ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS
132 kV GIS Ayios Athanasios Substation at Limassol
SECTION 5
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 1 of 7
Table of Contents
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT.................................................................................................................. 3
1.2
EXTENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................................................. 3
1.3
CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS..................................................................................................................... 3
1.4
PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.................................................................................. 4
1.5
BUILDINGS....................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.6
TOOLS AND APPLIANCES ............................................................................................................................. 5
1.7
SPARES............................................................................................................................................................ 6
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 2 of 7
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
The Project works are to be carried out mainly in the town of Limassol, which is situated in
the Southern coast of Cyprus.
The Project includes the establishment of a new 132/22-11kV substation in the town of
Limassol, named “Ayios Athanasios” substation. It also includes small protection
refurbishment works at two existing 132kV substations, in order to match the protection of the
new substation
1.2
EXTENT OF CONTRACT
The Contract is on a turnkey basis and provides for all parts of the work, excluding civil works,
to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the
Engineer.
1.2.1
Work Description
The Contract covers the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at the maker's works
and at site, packing for export shipment, insurance, transport and delivery to site or store,
unloading, customs clearance, complete erection, testing and setting to work and
maintenance for a period of twelve (12) months of the works described below and detailed in
the Schedules at the fixed scheduled prices:
1.2.1.1
Ayios Athanasios Substation
Establish a new 132/22-11 kV GIS substation with two 40 MVA 132/23-11,5 kV transformers
and a 33-panel 22kV switchboard.
1.2.1.2
Old Power Station Substation
Installation and Commissioning of two new main protection relays on the existing 132kV
Protection Relay Panel.
1.2.1.3
Yermasoyia Substation
Installation and Commissioning of two new main protection relays on the existing 132kV
Protection Relay Panel.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for
commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details,
accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant
are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as
included in the Contract Price.
It also includes training of staff at manufacturer's works and at site as per relevant
Schedule
1.3
CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS
The Contract does not include:
(a) 132kV cables, multipair cables, or fiber optic cables between Ayios Athanasios substation
and Yermasoyia, Old Power Station, Moni and Polemedhia substations.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 3 of 7
(b) Communications and System Control Equipment.
The following shall be the Contract Terminal Points:
1.3.1
Ayios Athanasios Substation
1.3.1.1
132 kV GIS Switchgear - Outgoing Cable Feeders
The cable termination arrangement on the GIS switchgear shall be suitable for accepting the
cable sealing ends, which will be provided and fitted by the Cable Contractor. The
Switchgear Contractor will be required to agree the final coordination of the sealing end
interface with the Cable Contractor.
1.3.1.2
22 kV Switchboard
The Contractor's responsibility ends on the terminals of the cable boxes of the outgoing
feeders of the 22kV switchboard.
The termination of outgoing 22kV feeders to the 22kV switchboard is not included in this
Contract. However the supply of the termination accessories of all outgoing and spare
incoming feeders of the switchboard is included in this Contract.
1.3.1.3
Communication Panel
In the case of current differential protection relays through fiber optic media, the Contractor
shall be responsible for connecting and terminating up to the multiplexer communication
panel, which shall be provided by others, or the main fiber optic termination box as specified
elsewhere in this Contract.
1.3.1.4
132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables
All 132 kV and 22 kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation
will be provided by the Purchaser. All accessories and works required for connecting
these power cables will be the responsibility of the Supplier/Contractor. The
Supplier/Contractor will not be responsible for the guarantee of the power cables but will
be responsible for the guarantee of all connections.
1.3.2
Old Power Station Substation
The Contractor shall be responsible for dismantling of the existing two main protection relays,
which should be delivered at EAC stores, and the installation, setting up and commissioning
of new distance and current differential relays to the existing 132kV protection relay panel in
order for the circuit to work.
1.3.3
Yermasoyia Substation
The Contractor shall be responsible for dismantling of the existing two main protection relays,
which should be delivered at EAC stores, and the installation, setting up and commissioning
of new distance and current differential relays to the existing 132kV protection relay panel in
order for the circuit to work.
1.4
PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
The Tenderer shall include the provision of all labor, technicians, testing and supervisory
engineers to install, test and commission the plant supplied under the Contract to the
agreed program and shall include all costs associated with the activity including the cost
of providing all necessary test equipment.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 4 of 7
The Tenderer shall fully consider the Regulations regarding the use of local labor for site
works and clarify in his offer where expatriate staff will be used on site activities.
Directions and instructions given by the Engineer's Representative or the Purchaser to the
supervisors shall be interpreted as having been given to the Contractor.
The supervisors shall be well qualified by long training and experience in the installation and
operation of equipment of the type covered by the Specification. They shall liaise with the
Engineer and the Purchaser's staff in respect of the installation, testing and placing into
operational service of the substation equipment supplied under other contracts leading to
commissioning of the complete substation or extension and for this purpose the English
language shall be used.
1.5
BUILDINGS
Unless otherwise specified all substation buildings, foundations, walls, roof coverings,
concrete floor fittings, ducts and pipework embedded in the foundations, trenches with floor
plates for cables, etc., will be provided under other contracts. Tenderers should take into
consideration the following:
•
dimensions specified as per drawings
•
applied maximum load (including impulse load) on the floor of the GIS switchgear room
should not exceed 20 kN/m2
•
the available crane in the GIS room can carry a maximum load of 5.000 kg.
The magnitude of the loadings from plant or equipment onto foundations must be stated by
the Tenderer. The loadings shall be confirmed by the dates given in the appropriate
schedule.
The Tender Drawings show the preferred layouts of all plant, equipment and buildings.
Dimensions in these Drawings have been based on typical sizes of plant and equipment.
The Contractor should ascertain for himself during the tender stage that the plant he
proposes to supply will be suitable for the arrangements shown on Tender Drawings, and the
Contract Price is deemed to include the cost of any modified layout to meet the Employer's
design principles. Failure of the Engineer or Employer to comment on drawings submitted by
the contractor during the tender stage which show modified arrangements not complying with
Tender Drawings and Design Principles shall not be accepted as approving such
arrangements; any modifications proposed should be clearly stated in the Schedule of
Departures.
1.6
TOOLS AND APPLIANCES
The following tools and appliances may be purchased under this Contract. The Tenderer's
full list with itemized prices and details is to be given in the Schedule of Special Tools and
Equipment of this Specification.
(a) One set of any special tools or gauges required for the normal maintenance of the Plant
and equipment covered by the Contract.
(b) One set of any special lifting and handling appliances required for the normal
maintenance of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 5 of 7
(c) One set of any special tools, gauges or other test equipment required for the dismantling,
re-assembly, checking or adjustment (but not normal maintenance) of the whole of the
Plant and equipment covered by the Contract.
Each tool or appliance is to be clearly marked with its size and/or purpose.
Each set of tools and appliances under category (a) above, together with the smaller items
under (b) & (c) above, are to be suitably arranged in fitted boxes of mild steel construction,
the number of boxes being determined in relation to the layout of the Plant and equipment in
question. If the weight of any box and its content should be such that it cannot conveniently
be carried it is to be supported on steerable rubber-tyred wheels.
Each box is to be fitted with a lock and is to be painted black and clearly marked in white
letters with the name of the Plant or equipment for which the tools and appliances therein are
intended.
The tools and appliances with the appropriate boxes are to be delivered to the Purchaser
together with the switchgear.
The price of such equipment as detailed in the Schedules shall remain fixed for the duration
of the Contract.
1.7
1.7.1
SPARES
General
The Tenderer shall complete the appropriate Schedules with a list of spares in addition to any
specifically stated and provide unit prices for the spares which he recommends should be
held in stock for the maintenance of the plant for at least 5 years of normal operation.
1.7.1.1
Programmed Maintenance Spares
Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands will arise in the normal operation of
the plant. The Contractor shall quote estimates of annual consumption of each item over
each of the first five years.
1.7.1.2
Strategic/Breakdown Spares
Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands may arise through breakdown which
could jeopardize the availability or safety of the plant. The Contractor shall state his
recommended stock holding for such items.
The spares prices shall remain valid for at least twelve months after placing the contract
provided also that a reasonable time will be provided after the contractor makes all necessary
information available to enable determining the spares requirement.
The Contractor shall indicate the items which he recommends should be manufactured at the
same time as the main plant. For each of these items he must inform the Engineer the latest
date by which orders are to be placed for concurrent manufacture.
The Purchaser may order all or any of the spares so recommended at his discretion. The
Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Deliveries the minimum period required by him for
the delivery of the spares from the date of the receipt by him of the Purchaser's order.
The spares will be charged against the Provisional Sum included in the Schedule of Prices
and are to be supplied at the prices listed in the Schedule of Spares subject to the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 6 of 7
qualification that, if any spares should be ordered after the dates referred to in this clause the
price may be subject to adjustment.
All spares supplied are to be strictly interchangeable with the parts for which they are
intended to be replacements and are to be treated and packed for long storage under the
climatic conditions prevailing at the Site and labeled for easy identification. Packing shall be
on individual items or sets basis where appropriate.
Labeling shall be such that spares can be correctly identified from reference quoted in the
operation and maintenance manuals provided. All labeling shall be legible without unpacking
the items.
1.7.2
Commissioning Spares
The Tenderer shall make his own provision for spares required during erection and
commissioning without resorting to the use of the spares ordered and supplied under the
contract.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Contract Requirements
Page 7 of 7
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios Substation
SECTION 6
EAC SPECIFICATION 14-019
Transmission Substation Equipment
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 1 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Table of Contents
1.
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1
2.
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................... 7
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1
NORMATIVE REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.2
INFORMATIVE REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.3
LIST OF REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................... 8
3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................... 15
3.1
DESIGN CRITERIA......................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 21
3.3
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................................................... 25
3.4
DRAWINGS..................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.5
PROGRAM OF WORK ................................................................................................................................... 27
3.6
PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS ..................................................................................................... 29
3.7
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS...................................................... 33
3.8
PACKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH ................................................................. 36
3.9
CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING ....................................................................................................... 38
3.10
ERECTION MARKS........................................................................................................................................ 39
3.11
TRANSPORT TO SITE ................................................................................................................................... 39
3.12
ERECTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.13
CLEANING AND PAINTING........................................................................................................................... 40
3.14
LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION DISCS ........................................................ 41
3.15
LOCKS ............................................................................................................................................................ 42
3.16
TROPICALIZATION........................................................................................................................................ 42
3.17
NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS ..................................................................................................... 43
3.18
RIVETS............................................................................................................................................................ 43
3.19
FORGINGS ..................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.20
CASTINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.21
WELDING........................................................................................................................................................ 44
3.22
GALVANIZED WORK..................................................................................................................................... 44
3.23
PIPE WORK AND VALVES............................................................................................................................ 45
3.24
OIL OR COMPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS................................................................................................... 47
3.25
OIL LEVEL INDICATORS............................................................................................................................... 47
3.26
THERMOMETER POCKETS .......................................................................................................................... 47
3.27
CHROMIUM PLATING.................................................................................................................................... 48
3.28
PRESSURE GAUGES .................................................................................................................................... 48
3.29
SMALL WIRING.............................................................................................................................................. 48
3.30
TERMINAL BOARDS ..................................................................................................................................... 50
3.31
ELECTRICAL INSULATION........................................................................................................................... 51
3.32
EARTHING CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 52
3.33
ELECTRIC MOTORS...................................................................................................................................... 52
3.34
CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS.............................................................................................. 53
3.35
INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING .............................................................................................................. 54
3.36
AUXILIARY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................. 54
3.37
ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HEATERS, AND VENTILATORS ........................................................... 54
3.38
INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS................................................................................................... 55
3.39
CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCESSORIES .................................................................................... 55
4.
INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ..................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1
UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE......................................................................................................... 57
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 2 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.2
ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE .......................................................................................................... 57
4.3
CLEANING OF SITE....................................................................................................................................... 57
4.4
ABNORMAL WORKING TIME ....................................................................................................................... 57
4.5
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF ................................................................................ 58
4.6
SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC ...................................................................................................... 59
4.7
SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO WORK ............................................ 60
4.8
TAKING OVER CERTIFICATES .................................................................................................................... 60
4.9
ACCESS TO SITE........................................................................................................................................... 60
4.10
DAY WORK..................................................................................................................................................... 61
4.11
SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE......................................................................................................... 61
4.12
SITE SERVICES ............................................................................................................................................. 61
4.13
TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL....................................................................................... 64
4.14
EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP ................................................................................... 64
4.15
SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE ............................. 64
5.
132kV SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR ........................................................................................................... 66
5.1
TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 66
5.2
CURRENT RATINGS...................................................................................................................................... 67
5.3
CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS.................................................................................................. 67
5.4
DESIGN PRINCIPLES – 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................... 67
5.5
SEALING ENDS.............................................................................................................................................. 73
5.6
LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL ................................................................................... 75
5.7
CIRCUIT BREAKERS..................................................................................................................................... 76
5.8
LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES ...................................................................................................................... 80
5.9
LOCKING FACILITIES ................................................................................................................................... 80
5.10
ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES .................................................................................................... 80
5.11
INTERLOCKING ............................................................................................................................................. 82
5.12
AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS .............................................................................................. 83
5.13
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS........................................................................................................................ 85
5.14
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ........................................................................................................................ 87
5.15
EARTHING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 88
5.16
SURGE ARRESTERS..................................................................................................................................... 88
5.17
GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................... 89
6.
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................. 91
6.1
SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE ......................................................................................... 91
6.2
CLEARANCES................................................................................................................................................ 91
6.3
RADIO INTERFERENCE ................................................................................................................................ 91
6.4
CIRCUIT-BREAKERS..................................................................................................................................... 91
6.5
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS............................................................................................. 97
6.6
SURGE ARRESTERS................................................................................................................................... 101
6.7
ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES ....................................................................................................... 103
6.8
OUTDOOR BUSBARS ................................................................................................................................. 107
6.9
STEEL STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................................. 111
7.
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................................. 118
7.1
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
7.2
ABBREVIATIONS......................................................................................................................................... 118
7.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 119
7.4
SYSTEM STRUCTURE................................................................................................................................. 122
7.5
STATION CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................................... 127
7.6
OPERATOR CONSOLE ............................................................................................................................... 129
7.7
BAY UNITS ................................................................................................................................................... 133
7.8
SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 135
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 3 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.9
ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE ......................................................................................................... 136
7.10
Substation Automated System based on IEC 61850................................................................................ 138
8.
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED SUBSTATIONS ....................................................... 139
8.1
ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES................................................................................................................ 139
8.2
CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES ................................................................................................................ 139
8.3
CONTROLS .................................................................................................................................................. 141
8.4
INDICATIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 143
8.5
SUPERVISION RELAYS .............................................................................................................................. 143
8.6
BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION ............................................................................................................... 144
8.7
SYNCHRONISING ........................................................................................................................................ 145
8.8
INDICATING LAMPS .................................................................................................................................... 146
8.9
ALARM SCHEMES....................................................................................................................................... 147
8.10
RELAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES ....................................................................... 148
8.11
INSTRUMENTS............................................................................................................................................. 149
8.12
CABLE TERMINATIONS.............................................................................................................................. 150
8.13
TESTING FACILITIES .................................................................................................................................. 150
8.14
EARTHING.................................................................................................................................................... 150
8.15
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS................................................................. 151
8.16
MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.............................................................................. 152
8.17
TRANSDUCERS ........................................................................................................................................... 152
9.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................................................... 155
9.1
General ......................................................................................................................................................... 155
9.2
Protective IEDs ............................................................................................................................................ 155
9.3
Test and Earthing Facilities........................................................................................................................ 160
9.4
132 kV Feeder Protection............................................................................................................................ 161
9.5
Transformer Protection............................................................................................................................... 166
9.6
132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection.................................................................................. 168
9.7
Auto-Reclosing Function ............................................................................................................................ 170
9.8
Synchronizing Check Function .................................................................................................................. 171
9.9
Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment ................................................................................... 172
9.10
Tripping Relays............................................................................................................................................ 172
9.11
Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes ............................................................................................................. 172
9.12
Segregation.................................................................................................................................................. 173
9.13
22-11 kV Feeder Protection ........................................................................................................................ 173
10.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE ................................ 176
10.1
SWITCHGEAR TYPE.................................................................................................................................... 176
10.2
CURRENT RATINGS.................................................................................................................................... 176
10.3
PANEL DESIGN............................................................................................................................................ 176
10.4
MODULES CONTAINING SF6 ...................................................................................................................... 177
10.5
CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULES .................................................................................................................. 177
10.6
OPERATING MECHANISM .......................................................................................................................... 178
10.7
ISOLATING FACILITIES .............................................................................................................................. 179
10.8
EARTHING FACILITIES ............................................................................................................................... 179
10.9
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING SWITCHES .......................................... 179
10.10
EARTHING OF METAL PARTS ................................................................................................................... 180
10.11
CABLE CONNECTION ................................................................................................................................. 180
10.12
MODULE COUPLINGS................................................................................................................................. 180
10.13
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS...................................................................................................................... 181
10.14
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ...................................................................................................................... 181
10.15
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM......................................................................................... 182
10.16
SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE ...................................................................................................................... 182
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 4 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
10.17
INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS ................................................................................................................. 183
10.18
LOCKING FACILITIES ................................................................................................................................. 183
10.19
AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS ............................................................................................ 183
10.20
BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................ 184
10.21
CIRCUIT LABELS......................................................................................................................................... 184
10.22
SWITCHGEAR FEATURES.......................................................................................................................... 184
11.
POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS.................................................................................................... 185
11.1
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 185
11.2
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS........................................................................................................ 188
11.3
TANKS .......................................................................................................................................................... 190
11.4
COOLING PLANT......................................................................................................................................... 194
11.5
VOLTAGE CONTROL .................................................................................................................................. 196
11.6
TERMINAL BUSHINGS ................................................................................................................................ 199
11.7
CABLES AND TERMINATIONS................................................................................................................... 201
11.8
TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING CUBICLES ............................................ 201
11.9
DRYING OUT ................................................................................................................................................ 204
11.10
OIL................................................................................................................................................................. 204
11.11
EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS ....................................................................................... 205
12.
STATION DC EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................................. 207
12.1
BATTERY CELLS......................................................................................................................................... 207
12.2
BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORIES................................................................ 209
12.3
DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ 210
12.4
DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS ........................................................................................................ 217
13.
POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132 kV.................................................................... 220
13.1
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
13.2
132/66 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES........................................................................................ 225
13.3
22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES............................................................................................... 227
13.4
AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO 1.000 V ............................................................. 228
13.5
MULTIPAIR CABLES ................................................................................................................................... 230
13.6
INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE SUBSTATION BUILDING.................. 230
13.7
EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN TRANSMISSION SUBSTATIONS233
13.8
TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF CORES ......................................... 240
13.9
TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS ..................................................................................... 241
13.10
TERMINAL COLOURING AND LABELLING............................................................................................... 241
13.11
TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS ...................................................................... 241
13.12
DRAWINGS................................................................................................................................................... 243
14.
LV AC SWITCHBOARD ...................................................................................................................................... 244
14.1
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 244
14.2
RATINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 244
14.3
MAIN BUS-BARS ......................................................................................................................................... 245
14.4
TEMPERATURE RISE.................................................................................................................................. 245
14.5
CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE ............................................................................................................ 245
14.6
LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................................................. 246
14.7
INSTRUMENTS............................................................................................................................................. 248
14.8
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS...................................................................................................................... 248
14.9
TERMINATION CABLES.............................................................................................................................. 249
14.10
EARTHING.................................................................................................................................................... 249
14.11
INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND INTERLOCK SCHEME .............................. 249
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 5 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
SUBSTATION EARTHING .................................................................................................................................. 251
15.
15.1
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 251
15.2
BASIS OF DESIGN....................................................................................................................................... 251
15.3
EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................................... 251
15.4
JOINTS AND BRANCHES ........................................................................................................................... 251
15.5
GUARDS ....................................................................................................................................................... 252
16.
FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................................... 253
16.1
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 253
16.2
OPTICAL FIBERS......................................................................................................................................... 253
16.3
FIBER JOINTS.............................................................................................................................................. 255
16.4
TERMINATION CABLES.............................................................................................................................. 255
16.5
TESTING ....................................................................................................................................................... 256
17.
INSPECTION AND TESTING.............................................................................................................................. 257
17.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 257
17.2
SUB-CONTRACTORS.................................................................................................................................. 257
17.3
MATERIAL TESTS ....................................................................................................................................... 258
17.4
WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 258
17.5
SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 259
17.6
TEST CERTIFICATES .................................................................................................................................. 260
17.7
REJECTION OF PLANT ............................................................................................................................... 261
17.8
LIST OF TESTS ............................................................................................................................................ 261
17.9
INSPECTION PLAN AND PROCEDURES................................................................................................... 280
18.
19.
ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT...................................................................................................................................... 282
18.1
132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR ........................................................................................ 282
18.2
METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................... 292
18.3
POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................. 296
18.4
22 kV SWITCHGEAR.................................................................................................................................... 300
18.5
PROTECTION AND BAY CONTROL CUBICLES........................................................................................ 308
18.6
AUTOMATED SUBSTATION CONTROL..................................................................................................... 314
18.7
REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS......................................................................................... 315
18.8
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SIGNALS ............................................ 323
18.9
MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES................................................................... 330
18.10
LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD ................................................................................................................... 333
18.11
SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................... 333
18.12
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................................................................................ 335
18.13
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS ....................................................................................................... 335
ENGINEER’S DRAWING LIST ........................................................................................................................... 336
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 6 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
1.
1.1
SCOPE
GENERAL
This specification includes the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at maker's
works, packing for export shipment and delivery of 132kV, 66kV and 22kV switchgear and
ancillary equipment. When specified it also includes erection and commissioning. The
Contractor is responsible for making good defective material within the guarantee period.
The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for
commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any
details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation
of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be
considered as included in the Contract Price.
Test requirements and test methods are included which are intended to demonstrate the
capability of the offered equipment and their compliance to the declared values in the
Schedules of Particulars that are attached to this document.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 7 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
2.
REFERENCES
2.1
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
This specification incorporates by dated or undated reference, provisions from other
publications. These normative references are cited at the appropriate place in the text
and the publications are listed in paragraph 2.3 below. For a dated reference, only the
cited edition applies: any subsequent amendments to or revisions of the publication apply
to this specification only when incorporated in the reference by amendment or revision.
For undated references, any amendments to, or the latest edition of, the cited publication
applies.
2.2
INFORMATIVE REFERENCES
This specification refers to other publications that provide information or guidance.
Editions of these publications current at the time of issue of the standard are listed in the
paragraph below, but reference should be made to the latest editions.
2.3
LIST OF REFERENCES
Normative references
EN 197-1
Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for
common cements
EN 729
Quality requirements for welding. Fusion welding of metallic
materials
EN 755
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
EN 837
Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions,
metrology, requirements and testing
EN 1435
Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of
welded joints
EN 1559
Founding. Technical conditions of delivery
EN 1780
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Designation of unalloyed and
alloyed aluminium ingots for remelting, master alloys and castings
EN 1977
Copper and copper alloys. Copper drawing stock (wire rod)
EN 10025
Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery
conditions
EN 10027
Designation systems for steels
EN 10029
Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot
rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above
EN 10113
Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 8 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
EN 10137
Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steels in
the quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened conditions
EN 10143
Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances
on dimensions and shape
EN 10147
Continuously hot-dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip.
Technical delivery conditions.
EN 10155
Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance.
Technical delivery conditions
EN 10210
Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
structural steels. Technical delivery requirements
EN 10220
Seamless and welded steel tubes. Dimensions and masses per unit
length
EN 10244
Steel wire and wire products. Non-ferrous metallic coatings on steel
wire. Zinc or zinc alloy coatings
EN 12540
Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of nickel,
nickel plus chromium, copper plus nickel and copper plus nickel plus
chromium
EN 50052
Specification for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear for
industrial use. Cast aluminium alloy enclosures for gas filled highvoltage switchgear and control gear
EN 50064
Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy enclosures
for gas-filled high-voltage switchgear and control gear
EN 50068
Specification for wrought steel enclosures for gas filled high voltage
switchgear and controlgear
EN 50069
Specification for welded composite enclosures of cast and wrought
aluminium alloys for gas filled high voltage switchgear and
controlgear
EN 50081
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 50089
Specification for cast resin partitions for metal-enclosed gas filled
high-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 50178
Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN 50262
Metric cable glands for electrical installations
EN 50265
Common test methods for cables under fire conditions. Test for
resistance to vertical flame propagation for a single insulated
conductor or cable
EN 50266
Common test methods for cables under fire conditions
EN 60034
Rotating electrical machines
EN 60044 – 1
Instrument transformers. Current transformers
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 9 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
EN 60044 – 2
Instrument transformers. Inductive voltage transformers
EN 60044 – 3
Instrument transformers. Combined transformers
EN 60044 – 6
Instrument transformers. Requirements for protective current
transformers for transient performance
EN 60044 – 7
Instrument transformers. Electronic voltage transformers
EN 60044 – 8
Instrument transformers. Electronic current transformers
EN 60051
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments
and their accessories
EN 60068
Environmental testing
EN 60073
Basic and safety principles of man-machine interface, marking and
identification. Coding principles for indicators and actuators
EN 60076
Power transformers
EN 60099 – 1
Surge arresters. Non-linear resistor type gapped surge arresters for
a.c. systems
EN 60099 – 4
Surge arresters. Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c.
systems
EN 60099 – 5
Surge arresters. Selection and application recommendations
EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Testing and measurement
techniques. Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field
immunity test
EN 60137
Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1kV
EN 60146
Semiconductor convertors
EN 60168
Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or
glass for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V
EN 60214
On-load tap-changers
EN 60255
Electrical Protection relays
EN 60269
Low-voltage fuses
EN 60289
Reactors
EN 60383 – 1
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.
Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems. Definitions, test
methods and acceptance criteria.
EN 60383 – 2
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.
Insulator strings and insulator sets for a.c. systems. Definitions, test
methods and acceptance criteria
EN 60439
Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 10 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
EN 60529
Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures
(IP code)
EN 60551
Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
EN 60599
Mineral oil-impregnated electrical equipment in service. Guide to the
interpretation of dissolved and free gases analysis
EN 60617
Graphical symbols for diagrams
EN 60623
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid
electrolytes. Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single
cells
EN 60688
Electrical measuring transducers for converting a.c. electrical
quantities to analogue or digital signals
EN 60793
Optical fibres. Measurement methods and test procedures
EN 60811
Insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables. Common test
methods
EN 60898
Specification for circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for
household and similar installations
EN 60947
Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 61082
Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology
EN 61131
Programmable controllers
EN 61346
Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial
products
EN 62271 - 1
Common specifications for high voltage switchgear and controlgear
standards
EN 62271 - 100
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternatingcurrent circuit-breakers
EN 62271 - 102
High voltage switchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternating
current disconnectors and earthing switches
EN 62271 - 103
Specification for high-voltage switches. Switches for rated voltages
above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
EN 62271 - 104
Specification for high-voltage switches. High-voltage switches for
rated voltage of 52 kV and above
EN 62271 - 106
High-voltage alternating current contactors and contactor-based
motor starters
EN 62271 - 200
A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear an controlgear for rated voltages
above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
EN 62271 - 203
Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 72.5
kV and above
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 11 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
IEC 62271 - 305
Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for
rated voltages of 72,5kV and above – Fluid-filled and extruded
insulation cables – Fluid-filed and dry type cable-terminations
EN ISO 216
Writing paper and certain classes of printed matter. Trimmed sizes.
A and B series
EN ISO 4589
Plastics. Determination of burning behaviour by oxygen index
EN ISO 5455
Technical drawings. Scales
EN ISO 12944
Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective paint systems
EN ISO 14713
Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. Zinc and
aluminium coatings. Guidelines
IEC 60085
Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IEC 60186
Voltage Transformers
IEC 60228
Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60273
Characteristic of indoor and outdoor insulators for systems with
nominal voltage greater than 1000V
IEC 60296
Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
IEC 60332
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC 60354
Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60376
Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride
IEC 60376A
First supplement: Section thirteen Mineral Oil Content
IEC 60376B
Second supplement - Clause 26 Specification and acceptance of
new sulphur hexafluoride
IEC 60480
Guide to the checking of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) taken from
electrical equipment
IEC 60502
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60840
Test of Power Cables with extruded insulation above 30kV up to
150kV
IEC 60859
Cable Connections for gas-insulated metal enclosed switchgear for
rated voltages of 72,5kV and above
IEC 61109
Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000 V - Definitions, test methods and acceptance
criteria
IEC 61850
Communication networks and systems in substations
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 12 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
IEC 62155
Hollow pressurised and unpressurised ceramic and glass insulators
for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000
V
ISO 1000
Specification for SI units and recommendations for the use of their
multiples and of certain other units
BS 61
Specification for threads for light gauge copper tubes and fittings
BS 148
Specification for unused and reclaimed mineral insulating oils for
transformers and switchgear
BS 159
Specification for high-voltage busbars and busbar connections
BS 215
Specification for aluminium conductors and aluminium conductors,
steel reinforced for overhead power transmission.
BS 381C
Specification for colours for identification, coding and special
purposes
BS 1133
Packaging Code
BS 1376
Specification for colours of light signals
BS 1858
Electric cables. Accessories. Bitumen-based filling compounds
BS 2484
Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers
BS 2562
Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors
BS 2569
Specification for sprayed metal coatings. Protection of iron and steel
against corrosion and oxidation at elevated temperatures
BS 2765
Specification for dimensions of temperature detecting elements and
corresponding pockets
BS 2950
Specification. Cartridge fuse-links for telecommunication and light
electrical apparatus
BS 3288
Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines
BS 3643
ISO metric screw threads
BS 3692
ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification
BS 3941
Specification for voltage transformers
BS 4190
ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification
BS 4504
Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated)
BS 4872
Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure
approval is not required
BS 4963
Specification for tests on hollow insulators for use in high voltage
electrical equipment
BS 5000
Specification for rotating electrical machines of particular types or for
ti l
li ti
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 13 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
particular applications
BS 5207
Specification for sulphur hexafluoride for electrical equipment
BS 5308
Instrumentation cables
BS 5467
Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric
cables having thermosetting insulation
BS 6231
Specification for PVC-insulated cables for switchgear and
controlgear wiring
BS 6399
Loading for buildings
BS 6346
Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric
cables having PVC insulation
BS 6360
Specification for conductors in insulated cables and cords
BS 6622
Specification for cables with extruded cross-linked polyethylene or
ethylene propylene rubber insulation for rated voltages from 3.8/6.6
kV up to 19/33 kV
BS 6724
Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric
cables having thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke
and corrosive gases when affected by fire
BS 7207
Specification for crude vegetable fats
BS 7354
Code of practice for design of high-voltage open terminal stations
BS 7430
Code of practice for earthing
BS 7655
Specification for insulating and sheathing materials for cables
BS 7668
Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural
hollow sections in weather resistant steels
BS 7884
Specification for copper and copper-cadmium stranded conductors
for overhead electric traction and power transmission systems
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 14 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.
3.1
3.1.1
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
DESIGN CRITERIA
Site Operating Conditions
The climate is sub-tropical and the following meteorological information is set out for
guidance only. No responsibility or any claims based on this information will be accepted.
Nevertheless, the values given below shall be taken into account in designing the works.
1
Altitude of sites above sea level:
Below 1000m
2
Maximum outdoor ambient shade or indoor temperature for
design purposes:
50 oC
3
Minimum temperature:
-5 oC
4
Relative humidity:
100 %
5
Thunderstorms per year:
30
6
Number of strokes to earth per km2 per year:
4
7
Earthquake loading for design purposes:
Refer to Clause
3.1.8
8
Wind Speed/pressure for design purposes
40 m/s at 10m /
575 N/m²
9
Condition of atmosphere
Occasionally dust
and salt laden
For current rating calculations of busbars and busbar connections the following
assumptions shall be made:
Copper
1
Maximum operating temperatures
2
Wind speed
3
Aluminium
Refer to Clause 6.8.1
m/sec
0,6
0,6
Emissivity factor
0.5
0,6
4
Absorption factor
0,5
0,6
5
Solar radiation
1050
1050
3.1.2
W/m2
General Design Information
Phase Rotation and Colour-Phases shall be distinguished as Brown (L1), Black (L2), and
Grey (L3) with phases reaching their maximum values in that order in an anti-clockwise
rotation.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 15 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
1
Nominal system voltage between
phases (kV)
220
132
66
22/11
2
Rated voltage (kV)
245
145
72,5
24/12
3
System Frequency (Hz)
4
Rated short-circuit and throughfault capability, Vassilikos,
Dhekelia and Moni S/S
5
Rated short-circuit and throughfault capability, other Substations
6
7
50
40kA for 1s
25 kA
for 1s
20kA
for 3 s
50 kA
for 1s
31,5kA for 1s
25 kA
for 1s
20kA
for 3 s
50 kA
for 1s
Earthing of System
System
0,400
X
ratio Vassilikos,
R
Solid
Earthing
of the
22/11kV
neutral
or of zigzag
earthing
transfor
mer
Solid Earthing
100
Dhekelia and Moni S/S
8
System
X
ratio other
R
20
Substations
9
AC supply voltage for auxiliary
equipment
400/230 Vac ±10%
10
DC supply voltage for auxiliary
equipment
110 Vdc 2-wire
11
Closing
110 Vdc
12
Tripping
110 Vdc
13
Initiating power supply for
indications and alarms
110 Vdc
DC voltages stated are nominal battery voltages and due allowance shall be made for all
connected equipment to operate safely when batteries are under normal float charge or
boost charge conditions.
The equipment provided under this Contract is to be capable of operating reliably within
the following voltage ranges:
(a) DC Equipment:
From 80% nominal voltage up to 110% nominal voltage (125 V for 110 V DC supply).
(b) AC Equipment:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 16 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
From 80% nominal voltage up to 110% nominal voltage.
3.1.3
Co-ordination of Substation Insulation
1
Nominal system voltage (kV)
220
132
66
22
11
2
Rated system voltage (kV)
245
145
72
24
12
3
Assumed highest switching surge
4
Impulse withstand voltage (1,2/50
µsec) (kV)
950
650
325
125
75
5
Impulse withstand voltage (1,2/50
µsec) for transformers (kV)
750
550
325
125
95
6
Power frequency withstand voltage
(1 min) (kV)
395
275
140
50
28
7
Impulse withstand level of isolator
gap
8
Minimum external creepage
distance (mm)
9
Minimum substation clearances
(Outdoor Equipment):
Not greater than 3:1
115% of rated insulation level
7700
4620
2310
770
385
•
Phase to earth (mm)
2100
1270
685
279
200
•
Phase to phase (mm)
2400
1473
786
330
250
•
Between terminal of same
phase (mm)
1783
1473
786
330
250
•
Finished concrete level to
base of post insulator (mm)
2440
2440
2440
2440
2440
•
Section (mm)
4250
3500
3050
2590
2590
•
Height from ground to the
nearest unscreened live
conductor in air (mm)
3530
3530
3530
3530
3530
Note 1: The above clearances are applicable only to equipment not subject to impulse
voltage tests. They apply for conditions of maximum swing and sag.
Note 2: The minimum creepage distance measured from the metal cap to the base over
the surface of the insulator shed (expressed in millimetres per unit of nominal voltage
between phases) shall not be less than 35mm per kV (nominal voltage) for outdoor
insulators.
The minimum protected creepage distance shall not be less than thirty five per cent of the
total creepage distance. The protected creepage distance refers to that part of the
insulator, which is protected against rain at right angles to the axis of the bushing. If the
use of "Anti-fog" or "Anti-pollution" type or other insulators with deep sheds or skirts is
intended the Tenderer shall include a description and fully dimensioned drawing of the
insulators in the tender.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 17 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.1.4
Surge Arrester Basic Requirements
1
Nominal discharge current
10kA crest
2
Line discharge class as per EN
60099-4
3
3
Discharge Current Withstands
• High Current 4/10 µs
• Low Current 2000 µs (minimum)
4
Housing
3.1.5
100kA crest
700A crest
Polymeric
Minimum Factors of Safety for Outdoor Switchgear and Equipment
1
Busbar or other connections based on elastic limit or 0.1% proof stress:
2,5
2
Complete insulator units based on mechanical test:
2,5
3
Insulator metal fittings based on elastic limit:
2,5
4
Steel structures based on elastic limit of tension members and on crippling
loads of compression members:
2,5
5
Foundations for structures against overturning or up-rooting under
maximum simultaneous working loading:
2,5
3.1.6
Characteristics of Associated Transmission Lines
1
Normal transmission voltage between
phases (kV)
220
132
2
Wet power frequency withstand
voltage (kV)
395
275
3
Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage
(kV)
950
650
Phase
conductor
Phase
conductor
Earthwire
13,5 kN
4,5 kN
4
Maximum tension in each line
conductor on the substation landing
gantry (kN)
40 kN
5
220 kV feeders
Rubus
OPGW
6
220 kV feeders but operated 132 kV
Rubus
OPGW
7
132 kV feeders
UPAS or
Parakeet
Willow or
OPGW
8
132 kV feeders but operated 66 kV
UPAS or
Parakeet
Willow or
OPGW
9
Number of circuits per tower
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
2
2
Page 18 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
10
Number of phase conductors per
circuit
2
1
11
Number of earthwires
1
1
12
Typical impedance values:
3.1.7
•
Positive sequence (Z1)
N.A.
0,42 <740
Ohms / km
•
Zero sequence (Z0)
N.A.
1,21 <730
Ohms / km
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The electromagnetic environment comprises:
(a) conducted emissions and susceptibility
(b) radiated emissions and susceptibility
(c) conditions leading to electrostatic discharge
The Works shall conform to the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the
above listed phenomena.
3.1.7.1
Susceptibility to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
The Works shall be immune from the effects of:
(a) 5W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU
equipment (0.25m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and
covers in place).
(b) Cell phones when operated in the 900MHz frequency band within the same rooms as
the equipment (0.25m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers
in place).
(c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals.
(d) An electromagnetic field, with a field strength of 10V/m, measured by the method
specified in EN 61000-4-3.
3.1.7.2
Production of Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure that
there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation
of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms.
3.1.7.3
Susceptibility to Conducted Electromagnetic Energy
The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types
and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference.
(a) Impulse Voltage Withstand as defined and recommended in EN 60255-22 for
equipment required to operate in environments subject to Electrical Interference Class
II.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 19 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(b) High Frequency Disturbance as defined and recommended in EN 60255-22 for
equipment required to operate in environments subject to Electrical Interference Class
II and shall be applied to the AC power supply terminals of the equipment.
(c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz.
(d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz.
3.1.7.4
Production of Conducted Electromagnetic Interference
The Works shall not introduce conducted interference, which disturbs its own internal
operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply, which causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others.
3.1.7.5
Electrostatic Discharge
During normal operation, the Works shall be immune from any levels and types of
electrostatic discharge (ESD), which can be found in a typical office environment. The
Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to
be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance.
3.1.7.6
EMC Standards
The Tenderer shall indicate:
With which, if any, standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the
equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with
such standards exists.
Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EC 1992 directive on EMC.
3.1.8
Earthquake Withstand
The sites are subject to seismic activity and disturbances with a modified Mercalli intensity
of 8,0, which should be taken into account in the plant design. For the purpose of design
calculations, the earthquake stresses may be determined based on maximum horizontal
and vertical ground accelerations (seismic coefficient) of 0,15 g.
For equipment contained in the circuit breaker, which will fail by fracture of a brittle
component the adopted design stress using the modified seismic coefficient shall provide
for a factor of safety of not less than 2.
The seismic design of the substation equipment shall be based on a recognized design
code, as far as such codes are applicable to the plant in question. Tenderers shall state
which design code they propose to use.
Tenderers shall include evidence of tests or studies conducted or still to be conducted to
prove the earthquake resistance of the equipment offered. Details of equipment similar to
that offered and which has been subject to any serious earthquakes shall be stated.
Calculations to show design factors used, design stresses, seismic response spectra,
factors of safety, inherent damping, mode of failure etc shall be submitted by the
Contractor. Drawings showing the weight and location of the centres of gravity of the
principal components of each piece of equipment, reports of tests and studies conducted
to determine damping factors and natural periods of vibration should be submitted.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 20 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.2
3.2.1
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION
General
Notwithstanding any descriptions, drawings or illustrations which may be submitted with
the Tender, all details will be deemed to be strictly in accordance with the Specification
and the standard specifications and codes referred to therein unless a departure is listed
in the Schedule of Departures and the departure has been formally accepted at the date
of Contract award.
3.2.2
Contractor's Responsibilities
Unless stated specifically to the contrary in the Tender with full supporting explanations,
the Contractor will be deemed to have concurred as a practical manufacturer with the
design and layout of the Works as being sufficient to ensure reliability and safety in
operation, freedom from undue stresses and satisfactory performance in all other
essentials as a working plant.
The Contractor is to include the whole of the Works that are described in or implied by the
Contract Document. All matters omitted from the Contract Document, which may be
inferred to be obviously necessary for the efficiency, stability and completion of the Works,
shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
Works shown upon the drawings and not mentioned or described in the Specification and
Works described in the Specification and not shown on the drawings will nevertheless be
held to be included in this Contract and their execution is to be covered by the Contract
Price in the same manner as if they have been expressly shown upon the drawings and
described in the Specification.
3.2.3
Design and Construction
3.2.3.1
General
In complying with the requirements of the Specification, both with respect to arrangement
and detail, design is to conform to the best current engineering practice. Each of the
several parts of the Plant is to be of the maker's standard design provided that this design
is in general accordance with the Specification. All systems and equipment supplied shall
have proved satisfactory on other installations when operated similarly in a similar
environment.
Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same design, colour and
appearance. In addition, panels provided as extensions or for erection in the same room
as existing boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the existing
boards. Equipment mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style and scaling similar
to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all connections of equipment
to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully compatible with
and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment. The
characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contract Works shall be designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs and for
operation in which continuity of service is the first consideration. All apparatus shall be
designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at
the sites and under such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be met under
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 21 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
working conditions on the system and short circuits, including those due to faulty
synchronizing, within the rating of the apparatus.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of
all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of
associated works supplied under other Contracts.
The essence of design should be simplicity and reliability in order to give long continuous
service with high economy and low maintenance cost. Particular attention should be paid
to internal and external access in order to facilitate inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts are to be such that they will not suffer
damage as a result of stresses under the most severe service conditions.
Fully detailed specifications of the several parts of the Plant are to be submitted
describing particularly the materials to be used.
The materials used in the construction of the Plant are to be of the highest quality and
selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. Mechanisms are to be
constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
Workmanship and general finish are to be of the highest class throughout.
Corresponding parts throughout the Contract plant shall be interchangeable and all spare
parts must fit in place accurately without additional machining. When required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate this quality.
All equipment is to operate without undue vibration and with the least possible amount of
noise and is not to cause a nuisance.
All equipment is to be designed to minimize the risk of fire and any damage, which may be
caused in the event of fire.
All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short-circuit due to
animals, birds and vermin. Openings in ventilated enclosures shall be so constructed to
prevent the entry of vermin and insects. The use of materials, which may be liable to
attack by termites or other insects, is to be avoided.
3.2.3.2
Construction of Cubicles
Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2 mm (14SWG). The
construction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other
reinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the maloperation of relays or other
apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs and the size of the
panel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-finished surface.
Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associated with only
one circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP31 degree of protection for
indoor and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorized by EN 60529 in accordance with this
Specification.
Cubicles shall be so constructed that the front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is
removable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure.
Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be provided and
hinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 22 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Doors shall be secured by integral handles and provision shall be made for padlocking.
Handles and padlocks shall not be more than 1,5 meters above floor level. Top and
bottom doors shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the
cubicle. Moulded gaskets of non-aging material shall be used to provide close sealing.
All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point closing device (e.g.,
Espagnolette type).
The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a Matt white surface and an interior lamp
suitable for the local LV AC supply and controlled by a door operating switch, shall be
fitted at the top of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each
section and each cubicle shall be well-ventilated top and bottom through vermin proof
louvers fitted with brass gauze screens.
Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall provide
for bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates and hardwood
sealing bushes.
Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a minimum of
disturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in achieving this,
cubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not exceed the
width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not be less than
that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatus mounted on
the panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicore cable terminal boards shall be
in accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification.
The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cable terminations
but separate removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as
to provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables.
Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged front
panels, these shall be designed to minimize shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to
impose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be mounted on rear
access doors.
All sections of a composite cubicle shall be suitably labelled in accordance with the
Specification and each section or panel shall also be readily identified by labels at the rear
with the access doors either open or closed.
The arrangement and mounting of all devices shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
The exterior finish and colour of all cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
3.2.3.2.1
Bay Cubicles
Bay control and protection cubicles must be provided for each primary circuit. In the case
of 22 kV switchgear the cubicle can be a section of the individual bay panel and for high
voltage switchgear cubicles should be separate self-standing panels.
3.2.3.2.2
Outdoor Cubicles
They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mounting on concrete
foundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate.
Cubicles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates etc., for
termination of multicore cables.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 23 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the climate conditions
at site.
The cubicles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be well ventilated
through louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secured to the
inside of the cubicle.
Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforated to assist air
circulation.
3.2.4
Relays, Miniature Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Ancillary Apparatus
All relays shall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspection or adjustment
is less than 450 mm or more than 2 meters above floor level. Where practicable the
clearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less than 30 mm and in
no case less than 25 mm.
Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and
withdrawable.
Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriate phase
identification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addition to the
labelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components shall be
identified from the rear of the panels.
The use of permanently energized relays shall be kept to a minimum and where approved
these shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery.
Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the
isolation of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other work on the panel
without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels. Carriers
and bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloured white for links and black for
fuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. As an alternative
to fuses and links, miniature circuit breakers will be accepted.
Where miniature air circuit breakers are used on control, protection and alarm supplies,
tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed.
Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not be accepted. Fuse
holders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of
screw clamping devices.
Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mounting of fuses and
links shall conform with the existing panels, MCB´s fuses and links associated with
tripping circuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bottom of the
front face of relay and control boards.
Other links, fuses and MCB's shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of
the cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped and spaced
according to their function in order to facilitate identification.
Spare fuses and MCB´s of at least 50% of each type and size shall be provided and
delivered to the Purchaser.
Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size M6 hexagon
nuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronze or stainless
steel.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 24 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All incoming circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall be fed through
insulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottom terminal, which
shall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded
so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is
withdrawn.
Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are
on a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud terminals. Set
screws shall not be used.
3.3
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
The Contractor shall design in "The International System of Units" (SI Units) in
accordance with ISO 1000
Where plant and equipment designs already exist in Imperial units, dimensions and
tolerances of layouts and terminal points shall be presented in SI Units to a degree of
accuracy of conversion from the original unit, which permits precise matching with mating
components.
Contract drawings produced specifically for this Contract and plant manuals shall be in SI
Units.
SI Units shall be used in all correspondence, technical schedules and in the Operating
Maintenance Instructions.
3.4
3.4.1
DRAWINGS
General
Drawings shall be prepared in accordance with EN 61082, 61355 and 60617 or in the
event to equivalent Standards of the country of origin subject to the approval of the
Engineer. All drawings shall be on EN ISO 216 using the preferred "A" series size sheets
with multiple sheets of the same drawing all the same size. The maximum dimensions in
one direction shall not exceed 420 mm and the minimum drawing size shall not be less
than 210 mm x 297 mm. Drawings shall be specifically prepared for this Contract unless
the Engineer approves existing standard drawings.
3.4.2
Tender Drawings
The Tender shall be accompanied by the drawings and performance curves referred to in
the Schedules and any other drawings necessary to describe the plant offered.
3.4.3
Manufacturing and Erection Drawings
At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare a register of all
drawings, which he proposes to produce, which he shall maintain and issue at regular
intervals. The register shall record dates of issue and approval status against each issue.
Drawings shall be subdivided into groups of drawings in subject matter. The register
layout shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Before the work is put in hand, dimensioned drawings and diagrams showing all details of
the Plant and materials to be used are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 25 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
No wiring or connection diagrams shall be submitted for approval unless prior approval
has been obtained for schematic diagrams, which is to include control and protection
schematics, showing the facilities being provided and the working of the schemes.
Electrical schematic diagrams shall show, in a simple manner, the connections between
all apparatus included in the Contract and also those connections to associated
equipment which may be supplied under a separate contract. All schematic drawings shall
preferably be submitted on single drawing on a format large enough to cover the complete
system, which is the subject matter of the drawing. All wiring diagrams shall include a
schedule of apparatus, which shall explain any symbols or abbreviations used.
All wiring diagrams shall show clearly the details of multicore cables terminated in the
equipment, whether such multicore cables are supplied under the Contract or not.
Wiring diagrams shall be drawn as viewed from the back of the panels. Where wiring
diagrams take the form of schedules, each schedule shall include a view of the back of
the panel with the position of all terminals identified.
Electronic circuit diagrams and component layout drawings are to be supplied in order to
enable full repair and testing by the Purchaser of all electronic equipment supplied under
the Contract. In cases where the Contractor is unable to provide any of the above,
required information, it should be stated at the time of Tendering.
The drawings are to be submitted as soon as possible after the commencement date and
in any case in sufficient time to permit modifications to be made if such are deemed
necessary by the Engineer without delaying the initial deliveries or the completion of the
Contract Works. The drawings submitted are to be modified as necessary if requested by
the Engineer and re-submitted for final approval.
In no case shall the Contractor proceed with manufacture before the manufacturing
specification, drawings and design data are approved. Comments or approval shall be
given by the Engineer within thirty days from receipt by the Engineer. Any manufacturing
work carried out prior to such approval will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense.
The Contractor's program shall allow for the time required for the necessary comment
and/or approval by the Engineer.
If the Contractor requires urgent approval of any drawing in order to avoid delay in the
delivery of the Contract Works, he is to advise the Engineer to such effect when
submitting the drawing. The Engineer will not be held responsible if he is unable to
approve or comment on the submitted drawing within the time requested by the
Contractor.
If the Engineer fails to approve or comment on the drawings submitted by the Contractor
within the specified period the Contractor may, after advising the Engineer in writing,
proceed with manufacturing at the manufacturer's works in accordance with the program.
One full size copy of each drawing, diagram or report shall be furnished for approval of the
Engineer, by airmail if from another country. The same copy of documents shall be sent to
the Engineer in electronic form by e-mail. Within thirty days after receipt, the Engineer will
advise the Contractor by e-mail in one of the following ways:
(a) "Approved” - Category I
(b) "Approved Except as Noted" - Category II
(c) "Modification required" - Category III
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 26 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(d) "For information only, no approval required" - Category IV.
The notation "Approved" and "Approved Except as Noted" authorize the Contractor to
proceed with fabrication of the plant covered by the drawings subject to the agreed
amendments, if any, indicated.
When the Contractor receives the advice that a plant drawing is "Approved" by the
Engineer, he must then forward within 14 days one copy of this drawing directly to the
Engineer. When the Contractor receives the advice "Approved Except As Noted" the
Contractor may either re-submit a modified drawing for approval or accept the noted
modification and forward within 14 days one copy, suitably amended as above.
No examination or consideration by the Engineer of proposals, drawings or documents
submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer, nor the approval expressed
by him with regard thereto, either with or without modifications, shall absolve the
Contractor from any responsibility or liability imposed upon him by any of the provisions of
the Contract documents.
3.4.4
Numbering of Drawings
All drawings shall bear a title in English, including the site and description of the drawing
subject and the serial number of the Main Contract, the revision letter, the scale, an
indication of the method of drawing, together with an approved Contract Reference.
The title block shall include a space in a prominent location of the Purchaser's name
ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS, substation site, Contract No. and drawing
number. A blank area of 100 mm x 70 mm shall be left on all drawings above the title
block for the Engineer's acceptance stamp.
Amended or redrawn drawings shall have the revision letter inserted in each drawing in a
table which shall also include a brief description of the revision, date and authorization
signature.
The drawing title block shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
3.4.5
Contract Drawings
After all items of Plant have been manufactured one electronic copy of each drawing
being fully revised and previously approved is to be provided. The drawings that are
impossible to be provided in electronic format shall be provided in a reproducible format
on heavy gauge polyester-base film or similar.
Translucent copies shall be of a base material with a Matt finish on both sides and which
is non-tintent polyester plastic between 0,075mm and 0,125mm thick having a
non-sensitised surface suitable for pencil or ink drafting work. They shall be reverse
reading (i.e. the image of the original shall be in contact with the sensitised coating of the
copy material during exposure). If diazo film is supplied it shall be of the ultra-violet
stabilized type.
3.5
3.5.1
PROGRAM OF WORK
Manufacturing Progress Information
Within one month of acceptance of the Tender, the Contractor is to forward to the
Engineer a chart detailing the plant manufacture, delivery, installation and commissioning
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 27 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
program etc. for the complete contract work for his comment or approval. Copies of the
approved chart, as required by the Engineer, are to be provided by the Contractor.
The chart is to indicate the various phases of work for all items of the Contract from the
commencement of the Contract to its final completion, e.g., design, submission of
drawings, ordering of materials, manufacture delivery, installation, cabling testing and
commissioning.
The works program shall take into consideration work carried out by different parties
involved (e.g., civil contractor etc.) and shall define the time at which the various
operations controlling the site progress will take place such as submission of civil works
layout drawings, supply of anchor bolts for structures etc.
All instructions for work on existing plant shall be requested from the Purchaser at least
one month in advance.
The dates by which access to sites or buildings are required to achieve the program shall
be stated. The program shall indicate the dates by which drawings will be submitted
indicating separately dates for arrangement and layout, schematics, wiring diagrams and
cable schedules. The arrangement drawing submission dates shall detail separately the
date by which all information required to finalize civil works designs will be available.
If at any time during the execution of the Contract it is found necessary to modify the
approved chart, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and submit a modified chart for
approval.
Such approval is not to be deemed to be consent to any amendment to the date of
completion of the Contract.
3.5.2
Project Schedule/Program
The Contractor shall submit within one month of Contract award a master program subdivided in such a way as to give full information on the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Design/Document submissions
Placing of orders for manufacture
Periods of manufacture
Work tests
Factory Inspections
Transportation and Shipment
Plant Erection
Plant Commissioning
Delivery of Spares and Tools
Training of purchaser’s Staff
The erection and commissioning section shall be particularly detailed to clearly show
required power system shutdown and durations.
The master program must be consistent with the guaranteed dates of delivery of
information, drawings and equipment as required by the contract, and included in the
Order Letter and is to cover all phases of the works for all items of the Contract, from the
commencement of the Contract to its final completion.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 28 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Sub-programs based on and containing similar information to the master program shall be
provided by the Contractor on a per-site basis and in the same number of copies as the
master program at the discretion and request of the Engineer.
Both the master and sub programs shall be of clear presentation to illustrate the relevant
calendar dates/activity durations.
The approval program shall be marked up by the Contractor to record the actual and
forecast progress for the purpose of Contract control and shall be submitted to the
Engineer at monthly intervals. In the event of any unscheduled delays occurring, the
Contractor shall inform the Engineer and advise the policy or methods to be implemented
to eliminate or minimize such delays.
All programs shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and once approved shall not be
amended unless specifically agreed by the Engineer.
3.6
PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS
3.6.1
Progress Reports
For the duration of the Contract the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in duplicate by
the fifth (5th) day of each calendar month, an approved overall project progress report for
the previous month. The project report shall include as a minimum the following items:
3.6.1.1
Summary
The Contractor shall submit in writing, brief but concise progress reports indicating:
(a) The state of progress in design, specification, sub-ordering, manufacture, erection and
commissioning of a specified and agreed list of key items of plant.
(b) A statement of any delays and the reasons why they have occurred.
(c) An assessment of the effect of such delays on the attainment of specified key dates in
the Contract (not necessarily Contractual key dates).
(d) A statement of the measures, if any, being taken or proposed to be taken to minimize
the effect of the delay.
(e) An estimation of the completion date of the project, based upon the programs outlined
in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions.
3.6.1.2
Project Schedule/Program
Copies of the programs outlined in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions shall also be included.
3.6.1.3
Updated Schedules
The following updated schedules shall be included:
•
•
•
Equipment/Material approval status
Drawing Schedule
Equipment Schedule
The drawing schedule shall detail the current status of the individual drawings.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 29 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The equipment schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and the
individual equipment/materials, identified as one of the following categories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Submitted for Approval
Approved
Approved Except as Noted
Modification Required
No Approval Required
% Manufactured
Works Tested
Factory Inspected
Under Transportation/Shipment
Site Inspected
% Erected
% Commissioned
(SA)
(AP)
(AE)
(MR)
(NA)
(MA)
(WT)
(FI)
(TR)
(SI)
(ER)
(CO)
Key dates relating to the above shall also be shown. The equipment identified shall be
sub-divided only up to main component parts.
Any changes within the equipment schedule since the last issue shall be highlighted by
including the revision number of the latest issue of the schedule next to the particular item.
Any equipment removed shall still be detailed but shall be indicated as deleted.
3.6.1.4
Health and Safety Plan
All project works shall comply with all relevant Cyprus laws and regulations regarding the
health and safety at work. Particular attention is drawn to the Tenderer that in accordance
with regulation Κ∆Π 172/2002, the Tenderer is obliged to submit with his Tender proposal for
the appointment of a qualified Safety Coordinator and a health and safety plan (referred to in
this specification as the "plan") at the stage of design. Likewise, a qualified Safety
coordinator shall be appointed for the construction works before the commencement of such
works.
As guidance, to the Tenderer, the following basic requirements for the plan are specified here
below. The Tenderer is obliged to read all the requirements of the above regulation and any
other law or regulation associated with, before preparing this plan.
A copy of the plan shall be always maintained on site in the health and safety file (referred to
as the "file"). Upon completion of the works, the plan shall be updated and amended, if
required, and the file shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The prerequisite for the preparation of the plan is to define and assess all risks involved in the
works and to determine how these risks can be avoided or how can the works be protected
from them.
At the design stage the plan shall include among other things the following:
•
A schedule of all stakeholders being known at the design stage (owner, Safety
Coordinator, designers, project manager, contractors, sub-contractors, etc).
•
A project definition, including work description, topographical maps, demarcation,
schedule of works at milestone level, etc.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 30 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Site information such as neighbouring buildings, structures, other installations, traffic,
ground characteristics, any constraint or requirement implied by the Purchaser or other
Authority, etc.
•
Flow of traffic and access paths to public or private buildings.
•
Design principles including preventive measures against risks associated with the
construction works and proposed working procedures and codes of practice that might be
implemented in connection with the works covered under this contract.
•
Construction drawings and other documents associated with the design and any other
specific information that might be useful to the construction team and is relevant to health
and safety issues.
•
Definition of risks associated with the materials or use of materials.
•
Site organization, including site office, stores, and health facilities locations.
•
Procedures relevant to the revision of the plan in accordance with any possible
amendments during the construction works, the management of any design revisions and
the cooperation between the subcontractors involved.
•
Any information or requirement relevant to the preparation of the plan at the construction
stage and necessary for the file in connection with work on the line throughout its life,
such as maintenance, dismantling etc.
Supporting information for the above requirements, necessary to be provided by the
Purchaser is available in the tender documents.
At the construction stage, the plan shall include among other things the following:
•
Description of all tasks associated with the construction work.
•
Health and safety policy and formulation of targets.
•
Constraints affecting the execution of the works.
•
Organization structure of the project team and the assignment of roles and responsibilities
for each individual member.
•
Description of the management system on health and safety issues.
•
Communication procedures and coordination of the works of subcontractors
•
Detailed mapping showing all site facilities and installations, including flow of traffic,
storage, waste disposal, etc.
•
Information on all standards and legislation relevant to health and safety and
environmental issues, that must be implemented.
•
Criteria for the appointment of subcontractors and suppliers in order to secure
•
The competency of subcontractors in respect to safety at work and no health risks.
•
The provision of all necessary information from the suppliers regarding the safe
transportation and use of all materials.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 31 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
The use of suitable machinery and equipment and adequately and sufficiently
maintaining it throughout the whole period of construction works.
•
The sufficient training of all machinery operators.
•
Procedures for providing sufficient information to all stakeholders who might be affected
from the works.
•
Procedures for the establishment of the necessary cooperation and coordination of all
subcontractors involved including meetings to secure that the works will be running in
safety with no risk on health.
•
Procedures in cases that, during the construction works, design works should be
required, including procedure for design work approval.
•
Effective management of all tasks and activities involving safety and health risks. The
management of these tasks shall include among others the following:
•
Identification and written assessment of risks.
•
Determination of safe procedures and methods of work including where necessary
design and calculations, temporary supports, assembly manuals, operation and
maintenance manuals of all mechanical and other equipment such as lifting devices,
scaffoldings etc., permit to work certificates in confined areas adjacent to electrical
conductors etc, and details of safety measures for risks which are impossible to avoid.
•
Such activities are indicatively shown in the relevant regulation.
•
Maps, diagrams and procedures to secure the flow or diversion of traffic in a safe
manner, access to private or public land or buildings and safety measures .
•
Procedures in anticipation of emergencies, such as escape or action plans.
•
Procedures for the notification of accidents and dangerous events such as falling of
scaffoldings, excavations, etc and procedures for researching such events, including the
maintaining of statistics.
•
Facilities for the personal hygiene of personnel.
•
Procedures for the information and training of all personnel in relation to the organization
of site and program of works, the risks and the required safety measures, the part of the
plan which must be familiar with their commitments and obligations as implied by the
legislation and any other relevant useful information.
•
Procedures for employee consultations and involvement in issues related with the health
and safety, such as organizing safety committees.
•
The establishment of rules governing the operation of the site addressed to
contractors/subcontractors/employees/visitors, suppliers.
•
Procedures for the collection and entry of all data to the file relating to any alteration to the
planned work, so that the file includes the right information describing the work as this has
been constructed.
•
Procedures for auditing that work is being running in accordance with the provisions of
legislation, the rules of the site and the plan.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 32 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.6.1.5
Financial Report
A financial report comprising a summary sheet of invoicing/payments to date plus
payment status against a payment schedule of individual items as agreed in the Contract.
The payment schedule shall take the form of a matrix and shall include a total comprising
of specific sub-totals against an agreed item of equipment/work/specification requirement.
The payment schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and once agreed
shall be modified only in accordance with the current completion/payment status of the
equipment/work/specification requirement.
3.6.1.6
Site Report
A site report containing a summary of those details required by these Conditions in
addition to the following:
(a) Site Manpower forecasts and returns (including arrival and departure date of
supervisory staff).
(b) Plant and Machinery returns (including arrival and departure dates).
(c) Site Erection and Commissioning progress made during the month.
(d) An accident report related to personnel injuries.
(e) A damage report related to plant and machinery.
(f) A fully detailed schedule of works proposed for the following month ahead including
erection, commissioning, etc.
(g) A schedule of equipment shipment and site arrival dates (anticipated and actual).
3.6.2
Notification of Delay
In every case of delay or anticipated delay, from whatever cause, in fulfilment of the
Contract by the Contractor, which is likely to postpone delivery or completion dates
provided in the Contract, the Contractor will notify the Purchaser in writing within seven
days after Contractor becomes aware of the cause of the delay and the changed date of
delivery. Such notification does not relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities and
obligations.
3.6.3
Meetings
If during the execution of the Contract the Engineer considers the progress position of any
section of the work to be unsatisfactory, he will be at liberty to call such meetings, either at
his office, or at the Contractor’s works, as he deems to be necessary.
If required by the Engineer, a responsible representative from the Contractor’s works is to
attend such meetings.
Access to the Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s works is to be granted to the Engineer at
all reasonable times for the purpose of ascertaining progress.
3.7
3.7.1
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Purpose
The purpose of the manual is to collect all information necessary to allow the purchaser:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 33 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
to understand the operation of the equipment,
•
to operate it under normal and accident conditions,
•
to maintain it under satisfactory conditions,
•
to carry out all operations which may be necessary for the maintenance necessary in
case of incident or accident.
3.7.2
Contents
The details are to cover the main plant and all associated ancillary equipment as supplied
under the Contract. It will not be sufficient to incorporate manufacturer's standard
brochures as part of the text unless they refer particularly to the equipment supplied and
are free of extraneous matter.
The instruction manuals shall conform to the following format:
3.7.2.1
Index
The index system shall provide rapid and easy access to particular subjects, drawings and
illustrations. It should include a master index and a sub-index to each main section of the
manual.
3.7.2.2
Description
This section shall include basic data on the Plant:
(a) Descriptions of the Plant both for individual items and for the system into which items
are assembled.
(b) Drawings sufficient for the understanding of descriptions.
(c) Flow sheets or single line and block diagrams, which explain the functioning and logic
of the system. Where related systems are shown on composite diagrams, individual
systems shall be identified by colour, or coding as agreed.
(d) Schedules which provide assembled references to items of a like kind, e.g. Valve
Schedules, Piping Schedules, Operational Limit Schedule, etc.
(e) Data sheets, which assemble in a concise format relevant technical details of a plant
item or system. The purpose of a data sheet is to provide quick reference to the
essential facts omitting all reference to general descriptions operating or maintenance
principles and instructions.
3.7.2.3
Installation
It shall include installation drawings and systematic procedures for installation.
3.7.2.4
Operation
This section shall include basic systematic instructions on how to operate the Plant both
with regard to individual items and to systems under all patterns of normal and abnormal
conditions. The instructions shall include reference to the applicable operation limits.
3.7.2.5
Maintenance
This section shall comprise the maintenance procedures for the items of the Plant and
shall include:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 34 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) The step-by-step procedures for maintenance including assembly and disassembly
instructions.
(b) The checks to be made, including the limits of fits and other tolerances.
(c) A fault diagnosis guide, where appropriate in particular where it concerns electronic
equipment.
(d) The spares required.
(e) The special tools required.
(f) Drawings sufficient to illustrate the maintenance procedures, spares and special tools
including where appropriate exploded views and isometrics to give maximum
instructional content. The necessary electronic circuit diagrams and component layout
drawings for all electronic equipment supplied should be provided in order to enable
full testing and repair of such equipment.
(g) Lubricant schedule.
(h) Ball and roller bearing schedule.
3.7.3
Manual Presentation
Drawings and diagrams shall wherever practicable be reduced to a convenient size and
bound into the manual. The reduced size drawings and diagrams shall be completely
legible and suitable for reproduction. Drawings, which are referred to several times in the
text, shall be either of the "throw clear" type or be repeated as necessary. Throw-clear
drawings are to be included at the back of the relevant sub-sections, and their locations
noted in the Section drawing index. Detailed engineering drawings necessary for
maintenance and mentioned in the text but not included in the manual because of size
reduction difficulties, should nevertheless be listed in the drawing index, the words 'NOT
INCLUDED' being entered against them. Drawings are to be identified at the bottom right
corner by title and number.
The name of the main Contractor, but not that of any Sub-Contractor, may also be
inscribed upon the cover after the description of the Plant.
The name of the Purchaser and substation or other identification followed by a
classification of the plant (e.g., 132 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER) is to be inscribed upon the
spine of the cover and, if the instructions are contained in several books, these are to be
marked with the appropriate volume number.
3.7.4
Manual Delivery Time
Copies of the draft composite maintenance and operating manuals covering all plant
supplied under the contract shall be submitted to the Engineer at least two months before
the earliest delivery of plant, in accordance with the general clauses of the Specification.
Where appropriate these shall be subdivided to cover each substation site. In case of
power transformers, separate manuals shall be prepared for each size of transformer
included in the Contract.
In the event that amendments or alterations to the draft manual are required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall submit revisions for approval without delay so that the final
document can be supplied within the date specified.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 35 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Not later than the time of delivery of the Plant covered by the Contract at least three
copies of the approved version of the instructions incorporating amendments required by
the Engineer shall be delivered to the Purchaser. Where more than one substation is
covered by the Contract, at least three sets shall be supplied for each substation, each set
covering all transformer types and sizes supplied for the substation. If the complete text of
the manual is too bulky then it should be sub-divided and produced in multi-volume form.
Should any changes/modifications be required to the operation and maintenance
instructions arising from operation, failure, repair, modification etc. of the works during the
Maintenance Guarantee period, the Contractor shall incorporate such
changes/modifications into the operation and maintenance instructions as required.
Incorporation of such changes/modifications by the Contractor shall be to the satisfaction
and approval of the Engineer and is to be effected not later than the Contractor’s
application date for issue of the Final Taking Over Certificate.
A further four sets of manuals for each substation site and for each spare transformer are
to be reproduced as a book or books of approximately A4 size and bound into durable
covers inscribed in permanent form upon the front generally in the form of the title page to
this document except that the references to Specification, Conditions of Contract,
Drawings, etc. will be replaced by “Operating and Maintenance Instructions”.
The finished books are to be handed to the Engineer not later than six months before the
completion of the guarantee period.
3.8
PACKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH
The recommendations of BS 1133 Packaging Code are to be observed.
Packing shall be such that it affords adequate protection to the enclosed materials against
mechanical damage during transport to its final destination, including any transition during
shipment. All plant shall be packed suitable for open storage for up to three months
following arrival in Cyprus, if required, taking into consideration high humidity and salty
atmosphere.
A maximum amount of shop assembly consistent with export shipping requirements is
required in order to reduce field erection work.
Where shipment by container is intended the packing requirements stated below for noncontainerised shipments shall apply for any part container loads.
Containers shall be of the fully enclosed weatherproof type (i.e. metal sides and roof)
unless the size of plant to be shipped necessitates otherwise in which case the type of
container and method of shipping shall be subject to approval.
For non-container shipments packing shall be stout close-boarded wooden cases of
adequate thickness, suitably braced and banded and lined internally with water-resistant
material.
Certain types of outdoor equipment may be crated, provided that adequate protection of
vulnerable parts is assured. All pipe flanges shall be fitted with wooden covers not less
than 40mm larger in diameter than the flange. These shall be wired or bolted provided
that the ends are adequately protected and the enclosing bands or wires are robust.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 36 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
For full container shipments a degree of crating may still be required depending on the
type of equipment involved and the Contractor shall state his intentions and obtain
approval.
Adequate battens and braces shall be provided to prevent movement of equipment within
the container. Where appropriate due to the weight or nature of the equipment pallet type
bases shall be provided to assist in loading and unloading.
Indoors electrical equipment, whether shipped in containers or packing cases, must be
enclosed in welded polythene envelopes inside the packing cases. The envelopes should
be sealed and have sufficient desiccant inside to absorb the initial moisture content plus
an allowance for leakage.
When in cases or crates or containers, all items shall be so secured that they are not free
to move and cannot work loose in transport. If rotating parts are shipped within their
bearings or mountings they must be adequately braced and restrained to prevent relative
movement. Bags of loose items shall be placed in a supplementary case, each bag
having stitched on to it a metal label indicating the number and nature of its contents.
Where a filler material is used in a case to restrict movement or provide additional
protection it must be inorganic and non-hygroscopic.
All surfaces liable to corrosion shall be thoroughly cleaned and special steps, adapted to
the nature of the materials and the time interval between packing and unpacking, shall be
taken to prevent corrosion. These steps may constitute the greasing of surfaces, the
application of a protective coat; enclosure of the items in a hermetically sealed container,
consisting of paper, cellophane, plastic or zinc; the addition of vapour phase inhibitor
paper to the package; or other approved means.
Steps shall be taken to ensure that insulated materials cannot be damaged by moisture,
mould, insects or rodents. Items that include materials liable to be damaged by moisture
shall be packed in hermetically sealed containers in which some approved, non-harmful or
toxic dehydrant, has been inserted.
Cases shall be marked both with large lettering to show which side up the case is to be,
and, if the contents are fragile, marked "FRAGILE" in large letters and the international
wineglass symbol. In the case of container shipments individual crates or equipment on
pallets shall also indicate any special handling or movement requirements or weight
limitations. Packages shall be marked with their place of destination in such a way that
rough handling or the effect of weather cannot remove or obliterate the marking. Each
separate package shall be marked with the gross weight and for all lifts over two tons
marks on the cases or equipment shall show where the weight is bearing and the correct
positions for the slings.
The cases shall, whenever possible, be so packed that they can safely be placed any side
uppermost and no reliance shall be placed on the ability of those who will handle the case
to read written instructions or to understand pictorial ones. Cases that have to be slung in
a certain way shall, as far as possible, be so constructed that they cannot conveniently be
slung in any other way and packages shall preferably be so large that they cannot be
easily rolled over or thrown about; thus when practicable small cases shall be crated
together to form one larger unit. Crates shall be sufficiently strong to be capable of being
slung from the outside even when provision is also made for slings to be attached direct to
a major article inside. Special steps shall be taken to guard against theft during transport.
No small items, such as padlocks, nameplates and so forth, which could be torn off or
unscrewed, shall be accessible. Cases, crates, barrels and drums shall be handed in
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 37 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
such a manner as to obstruct the theft of any of the timber used for packaging, and the
bands shall be so secured that they are not rendered ineffective by shrinkage of the wood.
The materials for each substation should be packed separately and suitable markings to
the approval of the Engineer shall be made on all cases, crating etc. to distinguish the
materials for each substation.
A descriptive and fully itemized list shall be prepared of the contents of each packing case
or container. A copy of this list shall be placed in a waterproof envelope under a metal or
other suitable plate securely fastened to the outside of one end of the case or container
and its position adequately indicated by stencilling. Where appropriate drawings showing
the erection marking instructions of the items concerned shall be placed inside the case or
with the equipment in the container.
All stencilled markings on cases and crates, or other markings on descriptive metal tabs
fixed to cable drums, bundles of structural steelwork and so forth, shall be applied in two
places with a material which cannot wash off and shall be additional to any erection of
other marks or impressions which may be specified elsewhere.
Components accessories or materials not included in the main shipment as a result of an
oversight or the negligence of the Contractor, shall, unless otherwise agreed by the
Purchaser, be shipped by air mail or air freight on the Contractor's expense.
During transit mechanical shock indicators shall be fitted on each of the following
equipment to indicate how the specific equipment was handled during transit and to
determine if detailed inspection is required at site:
•
Power Transformers
•
GIS Panels
•
Circuit Breakers
•
Surge Arresters
•
Outdoor Current and Voltage Transformers
•
22 kV Switchgear Panels
3.9
CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING
Cable shall be supplied on strong non-returnable drums arranged to take a round spindle
of a section adequate to support the loaded cable drum during installation and handling.
The drum shall be lagged with strong closely fitting battens, which shall be securely fixed
to prevent damage to the cable. Wooden drums shall be constructed of seasoned timber
to prevent shrinkage of drums during shipment and subsequent storage on Site. Each
drum shall be clearly marked in a manner which cannot be obliterated with the particulars
of the cable including voltage, length, conductor size, number of cores, type of protective
covering, section number, gross and net weights, together with the direction for rolling.
Empty drums shall remain the property of the Purchaser if he so chooses. The Contractor
shall be responsible to transfer to the Purchaser’s Stores, as will be advised by the
Purchaser, of all empty drums that the Purchaser will decide to retain. Any other drums or
other leftover packing materials will be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own
expenses.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 38 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The ends of lead sheathed cables shall be sealed by plumbing a cap or disc on the lead
sheath. The ends of PVC sheathed cables shall be suitably sealed to prevent the ingress
of moisture. The end of the cable left projecting from the drum shall at all times be
securely protected against damage.
3.10
ERECTION MARKS
All plant requiring erection at site shall be marked with distinguishing numbers and/or
letters corresponding to those on the approved drawings and material lists or shipping
documents. All erection marks shall be legible and clearly visible, where relevant erection
Marks shall be stamped before galvanizing.
Colour banding to an approved code is to be employed to identify members of similar
shape or type but of differing strengths of grades.
3.11
3.11.1
TRANSPORT TO SITE
General
The Contractor shall arrange and carry out under his own responsibility and supervision
the local transport from the port of destination to the Site.
The Contractor shall, at his own convenience, gather all necessary information and
arrange for all necessary provisions in order to obtain accurate information about
unloading at the port of destination and inland transport facilities as well as prevailing
conditions, particularly the safe load bearing capacity of highways and bridges. The
Contractor shall bear every and all expenses related therewith.
The Contractor shall use every reasonable means and care to prevent any of the
highways or bridges on the route to Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of
the Contractor or any of his Sub-Contractors and in particular select, choose and use
vehicles and restrict and distribute loads so that any such extraordinary traffic that will
inevitably arise from moving of Contractor’s equipment and material from and to the Site
shall be limited as far as reasonably possible and so that no damage or injury may be
occasioned to such highway and bridges.
If during the carrying out of the work or at any time thereafter the Contractor receives any
claim arising out of the execution of the Works in respect of damage or injury to the
highways or bridges, he shall immediately report the same to the Engineer and thereafter
he shall make the settlement of any payment of all sums due in respect of such claim and
in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses in
relation thereto without any obligation to the Purchaser.
The unloading and storage at Site shall be carried out by the Contractor, who for these
purposes shall make all necessary provisions and arrange for all necessary equipment.
3.11.2
Receiving of Equipment & Issuing of Damage Reports
The Contractor shall submit receiving reports to the Engineer to cover each individual
shipment received and checked at the jot site. Each shipment on arrival at job site shall
be unloaded, opened and carefully checked for any damage in transit and the Contractor
shall immediately submit a damage report, countersigned by the Engineer to the
Insurance Company with copy to the Engineer, where damage has occurred in Marine
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 39 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Transportation. A copy of the damage report shall also be sent to the registered/appointed
surveyor.
In all cases of irreparable damages, the Contractor shall immediately notify the relevant
manufacturer(s). He shall also immediately notify the Engineer of the actions he will be
initiating and undertaking in order to repair or replace the damaged part(s) and of the
consequences this damage will have on the completion date of the Works. Any repairs
proposed by the Contractor will be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.12
ERECTION
The Maintenance Instructions shall include any special precautionary measures, which
must be taken during erection or subsequent maintenance. These special precautions
must be strictly observed when the equipment is installed, tested and commissioned.
Special care shall be taken not to injure galvanized or other specially treated surfaces
during erection and also to prevent or remove any rust streaks or foreign matter deposited
on galvanized surfaces during storage or transport or after erection.
In operational substations all work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the EAC
Permit to Work system. Failure of personnel to adhere to this system may result in
personnel being dismissed from the site.
3.13
CLEANING AND PAINTING
All iron and steel structures shall be protected against corrosion in accordance with EN
ISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713 and shall withstand the environment for at least 10 years
without maintenance.
The Tenderer is to submit with his offer details of painting and finishing covering the
extent of surface treatment required on items in works and prior to dispatch.
Before painting or filling with oil, gas, or compound, all non galvanized parts including
tanks and accessories, shall be thoroughly cleaned free from rust, scale, burrs, sharp
corners, grease and moisture by shot blasting, pickling and rinsing or other approved
process. Any protective coatings are to be applied after tests have been carried out.
Pickling shall be preceded by suitable solvent or alkaline cleaning for removal of deposits
of oil, grease etc., where necessary. The finished surface shall be in a suitable condition
to provide good adhesion properties to the primary coat.
Pipes, valves and other similar parts of the Plant which are subject to hydraulic test and
are not readily accessible for drying out are on completion of tests at the manufacturer's
works to be drained out by washing with an approved de-watering oil prior to protection for
shipment.
All surfaces shall be prepared for coating in accordance with BS 2569.
All paint is to have appropriate standard finish, requiring at least two finishing coats on
prepared surfaces properly filled in to provide a smooth finish. The insides of control
cubicles, cabinets etc., where condensation is liable to occur are to receive the same
number of coats.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 40 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All bright metal parts are to be covered before shipment with an approved protective
compound and protected adequately during shipment to Site. After erection these parts
are to be cleaned with correct solvent and polished bright where required.
The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of touch-up paint for making good minor
damages, which may occur during transport.
The colour and shade of all painted external surfaces shall be to BS 381C colour, 631
Light Grey or similar. All internal surfaces, which require painting, shall be white.
Instrument, relay and ancillary panel mounted equipment shall be consistently finished
and details submitted for approval by the Engineer.
The SF6 pipes shall be painted yellow but all pipes associated with one gas zone shall be
separately identified with an individual colour band every 300 mm.
Colours of equipment other than above and all shades are to be proposed by Contractor
and agreed with the Engineer.
3.14
LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION DISCS
Each main and auxiliary item of plant is to have attached to it in a conspicuous position, a
rating plate of material that cannot be corroded upon which is to be engraved any
identifying name, type or serial number, together with details of loading conditions under
which the item of Plant in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram
plates as may be required by the Engineer. Where labels are provided for making clear
the method of operation of apparatus they shall be concise and preferably diagrammatic
in form. Danger labels and fire protection equipment labels shall be fitted in appropriate
places. All labels shall be submitted for approval and shall be in English unless otherwise
specified.
Equipment rating plates and serial numbers shall be located in a conspicuous and easily
readable position.
All switchgear shall be clearly and permanently identified with circuit designation, front and
rear, number plates, and phase discs of appropriate colours.
Labels, number plates and their fixing screws for outdoor use shall be of stainless steel or
other corrosion resistant material. Where the use of vitreous enamelled labels is
approved, the whole surface including the back and edges shall be properly covered and
protective washers shall be provided front and back on the fixing screws.
Danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background or they may be pictorial if
approved by the Engineer. All other labels and number plates shall have black lettering
on a white background.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 41 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Equipment
Label Size (mm)
Lettering (mm)
Main labels on panels, cubicles, kiosks,
junction and control boxes and similar
equipment
125X50
20X1,5
Control and changeover switches and
similar items
70X30
12X1,5
Fuses and links
35X15
5X1
Relays and contactors
60X20
5X1
3.15
LOCKS
Padlocks or other approved locking devices for circuit breakers, isolating devices, control
switches, screened enclosures, and other equipment shall be supplied under this
Contract.
On electrical plant at all voltage levels switches on the local and remote control and
protection panels shall be locked as follows:
•
Control Switches:
Cylinder or fixed interference lock (key removable
in neutral position only)
•
Discrepancy Switch:
Fixed interference lock (key removable in neutral
position only)
•
Control Selector Switch:
Cylinder or fixed interference lock (key removable
in each position)
Where locks are called for under this Specification, these shall be of an approved dead
latch type, or padlocks as appropriate. Three keys shall be supplied for each lock and all
locks and keys shall be non-interchangeable.
Where a set of locks is provided under any particular section of the Plant, a group master
key shall be supplied in addition.
All locks and padlocks shall be of brass and where they are fitted to switchboards or
similar cubicles shall have the visible parts chromium plated.
Keys and locks shall be impressed with the manufacturer's serial number.
The padlocks and keys shall be engraved with an agreed identifying code or inscription.
3.16
TROPICALIZATION
In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard is to be given to the humid conditions
under which equipment is to work. Some relaxation of the following provisions may be
permitted where equipment is hermetically sealed but it is preferred that tropical grade
materials should be used wherever possible.
3.16.1
Metals
Iron and steel are generally to be painted or galvanized as appropriate. Indoor parts may
alternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plating or other approved protective finish.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 42 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Small iron and steel parts (other than rustless steel) of all instruments and electrical
equipment, the cores of electromagnets and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms
are to be treated in an approved manner to prevent rusting.
3.16.2
Screws, Nuts, Springs, etc
The use of iron and steel is to be avoided in instruments and electrical relays wherever
possible. Steel screws are to be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated, or when plating is not
possible owing to tolerance limitations, are to be of corrosion-resisting steel. Instrument
screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit) are to be of brass or bronze.
Springs are to be of non-rusting material, e.g., phosphor bronze or nickel silver, as far as
possible.
3.16.3
Rubbers
Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the climatic
conditions, are to be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.
3.17
NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS
Nuts and bolts for incorporation in the plant are preferably to conform to ISO Metric
Coarse to BS 3643, BS 3692 and BS 4190. Other sizes or threads are permitted for
threaded parts not to be disturbed in normal use or maintenance. Where the Contract
includes nuts and bolts of different standards, then the tools to be provided in accordance
with this Specification are to include spanners, taps and dies for these nuts and bolts.
Fitted bolts are to be a driving fit in the reamed holes they occupy, are to have the
screwed portion of a diameter such that it will not be damaged in driving and are to be
marked in a conspicuous position to ensure correct assembly at Site.
On outdoor equipment all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non-corroding materials
where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and
elsewhere where specifically required by the Engineer.
All washers are to be included under this Contract, including locking devices and
anti-vibration arrangements, which are to be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Taper washers are to be fitted where necessary.
Where there is risk of corrosion, bolts and studs are to be finished flush with the surface of
the nuts.
3.18
RIVETS
Rivets are to conform to the appropriate British Standard and for general use pan heads
are preferred. Rivets on bearing surfaces are to be flat counter-sunk, driven flush.
Whenever practicable, riveting is to be done by hydraulic tools and rivets must completely
fill the holes when closed. If loose, or if the heads are badly formed, cracked or eccentric
to the shank or do not bear truly on the plate or bar, such rivets are to be cut out and
replaced. All surfaces to be riveted must be in close contact throughout.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 43 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.19
FORGINGS
All important forgings are to be jointly examined at the maker's works by the Engineer and
by a representative of the Contractor during forging and heat treatment and are to be
examined by the latest methods for the detection of defects.
3.20
CASTINGS
All castings are to be as free from blowholes, flaws and cracks as is practicable. No
welding, filling or plugging of defective parts is to be done without the sanction of the
Engineer and then only with his approval in writing.
All cast-iron is to be of close-grained quality and is to be corrosion-resistant for those
parts in contact with seawater. Cast-iron is not to be used for any part of the equipment
which is in tension or which is subject to impact stresses. This clause is not intended to
prohibit the use of suitable grades of cast-iron for parts where service experience has
shown it to be satisfactory.
3.21
WELDING
Where fabrication welds are liable to be highly stressed, the welders or welding operators
shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate section of BS
4872 Part 1, or other relevant International Standard Specification.
The Engineer reserves the right to visit the Contractor's Works at any reasonable time
during the fabrication of the items of Plant and to familiarize himself with the progress
made and the quality of the work to date.
All tests are to be carried out in accordance with the relevant International or other
approved Standards. Where required by the Engineer, non-destructive examination of the
finished weld is to be made. If the examinations be by radiograph means, then the
recommendations of EN 1435 where applicable are to be followed and the resulting
negatives are to be made available to the Engineer.
3.22
GALVANIZED WORK
All materials to be galvanized are to be of the full dimensions shown or specified and all
punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the removal of burns is to be completed
before the galvanizing process commences.
All galvanizing is to be done by the hot dip process with spelter, not less than 98% of
which must be pure zinc and in accordance with EN 729 or EN 10244 as applicable. No
alternative process is to be used without the approval of the Engineer. Bolts are to be
completely galvanized including the threads, but the threads are to be left uncoated in the
case of nuts.
The zinc coating is to be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible.
Unless otherwise specified the average thickness of zinc coating for iron and steel articles
shall be in accordance with EN 729 and that for steel wires to EN 10244. The Engineer
may select for test as many components to be weighed after pickling and before and after
galvanizing as he may think fit.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 44 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All galvanized parts are to be protected from injury to the zinc coating due to abrasion
during periods of transit, storage and erection.
3.23
3.23.1
PIPE WORK AND VALVES
Internal Cleaning of Pipes
The Contractor is to be responsible for ensuring that the internal surface of all pipelines is
thoroughly clean both during erection and before the pipeline is placed in commission.
The procedure adopted by the Contractor is to include the following:
(a) Thorough cleaning of all internal surfaces prior to erection to remove accumulations of
dirt, rust, scale, etc., and welding slag due to site welding before erection.
(b) Thorough cleaning of all pipe work after erection by blowing through to atmosphere to
ensure that no extraneous matter is left in the system. The Contractor is to provide all
necessary facilities for carrying out these requirements.
3.23.2
Pipe Work
All pipe work shall be designed for the appropriate conditions and shall comply with
requirements of the latest Standard. All pipes, bends, and tees shall be truly cylindrical
and uniform in section. The pipes shall be of appropriate approved material, shall be
seamless and shall be suitable to withstand the stresses and strain involved in the
operation of the Plant.
Branches shall be welded onto the pipes in an approved manner - alternatively cast steel
tees may be provided subject to the approval of the Engineer. Cast steel tees bends or
fittings shall be of similar analysis to the adjoining pipes.
Care shall be taken that the internal diameter of all castings is the same as that of the
pipes to which they are joined. Castings without ample fillets at the points of attachment of
flanges and branches will be rejected.
All pipes shall be adequately anchored and expansion loops and bends shall be provided
where required and shall preferably be arranged horizontally. The Contractor will be
responsible for the design and positioning of all provisions for expansion.
All piping systems shall be arranged to allow adequate falls in the direction of the flow
except where otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Adequate provision shall be made for air release, pressure relief, and drainage on all pipe
work. Isolating valves, complete with padlocks and hose connections, shall be provided at
the take off points of all such drains.
Special care shall be taken to ensure that no permanent stresses are set up in any
pipeline or items of connected plant when closing lengths are jointed.
Except where otherwise specified all piping shall have full penetration butt welded
connections with a minimum number of flanged joints necessary for maintenance.
All terminal points and at points where castings adjoin and where, in the opinion of the
Engineer, it is undesirable to use a butt-welded joint, a flanged joint of approved design
shall be provided.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 45 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Pipes and attachments shall be properly aligned and jigged prior to welding. If tack welds
are used the tacks shall be fused into the first runs of weld deposited.
All flanged joints and bolting materials shall be liberally smeared with an adequate
graphite solution during erection and/or assembly to assist subsequent maintenance.
Gauges shall not be mounted directly on the pipes but shall be secured to a wall or
structure which is free from vibration.
3.23.3
Pipe Supports
The whole of the pipe work and accessories included in this Contract are to be supported
and mounted in an approved manner. All necessary slings, saddles, structural steelwork,
foundation bolts, fixing bolts and all other attachments are to be supplied.
Supports shall be arranged so that any valve or fitting can be withdrawn without any
additional support being required and without disturbing the rest of the plant.
No pipe shall be supported from another pipe.
The number and positions of all supports and the maximum weight carried by a support is
to be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.23.4
Valves
All valves shall be of approved design and manufacture. Where valves are of a similar
make, size and type they shall be interchangeable with one another. Valves shall have
bolted connections. Light pattern valves are not acceptable for any service.
All valves shall be of the full way gate type unless otherwise specified and when in full
open position, the bore of the valve shall not be obstructed by any part of the gate. The
internal diameter of all valves at the ends adjacent to the pipe work shall be similar to the
internal diameter of the connecting pipe work.
All valves over 50 mm nominal bore shall have outside screwed spindles, the screwed
thread on the spindle shall not pass through or into the stuffing box. Where valves are
exposed to the weather, protective covers shall be provided for the spindles, which shall
be to the approval of the Engineer.
All valves shall be closed by rotating the handwheel in a clockwise direction when looking
at the face of the handwheel. The face of each valve handwheel shall be clearly marked
with the words "OPEN" and "SHUT" and with arrows adjacent to indicate the direction of
rotation to which each refers.
All valves over 50 mm bore shall have indicators to show readily whether the valves are
open or shut. In the case of valves with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted to
both the valve spindle and the operating pedestal.
Each valve handwheel shall have fitted firmly in position on top of the handwheel, a
permanent stainless steel nameplate with inscribed lettering to indicate the system with
which the valve is associated and an identification number corresponding to the number
allocated to the valve on the system flow diagram. The identification system shall be to
the approval of the Engineer.
Valves shall be installed with their spindles above or at the horizontal position, no valves
shall be erected in the inverted position. Hand operated valves shall be easily operable
by one man.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 46 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Adequate means of easy lubrication shall be provided for all valves and operating
extension components.
Cast iron shall not be used in the manufacture of any valves. Plastic or composition hand
wheels will not be accepted.
All non-return valves shall be of an approved type and manufacture and head loss through
the valves shall be to approval. The bodies shall be provided with removable access
covers to enable the internal parts to be examined or renewed without removing the valve
from the pipeline. The bodies shall be stamped with an arrow to indicate the correct flow
direction.
Non-return valves shall not be fitted in vertical pipe runs.
Valves which it will be necessary to lock in the open or closed position are to be provided
with a non-detachable locking arrangement by locking pins which shall be of an anti-rattle
design so as not to add to noise emission. Such locking pins shall incorporate 8mm holes
for padlocks.
Filter valves shall be fitted with locking plates.
3.24
OIL OR COMPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS
All joints of fabricated oil or compound filled chambers, other than those, which have to be
broken, are to be welded and care is to be taken to ensure that the chambers are oil-tight.
Defective welded joints are not to be caulked but may be re-welded subject to the written
approval of the Engineer.
Suitable provision is to be made for the expansion of the filling medium in all oil or
compound filled chambers and the chambers are to be designed to avoid the trapping of
air or gases during the filling process.
Design shall permit the temperature of any chamber, which is to be compound filled, to be
raised such that the compound does not solidify during the filling process.
All wiring in the vicinity of oil-filled chambers is to be insulated with oil-resisting insulation
of approved quality.
3.25
OIL LEVEL INDICATORS
Oil level indicators of approved design are to be fitted to all oil containers. The indicators
are to show the level at all temperatures likely to be experienced in service, are to be
marked with the normal level at 20oC clearly visible from normal access levels and are to
be easily dismantled for cleaning. In addition, the normal filling level of all removable
containers is to be marked on the inside.
3.26
THERMOMETER POCKETS
Thermometer pockets and instrument connections of an approved pattern are to be fitted
in such positions as may be determined to suit the operation and testing of the plant to the
approval of the Engineer. A thermometer pocket is to be fitted adjacent to each point of
connection for distant remote temperature indication unless specifically stated to the
contrary. Where necessary, the pocket is to be of approved alloy material suitable for the
required service.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 47 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All thermometer pockets are to comply with the requirements of BS 2765.
3.27
CHROMIUM PLATING
The chromium plating of those components of the Plant where specified and where
offered by the Contractor is to comply with the requirements of EN 12540.
3.28
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges are to comply with the requirements of EN 837.
All pressure gauges are to be fitted with stopcocks immediately adjacent to each gauge
and all pressure gauge piping is to be fitted with an isolating valve at each point of
connection to the main system. Where pressure gauges are mounted on panels, the
stopcocks are to be suitable for the connection of a test gauge.
Where a difference in level exists between the situation of the gauge and the point at
which pressure is to be measured, appropriate compensation is to be made in the dial
reading and the dial must be marked with the amount of compensation applied. Where
the compensation would amount to two percent or less of the total movement indicated
under normal conditions, it may be ignored.
All pressure gauges are to be clearly identified by means of labels of approved type and
lettering.
All pressure gauge piping is to be of corrosion resistant steel or copper tube.
3.29
3.29.1
SMALL WIRING
General
All wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in cleats, bunched in neat forms or run in
approved wiring troughs or tubes not susceptible to corrosion. The number of wires in any
one bunch or tube shall not exceed 20 and the duct-filling ratio shall not exceed 75%. The
practice of doubling back wires on themselves in a trough to absorb slack is not
acceptable. Where bunched or handled wires are run in troughs the maximum number in
each bunch or bundle shall be retained at 20.
Cleats shall be of moulded or metal-reinforced insulating material and shall be of the
limited compression type. Insulated strapping shall be used for bunched wires. Wiring
troughs shall be of insulating material.
Wherever practicable, wiring shall be accommodated on the sides of the cubicles and the
wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel wiring shall be so
arranged that access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus and to
contacts of control and other switches is not impeded. Where provision is made for
addition of equipment not required initially, means shall be adopted for supporting and
termination wiring during the interim period.
Except where terminals are approved by the Engineer for use with bare conductors,
crimped plated connectors of approved type are to be used to terminate all small wiring.
All wiring shall have insulation incapable of supporting combustion. Cores shall be multistranded.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 48 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The size of wiring cores shall be selected with due regard to thermal requirements,
voltage drop and mechanical strength.
Particular attention is to be paid to fatigue failure of cores due to flexing or vibration
including damage at terminations, which require disconnection for test purposes.
All panel wiring is to comply with the requirements of BS 6231, Type A or B, as
appropriate. Conductors are to be copper and have a cross section equivalent to
30/0,25mm (1,5mm2), 50/0,25mm (2,5mm2), 7/0,67mm (2,5mm2) or 1/1,78mm (2,5mm2)
but single stranded conductors should only be employed for rigid connections which are
not subject to movement or vibration during shipment, operation or maintenance. Flexible
conductors of smaller sizes shall only be employed with written approval.
Small wiring shall be black or other approved uniform colour unless otherwise specified or
extensions are involved to existing plant which has already coloured wiring, in which case
the existing wire colouring scheme shall be retained as far as existing switchboards are
concerned. For new switchboards the coloured wiring shall comply with the following
code:
Colour of Wire
Circuit Particulars
•
Brown (L1) / Black (L2) /
Grey (L3)
First, second and third phase connections,
respectively, when directly connected to the primary
circuit or connected to the secondary circuits of
current and voltage transformers.
•
Green or Green/Yellow
Connections to earth
•
Blue
AC neutral connections, earthed or unearthed,
connected to the secondary circuit of current and
voltage transformers. AC connections other than
those above and connections in AC/DC circuits.
•
Grey
Connections in DC circuits.
Alternatively, where equipment is wired in accordance with a manufacturer's standard,
wiring may be carried out in a single colour except that all connections to earth shall be
green or green/yellow.
Wiring diagrams must indicate wire colours and are to be drawn as viewed from the back
of the panel.
Numbered ferrules shall be fitted to internal wiring and to all multi-core cable tails.
Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with the established numbering system for
existing substations. For new substations the Contractor shall submit for approval by the
Engineer of a standard system of numbering for small wiring.
Each wire shall have a letter to denote its function, e.g. control of circuit breaker, current
transformer for primary protection, voltage for instruments, metering and protection. The
function letter shall be followed by a number identifying the individual wire. Every branch
of any connection shall bear the same identification mark. At points of interconnection
where a change of numbering cannot be avoided double ferrules are to be provided.
Where it is necessary to identify branches which are commoned (e.g., current transformer
leads), different identification marks for the branches may be employed only if they are
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 49 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
commoned through links, or are connected to separate terminals which are then
commoned by removable connections.
Numbering shall read from the terminals outwards on all wires.
Unused cores in multicore cables shall be ferruled U1, U2, etc. at both ends and
connected to individual spare terminals.
Ferrules shall be of white insulating material with glossy finish to minimize adhesion of
dirt. They shall not be affected by damp or oil and shall be clearly and permanently
marked in black.
The ferrules shall be of sleeve type so fitted that they cannot slip along the cable or be
removed from the cable without re-terminating.
The ferrules on all wiring directly connected to circuit breaker trip coils, tripping switches,
etc., are to be of a colour, preferably red, different from that of the remainder and marked
"Trip" or "T" in white.
All wiring shall be taken to terminal boards and wires shall not be teed or jointed between
terminal points.
Electrical wiring and instruments are to be so located that leakage of oil or water cannot
affect them.
Where plastic material is used for ducting etc. it shall be tough and shall be able to resist
shock tests for reinforced enclosure equipment. Inflammation of the plastic due to
exposure to flame shall not propagate beyond the combustion area when the flame is
removed.
All metallic cases of instruments, control switches, relays, etc., are to be connected by
means of copper conductors of not less than 2,5 mm2 section to the nearest earth bar.
These conductors may be bare or have insulation coloured green.
3.29.2
External Wiring
Control and indication cables erected on the surface of transformers, for example,
between Buchholz relay, thermal point terminal boxes and the marshalling box, shall be
suitable for continuous operation at temperatures up to and including 105 oC. Heat
resisting grade PVC is approved for this purpose but the use of mineral insulated cables is
not permitted. The wiring shall enter the bottom compartment of the kiosk through the
gland plate in such a manner that the rear is kept clear for access.
External wiring shall have a minimum cross section of 2,5 mm2.
3.30
TERMINAL BOARDS
Screw type terminals shall utilize a pressure plate arrangement, single point screw
terminations will not be accepted. The size of screws for screw clamps is not restricted
provided that the screws are captive, otherwise they shall comply with the requirements
for bolt and stud terminals. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one
terminal. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent pairs of terminals. The
height of the barriers and the spacing of the terminals shall be such as to give adequate
protection while allowing easy access to terminals.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 50 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Terminations shall be grouped according to function and labels shall be provided to show
the group function.
Connections to terminals shall be made using pre insulated reinforced crimped-end
pieces.
Terminals of Voltage and Current Transformer Tripping circuits shall be of the slide-type
test/disconnect type and shall have facility for inserting banana type testing terminal to
both the incoming and to the outgoing terminal.
Connections to relays shall be made using screwed lugs clamped to the conductors with
an insulating sleeve.
All terminal boards are to be mounted in accessible positions and, when in enclosed
cubicles, are preferably to be inclined towards the rear doors to give easy access to
terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Spacing of
adjacent terminal boards is to be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of each board is to
be not less than 200 mm above the incoming cable gland plate. Separate terminations
are to be provided on each terminal strip for the cores of incoming and outgoing cables
including all spare cores.
Acceptable types of terminals are:
(a) Screw or stud type used with crimped ring type termination for high current
connections. All studs are to be provided with nuts, washers and lock washers.
(b) Insertion clamp type such as the Klippon type SAK6 or the Phoenix type UK10 or
similar equivalent to the approval of the Engineer, whereby the crimped termination is
clamped between plates by a screw having a suitable locking device. Terminal entries
are to be shrouded such that no current carrying metal is exposed. Tapped holes are
to have not less than three full threads. Screws are to be of plated steel, stainless
steel or phosphor bronze and size M3 and M4.
Terminal assemblies are preferably to be of the unit form suitable for mounting collectively
on a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the required number of
ways plus at least ten percent extra terminals as spares. Relevant manufacturer's
catalogues are to be supplied with the offer. If requested by the Purchaser samples of
terminals are to be provided for inspection and approval.
For voltages in excess of 125 V, circuit terminals are to be segregated from other
terminals and are to be fitted with non-flammable plastic covers to prevent contact with
any live parts. They are to have warning labels, with red lettering, mounted thereon in
conspicuous position.
All connections are to be made at the front of the terminal boards and no live metal is to
be exposed at the back.
3.31
ELECTRICAL INSULATION
All insulating materials are to be suitably finished so as to prevent deterioration of their
qualities under the specified working conditions.
Plastics, elastomers, resin-bonded laminates and inorganic materials are to be of suitable
quality selected from the grades or types in the appropriate British Standard.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 51 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.32
EARTHING CONNECTIONS
All necessary studs, connectors and earth bars are to be provided to permit the
connection of each switchboard, motor or other electrical equipment supplied under the
Contract to the substation general earthing system. The provisions for earthing are to be
such that no reliance is to be placed on the conductivity of metal to metal joints without the
use of special connectors.
All control or relay panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 85
mm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged so that the bars of
adjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All joints shall be tinned.
The common earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main
station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than 85 mm2.
Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall be connected to
this bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2,5 mm2.
Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in
themselves and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible
position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled.
The links shall be of the bolted type, having M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.
3.33
ELECTRIC MOTORS
All motors are to be in accordance with BS 5000, Part II or EN 60034 and, unless
otherwise specified shall have cooling type ICO1 suitable for continuous operation and
direct on-line starting.
They are to be suitable in all respects for service under the conditions at site. Main
conductor and slot insulation is to be non-hygroscopic and in accordance with Class B of
IEC 60085.
Motors are to be capable of operating continuously at rated output at any frequency
between 48 and 51 cycles per second and at 85% of the nominal voltage without injurious
overheating. Motors are to be designed to operate for a period of not less than five
minutes at a voltage of 25% below the nominal value and at normal frequency without
injurious overheating. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor is to demonstrate that
the motors comply with this requirement.
A miniature circuit breaker or fuses with thermal overcurrent protection shall protect each
motor.
The starting current at full voltage is not to exceed six times the rated full load current.
Motor bearings are to be of the rolling type and the cage locating the balls or rollers is not
to be in contact with the races. All bearings are to be fitted with oil or grease lubricators.
Vertical shaft motors are to have approved thrust bearings.
The ends of motor windings are to be brought out to terminal boxes and the arrangement
is to be such as to permit easy changing over of any two-phase leads.
All terminals are to be of the stud type of adequate size for the particular duty, marked in
accordance with EN 60034 and to be enclosed in a weatherproof box, which is to be
securely fixed to the motor frame.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 52 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All terminal boxes are to be fitted with an approved sealing chamber, conduit entry or
adaptor plate, as required, together with the necessary fittings to suit the type of cable
supplied.
Motors shall be provided with a 9 mm diameter earthing stud and lock nuts. The material
surrounding the stud shall have a flat surface for an area of 30 mm diameter. For motors
below 1 kW a 6 mm diameter earthing stud may be fitted. Holding down bolts shall not be
used for earthing purposes.
The following protection shall be provided:
•
Motors up to 1 kW:
fuses, thermal or magnetic overload
•
Motors more than 1 kW:
fuses, thermal overload, single-phasing protection
3.34
CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS
Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with EN 60947.
3.34.1
General
Control switches for electrically operated circuit-breakers are to be of pistol grip or, where
specified, of approved discrepancy type and arranged to operate clockwise when closing
the circuit-breakers and anti-clockwise when opening them. They are to be designed to
prevent accidental operation. When switches of the discrepancy type are approved,
operation is to be effected by two independent movements.
Where necessary, control switches are to be capable of being locked in appropriate
positions but control switches for circuit breakers are to be of the non-locking type with
spring-return to the "neutral" position. Such switches are to be controlled by independent
springs, the use of contact springs alone for restoring not being acceptable.
All pushbuttons are to be of the non-retaining type made of non-hygroscopic materials,
non-swelling and fitted to avoid any possibility of sticking.
The contacts of all switches and pushbuttons are to be strong and to have a positive
wiping action when operated.
All control switches are to be provided with labels complying with the requirements of this
Specification in addition to clear indication as to the direction of each operation, for
example, "open", "close", etc.
3.34.2
Electrical Control Locations
Equipment may be electrically controlled from a number of different control points as
specified in the appropriate sections of this Specification. The control positions shall be
designated as follows:
3.34.2.1
Local Control
Located adjacent to the item of plant to facilitate maintenance, inspection and emergency
operation.
3.34.2.2
Remote Control
Located at a substation control room where specified items of Plant are monitored and
controlled by direct cable connection.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 53 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.34.2.3
Supervisory Control
Located at a System Control Centre where principal items of plant at a number of
substations are remotely controlled via a telecontrol system.
3.35
INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING
Indicating lamps fitted into the fascias of switch and instrument cubicles or panels are to
be adequately ventilated.
Lamps are to be easily removed and replaced from the front of the panel by manual
means preferably not requiring the use of extractors.
The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass is to be of an
approved finish and to be easily removable from the body of the fitting so as to permit
access to the lamp and lamp glass.
The lamps are to be clear and are to fit into a standard form of lamp holder. The rated
lamp voltage should be ten percent in excess of the auxiliary supply voltage, whether AC
or DC. Alternatively, low voltage lamps with series resistors will be acceptable.
The lamp glasses shall comply with BS 1376 and EN 60073 and are to be in standard
colours, red, green, blue, white and amber. The colour is to be in the glass and not an
applied coating and the different coloured glasses are not to be interchangeable.
Transparent synthetic materials may be used instead of glass, provided such materials
have fast colours and are completely suitable for use in tropical climates.
3.36
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
Where appropriate, each item of Plant is to be equipped with all necessary auxiliary
switches, contactors and mechanisms for indication, protection, metering, control,
interlocking, supervisory and other services. All auxiliary switches are to be wired up to a
terminal board on the fixed portion of the plant, whether they are in use or not in the first
instance.
All auxiliary switches and mechanisms are to be mounted in approved accessible
positions clear of the operating mechanisms and are to be protected in an approved
manner. The contacts of all auxiliary switches are to be strong and to have a positive
wiping action when closing.
Banks of auxiliary switches and associated terminal boards are to be arranged to facilitate
extension when required. Also, all auxiliary switches are to be replaced when damaged or
maintained, without having to dismantle the entire bank or take the wires of adjacent
switches away.
3.37
ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HEATERS, AND VENTILATORS
Enclosures for electrical apparatus are to afford the following degrees of protection
classified in EN 60529
(a) Metal housing of switchboard - IP54 - also provision of a thermostatically controlled
230 Vac anti-condensation heater and screened drainage holes.
(b) Auxiliary switches and associated terminals - IP54 - as (a) but with heater control
switch common to other apparatus on the same circuit.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 54 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) Junction boxes - IP54
(d) Instruments - IP65
(e) Motors - IP54
Operating boxes, kiosks, cubicles and similar enclosed compartments forming part of
auxiliary equipment shall be adequately ventilated to minimize condensation. All
contactor or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. Anticondensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided inside each cubicle or where
necessary each cubicle compartment. They shall be shrouded and located so as not to
cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. A thermostat shall be arranged to
switch off the heater supply when the ambient temperature exceeds 30-35oC. Means
shall be provided at each unit for isolating the supply. A common switch with a neon gas
type lamp labelled "Cubicle heaters on" shall be mounted at a convenient point such that it
will not require movement in the event of extension units being added.
3.38
INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS
The Contractor shall supply the first filling of all oil, compound and gas required for the
operation of the plant. The oil shall be in accordance with EN 60296 or BS 148
uninhibited, non-labelled, Class I and on testing at works shall comply with these
Standards.
The compound shall comply with BS 1858.
The SF6 gas shall comply with BS 52O7 (EN 60376).
These shall be delivered in strong hermetically sealed drums or suitable containers.
Where other types of filling media are used in current transformer chambers and other
parts of the equipment they shall be of an approved type.
Where drums are stored on Site in the open, they shall be kept in a horizontal position.
All oil or oil derived compounds shall be PCB free. A certificate shall be provided at the
tender stage guaranteeing that none of the equipment offered utilizes PCB's and each
shipment shall be accompanied by a certificate confirming that all equipment in the
shipment is free from PCB's. Furthermore, all shipments shall be accompanied by a
Material Safety Data Sheet, which shall give the composition, the characteristics and
instructions for the correct and safe use and disposal.
3.39
3.39.1
CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCESSORIES
Cable Boxes
Cable boxes shall be unfilled and shall be suitable for dry terminations for the number,
type and size of cables specified in the Schedule of Requirements. Air clearances to earth
and between phases shall not be less than the figures stated in Table 3 of BS7354.
Provision shall be made for earthing the body of each cable box.
Boxes shall be arranged for cables entering vertically from below.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 55 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
To provide full accessibility and to enable the cables to be prepared in their final position
in the cable box, the gland plate and the front cover down to the gland plate shall be
separate and removable.
The cable boxes shall be supplied complete with the required connecting bars including,
any supporting insulators, on which the cable connectors will be attached.
Where cable boxes are provided for three-core or four-core cables, the sweating sockets
on the outer phases shall be inclined towards the centre to minimize bending of the cable
cores.
3.39.2
Cable Terminations
The bushing contacts for the 22 kV XLPE cables shall comply with EN 50181 and they
shall be of the bolted type.
The contractor shall supply the separable elbow connectors for the incoming cables. The
separable elbow connectors for the outgoing cables shall be supplied by the purchaser.
The separable elbow connectors shall be suitable for the above bushings and comply with
the requirements of HD 629.1.S1.
3.39.3
Cable Glands
Where lead sheath cables are to be used wiping cable glands to BS 2562 shall be
provided under the Contract.
Glands for single core cables are to be insulated from the box. The insulation is to include
a metallic "island" layer for testing purposes. In addition, removable connectors for
bonding across the gland insulation are to be provided. The gland insulation is to be
capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 2kVrms AC for one minute.
Where XLPE cables are to be used compression type cable glands to EN 50262 shall be
provided under the Contract.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 56 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.
4.1
INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE
The Contractor shall unload all imported equipment and material at the Contractor's store
or at the Site or at the Purchaser's store, as the case may be, using suitable unloading
equipment from trucks and trailers and delivery vehicles as the case may be. Items of
permanent installation shall be properly and neatly stored in areas designated by the
Engineer and shall be protected to prevent damage or deterioration of any type. Storage
methods shall be such as to cause minimum inconvenience to others and shall be
arranged to facilitate inspection and withdrawing from stores. All equipment and material
storage shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.2
ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the execution of the Works and performance
of erection work carried out by his own personnel, by his Sub-Contractor's personnel or by
locally engaged skilled or unskilled personnel.
The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying himself as to the correctness of the
electrical and mechanical connections to all equipment supplied under the Contract before
such equipment is brought into commission.
The Contractor shall supply and provide all erection and construction equipment and
material, both for temporary and permanent work, tools, tackles, stores, etc., as well as
consumables required for the execution and completion of the Works.
All works at the site shall be carried out in such a manner as not to obstruct the operations
of other Contractors on the site or interfere with the operation of the Purchaser's existing
installations on the Site, and the Contractor shall co-operate with other contractors and
the Engineer to attain this end.
4.3
CLEANING OF SITE
The Contractor shall keep the site on which he erects or stores plant, reasonably clean,
removing all waste material resulting from the Works as it accumulates and as reasonably
directed. The use of a waist skip on site is mandatory for the collection of all waist
material on a daily basis. If the Contractor fails to remove rubbish within 48 hours of the
determined date, the rubbish will be removed by others and the cost back-charged to the
Contractor. On completion of the Works the Site shall be left clean and tidy to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Any damage done to buildings, structures, plant or property
belonging to the Purchaser shall be made good at the Contractor's expenses.
4.4
ABNORMAL WORKING TIME
Where the Contractor intends to work outside normal working hours he shall give
adequate advance notice to the Engineer so that the Engineer or the Engineer's
representative can be present during the work.
It shall be understood that all prices quoted involving work within operational substations
are based on work being carried out during normal EAC working hours. Where for
reasons of system operation requirements it is necessary to carry out work in operational
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 57 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
substations outside normal working hours and this is requested by the
Purchaser/Engineer, the Contractor will be entitled to premium time payment which will be
calculated from the difference in the rates entered in the appropriate Schedule for
installation and supervisory staff.
Where the Contractor requires work to be carried out within EAC operational substations
outside normal hours and such work requires the attendance of the Purchaser's
personnel, then the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the extra cost incurred
by the Purchaser.
4.5
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF
The carrying out of all the work included in the Contract shall be supervised by a sufficient
number of qualified representatives of the Contractor and full facilities and assistance
shall be afforded for the Engineer to check the Works.
The Contractor shall provide and employ in connection with the execution and
maintenance of the work:
•
Only such engineers as are qualified and experienced in their respective fields to give
proper supervision to the work they are required to supervise.
•
Only such assistant engineers as are skilled and experienced in their respective fields
and such sub-agents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to give proper
supervision to the Work they are required to supervise.
•
Only such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as necessary for the proper and
timely execution of the Works.
The Purchaser/Engineer shall be at liberty to object and to require the Contractor to
remove forthwith any person employed by the Contractor for the execution of the work
under this Contract, who in the opinion of the Purchaser/Engineer is insufficiently qualified
for his intended duty, misconduct’s himself, or is incompetent, or negligent in the proper
performance of his duties, or whose employment is otherwise considered by the
Purchaser/ Engineer to be undesirable, and such person shall not be again employed on
this Contract without the written permission of the Purchaser/Engineer. Any person so
removed shall be replaced without delay by a competent substitute, subject to the
provisions of further stipulations in the following sub-clauses.
The Tenderer shall nominate in his Tender a Project Manager from among his senior staff,
who will be empowered with the authority to undertake the entire project on behalf of the
Contractor. The Project Manager shall be in charge of coordination of the works and for
liaison with the Purchaser and the Engineer.
The Tenderer shall also nominate the Site Manager who shall be present at Site during
working hours and any orders or instructions which the Engineer or his representative
may give to him shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
The Tenderer in his Tender shall nominate persons for each of the job allocations
associated with the execution of the Contract. The Tenderer shall include full curriculum
vitae of the nominated persons at the time of the Tender to establish that the personnel
comply with the minimum qualifications required as indicated in the following clause. The
Tenderer shall also indicate the period for which these persons are expected to be
available in their respective posts. The posts shall not be for less than the period up to
the completion of the Works.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 58 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor shall submit a chart showing the proposed manpower strength for each
month of the whole of the construction period.
4.6
SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC
The Tenderer shall submit with his offer a manual detailing the procedures, rules and
regulations pertaining to "Safety and Engineering Practices" according to which he
proposes to undertake the Works. Following Award of Contract this manual shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and once approved shall be strictly complied with
by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors. The Contractor and his Sub-Contractors shall
also comply with all applicable Governmental safety and sanitary laws, regulations and
ordinances, as well as the established safety rules and practices of the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall provide means for the protection of personnel and properly maintain
warning signs and lights, barricades, railings and other safeguards as required by the
conditions and the progress of the Work.
During erection and commissioning the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding,
ladders, platforms with toe boards and hand-rails essential for proper access of workmen
and inspectors, cover or rail-off dangerous openings or holes in floors, and afford
adequate protection against material falling from a higher level on the personnel below.
The Contractor must take particular precaution to warn the Engineer within a reasonable
time in advance of forthcoming activities in the works, which may affect the normal
operation of the existing plant, or the personnel engaged in it.
The maximum personal safety must be afforded to personnel either directly engaged on
this Contract or who in the normal course of their occupations find it necessary to utilize
temporary works erected by the Contractor or to frequent the working area.
In this respect the Contractor shall nominate a person or persons from his staff, whom will
identify themselves by their passport, as competent persons for receiving the "Permits to
Work".
In each and every case involving a connection between the Plant supplied under this
Contract and any other existing plant which may or may not be in service the Contractor
must make suitable arrangements as regards the time and manner in which the
connection is made subject only to the approval of the Engineer and the Purchaser's
Representative who is in charge of the existing plant. Where cases arise involving the
operation of the plant, or work on plant in operation, or whenever required by the
Purchaser's representative, the Contractor must obtain a written "Permit to Work" signed
by a person duly authorized by the Purchaser and countersigned by the Engineer.
All accidents shall be promptly reported to the Engineer's representatives at Site with
copies to the Purchaser, the Engineer and the Government.
The Contractor shall make full arrangements and be responsible for the diversion of
traffic, including arranging permission from road authorities, fixing and maintenance of
signs, caution boards and provision of night signals and temporary traffic lights.
All this work shall be undertaken by the Contractor to the satisfaction and approval of the
Engineer. All costs associated with this work shall be deemed to be included in the
agreed Contract Price.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 59 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.7
SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO
WORK
For the installation, testing, taking over, commissioning and final acceptance of the
Works, the Contractor is required to adopt a safe and orderly procedure approved by the
Engineer and to comply with such safety regulations and safety procedures as may be
issued from time to time by the Purchaser or by the Engineer on his behalf.
Where a shut down of the existing system is required to enable work to proceed,
reasonable notice shall be given to the Engineer and a program agreed. Before work
commences a Permit to Work shall be issued by the Employer to a representative of the
Contractor, such person to be agreed with the Engineer as being a responsible person.
Before a Permit to Work will be issued, the Contractor shall submit full details of all work
to be carried out with points of isolation and where modifications to existing panel wiring
are involved. Marked up copies highlighting the changes are to be submitted showing the
extent to which modifications on a specific circuit being the subject of the Permit may
affect schemes common to the substation and switchboard.
The recipient of a Permit to Work shall satisfy himself that the Employer has made the
equipment to be worked on dead, locked off any disconnectors, switches, or circuit
breakers from which such equipment may be energized, posted any necessary warning
notices and earthed the equipment in an approved manner. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for staff under his control observing the limitations of access stated on the
Permit and shall ensure that such staff is fully informed of the areas covered by the
Permit. He shall also be responsible for informing all staff (including Employer's and
Engineer's staff) employed on work covered by a Permit, when the Permit has been
cancelled. Any equipment or section of line not included in the Permit shall be considered
to be live and be roped off and Danger Notices posted in prominent positions. Access to
the work zone shall be along and only along an agreed safe path.
When each item or section of Plant has been installed and prior to energizing or
alternatively when the equipment is to be installed in an area where its proximity to
existing "live" equipment constitutes a hazard, a "Clearance Certificate" shall be issued by
the Engineer's Representative and signed by the Contractor. This Certificate shall inform
the Contractor that the equipment shall henceforth be subject to the Purchaser's
regulations and that no more work thereon shall be undertaken unless a valid Permit to
Work card has been issued by the Employer.
4.8
TAKING OVER CERTIFICATES
When the Works, or any Section of the Works, has been completed and passed the Tests
on Completion, the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer's Representative a proposed
date for taking over as referred to in the Contract Conditions. This will be confirmed by
the Engineer by the issue of a Taking Over Certificate to the Contractor.
4.9
ACCESS TO SITE
Arrangement for access to EAC Operational substations shall be made in the first case
through the Engineer's Representative. All Contractor's personnel entering operational
substations will require official passes and arrangement for the issue of these should be
made with the Electricity Authority of Cyprus.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 60 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor will be responsible for security of the new substation Site until it comes
under EAC control period to commissioning.
Vehicles will not normally be permitted into operational substations and where necessary
to perform the works, prior arrangements shall be made.
4.10
DAY WORK
Work on Site authorized by the Engineer to be carried out on a time and material basis
shall be the subject of a Site Instruction (SI) issued by the Engineer's Representative and
suitably endorsed to that effect. The Purchaser will not be bound to pay for any work at
time and material rates carried out unless an SI signed by the Engineer's Representative
has been issued.
Time and Material Sheets shall be submitted in duplicate at weekly intervals to the
Engineer and shall show the number of the SI authorizing the work, the Site at which the
work is carried out, the date of the work, all men and material and plant employed and
their respective time periods and rates. The Contractor shall submit Time and Material
Sheets to the Engineer for signature at the end of each working week while the Work is in
progress. Day work invoices shall be submitted in duplicate to the Engineer at monthly
intervals for certification, supported by Suppliers' invoices for all materials.
4.11
SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE
During Plant erection the Government Inspector or other authorized person may wish to
examine the register containing the test certificates of all lifting tackle used in the course
of the Work, such as cranes, hoists, shackles, eye-bolts, trunnions, slings and any special
handling equipment. The Contractor shall prepare the register at the start of erection and
after commissioning shall hand it over to the Engineer's Representative on Site.
4.12
4.12.1
SITE SERVICES
Living Accommodation
The Purchaser will not provide any housing accommodation for the Contractor's expatriate
or locally recruited staff and the Contract Price is to include the cost of such
accommodation as may be necessary. No living accommodation will be allowed on the
Site.
4.12.2
Office Accommodation
The Contractor is to provide such temporary buildings as may be necessary for office
accommodation and sanitary arrangements for his site staff during the erection of the
Works and the cost of these shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
The sanitary accommodation shall be kept in a clean and orderly condition to the approval
of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. The sanitary accommodation shall be
removed on completion of the Work and all trenches shall be chemically treated and
completely back filled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.12.3
Storage and Workshop Facilities
The Contractor should make his own arrangements for unloading and storing of materials
and equipment and for providing workshop facilities and the cost of these will be deemed
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 61 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
to be included in the Contract price. At the absolute discretion of the Purchaser the
Contractor may be permitted to use the substation sites for temporary storage of materials
or equipment if this will not interfere with the freedom of access to the sites or with other
works being or planned to be carried out at these sites or with the safe operation of the
substations and the safety of the personnel.
4.12.4
Electricity Supply
The Purchaser will make available to the Site a supply of electrical energy at 400 volts, 3phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz for power and lighting (maximum power: 50 kVA).
The supply will be made available at the substation's LVAC Distribution Board (either
existing or to be provided and installed by the Contractor).
The Contractor will be responsible for providing and maintaining the whole of the
installation beyond the panel, as required for his operations on the site.
All portable lights must be low voltage and the Contractor is to provide for his own use all
necessary transformers, with centre points earthed.
The design, location, utilization and maintenance of the installation must receive the
approval of the Engineer or his authorized representative, who may require the
disconnection or alteration of any parts, which in his opinion may be dangerous. All local
Electricity Regulations and Ordinances shall be strictly observed in the distribution and
use of the supply.
The supply of electricity will be free of charge for construction purposes provided that the
Contractor uses it economically.
The supply of electricity will be available at all hours, but the Purchaser will not be held
responsible for any loss, damage, inconvenience caused directly or indirectly by a total or
partial interruption of the supply.
4.12.5
Water Supply
The Contractor will have to make his own arrangements for provision of any water supply
required at the sites, either potable or non-potable.
4.12.6
Compressed Air
The Contractor is to make his own arrangements for a supply of compressed air
necessary for the construction of the Plant.
4.12.7
Lifting Facilities
Lifting facilities are not available on site. The contractor is in charge of these facilities.
4.12.8
Contractor’s Employees
The Contractor is to fulfil all his obligations in respect of accommodation, feeding and
medical facilities for all personnel in his employ, as necessary to ensure satisfactory
execution of the Contract. He is also to comply with the requirements of all relevant local
Statutory Employment Regulations.
The Contractor is to be responsible for the behaviour on site of all personnel employed by
him.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 62 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.12.9
First Aid Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate first aid facilities on the Site to the
approval of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. At least one of his staff shall
be fully qualified in the knowledge and administration of first aid at each site.
4.12.10
Watching, Lighting, and Fencing
The Contractor shall in connection with the Work provide and maintain at his own cost all
lights, guards, fencing and watching when and where necessary or requested by the
Purchaser/Engineer or by any duly constituted authority for the protection of the Work or
for the safety and convenience of the public or others.
4.12.11
Fire Fighting Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain to the approval of the Engineer and the local
Fire Authority adequate portable fire fighting equipment on the Site during the
performance of his service until the issue of the Initial Taking Over Certificate(s).
4.12.12
Signboard
The Contractor shall, after having obtained the Purchaser's/ Engineer's approval, erect
and maintain at the Site two painted signboards of minimum size 2x1m, one lettered in
English and the other in Greek giving the Contractor's name and the names of the
Purchaser, of the Engineer, if other than the Purchaser and of the Project, the date of
commencement and the date of completion.
4.12.13
Erection Progress Report
(a) The Contractor's Site Manager shall submit weekly statements of the number and
qualifications of the site personnel employed every day.
(b) He shall furthermore, submit to the Engineer at monthly intervals detailed progress
reports, including charts. These reports shall clearly demonstrate the Work performed
and man-hours effected during the past month, and the actual stage of the Work
compared with the Work scheduled to be performed during the past month, and
compared with the contractual progress of Work schedule, special events having
occurred during the period of the said report and the anticipated Work to be performed
during the coming month. These reports shall be submitted not later than the 5th day
of the month for the period covering the previous month.
(c) The Contractor's Site Manager shall immediately inform the Engineer's representative
of special events, which may influence the smooth progress of Work, and of accidents
that occurred on Site.
(d) Periodical meetings will be held between the Engineer's Representative and the
Contractor's Site Manager. The frequency shall be agreed upon according to actual
requirements.
4.12.14
Site Records
The Contractor shall maintain a field copy at Site wherein all records of tests and plans
shall be entered. Also sketches and records of the field works shall be shown in this field
copybook.
The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from the approved
drawings if any and as approved by the Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 63 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.13
TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL
(a) During the construction and erection of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the instruction and training of operation and maintenance personnel appointed by
the Purchase for this Work as may be necessary. This training shall be carried out at
both Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premises or manufacturer's works and site.
(b) The training carried out at the Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premises or at
manufacturer's works shall be undertaken by means of simultaneous, lectures, films,
slides, models, manuals, drawings etc. In order that this training may be given the
Contractor shall be responsible to make all arrangements and provide all assistance
as necessary.
(c) The training carried out at site shall be similar to that detailed in paragraph (b) above
except that all instruction material shall become the property of the purchaser and the
installed equipment shall be used in place of simulators.
(d) The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender details of the proposed training.
(e) The Contractor shall submit a fully detailed training program to the Engineer for
approval at least eight weeks prior to the proposed date of the training, but no later
than four weeks prior to the start of the trail operation of the plant.
4.14
EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP
(a) No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Engineer
and the Contractor shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to examine and
measure any work which is about to be covered up or put out of view and to examine
foundations before permanent work is placed thereon. The Contractor shall give due
notice to the Engineer whenever any such work or foundations is or are ready or about
to be ready for examination. The Engineer shall, without unreasonable delay, unless
he considers it necessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, attend for the
purposes of examining and measuring such work or of examining such foundations.
(b) The Contractor shall for the purposes of examination uncover any part or parts of the
work or make openings in or through the same as the Engineer may, from time to
time, direct. In such an event and after examination the Contractor shall reinstate and
make good such part or parts referred to above, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.15
4.15.1
SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER
CONTRACTORS AT SITE
System of Works
The Contractor shall progress the works in a systematic pattern and shall not interfere
with any other Works at the site not relating to the Contract's execution; moreover, he
shall keep and hand over the site clean and free from all unwanted materials, garbage
and refuse affecting public health and shall hand over the work after being completed in
good working condition. If the Contractor fails to perform these works, the Purchaser shall
have the right to undertake the same at the Contractor's expense without any objection,
notice or resort to the courts.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 64 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.15.2
Cooperation with Other Contractors
If the construction of the Works provides for work to be done at the site with another
Contractor, or the Purchaser's employees or others, the Contractor shall make every effort
to cooperate with such persons without interfering with their affairs. Furthermore, he shall
provide them with the required facilities, implement the instructions issued by the Engineer
in this connection and advise the Engineer of any differences that may arise between
them. The decisions issued by the Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on
the Contractor and he shall not claim any compensation or extension of the Contract
period by virtue of the foregoing.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 65 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
5.
5.1
132kV SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The switchgear shall be of the SF6 gas insulated metal-enclosed type suitable for outdoor
installation and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing at
the Site.
The design and performance of the switchgear shall comply with this Specification and the
latest revision of the relevant International and British Standards. Deviations from these
specifications and standards shall be stated in the appropriate Schedule.
The drawings issued with this Specification indicate possible switchroom/switchgear
layouts for 132 kV relay and control equipment. It is recognized that final layouts will
depend on the type of switchgear offered, and on the manufacturer's recommendations,
but overall sizes of substations should be kept to a practical minimum. However, the
amount of spare space included on the tender drawings shall not be reduced in the actual
design on the basis of the switchgear shown typically in the tender drawings.
Particular emphasis is placed on the provision of adequate clearance between chambers
to facilitate maintenance. It is not desirable to compress the layout of the equipment
unduly in order to minimize the space required.
The design of the switchboard shall be such as to permit easy operation and easy
replacement of any item and to enable extensions to be added at either end with the
minimum of disturbance to the installed equipment and without complete shutdown of the
substation. Where duplicate busbar equipment is supplied, the design shall allow high
voltage testing of busbars after extension with the second busbar in service.
The equipment offered shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage
surges and any equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above that
specified shall be included.
The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performance of the specified
site checks and tests.
Circuit-breakers, isolators, earth switches, VTs, CTs, cable termination chambers and any
other chambers and components must be capable of withstanding a gas overpressure of
130% of normal operating pressure continuously.
Where duplicate busbar switchgear is specified, busbar selector isolators shall be
provided as specified in the schedules to facilitate the changeover of individual circuits
from one busbar to the other with the circuit on load and a bus coupler closed. In no case
the repair of a gas leakage or any other fault shall require the taking out of service of more
than half the switchboard.
Where single busbar equipment is specified suitable for future conversion to double
busbar the Tenderer shall describe clearly all steps required in connection with the
changeover with at least half of the substation remaining in service at all times.
The Tenderer shall also demonstrate the repair steps to be taken for an arc fault leading
to the loss of gas at the most critical location and the extent of interruption to supplies.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 66 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
5.2
CURRENT RATINGS
The temperature rise of the busbars, connections, isolators, fuses, contacts, cable boxes,
trunking connections, etc, which form part of the contract works, when operating
continuously at the specified rating or under short circuit conditions and at the specified
site rating under the specified maximum design ambient conditions, shall not exceed the
values specified in EN 62271 – 1, EN 62271 - 203 or equivalent National Standard.
Any derating to meet the site ambient conditions shall be taken into account and shall be
declared in the schedules.
Every part of the switchgear shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage,
the instantaneous peak currents and rated short-time currents pertaining to the rated
breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. Except as otherwise specified rated duration of
short-circuit shall be taken as one second. The primary rating of the current transformers
shall not differ from that of the associated circuit breakers.
5.3
CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS
SF6 immersed cable sealing end chambers or SF6 insulated bus ducts and/or open type
terminal bushings shall be provided as specified for the outgoing circuits.
5.4
5.4.1
DESIGN PRINCIPLES – 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR
General
The design of the SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear with either copper or
aluminium busbars shall comply with all the relevant EN 62271 standards. Deviations from
any of these shall be stated in the tender.
The switchgear shall be supplied complete with auxiliary equipment necessary for safe
operation, routine and periodic maintenance and repairs. The switchgear shall be
designed to permit the removal and extension of any part without unnecessary outages or
disturbance to adjacent items of plant and it shall also be possible to maintain a supply
from one section of busbar whilst extending the other. The Tenderer is required to
demonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the switchgear design in these
respects.
Control facilities shall be simple and clearly designated with the respective function and
instructions on operation and maintenance shall be unambiguous.
All main and operating parts of the switchgear shall be suitably labelled. This shall include
but not necessarily be limited to primary switches, aux. switches, gauges and valves.
Circuit identifying labels shall be fitted at the front and rear of each individual circuit
assembly and on the local control cubicle.
The switchgear to be supplied shall have rated impulses and power frequency withstand
voltages equal to or greater than the specified levels at the minimum operating SF6 gas
density or pressure.
The actual guaranteed withstand voltages applicable to the maximum filling pressure at
20oC minimum and nominal SF6 gas pressures shall be given in Schedules.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 67 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The minimum clearances between phases and from phase to earth at the minimum
working density shall be consistent with the specified impulse withstand level. In event of
leakage from any compartment, equipment shall withstand rated power frequency voltage
with SF6 at atmospheric pressure.
In case the Tenderer offers a GIS range of equipment from a recent technology, deriving
from an existing range of equipment and providing some advantages in terms of capacity,
reliability and/or monitoring, the experience of the Tenderer in designing, manufacturing
and erecting large scale GIS projects and in having supplied large quantities of GIS bays
of a proven design at home and abroad, will be considered in assessing the Tenderer’s
ability to comply with the required successful commercial operation period.
5.4.2
Enclosures
The material of enclosures shall be aluminium and shall be designed to minimize losses
and heating due to circulating currents.
The metal enclosure shall be capable of withstanding the normal and transient pressures
to which it is subjected in service. It shall also withstand the mechanical and thermal
effects of internal arc faults and to definitely prevent burning through within a rated shortcircuit and earth-fault duration of 0,3 seconds for single encapsulation construction and
0,2 seconds for three-phase encapsulation. The effects of any arc shall confine only to the
compartment where the arc has ignited.
The Tender shall include information on the effect of an internal fault in any section of the
plant supported by the results of type tests carried out.
The electrical connection between adjacent enclosures shall be continuous without use of
external connecting straps.
5.4.3
Division into Compartments
The switchgear units and busbar systems shall be divided into several gas-filled
compartments, sealed from each other by gas-tight partitions so that any leakage may be
quickly localized. The various gas zones shall be further sub-divided when necessary to
restrict any internal arcing damage, particularly within sections of busbars and to enable
gas-handling procedures to be completed with the minimum of delay. The partitions
should confine any internal faults to a respective section of the switchgear.
Busbars have to be segregated in independent gas-zones corresponding to each bay.
The number of gas compartments shall be such as to limit the amount of switchgear that
has to be isolated and taken out of service as a result of gas leakage, planned
maintenance or internal faults.
Proposals for the partitioning of gas zones shall be clearly indicated on the drawings
submitted with the tender. Gas volumes and duration of gas handling procedures shall
also be indicated in the technical schedules.
Total time for gas evacuation and filling of the largest chamber shall not exceed the
relevant requirements of this Specification.
On duplicate busbar switchgear, busbar chambers shall be so arranged as to allow
maintenance on one busbar, i.e., gas removal, and retain the other busbar and circuits in
service.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 68 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The equipment and connections within each compartment shall be so arranged as to
allow ready removal and replacement of any section when the necessary parts are in
service. This feature should also permit the erection and testing of extension units
alongside equipment already in service with the minimum of outage time being required
for final connections. All external gas pipe work shall be connected via vacuum couplings
of proven design, which will enable joints to be broken and remade without loss of gas.
The Tenderer is required to demonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the
switchgear design in these respects.
Each pressure compartment shall be provided with a suitable device to allow for automatic
pressure relief. The pressure relief must operate before any part of the enclosure can
explode or burn through. It must be possible to locate an internal fault quickly and exactly.
All relief devices shall be located such that operation of the devices shall not endanger
personnel working on the equipment or in the vicinity of the equipment, but shall be
accessible for resetting or overhaul after operation. Where necessary the devices shall be
fitted with cowls to deflect any gasses or fragmented parts away from locations where
personnel may be expected to be present.
Gas compartments shall be fitted with permanent connection points for filling, emptying
and gas treatment without moving the switchgear.
Enclosures shall be clearly marked to identify gas compartment zones, disconnectors,
circuit breakers, earthing switches, and other primary devices contained therein. The
method proposed shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
All gas pipe work shall be colour coded and where more than one pipe follows a common
route, each pipe shall be ring coded and at regular intervals to identify the gas zone with
which it is associated.
5.4.4
Enclosures and Conductor Expansion
Enclosures shall have reliable provision to absorb thermal expansion created by
temperature cycling.
Suitable arrangements shall be provided for the thermal expansion and contraction of the
busbars and busbar chambers without application of stress to the supporting structure or
detriment to the current carrying capacity or gas volume.
The design of sliding type current carrying connectors and joints shall be such that they
meet the aforementioned conditions over the full permitted range of movement. Where
such joints may be made or adjusted on site, full details of alignment procedure, together
with any necessary alignment tools or gauges shall be described in the maintenance
manual and included in the supply of special tools.
Evidence shall be provided to verify that enclosures have been designed and tested in
accordance with established pressure vessel codes.
Voltages induced in the enclosures shall not be allowed to exceed reasonable safe limits.
All chambers throughout the equipment shall be earthed at an approved number of points.
All necessary earthing bars and associated fixings shall be provided.
Each enclosure shall be provided with lifting points to facilitate maintenance or repair
works.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 69 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
In order to compensate for any small variations in floor level each compartment shall be
fitted with means of adjustment (jacking screws or similar). Such adjustments shall be
fully described in the maintenance manuals provided by the manufacturer.
5.4.5
Gas Density, Monitoring, and Alarms
The nominal operating density of the SF6 insulating gas shall be as low as compatible with
the requirement for electrical insulation. It must be fully ensured that there is no possibility
of the liquefying of the gas at minimum ambient temperature. The auxiliary heating of gas
is not allowed.
The nominal density shall be at least 15% higher than the density at which the tests of the
insulation level of the switchgear are made.
Each separate compartment or gas zone must be provided with its own device for
monitoring continuously the gas density or alternatively pressure with a temperature
compensated gas pressure monitor. These devices shall be arranged to give individual
compartment indication in the local control units and initiation of remote alarm and
automatic tripping. These shall be set in two stages. The first stage shall operate an alarm
to warn that the gas pressure/density is falling to a critical level.
The second stage shall initiate automatic isolation of the gas section concerned by
tripping associated circuit breakers and disconnectors as appropriate. Tripping shall be
wired into the main protection circuits and shall only be initiated when both alarm and trip
conditions exist.
The philosophy of the automatic shut down sequence shall be submitted with the Tender
and agreed with the Engineer during initial contract discussions.
A lockout feature with remote indication shall be provided for circuit breakers whenever
SF6 gas pressure is less than that permitted by the design satisfactory operation.
Each gas compartment shall be fitted with a manometer with trip or block and alarm
facilities. It shall be possible to remove each gas density relay and manometer while the
compartment to which it is fitted remains in service. Spurious alarms shall not occur
during normal operation of the switchgear.
5.4.6
Gas Filters
Means shall also be provided to facilitate the regular maintenance checking of moisture
content. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with static filters to absorb any moisture,
which may be present. In addition filters for removal of SF6 decomposition products shall
be provided in those compartments in which arcing or corona discharge can take place.
The filters shall be effective for the duration of time between major overhauls. It shall be
possible to replace the active materials without extensive dismantling.
5.4.7
SF6 Immersed Insulation
Busbars and switchgear items shall be supported in the enclosures by insulators of
materials compatible with SF6 gas and the products of gas decomposition.
Gas barrier insulators and bushings, including gas-oil and gas-air bushings shall comply
with the specified conditions for sealing of enclosures. The Engineer shall be advised of
design pressures used and may require test evidence to substantiate performance under
extremes of differential pressure and temperature.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 70 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The surfaces of insulation in contact with SF6 shall not be glazed or otherwise treated with
silica compounds or other materials, which may deteriorate in the presence of
decomposed gas or arcing products. Alternative glazing or surface treatment, which is
compatible with SF6 and its by-products, may be acceptable subject to proven durability.
The insulators should be free at all times of partial discharges at all voltage levels within
the working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges during manufacture.
SF6 immersed insulation shall otherwise comply with the relevant clauses for insulators
and bushings.
5.4.8
Sealing of Enclosures
To prevent ingress of moisture or leakage of gas during the service life of the equipment,
the sealing materials used at all joints and interfaces shall satisfy the following
requirements:
(a) Not affected by SF6 gas or by SF6 decomposition products
(b) Non-hygroscopic, containing no silicon
(c) Non-aging and non-shrinking
(d) Retain resilience for long periods under stress
(e) Stable under all temperature conditions
Seals including those at compartment partitions shall continue to function correctly
throughout the temperature and pressure ranges in service and the pressure differentials,
including vacuum and test pressures, during erection, maintenance and subsequent
revisions.
Expansion bellows and diaphragms, and pressure relief devices shall be designed to be
free of leakage under the same conditions as stated for seals.
Where the use of cast aluminium is envisaged the Manufacturer shall submit to the
Engineer evidence of tests carried out for porosity and extended pressure testing to show
the quality of the castings used.
5.4.9
Gas Losses
The Manufacturer should be prepared to guarantee the equipment for a gas loss of not
more than 1,0% per annum in any single gas compartment.
5.4.10
SF6 Bus Ducts
SF6 insulated bus ducts shall be provided on the specified circuits and shall be of the
phase isolated type or 3-phase encapsulated as specified.
The enclosures shall be constructed from materials that will prevent overheating at the
specified rated currents.
The bus ducts shall be terminated with either outdoor type porcelain-clad bushings or with
facilities for direct termination on transformers, as stated in the Schedules.
Where direct termination on transformers or shunt reactors is called for, the bus ducts
shall be constructed with the limitation on dimensional tolerances, between phases and
from the ground, required by the manufacturer of the connected equipment.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 71 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Expansion joints, flexible connections, and adjustable mountings shall also be provided to
compensate for reasonable tolerances in the manufacture of associated equipment to
which the SF6 switchgear may be connected and to ensure that unreasonably excessive
accuracy is not required when installing such equipment.
The design of bus ducts must make full allowance for thermal expansion by means of
transverse erectable contact assembly and enclosure, and for associated transformer
vibration by means of elastic bellows provided at the transformer end.
The bus ducts and their supports shall be designed and tested for the specified rated
normal and short time current and for the maximum system voltage and specified test
voltages. The ducts and their supports shall include any non-magnetic material or
insulation necessary to prevent overheating or the induction of overvoltage in secondary
circuits.
5.4.11
Gas Handling
The tender shall include a complete specification for the gas to be used for the initial filling
of the plant. The gas shall fulfil the requirements of IEC 60376 and 60480.
Details of the method of taking gas samples from each compartment while in service shall
be given in the tender. Details shall also be given as to the degree of gas deterioration
that can be tolerated before treatment or replacement of the gas is necessary.
Instructions of the gas treatment necessary to return it to a satisfactory operating condition
shall be given. Under normal operating conditions, the period between gas treatments
shall be at least 15 years.
5.4.12
HV Cable Testing Facilities
Testing flanges shall be provided where relevant on each circuit for HV withstand testing
of main cables and switchgear. Each testing flange shall be positioned in an independent
gas zone compartment, which shall be independent of adjacent disconnector and earthing
switch gas sections.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that any section of busbars insulated by
SF6 gas is not subjected to any cable testing voltage unless able to withstand such
voltages.
Where line disconnectors are provided, only the disconnectors shall be opened during
cable tests. Removable bolted links or similar can be provided as alternative. In such a
case the design of the link and connections shall ensure that when removed the resulting
gap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages applicable to the
switchgear, and the HV DC test voltage applicable to the cable, for a period of 15 minutes,
when the chamber is filled to the minimum rated working SF6 gas density or pressure.
Details on the facilities provided and the method used shall be given in the appropriate
Schedule.
5.4.13
Circuit Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
Feeder circuits shall each be equipped with a circuit disconnector and not less than three
earthing switches. These earthing switches shall comprise of two maintenance earthing
switches, connected on each end of the feeder circuit breaker, and a high speed makeproof earthing switch, between the circuit disconnector and the connection to an overhead
line or cable.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 72 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Transformer circuit modules shall be equipped with not less than two maintenanceearthing switches, connected on each end of the transformer circuit breaker.
Bus coupler and bus section modules shall be equipped with a busbar disconnector on
each side of the circuit breaker and not less than one maintenance earthing switch
between each busbar disconnector and its associated circuit breaker, connected to the
circuit breaker end.
Bus section modules shall also contain a high-speed make-proof earthing switch on the
busbar side of each busbar disconnector.
5.4.14
Disconnector and Earthing Switch Operating Mechanisms
Disconnector and earthing switch operating mechanisms shall comply with EN 62271 102 and shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free action and shall be
unaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanisms shall be as simple as possible
and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts.
5.4.15
Cable Feeder and Transformer Connections
Connections shall be suitable for the specified continuous and short circuit current ratings.
Where necessary, expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate differential
movements between the switchgear phase terminals and cable conductors.
The manufacturer of the switchgear is required to coordinate design of SF6 filled
enclosures with that of cable sealing ends supplied by other manufacturers such that the
integrity of gas and/or oil pressure compartment is maintained.
Facilities shall be provided for high voltage DC testing and conducting cable fault location
measurements of the cable installation.
5.4.16
Position Indicators
Position indicators shall be provided for all disconnectors and earthing switches to show
whether the main contacts of these switches are in the fully open or closed positions.
Indicators shall be of a reliable mechanical design and be positively driven in both
directions by the final drive stage of the contact operating mechanism. Each indicator shall
be clearly visible to operating staff at operating control points and access routes provided
under this contract.
5.5
5.5.1
SEALING ENDS
General
Where applicable the metal enclosed cable sealing end chamber necessary for enclosing
the cable sealing end insulator suitable for termination of transformers and HV power
cables shall be supplied as part of this Contract. Design shall be in accordance with EN
62271 - 305.
The dimensions of the enclosure which are necessary to accommodate the transformer
bushing and cable sealing end shall be determined by the switchgear supplier who will be
responsible for the dielectric performance of the combined arrangements.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 73 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The dimensions and terminal arrangements, together with details of the filling medium of
the sealing end shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval before manufacture can
commence.
The stress cones for connection to the outgoing feeder cables will be supplied by the
cable manufacturer under a separate Contract. The surrounding housing will be supplied
by the SF6 switchgear manufacturer. The Tenderer shall submit drawings showing clearly
the limits of his supply. Particulars of the HV outgoing cables will be given on elaboration
of Contract.
The cable sealing end arrangement in transformer cells shall be clear of the transformer to
allow removal of the transformer without disturbing the main cables.
For circuits equipped with double cable isolation, provision shall be made to be able to
remove the gas from either cable chamber whilst maintaining the other cable in service.
Gas monitoring of the chamber in service shall be maintained at all times and each
chamber shall be separately monitored.
Fully cabled circuits shall provide access for test facilities at one end of the circuit.
In chambers equipped for 132 kV cable sealing ends a disconnecting link must be
provided to allow easy isolation between the cable sealing end and the main connections.
It must be possible to remove this link without removal/refitting of the main connections.
The design of the link when removed shall be sufficient to withstand HV DC testing of
cable and the full insulation requirements specified for the switchgear.
Design of cable termination equipment must ensure that the following conditions are
maintained throughout the life of the equipment:
(a) The insulating material, either gas or oil, from inside the cable does not escape and
penetrate the switchgear enclosure.
(b) The SF6 gas does not enter the cable from the enclosure.
(c) The cable sealing end does not introduce moisture into the gas in the sealing end
enclosure.
(d) The sealing end is capable of withstanding the cable test voltages and differential
pressures without damage including overpressure of +30% of normal operating
pressure.
(e) Disconnecting links that can be renewed/replaced in a time that does not exceed 10
hours for the complete operation, i.e., including degassing, vacuum, and regassing.
Both the earthed and high voltage ends of the cable sealing end shall adequately seal off
the SF6 gas insulation by bolted flanges provided with multiple rings and gaskets which
shall be coordinated with the cable sealing end design/manufacturer.
Sealing ends shall be designed with joint faces, which will ensure leak-free operation and
exclude the entry of air, dust or moisture. Arrangements employing fluid or semi-fluid filling
media shall have flanged joints, the faces of which shall be machined. The fixing bolt
centres for the flanged joints shall not exceed 100 mm. Filling orifices and drain plugs
shall be so positioned as to enable efficient handling of the media and to discourage the
formation of voids when filling. Expansion space not less than 8% of the total volume of
the filling medium at 15oC shall be provided. The internal surfaces of cable boxes shall be
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 74 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
cleaned of all scale and rust and after cleaning and priming, shall be finished with a hard
setting paint compatible with the filling medium.
End covers shall be provided to enable completion of erection and testing of the
switchgear in the absence of cable terminations.
The design and sealing end pressure shall be coordinated by the switchgear supplier so
as to minimize the risk of SF6 gas penetration into the transformers or HV power cables
and to accommodate any movement due to expansion.
Where required to reduce local heating where single core cables are adopted,
non-magnetic gland plates shall be provided or alternatively, not-magnetic inserts.
5.5.2
Insulation and Earthing
Sealing ends and cable boxes shall be provided with all fittings including flexible
connections where necessary. Approved means for grading the voltage stress shall be
provided at the terminal insulation of cables operating at voltages in excess of 12 kV
between phases. Screwed, tapered or stepped brass wiping glands shall be provided and,
where required by the Engineer, glands shall be insulated from the box or chamber in an
approved manner. An earthing strip shall be provided and combined armour and earthing
clamps shall be fitted to all armoured cable terminations.
Gland insulation shall be capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 10 kV DC for
one minute during cable sheath test.
Provision shall be made for earthing the body of each sealing end or cable box.
5.5.3
Material
Moulded insulators used in the manufacture of cable sealing ends and terminal boxes
shall be sound and free from defects.
The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic conditions,
ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likely to arise when
operating in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning.
When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further
insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted, and the Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators which have
been rejected in such a way that there shall be no possibility of such insulators being
re-submitted.
5.6
LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL
Operation will normally be from a remote or supervisory position but facilities shall be
provided for operation locally by electrical release and any direct manual release from
stored energy devices when the circuit breaker is isolated for maintenance. It shall be
possible to padlock each local control function in the open position. Position indication of
these devices shall be provided via auxiliary contacts on their operating mechanisms and
the Contract shall include the supply and fitting of the necessary local/remote and
remote/supervisory control switches, as well as, of the necessary auxiliary switches,
contactors, etc., as well as, their wiring and necessary cabling to the respective equipment
terminal boards.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 75 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
5.7
5.7.1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
General
Circuit breakers shall be of the SF6 type. Operating mechanisms shall be with individual
self-contained spring operated mechanisms.
Tenderers shall include proof that a satisfactory period of commercial service of not less
than three years has been obtained with the type and rating of the circuit breaker offered.
Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers shall specify the
maintenance requirements necessitated by climate and environmental conditions.
Circuit breakers shall operate on the principle of self-generating gas pressure within the
interrupter for arc extinction, e.g., puffer type.
5.7.2
Operating Duty and Performance
5.7.2.1
General
The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service, operation and the
making and breaking of fault current shall apply to the specified circuit breakers.
5.7.2.2
Test Certificates
Circuit breakers shall be covered by test certificates issued by an accredited Testing
Authority certifying the operation of the circuit breaker at duties corresponding to the rated
breaking capacities of the circuit breakers. The test duty shall be not less onerous than
the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender.
5.7.2.3
Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage
Attention is drawn to the requirements of International Standards wherein the standard
values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specifically stated in the
test certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenderer shall certify that the TRV to which
the circuit breaker was subjected during the short circuit tests was the most severe
condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first phase-to-clear factor
of 1,5.
Any device incorporated in a circuit breaker to limit or control the rate of rise of restriking
voltage across the circuit breaker contacts shall likewise be to the Engineer's approval
and full descriptions of any such device shall be given with the test certificates.
Evidence shall be submitted with the tender to verify that when interrupting transformer
secondary faults the transient recovery voltage conditions that could arise will not exceed
the tested interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker proposed.
5.7.2.4
Interrupting Duties
In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit
breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by the switching
of transformer magnetizing current and of capacitive current associated with overhead
line-charging, cable-charging, or capacitor banks as may be applicable. The circuit
breakers shall have a rated cable charging breaking current of at least 160 A at rated
voltage without exceeding the maximum switching overvoltage, which is included in EN
62271 – 100.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 76 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting currents associated with short-line faults
and the out-of-phase switching conditions that may occur in service. Circuit breakers shall
be of the restrike-free type only.
Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the above duties shall
be submitted with the Tender.
Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the
circuit breakers are capable of, before maintenance is required.
5.7.2.5
Opening Time
Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as possible and shall preferably not exceed
50 ms.
5.7.3
Contacts, Arcing Chambers, and Insulation
Separate arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit breakers to protect the main
contacts from burning during operation and shall be arranged to ensure that arcing after
commutation of the main current always occurs in the arcing zone between the arcing
contacts.
Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit breakers and
removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers.
Static and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gas or ingress of
moisture whilst in service and without deterioration.
Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF6 gas operating pressures outside
the declared limits of operation shall be included.
Where single rods or tubes are utilized for operating the moving contacts of circuit
breakers, they shall be securely pinned at each end to prevent rotation or displacement of
the contacts. Tubes shall be plugged in an approved manner where contacts or other
parts are fixed to the tubes.
5.7.4
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms
5.7.4.1
General
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specified in this
Chapter.
Circuit breaker operations shall be made with the shunt closing and opening releases
energized at 110%, 100% and 85% of the rated supply voltage.
All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with delayed auto-reclose
whether or not this feature is specified in the Schedules. When specified in the
Schedules, mechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three-phase auto-reclose to
the duty cycle stated.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical
tripping pulse being applied to the circuit breaker during the closing stroke, or of the
mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit breaker shall open fully and in
such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 77 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make
repeated attempts to close the circuit breaker when the control switch is held in the
CLOSE position in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of
a trip signal being given to the circuit breaker.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and
solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature
range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated
in EN 62271 - 100, and in addition over the range of all operating conditions of the
batteries and chargers supplied under this Contract.
Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial construction, utilizing such
materials as stainless steel, brass, or gunmetal, where necessary, to prevent sticking due
to rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a
minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration,
or other causes.
An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit breaker
operating mechanism to show whether the circuit breaker is open or closed. The colour
for the open position shall be (0) red and for the closed position shall be (I) green.
Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit breaker mechanisms.
The circuit breaker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three
phases.
Each phase shall incorporate a mechanical indicator or other approved means of position
indication where operating mechanism designs do not utilize mechanical coupling
between phases.
Where circuit breakers comprise three independent units, it shall be possible to make
independent adjustments to each unit to ensure simultaneous operation of the three
phases. For three-phase operation, the three units shall make and break the circuits
simultaneously. Pole discrepancies shall be less than 5 ms on closing (three phases). In
the event of any phase failing to complete a closing operation, provision shall be made for
automatic tripping of all three phases of the circuit breaker or for a remote alarm in the
event of any phase failing out of synchronism.
Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for further operations as
soon as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation and the design of the
closing mechanisms shall be such that the circuit breaker cannot be operated
inadvertently due to external shock forces resulting from short circuits, circuit breaker
operation, or any other cause.
Circuit breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for at least two complete
CLOSE-OPEN operations without recharging are preferred. Mechanisms incapable of
storing energy for at least two complete operations shall utilize the substation DC supply
for recharging the mechanism; other auxiliary mechanisms shall preferably utilize the LV
AC supplies for recharging duties.
If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a
predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm
initiated.
When in operational service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the
energy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully complete a
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 78 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
close or trip operation under all specified duties. Alarms shall be provided to indicate a
lock out condition and advance warning that the conditions are deteriorating towards a
lock out condition. Alarms shall be delayed for sufficient time for the energy system to be
restored to normal conditions following breaker operation.
The circuit breakers shall be provided with facilities for measurement of contact resistance
and timing tests without removal of covers or SF6 gas.
Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of the circuit
breaker, preferably by a shrouded push button and facilities shall be provided for locking
off this means of tripping. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism
so as to render the electrical tripping inoperative.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with two separate tripping coils. The two trip coils
shall be kept electrically separate.
Where possible, circuit breakers shall be provided with slow acting manually powered
operating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. It shall not be possible
to slow close a circuit breaker when in normal service condition. Suitable interlock shall
be provided between slow and fast acting circuit breaker operation during maintenance.
Where heaters are provided in mechanism housings, these shall be permanently
connected.
Means for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism housing.
5.7.4.2
Spring Operated Mechanisms
Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but means shall be
provided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism
during this process shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A spare
normally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided.
It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breaker in either the
open or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operating springs shall
commence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing operation. The
time required to power charge the spring should not exceed 30 seconds.
Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented and release
of the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged.
Spring closing mechanisms shall be designed such that it is not possible for a fully
charged spring to be released inadvertently due to external shock or vibration caused by
the breaker opening under short circuit conditions or any other cause.
Means shall be provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open
position without the circuit breaker attempting to close.
The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device
which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRING FREE"
when operation is not possible. The indications shall be visible through glazed access
doors or openings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remote
and supervisory indication of the state of the charge of the operating springs.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 79 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
5.8
LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES
All elements necessary for the control and monitoring of the circuit breaker shall be
housed jointly with the operating mechanism of the circuit breaker in the local control
cubicle.
Control and monitoring shall be generally achieved by digital circuit breaker control and
monitoring devices. (Refer to Para. 7.4.4.1)
The following essential functions shall be implemented on the bay control level:
(a) Fully interlocked local actuation and position indication of all switching elements
(b) Display of all indications necessary for operation and monitoring
(c) Transfer of all bay information to the substation control and protection equipment
5.9
LOCKING FACILITIES
Locking devices shall be provided for securing each control switch in the "neutral"
position, each control selector switch in all positions and for securing each isolator and
earthing switch operating handle in either the "open" or "closed" position.
The following locking facilities shall be provided:
(a) Circuit breaker mechanisms in the open position and any associated manual operating
device in the neutral position.
(b) Isolating switches in both open and closed positions.
(c) Control position selector switches in all positions provided.
(d) Operating cubicle access doors.
(e) Gas system isolating valves in open or closed positions.
Locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that they will
remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or maintenance
for continuous periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for
indefinite service.
5.10
ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES
Isolating and earthing switches shall be arranged to permit safe maintenance of any
section of the equipment when the remainder is alive.
Isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers, isolators and
earthing switches, as necessary, to prevent the possibility of making or breaking load
current.
Power operated drives shall be provided which shall be suitable for local, remote, and
supervisory control (supervisory control of earth switches is not required) and should be
fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It should be possible to
lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanism in the open and closed
positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-operating mechanism shall
be provided with an interlocking magnet for continuous duty to prevent mechanically the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 80 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
manual operation and at least electrically the motor operation when the interlocking
magnet is off-circuited.
Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for manual operation, the electrical
supply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnected.
Each isolator and earth switch shall have its own separate power supply. The motor
circuit shall be provided with a two-pole overload-tripping device with an alarm contact.
Where a chain of interlocking contacts is used each switch shall be sub-fused.
The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, that is, the mechanism
shall complete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited during operation.
There shall be separate electrical circuits for motor, control, and interlocking. An actuated
control pulse shall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit.
The colour for the open position (0) of the disconnector shall be red and for the closed
position (I) green.
Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switches and shall be clearly
visible from ground level.
5.10.1
Isolating Switches
Isolating Switches (disconnectors) shall be of the metal enclosed design and shall
generally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102, EN 62271 - 104 and EN
62271 - 203.
Isolating switches shall be arranged for operation while the equipment is alive, but will not
be required to break current other than the charging currents of associated connectors or
load currents shared by parallel circuits under the varying operating conditions which the
specified interlocking permits.
Isolators shall be housed in compartments partitioned from the circuit breakers and the
busbars or circuit side with which they are associated. It shall be possible with such
partitioning and with the isolator compartments maintained at full gas pressure, to carry
out high voltage insulation withstand tests on outgoing circuits or on sections of busbar,
without taking adjacent equipment or sections of busbars out of service.
When called for load making and breaking switches with fault making capability shall be
provided which shall be suitable for switching on load without detriment to the equipment
and under normal duties up to the circuit rating specified.
Switch mechanisms shall be so designed that the isolator cannot be opened or closed
inadvertently due to forces which may occur in service or under short-circuits, by forces
due to currents passing through it and shall be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed"
position. The mechanism shall open and close all three phases simultaneously.
Disconnectors incorporating metallic screens between contacts shall be interlocked to
prevent operation of the metallic screen or closing of contacts if the contacts are not fully
open or if the metallic screen is not fully withdrawn.
The insulation level for the isolating distance between disconnector contacts shall be 15%
higher than that for the remainder of the equipment
In the event of gas leakage the disconnector shall be capable of withstanding the rated
phase-to-phase voltage at normal atmospheric SF6 gas pressure.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 81 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
5.10.2
Maintenance Earthing Switches
Earthing switches shall generally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102 and EN
62271 - 203.
Earthing switches integrally mounted with disconnectors or separately mounted shall be
provided for earthing already isolated sections of gas-insulated switchgear in order to
provide safe maintenance. Motor operated mechanisms shall be provided but it shall be
possible to operate the switch manually in emergency conditions.
The earthing switch, when in the closed position shall have a short-time current withstand
as specified with a minimum duration of one second. No burning or welding of contacts
shall occur.
Provisions for testing purposes shall be incorporated in the design of earthing switches to
facilitate primary current injection tests, contact timing, voltage drop measurements, and
other low voltage checks without the necessity to open gas filled compartments. Detailed
means of performing these tests shall be provided in the appropriate Schedule. Fully
insulated designs of earthing switches shall incorporate removable earth links suitable for
the short-time current rating specified.
It shall be possible to apply maintenance earths on either side of the test zone for safety
reasons.
All earthing switchgear shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers and
disconnectors so that it shall not be possible to close an earthing switch onto a live circuit
or to make the circuit alive when the earthing switch is closed.
Facilities for padlocking earthing switches in the open and closed positions shall be
provided together with means for isolating the motor drives.
5.10.3
High-Speed Earth Switches
For safe earthing of the busbars and feeders, high-speed fault-making spring driven earth
switches shall be provided. Such operation of the earthing switch shall not endanger
adjacent compartments, cause contamination, or damage to the extent that immediate
removal from service for overhaul is necessary. The mechanisms shall be electrically
operated with provision for local manual operation. With earthing switches of the highspeed fault-making type it shall not be possible to complete a slow close operation.
Each section of busbar, which can be electrically isolated from other sections of busbar by
means of isolators or circuit breakers, shall incorporate high speed earthing switches as
specified above. The short-circuit making current of the earth switch shall be according to
EN 62271 – 102.
Facilities integral with the earthing switch for primary current injection or low voltage
checks shall be insulated from earth and incorporate a disconnectable earth strap.
These earthing switches shall otherwise be in accordance with the requirements for
maintenance earthing switches.
5.11
INTERLOCKING
An interlocking scheme shall be provided which takes into account the following basic
requirements:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 82 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the
equipment with other sections live.
(b) To prevent incorrect switching sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to
plant, equipment and personnel.
The interlocking scheme shall be electrical for all operational interlocks and preferably of
the mechanical type for maintenance safety interlocks but shall be effective when the
equipment is being controlled locally, under emergency hand or from a remote or
supervisory position.
All mechanical interlocks shall be applied at the point at which hand power is used so that
stress cannot be applied to parts remote from that point.
All electrical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating supply and a system
of interlocks shall be provided which shall cover the emergency hand operation of
apparatus which is normally power operated. Failure of supply or connections to any
electrical interlock shall not produce or permit faulty operation. Electrical bolt interlocks
shall be energized only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the
working position. Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mechanism is
locked or free. Means, normally padlocked, shall be provided whereby the bolt can be
operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock supplies.
All isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers and isolators in
the same station so that it shall not be possible to make or break current on an isolating
device unless a parallel circuit in that station is already closed.
Earthing switches shall be interlocked such that they cannot be operated unless the
associated isolator is open and line voltage is not present.
In double busbar stations where provision for on-load changeover of busbars is specified,
the busbar isolating devices shall be so interlocked with the appropriate busbar coupling
and sectioning equipment that sections or sets of busbars cannot be paralleled by means
of the busbar isolating devices unless a parallel circuit is already closed through the circuit
breakers of the appropriate busbar coupling and sectioning equipment. In all other
circumstances, the busbar isolating devices of equipment other than busbar sectioning
and coupling equipment shall be so interlocked that their respective circuit breakers can
only be coupled to one set of busbars at a time. It shall not be possible to parallel sections
of busbars except through the circuit breakers of the busbar coupling and sectioning
equipment.
The busbar selector isolators of a circuit are not expected to remain closed once load
transfer is completed and an alarm shall provide a warning if both busbar isolators of a
transferred circuit are left closed.
5.12
5.12.1
AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS
General
Circuit breakers, isolators, and earthing devices shall be provided with suitably rated
auxiliary switches, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, protection,
indication, and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant section of the
Specification.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 83 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The fitting of auxiliary relays to achieve the number of auxiliary contacts required will not
be acceptable.
Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven in both
directions. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing and shall be
mounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxiliary switches
shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Contacts, which signal the
position of an isolator or earth switch, shall operate in accordance with EN 62271 - 102.
Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of
the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed.
Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by
the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted
in lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engineer.
All auxiliary switches/contacts shall be wired out to a terminal board in the local
marshalling kiosk whether they are in use or not in the first instance and shall be arranged
in the same sequence on all equipment. Where adjustable linkages are provided to
facilitate the timing of the auxiliary switches with respect to the main equipment, approved
locking devices shall be fitted.
Auxiliary switches and contactors shall be capable of operation within the same voltage
limits as specified for the associated circuit breaker close and trip coils. The auxiliary
switches shall comply with the following requirements:
5.12.2
Design and Construction
The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with positive
operation in both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset and locked at the
works where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at site after
commissioning. Disconnection and reconnection of the drive linkage in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the setting. The take-off
for the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the final drive shaft of
the mechanism.
Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the time the contacts
are in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms.
The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual contact can be arranged
to operate relative to the drive in suitable steps but each complete bank shall be preset at
the manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break before make, the period
when both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practicable.
Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative materials with
comparable performance may be used subject to approval. The thickness of the facing
material shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life tests there is still
a layer of facing material at the point of contact.
Contacts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure.
Auxiliary switches shall be designed for use under the specified climatic conditions and
the contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tightly fitting
covers over the contacts.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 84 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
It is intended that designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or
no maintenance and adjustment on site.
Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall be lubricated for
life. The lubrication shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch.
5.12.3
Duties
Switches shall be suitable for the duties under which they are likely to be subjected.
The switches shall have adequate making and breaking capacity and adequate through
current capacity suitable for use in, for example, current transformer, interlocking and
control circuits.
5.12.4
Number of Contacts and Timing
In addition to the number of contacts required for the substation control and monitoring,
there should be at least 20% extra contacts available as spares of each type of contacts.
5.13
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear instruments
and/or metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 – 1 and the requirements of
this Specification.
Current transformers shall be of the toroidal core type preferably encapsulated in epoxy
resin. Where indicated on the associated schematic diagram they shall be located on
both sides of the circuit breaker to avoid "blind zones" in protection coverage.
Current transformers including primary conductors shall have a short time current rating
and duration not less than that of the associated switchgear. All current transformers
shall have sufficient overload capacity to permit continuous operation with currents up to
120% of the rated current of the associated equipment and for transformer circuits up to
150% of the maximum continuous rating of the associated transformer.
All current transformers shall be installed with the P1 (one) terminals adjacent to the
busbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be
clearly indicated at the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a
readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer.
Current transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in themselves, and shall be
earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible position. Each separate
circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the
bolted type, have M6 nuts, and provision for attaching test leads.
The earth links for protective and instrument current transformer secondary circuits shall
be mounted inside the relay panels. Earth links for metering current transformer
secondary circuits shall be mounted at the switchgear.
Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each
type and rating of current transformer. Where the Contractor wishes to provide current
transformer ratios differing from those specified he should first obtain approval in writing
from the Engineer for each specific instance.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 85 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
together with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipment with which
each current transformer is to be used.
Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy classes between
0,1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance with EN 60044
up to an equivalent primary current rating not exceeding that of the associated switchgear
circuit current rating.
Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral current
transformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shall have
magnetization characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each specific instance.
Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcurrent and
saturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circuit level of the
system. The accuracy class of all protection current transformers shall be 5P or better and
with an accuracy limit factor of 20. The rated burden of the protective cores applies to the
lower rated current.
The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity of the current transformers provided is
adequate for operation of the associated protective devices and instruments.
Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the
secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connection required
for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on the appropriate
schematic and connection diagrams.
All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means of
separate insulated leads to a terminal board, mounted at a height of 100 cm +/- 5 cm from
the gland plate, in the Local Control cubicle. All terminal boards in Relay and Control
Panels, which carry shorting/disconnecting links for Current transformers, should be
mounted at 100 cm +/- 5 cm from the respective gland plates. Terminal boards shall have
shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in service and on load. The
rated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels for secondary windings should be
according to EN 60044-1
Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs their suitability to
withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured,
otherwise, saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Where supplied, the
interposing winding shall be earthed at the control panel. The instrument security factor of
the measuring cores in all connections shall not be greater than 5.
Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple windings are tendered,
it shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alteration to the number
of primary turns. All ratio adjustment shall be made on the secondary side.
Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porcelain bushing
type complete with suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete with terminal
box for secondary connections.
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval, before commencement of
manufacture, the calculations on the burdens of all current transformers, which are
supplied under the Contract.
It shall be possible to carry out primary injection testing of the CTs when the switchgear is
fully assembled, or retesting of the CTs during the service life of the switchgear without
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 86 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
interruption of supply to adjacent circuits or to dismantle the switchgear or to break down
the cable termination, if applicable. The appropriate Schedule shall be completed to state
the testing facilities provided in the design for site testing.
The current transformer particulars as specified in EN 60044 shall be given on an
accessible plate mounted external to the current transformer.
5.14
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall comply with EN 60044 and IEC 60186 and the requirements of
the Specification.
Voltage transformers of metal-enclosed design shall be compatible with the switchgear
and contain no hygroscopic insulating material, which could affect the SF6 gas in either
the voltage transformer or the associated switchgear chamber.
Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of
lines, cables, and switchgear, which may remain connected to them during switching
operations. The Contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment for this duty.
It shall not be possible for voltage transformer secondary windings to be connected
directly in parallel, except through interposing voltage transformers associated with the
synchronizing scheme. To prevent any possibility of back energizing a VT secondary
winding via synchronizing circuits, circuit breaker auxiliary contacts which are of the late
make early break type shall be employed.
Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, synchronizing
equipment, voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers, and
metering.
When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth
fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided.
The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible
limits prescribed in EN 60044 - 2 and IEC 60186. All transformers shall have measuring
accuracy class between 0,1 and 1,0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required for
protection duty the relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules.
All transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the total connected
burden, which shall not be less than that stated in the Schedules.
Maximum burdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (including
transducer auxiliary power source where applicable) should be taken into account in
determining the output rating.
Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously without injurious heating
5O% burden above their rated burden.
Suitable voltage transformer secondary miniature circuit breakers shall be provided as
close to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled to indicate their
function, phase identification, etc. For single-phase voltage transformers separate earth
links for each secondary shall be provided and each neutral lead shall be connected
together at a single earth point in the local control cubicle. Earthing of the VT HV winding
shall be through a link separate from the LV winding.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 87 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
A minimum of two suitable main secondary miniature circuit breakers per phase shall be
provided to allow implementation of secondary circuit failure supervision with self-reset
alarm indication. Protection, synchronizing, instrumentation, etc, circuits shall be
distributed and protected between as many secondary circuits as required in order to
satisfy the independency and reliability of the individual systems. Suitable type of auxiliary
contacts of adequate number shall be provided with the MCBs for satisfying the
requirements of the protection synchrocheck and alarm systems. It shall not be possible
for the voltage transformer secondary circuits to be connected in parallel.
All transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of not less than 1,2 continuously and 1,5
for 30 seconds.
When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the
same circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be wired through
auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit breaker is open.
Voltage transformers on feeder circuits shall be located on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker outside the protected zone covered by the busbar protection. They shall however
be included in the protected zone afforded by the feeder protection.
Primary connections shall have the same short time current rating as the associated
switchgear.
Each secondary winding of the voltage transformers shall be protected by suitable
approved miniature circuit breakers and links, which shall be located as close as possible
to the voltage transformer, preferably within a suitable terminal box. All secondary
winding connections, including both ends of the secondary winding shall be brought out to
the miniature circuit breakers and links. The MCBs and links shall be connected to
approved isolating terminal blocks for termination of multicore cables. A metallic label
shall be provided and fixed at the voltage transformer clearly indicating the connections
required for each winding.
The neutral point of each voltage transformer secondary circuit shall be earthed at one
point only at the local control panel via a separate removable link of approved design.
The earth link shall be situated in an accessible position and suitably labelled.
A magnetization curve shall be provided for each voltage transformer for the Engineer’s
approval.
The location of the voltage transformers to be installed on the primary switchgear shall be
approved by the Engineer.
5.15
EARTHING SYSTEM
All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be electrically
connected to each other and shall also be connected to the earthing system. Any
necessary terminals on any part of the equipment required for this purpose shall be
provided by the Contractor.
5.16
SURGE ARRESTERS
If due to system conditions it is deemed necessary to incorporate surge arresters at the
GIS Substation in addition to those at the line entries then these shall be of the metal
enclosed design.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 88 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Surge arresters shall be of the gapless metal oxide type. Metal oxide arresters shall be of
proven design with type tests to EN 60099-4 or equivalent, demonstrating that thermal
runaway or premature aging does not occur in service. They shall have proven records
for the specified site conditions.
Metal-enclosed arresters shall be in their own gas zone, which shall be monitored.
Operation of over-pressure devices shall only allow the release of gasses to atmosphere.
Arresters shall be entirely suitable for operation under the system conditions specified
including system voltage rises on unloading long transmission lines charging currents
without damage.
The arresters shall be of the station class, shall have a rated discharge current of 10.000
A, at least discharge class III, and shall be equipped with pressure relief devices.
Individual surge arrester monitoring units shall be connected to each surge arrester
separately.
The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, the amplitude of
the surges together with their date and time, the total leakage current and the resistive current
through the arrester.
The measurements should be stored in the surge arrester monitoring units, and should be
collected with the aid of a handheld cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to
a computer for statistical analysis.
5.17
GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT
Gas handling equipment shall be provided at the GIS installation to permit emergency
topping up of gas in the switchgear in the event of leakage.
In addition, a mobile gas-handling unit, the size of which shall allow full mobility within the
area of the installation, shall be included for the complete sampling, testing, filtering,
drying, extraction, and refilling of SF6 gas. This unit shall be self-contained and comprise
of a wheeled trolley housing, all necessary compressors, gauges, piping and controls etc.,
together with a gas storage tank with usable capacity not less than that specified. The unit
shall be capable of evacuating air from the switchgear compartments and replenishing
them with gas at the end of a maintenance period. Facilities shall also allow for circulation
of the gas from a compartment through filters in order to extract moisture pressure.
This plant should be capable of evacuating and storing the largest quantity of gas
specified and of evacuating the largest volume specified to a vacuum of 20 mm Hg. These
two operations should not require an operating time in excess of 4,5 h. The plant should
also be capable of extracting air at atmospheric pressure from the largest volume
chamber to a vacuum of 1 mm Hg in a time not exceeding 2 h. The plant should be
capable of returning gas to the equipment and recirculating used gas through filters in
order to achieve the specified moisture level for the gas in service.
The filling time for the largest volume specified from a vacuum of 1 mm Hg to normal
working pressure should not exceed 2 h.
Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus included together with a description of the
filling and evacuating procedures shall be provided at the time of tendering.
Where specified additional mobile or static storage shall be provided for use in
combination with the gas trolley and to extend storage facilities.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 89 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All necessary pipe work, flexible hoses, couplings, valves, pressure and vacuum gauges
shall be included to enable interconnection between the switchgear compartments, gas
trolley and storage tanks and the cylinders provided by major producers of SF6 gas.
An approved portable SF6 gas leakage detector, oxygen analyser, and moisture meter
shall be provided for each substation.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 90 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
6.
6.1
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT
SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE
The switchgear shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of continuous operation
under the climatic conditions existing on site. It shall be designed to comply with this
Specification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviations from
these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedule.
In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be
included in the Contract.
The disposition of plant in the substation is to be such that the operation of any item of
plant under the specified service conditions shall in no way create a condition that could
adversely affect the performance of adjacent circuit breakers or any associated
equipment.
The Contractor is to ensure that the complete substation installation will satisfy the
requirements of this Specification and the appropriate Standards in respect of insulation,
fault levels, mechanical stress etc., and any additional equipment found to be necessary
to obtain these conditions shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Price.
6.2
CLEARANCES
The clearances and positions of apparatus including the access facilities shall permit safe
maintenance of any section of the apparatus while the remaining sections are alive.
Electrical clearances between live metal work and earth shall be not less than those in the
appropriate sections of BS 7354, or the clearances and dimensions given in this
Specification and attached drawings whichever is the greater.
The layout and design of plant and equipment on the substation site shall provide for
ready access for operation and maintenance whilst the remaining sections of equipment
are alive. Working clearances provided between isolated equipment and nearest live
metal work shall not be less than the British Standard section clearances.
6.3
RADIO INTERFERENCE
Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise electrical discharge and radio
interference. Type tests for electrical discharge and radio interference shall be carried out
by the Contractor and submit relevant test report with tender.
6.4
6.4.1
CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
General
Circuit-breakers shall be of the SF6 type with individual self contained. Operating
mechanisms shall be with individual self-contained spring operated mechanisms.
Hydraulic operating mechanisms although not proffered shall be considered.
Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers shall specify the
maintenance requirements necessitated by climate and environmental conditions.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 91 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Circuit breakers shall operate on the principle of self-generating gas pressure within the
interrupter for arc extinction, e.g. puffer type or thermal blast.
A lockout feature shall be incorporated to prevent operation of the circuit-breaker
whenever the gas pressure falls to a value below which it would be incapable of
performing in accordance with its rated duty. Gas monitors shall be temperature
compensated.
An alarm feature shall also be incorporated to give indication of failing gas pressure prior
to the lockout of the circuit breaker.
Suitable facilities shall be included for gas sampling and for draining and replenishing the
gas volume for maintenance. Absorption of moisture and the decomposition products of
arcing or discharge in the gas shall be achieved by integral filters.
6.4.2
Operating Duty And Performance
6.4.2.1
General
The requirements of EN 62271-100 in respect of type tests, service operation and the
making and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit-breakers.
6.4.2.2
Test Certificates
Circuit-breakers shall be covered by test certificates certifying the operation of the
circuit-breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the
circuit-breakers. The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requirements of EN
62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender.
6.4.2.3
Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage
Attention is drawn to the requirements of International Standards wherein the
standard values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specifically
stated in the test certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenderer shall certify that
the TRV to which the circuit-breaker was subjected during the short circuit tests was
the most severe condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first
phase-to-clear factor of 1.5.
Any device incorporated in a circuit-breaker to limit or control the rate or rise of
restriking voltage across the circuit breaker contacts shall likewise be to the
Engineer's approval and full descriptions of any such device shall be given with the
test certificates.
6.4.2.4
Reclosure Duty
Circuit breakers shall be suitable for both high and slow speed single shot
auto-reclosure with three-pole switching.
Circuit breakers must be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by
out-of-synchronism conditions associated with auto-reclosure.
6.4.2.5
Interrupting Duties
In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults,
circuit-breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 92 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
the switching of transformer magnetising current and of capacitor current associated
with overhead line-charging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as may be applicable.
Circuit-breakers shall be capable of interrupting current associated with short-line
faults and the out-of-phase switching conditions that may occur in service.
Circuit-breakers shall be of the restrike-free type only.
Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit-breakers for the above duties
shall be submitted with the Tender.
Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the
circuit-breakers are capable of before maintenance is required.
6.4.2.6
Insulation Co-ordination
The insulation strength across the open circuit breaker shall be at least 15 per cent
greater than the line to ground insulation strength for all impulse, switching surge and
power frequency voltage conditions.
6.4.2.7
Opening time
Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as possible and shall preferably not
exceed 50 ms.
6.4.3
General Arrangement
Circuit-breakers shall be suitable for mounting directly on concrete pads and shall include
any necessary supporting steelwork. The arrangement of the switchgear on site shall be
such that adequate access shall be available for normal routine maintenance and the
replacement of either a complete breaker or any component parts of the assembly.
Evidence shall be provided that enclosures subject to pressures in excess of normal
atmospheric pressure during service operation have withstood approved pressure tests
without leakage, permanent distortion or any temporary distortion such as might cause
maloperation of the circuit-breaker.
Means shall be provided to allow easy access for the inspection and maintenance of fixed
and moving contacts and other enclosed components.
6.4.4
Contacts, Arcing Chambers And Insulation
Separate arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit-breakers to protect the main
contacts from burning during operation and shall be arranged to ensure that arcing after
commutation of the main current always occurs in the arcing zone between the arcing
contacts.
Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit-breakers and
removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers.
Static and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gas or ingress of
moisture whilst in service and without deterioration.
Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF6 gas pressures outside the declared
limits of operation shall be included.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 93 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Where single rods or tubes are utilised for operating the moving contacts of
circuit-breakers, they shall be securely pinned at each end to prevent rotation or
displacement of the contacts. Tubes shall be plugged in an approved manner where
contacts or other parts are fixed to the tubes.
Circuit-breakers shall not comprise of materials that are liable to deterioration or create
undesirable chemical action when in contact with SF6 and its by-products under service
conditions. Precautions to minimise the presence of moisture and other by-products of
arcing in SF6 design shall be incorporated.
Noise made by the circuit-breaker when operating under all specified conditions shall not
be such as to cause a nuisance to residents beyond a radius of 100m.
6.4.5
CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISMS
6.4.5.1
General
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specified in this
Chapter.
All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with delayed auto-reclose
whether or not this feature is specified in the schedules. When specified in the schedules
mechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three phase auto-reclose to the duty
cycle stated.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical
tripping pulse being applied to the circuit-breaker during the closing stroke, or of the
mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit-breaker shall open fully and in
such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make
repeated attempts to close the circuit-breaker when the control switch is held in the
CLOSE position in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of
a trip signal being given to the circuit-breaker.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and
solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature
range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated
in EN 62271 - 100.
Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial construction, utilising such
materials as stainless steel, brass or gunmetal where necessary to prevent sticking due to
rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mechanical shock to a
minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration or
other causes.
An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit-breaker
operating mechanism to show whether the circuit-breaker is open or closed. Operation
counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms. Each phase shall incorporate a
mechanical indicator or other approved means of position indication where operating
mechanism designs do not utilise mechanical coupling between phases.
The circuit-breaker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three
phases.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 94 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Where circuit-breakers comprise three independent units it shall be possible to make
independent adjustments to each unit. For three phase operation the three units shall
make and break the circuits simultaneously. In the event of any phase failing to complete
a closing operation, provision shall be made for automatic tripping of all three phases of
the circuit-breaker or for a remote alarm in the event of any phase failing out of
synchronism.
Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for further operations as
soon as the circuit-breaker has completed the closing operation and the design of the
closing mechanisms shall be such that the circuit-breaker cannot be operated
inadvertently due to external shock forces resulting from short circuits, circuit-breaker
operation, or any other cause.
Circuit-breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for the operating
sequence O-0.3S-CO-3 min-CO.
If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a
predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm
initiated.
When in operational service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the
energy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully complete a
close or trip operation under all specified duties. Alarms shall be provided to indicate a
lock out condition and also advance warning that the conditions are deteriorating towards
a lock out condition.
Alarms shall be delayed for sufficient time for the energy system to be restored to normal
conditions following breaker operation.
The circuit-breakers shall be provided with the facilities for measurement of contact
resistance and mechanical and electrical timing of the contact. Full details of the facility
provided shall be stated in Schedule of particulars without removal of covers or SF6 gas.
Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of the circuit breaker
preferably by a shrouded push button with facilities for locking off. It shall not be possible
to lock mechanically the trip mechanism for rendering the electrical tripping inoperative.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with two tripping coils. The two trip coils shall be
kept electrically separate.
Where possible, circuit-breakers shall be provided with slow acting manually powered
operating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. It shall not be possible
to slow close a circuit-breaker when in normal service condition. Suitable interlock shall
be provided between slow and fast acting circuit breaker operation during maintenance.
Where heaters are provided in mechanism housings, these shall be permanently
connected. Where two-stage heaters are provided, one stage shall be permanently
connected and the other switched.
Means for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism housing.
6.4.5.2
Spring Operated Mechanisms
Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but means shall be
provided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 95 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
during this process shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A spare
normally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided.
When fully charged the spring mechanism shall have sufficient stored energy for the
operating sequence refer to above.
It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breaker in either the
open or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operating springs shall
commence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing operation.
Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented and release
of the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged. The time required to power
charge the spring should not exceed 30 seconds.
The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device
which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRING FREE"
when operation is not possible. The indications shall be visible glazed access doors or
openings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remote and
supervisory indication. Provision shall also be made for remote and supervisory indication
of the state of the charge of the operating springs.
Means shall be provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open
position without the circuit breaker attempting to close.
6.4.5.3
6.4.5.3.1
AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS
General
Circuit-breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches and contactors,
where permitted, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, protection,
indication and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant section of the
Specification and in addition shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for position
indication to the central system control room via the remote supervisory system.
Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven in both
directions. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing and shall be
mounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxiliary switches
shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Micro switches will not be
acceptable. Not less than six spare auxiliary switch ways shall be provided with each
circuit-breaker.
Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of
the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. The contacts
of all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall have a positive wiping action when
closing.
Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by
the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted
in lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engineer.
Auxiliary switches and contactors shall be capable of operation within the same voltage
limits as specified for the associated circuit-breaker close and trip coils. The auxiliary
switches shall comply with the following requirements:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 96 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
6.4.5.3.2
Design and Construction
The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with positive
operation in both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset and locked at the
works where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at site after
commissioning. Disconnection and reconnection of the drive linkage in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the setting. The take-off
for the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the final drive shaft of
the mechanism.
Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the time the contacts
are in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms.
The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual contact can be arranged
to operate relative to the drive in suitable steps but each complete bank shall be preset at
the manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break before make, the
period when both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practicable.
Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative materials with
comparable performance may be used subject to approval. The thickness of the facing
material shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life tests there is still
a layer of facing material at the point of contact.
Contacts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure.
Auxiliary switches shall be designed for use under the specified climatic conditions and
the contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tightly fitting
covers over the contacts.
It is intended that designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or
no maintenance and adjustment on site.
Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall be lubricated for
life. The lubrication shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch.
6.4.5.3.3
Duties
In addition to the number of contacts employed for control interlocking, the following
minimum requirements for auxiliary switches in respect of number contacts and timing
shall be provided.
Minimum Number of Contacts: 12 N.O. and 12 N.C. Timing: N.O. contacts with the
exception of two sets of this type shall close in about 10 milliseconds after the making of
the main circuit breaker and shall open in about 10 milliseconds before the separation of
the main circuit breaker contacts. The two remaining sets shall close in about 5
milliseconds before the making of the main circuit breaker contacts and open
simultaneously with the main circuit breaker contacts. N.C. contacts shall close 10
milliseconds after the opening of the main circuit breaker contacts and open at least 10
milliseconds before the making of the main circuit breaker contacts.
6.5
6.5.1
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
GENERAL
The CTs & VTs shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of continuous operation
under the climatic conditions existing on site. They shall be designed to comply with this
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 97 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Specification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviations from
these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedule.
In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be
included in the Contract.
The disposition of plant in the substation is to be such that the operation of any item of
plant under the specified service conditions shall in no way create a condition that could
adversely affect the performance of adjacent equipment.
6.5.2
CLEARANCES
The clearances and positions of apparatus including the access facilities shall permit safe
maintenance of any section of the apparatus while the remaining sections are alive.
Electrical clearances between live metal work and earth shall be not less than those given
in this Specification and attached drawings whichever is the greater.
6.5.3
RADIO INTERFERENCE
Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise electrical discharge and radio
interference. Relevant tests for electrical discharge and radio interference if applicable
shall be carried out by the Contractor and submit relevant test report with tender.
6.5.4
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be of the wound or capacitor type as specified in the Schedules
and shall comply with EN 60044 – 2, BS.3941 and the requirements of these
Specifications.
Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, synchronising
equipment voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers and metering.
Capacitor type voltage transformers shall be suitable for use as line couplers for the
operation of carrier accelerated tripping and communication systems and the top of all
voltage transformers shall be suitable for mounting wave traps. Wave or line traps will be
supplied under another contract. All voltage transformers shall be supplied complete with
High Frequency Drain coil and High Frequency grounding switch housed either in the
voltage transformer terminal box or housed in a suitable separate cubicle, which is to be
mounted on the voltage transformer, steel support.
Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of
line, cables and switchgear, which may remain connected to them during switching
operations. The contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment for this duty.
When a polarising source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth
fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided.
Capacitor voltage transformers shall be designed to minimise the possibility of ferroresonance occurring.
The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible
limits prescribed in EN 60044 and IEC 60186. All transformers shall have measuring
accuracy class between 0.1 and 1.0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required for
protection duty the relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 98 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All voltage transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the burdens
connected to them, which shall not be less than stated in the Schedules. Maximum
burdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (including transducer
auxiliary power source where applicable) should be taken into account in determining the
output rating.
They shall be capable of carrying continuously without injurious heating 50% burden
above their rated burden.
All transformers shall have a continuous rated voltage factor of not less than 1.2.
When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the
same circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be wired through
auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit breaker is open.
Voltage transformer secondary fuses or miniature circuit-breakers shall be provided as
close to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled to indicate their
function, phase identification, etc.
A minimum of two main secondary fuses per phase shall be provided to allow
implementation of fuse failure supervision with reclosing alarm when specified in the
Schedules. Protection, synchronising and instrumentation, etc circuits shall be distributed
between the two main secondary circuits and then sub-fused at the local control panel in
accordance with the appropriate schematic diagram.
For single-phase voltage transformers, both ends of each secondary winding shall be
brought out to insulated links. For three-phase voltage transformers, each phase end
shall be brought out to fuses or mcb’s and the neutral of the secondary winding shall be
brought out to insulated links. Where a residual winding is required the open delta shall
be brought out to insulated links. The fuses and links shall then be brought out to
insulated terminals located in a terminal box.
Secondary fuses shall be provided in the terminal box such that they can be removed with
the equipment alive and shall be labelled to indicate their function.
For single-phase units separate earth links for each secondary winding shall be provided.
Each of the neutral leads shall be connected together at a single earth point in the local
control cubicle.
Secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled.
Magnetisation curves for each type of voltage transformer shall be submitted for approval.
Voltage transformers shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting
structures such that the earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less than 2440 mm
above ground level.
6.5.5
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear instruments
and/or metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 – 1 and the requirements of
this Specification.
Current transformers using oil impregnated paper as the insulant may be of the bar, single
or multi-turn primary and shall be hermetically sealed.
The porcelain of current transformers shall comply with this Specification.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 99 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Each current transformer shall be impregnated and filled with oil of the grade specified in
BS148.
The following facilities shall be provided:
•
Visual means of determining from ground level the level of oil within the
transformers.
•
Oil drain cock and sampling device.
•
Earth terminal of adequate dimensions so arranged that the earth connection
couldn’t be inadvertently removed.
All current transformers shall be installed with the PI (one) terminals adjacent to the
busbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be
clearly indicated at the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a
readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer.
Primary winding conductors shall be not less than 100 mm2 section and shall have a one
second short time current rating not less than that of the associated switchgear.
Current transformer secondary circuits shall be complete and shall be earthed at one point
only, through links situated in an accessible position. Each separate circuit shall be
earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type
have M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.
The earth links for protective and instrument current transformer secondary circuits shall
be mounted inside the relay panels. Earth links for metering current transformer
secondary circuits shall be mounted at the switchgear.
Magnetisation and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each
type and rating of current transformer. Where current transformers are used for extending
an existing protection scheme the Contractor shall ensure that they are correctly matched.
Where the Contractor wishes to provide current transformer ratios differing from those
specified he should first obtain approval in writing from the Engineer for each specific
instance.
The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
together with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipment with which
each current transformer is to be used. Each current transformer shall be capable of
providing the necessary output to operate the related connected devices satisfactorily at
the lead burdens involved including bay controllers/transducers associated with SCADA.
Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy classes between
0.1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance with EN 60044
up to an equivalent primary current rating not exceeding that of the associated switchgear
circuit current rating.
Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral current
transformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shall have
magnetisation characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each specific instance.
All current transformers shall have a maximum continuous primary current rating not less
than the primary current rating of the bay in which they are installed.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 100 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcurrent and
saturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circuit level of the
system. The output of each current transformer shall be as specified in the relevant
schedules of requirements with an accuracy limit factor of 15 and the Contractor shall
ensure that the capacity of the current transformers provided is adequate for operation of
the associated protective devices and instruments.
Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the
secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connection required
for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on the appropriate
schematic and connection diagrams.
All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means of
separate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in the Local Control cubicle.
Terminal boards shall have shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in
service and on load. The rated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels for secondary
windings should be according to EN 60044-1
The accuracy class of all CTs is as specified in the relevant schedules of requirements.
Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs their suitability to
withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured or
saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Where supplied, the interposer winding
shall be earthed at the control panel.
Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple windings are tendered,
it shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alteration to the number
of primary turns. All ratio adjustment shall be made on the secondary side.
Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porcelain bushing
type complete with suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete with terminal
box for secondary connections.
Current Transformers shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting
structure such that the earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less than 2440 mm
above ground level.
6.6
6.6.1
SURGE ARRESTERS
General
All surge arresters shall be of the Zinc Oxide type for outdoor use and shall be housed in
polymeric housing meeting the requirements of IEC 61109 sealed against the entry of
moisture and oxygen.
Surge arresters shall be bottom supported or suspended on tower cross-arms and fitted with
suitable insulators to facilitate the connection of the surge counter.
On the live side the arresters shall be fitted with a suitably rated aluminium alloy clamp. The
clamp for the 120kV rated surge arrester should be able to accept an AAAC conductor with
25±10% mm diameter. For the 60kV rated surge arrester the clamp should be able to accept
an AAAC conductor size of 12±10% mm diameter.
The earth end of the surge arresters as well as both sides of the surge arrester monitoring
unit should accept a copper conductor of 14,5±10% mm.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 101 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Surge arrester monitoring units must be suitable for connecting on the common earth of a
three phase set of gapless surge arresters and should be housed within a weatherproof
housing suitably treated to withstand corrosive atmospheres.
The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, the amplitude of
the surges together with their date and time, the total leakage current and the resistive current
through the arrester.
The measurements should be stored in the surge arrester monitoring units, and should be
collected with the aid of a handheld cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to
a computer for statistical analysis.
The surge arrester monitoring units should be maintenance free meeting general design
requirements.
6.6.2
Galvanizing
All iron and steel used in the assembly of the arrester shall be galvanised after all sawing,
sheaving, drilling, punching, filing, bending and machining is completed. The zing coating is to
be of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible. It shall adhere
firmly and completely to the surface of the steel and is not to blister or be in any way
removable during handling or erection.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of at least
600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,084 mm in thickness, and
shall withstand the tests set out in the relevant standards.
The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adversely affect
the mechanical properties of the material. After galvanizing holes shall be free from nodules
of spelter.
If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rust spots or other defects
in galvanizing develop during the period of guarantee, then the affected material is to be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
To facilitate transport, lifting lugs, jacking pads or other handling devices capable of
supporting each unit when fully erected and ready for service shall be provided.
6.6.3
Insulators
All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the climatic and service conditions
specified. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical test load shall be
such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be not less
than two and a half.
Designs shall be such that stresses during expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulators do not lead to development of defects.
Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Glaze shall be smooth,
hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all exposed parts of the
insulators. Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing
weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced
under working conditions.
Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or
metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 102 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary approved water and
oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All
porcelain clamping surfaces shall be accurately ground and free from glaze. Fixing materials
used shall be of approved quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically
active with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service.
Where cement is used as a fixing medium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as
even as possible and care shall be taken correctly to centre and locate the individual parts
during cementing.
6.7
6.7.1
ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES
ISOLATOR
All isolating and earthing devices shall be designed for outdoor installation and shall be
complete with supporting steelwork.
All power driven isolators shall be suitable for local, remote and supervisory control and
should be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It should be
possible to lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanism in the open
and closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-operating
mechanism shall be provided with an interlocking magnet for continuous duty to prevent
mechanically the manual operation and electrically the motor operation, when the
interlocking magnet is off-circuited.
Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for manual operation, the electrical
supply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnected.
Each power driven isolator shall have its own separate power supply. The motor circuit
shall be provided with a two pole overload tripping device with an alarm contact.
The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, i.e. the mechanism shall
complete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited during operation.
There shall be separate electrical circuits for motor, control and interlocking. An actuated
control pulse shall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit.
The colour for the open position (O) of the disconnector shall be red and for the closed
position (I) green.
Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switches and shall be clearly
visible from ground level.
Isolators shall preferably be of the single throw double air break, centre rotating post type
or of the double rotating post type with single air break and shall be subject to approval by
the Engineer. Pantograph or semi-pantograph designs, or other alternatives if applicable,
will be considered.
The minimum total air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall
be of a length to withstand a minimum impulse withstand level of at least 115 per cent of
the specified impulse insulation rating to earth and shall in no case be less than the
minimum corresponding figure for the isolating distance as given in EN 62271 - 102.
Isolator switches shall be designed for live operations and will not require to switch current
other than the charging current of open busbars and connections or load currents shunted
by parallel circuits or transformer HV magnetising currents. Main contacts shall be of the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 103 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
high-pressure line type and arcing contacts, if provided, shall be to the Engineer’s
approval.
The mechanisms of all isolators and earthing switches shall be capable of being locked
and secured by padlock in the open and closed positions. Reliable and maintenance free
electrical bolt interlocking is required in addition, for operation and maintenance of all
isolators.
Service conditions require that isolating switches shall remain alive and in continuous
service for periods of up to two years in corrosive atmosphere over a wide temperature
range and without operation or maintenance. The contacts shall carry their rated load and
short-circuit currents without overheating or welding and at the end of the two year period
the maximum torque required at the operating handle to open a three-phase isolator
should be within the capabilities of one man (i.e. approx. 250N).
All isolators fitted with earthing devices shall be mechanically coupled or interlocked with
the main isolator so that the earthing device and main isolator cannot be closed at the
same time.
Isolator operating mechanisms shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure
free action and shall be unaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanisms shall be
as simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts. Approved
grease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings, which are not of the selflubricating type. The mechanisms shall be housed in a weatherproofed enclosure
complete with auxiliary switches, anti-condensation heater, terminal blocks and cable
gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the supporting steelwork shall be
galvanised.
Isolator mechanisms shall be so designed that the primary contacts cannot be opened by
forces due to currents passing through them, and shall be self-locking in both the "open"
and "closed" positions. The mechanism shall open and close all poles simultaneously.
Each isolator shall be provided with auxiliary switches coupled to the main drive
mechanism and with sufficient signalling contacts for indication, control, interlocking and
other services as specified. Signalling contacts shall be arranged and operate in the
manner specified in the relevant clauses of the specified standards.
6.7.2
EARTH SWITCH
Earth switches shall be manually operated and shall be combined with and interlocked
with their associated isolating device.
Earth switches shall otherwise conform to the applicable requirements for isolators.
The earthing switch, when in the closed position, shall be capable of carrying the rated
short time current for one second without the contacts burning or welding.
6.7.3
INTERLOCKING FACILITIES
All isolating devices and earthing switches shall be provided with an interlocking system,
which ensures safe operation of the equipment under all service conditions.
Interlocks shall be of the electrical bolt type.
Earthing switches shall be electrically interlocked with all associated isolators so that is
impossible to close either switch or isolators without first opening the other.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 104 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Electrical bolt interlocks shall be electrically energised only when the operating handle of
the mechanism is brought to the working position. Visible indication shall be provided to
show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Approved means, normally padlocked
shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of
interlock supplies.
6.7.4
LOCKING FACILITIES
Locks and locking facilities shall be provided on isolating and earthing switches in both
open and closed positions and shall be additional to the electro-mechanical interlocking
devices specified.
Provision for locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that
locks will remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or
maintenance for continuous periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance
shall be fit for indefinite service.
6.7.5
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
6.7.5.1
General
Isolator auxiliary switches must be generally in accordance to EN 62271 - 102, with regard
to definitions and terms, rating and operating sequence unless otherwise specified. The
contact material, type (preferably wiper contact type) and driving mechanism must be
such as to ensure best quality and maximum reliability. The auxiliary switches are
classified to the following categories according to their function:
Switches connected to CT circuits for high impedance busbar protection.
Switches connected to control, protection, interlocking and position indication circuits.
Switches connected to supervisory signalling circuits (SCADA) suitable for maximum
interrogation current of the order of 2mA.
Switches connected to alarm circuits for non-normal closure or complete opening of the
main contacts (intermediate position).
All of the auxiliary switches with “make contact” or “normally open” (NO) type shall not
indicate closed position unless it is certain that the movable contacts will reach a position
in which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and the short-time withstand
current can be carried safely (EN 62271 - 102). Switches of category (d) are excluded.
All of the auxiliary switches with “break contact” or “normally closed” (NC) type shall not
indicate open position unless the movable contacts have reached a position such that the
clearance between contacts is at least 80% of the gap or the isolating distance, or unless
it is certain that the movable contacts will reach their fully open position (EN 62271 - 102).
Switches of category (a) and (d) are excluded.
The sequence of operation of category (a) switches must be such that the “normally open”
(NO) contact makes before the “normally closed” (NC) contact breaks and vice versa so
as to ensure that the CT’s are never open circuited during isolator operation.
The sequence of operation of category (d) switches must be such that the “normally open”
(NO) contact makes in any other position of the isolator than the one specified above.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 105 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
6.7.5.2
Busbar isolators - Double busbars
The busbar isolators must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:
•
6 “NO” and 6 “NC” of category (a)
•
10 “NO” and 10 “NC” of category (b)
•
1 “NO” and 1 “NC” of category (c)
•
2 “NO” of category (d)
6.7.5.3
Isolators - Single Busbars
The line isolators must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:
•
10 “NO” and 10 “NC” of category (b)
•
1 “NO” and 1 “NC” of category (c)
•
2 “NO” of category (d).
6.7.5.4
Earth switches
The Earth Switches must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:
•
6 “NO” and 6 “NC” of category (b)
•
1 “NO” and 1 “NC” of category (c)
•
2 “NO” of category (d)
6.7.6
GALVANIZING
All iron and steel used in the assembly of the isolator and earth switch shall be galvanised
after all sawing, sheaving, drilling, punching, filling, bending and machining is completed.
The zinc coating is to be of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as
possible. It shall adhere firmly and completely to the surface of the steel and is not to
blister or be in any way removable during handling or erection.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of at
least 600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,084 mm in
thickness, and shall withstand the tests set out in the relevant standards.
The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adversely
affect the mechanical properties of the material. After galvanizing, holes shall be free
from nodules of spelter.
If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rust spots or other
defects in galvanizing develop during the period of guarantee, then the affected material is
to be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
6.7.7
INSULATORS
All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the climatic and service conditions
specified. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical test load shall be
such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be not
less than two and a half.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 106 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Designs shall be such that stresses during expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulators do not lead to development of defects.
Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Glaze shall be
smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all exposed parts of
the insulators. Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected by atmospheric conditions
producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be
experienced under working conditions.
Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of
bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.
Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary approved water
and oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the porcelain and the
fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be accurately ground and free from glaze.
Fixing materials used shall be of approved quality applied in an approved manner and
shall not be chemically active with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in
service.
Where cement is used as a fixing medium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as
even as possible and care shall be taken correctly to centre and locate the individual parts
during cementing.
6.8
6.8.1
OUTDOOR BUSBARS
BUSBARS, CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS
Busbars and busbar connections shall be of electrolytic copper or aluminium or as
specified. The busbars may consist of either stranded conductors or tubes as specified in
the schedules and indicated on drawings. Approved non-ferrous metal spacers shall be
used for stranded conductors having hollow cores.
Material used for busbars, busbar connections and their supports, whether insulated or
otherwise, shall not be stressed beyond two fifths of its elastic limit or its 0.1% proof
stress, whichever is applicable. Satisfactory provision shall be made for expansion and
contraction of busbars and busbar connections with variation in temperature.
Where aluminium busbars and connections are used, tubular conductors shall be of alloy
E91E to EN 755 and stranded conductors to BS 215 or other equivalent recognised
Standard. The number and diameters of the individual wires forming the finished
conductor and the thickness of the tubes shall be subject to approval.
Copper busbars and connections shall be in accordance with BS 7884, BS 159 and EN
1977 or other equivalent recognised Standard, in respect of current rating and material
analysis.
Busbars, conductors and their fittings should have smooth surface finish and be suitably
designed in accordance with the relevant Standards in order to avoid corona and RIV
interference. The maximum allowable height of sharp protrusions should not exceed
1.5mm. Any defects should be smoothed out and should be blended with the adjoining
surfaces.
The maximum permissible temperature of unprotected, bare busbars or busbar
connections when carrying rated current shall be:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 107 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Bus Material
Compressed
Terminals
Pad Connection
Bolded
Connection
Welded
AAC OR AAAC
90oC
90oC
NA
NA
Al Cable
90oC
90oC
NA
90oC
Al Pipe
NA
90oC
70oC
90oC
Cu Pipe
NA
75oC
75oC
NA
Cu Pipe
NA
75oC
70oC
NA
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction with variation in conductor
temperature and busbars shall be arranged so that they may be readily extended in length
with a minimum of disturbance to existing equipment. The design of joints and
connections shall be such as to permit ready dismantling. All necessary terminals and
connectors shall be provided under this Contract including those required between
equipment provided in this Contract and in other Contracts.
Busbars shall normally be in continuous lengths between supports. Connectors shall be
of approved type, and, if necessary, type tested. Connections dependent upon site
welding techniques will not be accepted.
Busbars and connections shall be so arranged and supported that under no
circumstances, including short circuit conditions, can the clearances between live metal
and earth or earthed metalwork or between other conductors be less than the specified
distances. Relevant calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
All clamps, and fittings necessary for attaching the busbars and busbar connections to
their insulated supports, together with all connectors, terminals and accessories required
for attaching the connections to the busbars, switchgear, transmission lines and power
transformer bushings shall be provided.
Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be of approved types and shall be as light
as possible. Those for aluminium conductor shall preferably be compression type in
accordance with BS 3288. Suspension and tension clamps shall be designed to avoid
any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the individual strands.
Tension assembly sets of busbar connections should include at one end adjustable
turnbuckles to enable adjusting the conductor sag.
Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or failure of the
complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 percent of the ultimate
strength of the conductor as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees.
All clamps and fittings and their components shall be electro-chemically compatible with
the conductor material and those made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact approved means shall be provided to prevent
electro-chemical action or corrosion. Unless, otherwise approved, joints and surfaces of
copper or copper alloy fittings shall be tinned. Hollow stranded copper conductors shall
be supported against crushing at clamping positions by sweating solid or plugging. The
open ends of all tubes shall be fitted with caps.
Conductors and connectors provided for extending existing connections at each
substation shall be as nearly as possible identical with the existing equipment.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 108 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Busbar supports shall be designed and constructed so that resonant vibrations are
eliminated or reduced to negligible proportions. Any required damping will be assumed to
be included in the Contract.
All bolts and nuts shall be locked in an approved manner. Where bolted connections are
used for current carrying joints torque spanners shall be used for tightening bolts and
nuts. Also where necessary washers shall be provided under bolt heads and nuts to
spread the load and reduce the effect of compressive creep of aluminium under pressure.
Torque values must be quoted on drawings.
Where current carrying surfaces of connections are bolted together such surfaces shall
have the oxide film removed and shall be cleaned and de-greased. A coating of approved
jointing compound shall be applied to contact surfaces and voids before bolting.
The bending of tubular aluminium sections shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
in respect of the angle and length of any such cranked connection.
6.8.2
INSULATORS, BUSHINGS AND FITTINGS
6.8.2.1
Material
Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified and the glaze shall not
be dependent upon the insulation.
Glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all
exposed parts of the insulators. Insulator fittings shall remain unaffected by atmospheric
conditions due to weather, proximity to the coast, fumes, ozone, acids, alkalis, dust and
rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions.
Paper insulators shall be of approved design and method of manufacture, and shall retain
their insulating characteristics in service. Special precautions shall be taken to exclude
moisture from paper insulation during manufacture and assembly. The surfaces of all
paper insulators shall be finished with approved non-hygroscopic varnish, which cannot
be easily damaged.
Toughened glass shall be sound and free from defects or blemishes, which might
adversely affect the life of the insulator. All exposed glass parts shall have a smooth
surface.
6.8.2.2
Design
All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the specified climatic and service
conditions. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanical test load shall
be such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads shall be
not less than two and a half.
Designs shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulators and fittings do not lead to development of defects.
All insulators shall be manufactured in one piece. Jointing of solid or hollow porcelain is
not permitted except by use of metal fittings.
Damaged insulators may not be repaired without the written consent of the Engineer.
Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of
bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 109 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Porcelain or glass shall not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary,
approved water and oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the
porcelain or glass and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be of approved
quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically active with the metal
parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Where cement is used as a fixing
medium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as even as possible and care shall
be taken to correctly centre and locate the individual parts during cementing.
6.8.2.3
Identification
Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark, the year of
manufacture and the insulator reference. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings
and shall be imprinted and not impressed. For porcelain insulators, the marks shall be
imprinted before firing and shall be clearly legible after firing and glazing. Glass insulators
shall be similarly marked in an approved manner.
When a batch of insulators has been rejected no further insulators from this batch shall be
submitted, and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate steps will be taken
to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected batch in such a way that there
is no possibility of the insulators being subsequently resubmitted for tests or supplied for
the Purchaser's use.
6.8.2.4
Suspension and Tension Insulators
Suspension and tension insulators are to be supplied by others under a separate contract
with a coupling designation of type 16A.
6.8.2.5
Post Type Insulators
Post insulators shall be of the cylindrical post type or made up of interchangeable
pedestal post units, sufficiently strong to withstand all shocks which may be met in
operation. Post type insulators of uniform composition shall be designed so that they can
be used either upright or under hung.
6.8.2.6
Suspension and Tension Clamps and Fittings
Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be as light as possible. Suspension and
tension clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded
conductor and separating the individual strands.
Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or failure of the
complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 per cent of the ultimate
strength of the conductor.
Suspension clamps shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane, and shall permit the
complete conductor to slip before failure of the latter occurs. The outermost point of
clamping pressure shall not be less than two conductor diameters inside the outermost
point of contact between the conductor and its supporting groove (the conductor being
assumed to be horizontal). The supporting groove, beyond the latter point, shall be
curved in the vertical plate to a minimum radius of l50 mm and for a sufficient distance to
allow for the conductor leaving the clamp at the maximum inclination to be obtained in
service. The mouth of the supporting groove shall also be slightly flared in plan. The
grooves in the clamping piece or pieces shall be bell-mouthed at each end. All conductor
grooves and bell-mouths shall, after galvanising, be smooth and free from waves, ridges
or other irregularities.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 110 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Bolted type tension clamps shall be radiused at the mouth as specified for suspension
clamps, and the above specified requirements for the conductor grooves shall be
observed where applicable.
In tension clamps in which the conductor is necessarily cut approved means shall be
taken to treat the cut ends of the conductors to prevent ingress of air or moisture. The
mechanical efficiency of such tension clamps shall not be affected by methods of erection
involving the use of "come along" or similar erection clamps before, during, or after
assembly and erection of the tension clamp itself.
Tension insulator sets and clamps shall be arranged to give a minimum clearance of l50
mm between the jumper conductor and the rim of the live end of the insulator unit or
string.
Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised. All bolts and nuts
shall be locked. All bolt threads shall be greased before erection.
All split pins for securing the attachment of fittings of insulator sets shall be of stainless
steel and shall be backed by washers of approved size and thickness.
The factor of safety of the fittings when supporting the maximum working load shall not be
less than 2.5 based on the elastic limit of the material.
6.8.2.7
Arcing Horns and Rings
Where specified arcing horns or rings of approved type, size and material shall be
attached in an approved manner to bushing and post type insulators and to the conductor
clamp fittings, but not to the clamps themselves, of all suspension and tension insulator
sets. Tension insulator sets shall have arcing rings at their outboard end, unless
otherwise specified. The design of the arcing horns or rings shall be such as to reduce,
as far as reasonably possible, cascading and damage to the conductors, clamps, insulator
units, bushings, insulators and to other fittings under all flashover conditions. The arcing
horns or rings shall be of substantial design in order to minimise the damage to them
when flashover occurs and to bear the weight of a man during cleaning operations.
6.9
6.9.1
STEEL STRUCTURES
GENERAL
Steel structures shall be provided under this Contract for supporting the insulators,
switchgear, overhead conductors, busbars, earthwires and other equipment and fittings
generally as shown on the drawings and called for in the Specification.
Structures shall be designed to meet the conditions specified for electrical clearances and
to give at least the minimum phase, earth and section clearances for the electrical
connections. Line entry gantries, busbar support gantries and earth screen masts are to
be manufactured ONLY to the approved designs that are included in the specifications.
The structures shall include all necessary access ladders to give access to the various
levels of the high-level equipment and shall incorporate all necessary screens to comply
with the requirements of this Specification.
The design and arrangement of supporting structures shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. Such structures shall be rigid and self-bracing against all dead, wind,
earthquake, pull-off and other applied loads. Wherever such an arrangement can be
adopted, structures shall be braced by horizontal beams at intermediate or high level to
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 111 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
provide an integrated framework such that all bending moments shall be distributed in the
structures with zero overturning moments at ground level. At or near ground level, all
uprights shall be provided with holding down bolts provided under this Contract.
The whole of the rolled steel sections, tubes, flats, plates, bolts, nuts and bars used shall
employ weldable structure steel of an approved quality to EN10025 and EN10027-1,
Grades 40D and 50D. The steel shall be free from blisters, scale and other defects.
Bolt holes are not to be more than 1.5mm larger in diameter than the corresponding bolt
diameter. The design is to be such as to keep the number of different parts as small as
possible and is to facilitate transport, erection and inspection.
Pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided, and all parts of the
structures shall be properly drained.
Steel sections forming the framework shall be heavily galvanised in accordance with this
Specification. Galvanising shall consist of a coating of nominal thickness 0.140 mm (993
glm3 average coating weight for any individual test area) in accordance with EN 729 , EN
ISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713. Bolts and nuts shall be galvanised and fitted with spring
washers. Taper washers are to be added where necessary. Threads of bolts shall be
spun galvanised and the threads of nuts shall be oiled. No bolt shall be of less diameter
than 6mm.
All members shall be cut to jig and holes shall be drilled or punched to jig. Parts shall be
carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the members are in position the
holes can be accurately aligned before being bolted up. Drifting of holes will not be
permitted.
Stress diagrams and calculations shall be submitted as required by the Engineer and the
dispositions and sections of all members and the design of joints and fittings shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
6.9.2
LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR DESIGN PURPOSES
The structures shall be designed to meet the maximum of the total forces calculated
vectorially from the following loadings:
•
Self weight of conductor, insulators and electrical apparatus.
•
Wind loading
•
Short circuit forces including "snatch" in the case of bundled conductors.
•
Seismic forces
•
Loads arising during assembly and erection
Seismic forces shall be applied as a horizontal force parallel and alternatively transversely
to the conductor axis and shall be equal in value to the seismic coefficient times the
vertical self-weight load and applied at the centre of gravity of the structure.
Wind loading and seismic forces shall not be assumed to act simultaneously.
Allowance shall be made for any additional loads to which structures or structure parts
may be subjected during their erection and the erection of conductors and other
equipment.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 112 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
6.9.3
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE TENDER
The ultimate stress in compression members shall not exceed a figure obtained from an
approved basis to be entered in the Schedule of Particulars based on the elastic limit
strength.
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio for various classes of members shall not
exceed the values given in clause “Design Criteria” of this Specification.
6.9.4
FACTORS OF SAFETY
The minimum factor of safety based upon elastic limits under the maximum simultaneous
resultant working loads and conditions shall be 2.5. When considering the effect of the
self-weight of the structure in either structural or foundation calculations a factor of 1.1
times the actual structure self-weight for both uplift and compressive loads shall be used
for both normal unbalanced loading conditions.
6.9.5
LOAD COMBINATIONS
The following loading combinations shall be considered in the design of structures to the
requirements of assumed working load and factors of safety referred to above.
1.0
Load Combination 1 - High Wind
1.1.
Self weight.
1.2.
A wind pressure of 960N/ m2 applied to one and a half times the projected
area of the members of lattice structures.
1.3.
A wind pressure of 575N/ m2 applied to conductors and electrical
equipment.
1.4.
Tensions associated with line terminating tower to be as defined in the
Specification.
2.0
Load Combination 2: Short Circuit, Maximum Normal Wind
2.1.
Dead weight.
2.2.
A wind pressure of 450 N/m2 applied to one and a half times the projected
area of the members of one face of lattice structures.
2.3.
A wind pressure of 255N/m2 applied to conductors and electrical
equipment.
2.4.
Tensions associated with line terminating tower to be as defined in the
Specification.
2.5.
Conductor temperature at time of short circuit: 50oC.
2.6.
Short circuit load
3.0
Load Combination 3: Earthquake and Short Circuit at Minimum Temperature, No
Wind.
3.1.
Dead weight.
3.2.
Earthquake load in the most unfavourable direction.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 113 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3.3.
Short circuit load.
3.4.
Conductor temperature for short circuit.
Details and fastenings shall be designed to have a factor of safety against failure not less
than the main members of the structure.
For the purposes of calculating the maximum wind load which may be applied to
structures it shall be assumed that the wind may blow in any horizontal direction with wind
strength and dynamic wind pressure as stated in the specification. The associated forces
on electrical equipment and structures are to be calculated using BS6399 or approved
equivalent.
The force due to short circuit current is to be based on the maximum force resulting from a
"2 phase to earth" short circuit using the specified fault levels and with appropriate factors
to cover:
3.5.
A fully asymmetric condition.
3.6.
The relationship between system frequency and natural frequency of the
vibration of the equipment concerned.
3.7.
A dynamic factor for sudden application of the short circuit force.
6.9.6
APPROVAL OF DESIGNS
The Contractor shall submit for approval loading diagrams for each type of structure
before proceeding with detail design.
Subsequently the Contractor shall submit outline drawings, wire clearance diagrams, force
calculations of an approved format indicating the design load for each member under
every loading case and a summary setting out for each member the critical design load,
member size, L/R ratio, permissible load, material and end connection details.
After agreement to the structure design, the Contractor shall prepare and submit General
Arrangement and Erection Drawings, calculations of design foundation loads, foundation
designs and drawings (where appropriate), and anchor bolt and stub setting diagrams. All
drawings, calculations and details shall be available before commencement of any type
tests.
6.9.7
DESIGN CRITERIA
Maximum ratio of effective unsupported length of steel members to the relevant radius of
gyration (L/R) shall not exceed:
•
For leg members
120
•
For other load bearing compression members
200
•
For redundant members without calculated stress 250
•
For tension members of tower cross-arm hangers 350
•
All other tension members
500
In no case shall the outstanding flange to thickness ratio exceed 16 i.e.,
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
b−t
< 16
t
Page 114 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Where:
b = flange width
t = flange thickness
The minimum thickness and diameter of material used in members and bolts shall be as
follows:
For leg members
6,0mm
For other members carrying calculated stresses
4,8mm
For redundant members without calculated stress
3,2mm
Gusset plates
6,0mm
Minimum bolt diameter for members carrying calculated stress
16,0mm
Minimum bolt diameter for redundant members without calculated stress
12,0mm
Each member whose longitudinal axis makes an angle less than 45 degrees with the
horizontal shall be of sufficient section to withstand independently of all other loadings a
concentrated load of l00 kgf applied normal to the longitudinal axis at any point along its
length.
The minimum angle between any two intersecting members shall be 15 degrees with 20
degrees preferred.
Members shall be of such size, shape and length as to preclude damage or failure from
vibration or stress reversal.
6.9.8
APPARATUS AND CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS
Slack spans from overhead line terminating towers complete with tension insulator strings
and conductors will be supplied under another Contract. Connections from these slack
spans to the substation equipment shall be made under this Contract.
All structures shall be provided with such holes, bolts and fittings as may be necessary to
accommodate insulators, isolating switches and other apparatus provided under the
Contract.
Means shall be provided for fixing and bonding copper strips to the steelwork at sufficient
points to ensure efficient earthing. Earth connections shall be made to a vertical face
clear of the ground. Foundation bolts shall not be used for attachment of earth
connections.
Structures carrying isolators and earth switches shall be pre-drilled to accommodate earth
bonding for earth conductor to the base of the plant item in accordance with the approved
earthing drawing.
6.9.9
SAFETY AND ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
To facilitate safe inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided with
ladders or step bolts, inter-circuit screens, guards and other facilities in suitable positions
as detailed in the approved drawings that are appended in this specification.
If required step bolts of an approved type shall be at not more than 450 mm centres
starting as near as practical to the base and continuing to 1 m below the top of the
structure. It is noted on the drawing that step bolts are to be removed after construction
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 115 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
for a distance of 2.0 m above ground level. Adequate clearance shall be provided
between the step bolts and any obstruction which might interfere with their use.
The bolts shall have a shoulder, shall not be less than 16 mm in diameter, project not less
than 150 mm, and be fixed with nut, washer and nut.
If ladders are required they shall be incorporated into the structure either integrally or
separately and shall start 2.0 m above ground level. The rungs shall be not less than 300
mm wide and regularly spaced at intervals of 225 mm. Protection must be provided
equivalent to a cage with three back straps and hoops at l,500 mm intervals.
6.9.10
FABRICATION
All members of prefabricated frames shall be cut to jig and all holes shall be punched or
drilled to jig. All parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the
members are in position the holes will be truly opposite to each other before being bolted
up.
The drilling, punching, cutting and bending of all fabricated steelwork shall be such as to
prevent any possibility of irregularity occurring which might introduce difficulties in the
erection of the structures on the site.
All bends in High Yield Steel over 5° shall be made hot. For material below 12 mm thick
the preferred range is 600-650°C and above this thickness the range should be 850950°C.
Punching of holes will only be permitted for Mild Steel members less than 20 mm thick
and for High Yield Steel less than 14 mm thick, and in no case shall a hole be punched
where the thickness of the material exceeds the diameter of the punched hole.
Approved steel gauges of the stud type shall be provided to enable the Engineer to carry
out such checking of members as may be considered necessary.
Built members shall, when finished, be true and free from all kinks, twists and open joints
and the material shall not be defective or strained in any way.
Where possible pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided but if
unavoidable they shall be properly drained.
In order to check workmanship when presented for inspection not less than one per cent
of the members corresponding to each type of structure shall be selected at random and
assembled to form part of complete structures in the presence of the Engineer at the
fabricator's works.
If the structures are fabricated or galvanised by sub-contractors the Contractor shall, if
required by the Engineer at no extra cost to the Contract, provide a resident inspector at
the works of each sub-contractor during the time that the bulk of the steelwork is being
fabricated or galvanised.
6.9.11
LONG TENSION MEMBERS
All members carrying tension only shall be detailed shorter than the theoretically required
length. Members 3,000 mm or less in length shall be detailed 3 mm shorter. Un-spliced
members greater than 3,000 mm in length shall be detailed shorter to a maximum
reduction of 6 mm. For spliced members 1.5 mm for each lap splice and 3 mm for each
butt splice shall be added to the amount computed for the overall length, as described
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 116 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
above, by which the member is to be shortened. The Contractor's shop details shall
indicate the amount by which each member has been shortened.
6.9.12
BOLT AND NUTS
All metal parts shall be secured with bolts and nuts with single flat or tapered washers. All
nuts and bolts shall conform to an approved Standard, which shall not be inferior to the
requirements of the appropriate ISO Recommendations.
Nuts and heads of all bolts shall be of the hexagonal type. All nuts and bolts shall
wherever possible be so placed that the bolt head is either on the outside of the structure
or underside of all horizontal members. If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are
inaccessible by means of an ordinary spanner a suitable spanner shall be provided.
When in position all bolts shall project through the corresponding nuts by at least three
threads, but such projection shall not exceed 10 mm. No screwed threads shall form part
of a shearing plane between members.
All bolts and screwed rods shall be galvanised including the threaded portion(s) to a
minimum average coating weight of 305 g/m2. The threads of all bolts and screwed rods
shall be cleared of spelter by spinning or brushing. A die shall not be used for cleaning
the threads unless specially approved by the Engineer. All nuts shall be galvanised with
the exception of the threads, which shall be oiled. The nuts of all bolts attaching insulator
sets, droppers and earth conductor clamps to the towers shall be locked in an approved
manner, preferably by locknut.
The bolts of any one diameter on a structure shall be one grade of steel.
6.9.13
ERECTION MARKS
Before galvanising, all members, including all plates and fabricated parts shall be stamped
with distinguishing numbers and letters to correspond with approved drawings and
material lists.
The number of letters shall be at least 16 mm in size, and shall be clearly legible after
galvanising.
6.9.14
EARTHING SCREEN
The contract includes ONLY the supply of the necessary earth masts to the requirements
of the detailed drawings that are attached to this specification together with the necessary
copper strip, 30mm X 5mm, to connect the overhead conductor screen (supplied by
others) to the substation earthing system. The rest of the materials shall be supplied by
others under a separate contract.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 117 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
7.1
SCOPE
This part of the specification covers the requirements for the procuring of a
microprocessor based substation automation system. It covers design, manufacture, and
supply, installation, test and commissioning. Offered substation automation systems shall
be suitable for efficient and reliable operation. The systems offered shall be of the state of
the art, follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long term compatibility requirements
and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.
7.2
ABBREVIATIONS
API
Application Programming Interface
CB
Circuit Breaker
CT
Current Transformer
DCS
Distributed Control System
DDE
Dynamic Data Exchange
EMI
Electro Magnetic Interference
FO
Fibre Optic Cable
GOOSE
Generic Object Oriented Substation
GSE
Generic Substation Event
GSSE
Generic Substation Status Event
HMI
Human Machine Interface
I/O-Unit
Input/Output Unit
I/Os
I/O Points including Digital Inputs and Outputs and Analogue Inputs
LAN
Local Area Network
LDC
Load Dispatch Centre
MMI
Man Machine Interface
MCB
Mini Circuit Breaker
NCC
Network Control Centre
ODBC
Open Data Base Connectivity
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding
OPC
Optical Photoconductor
PC
Personal Computer
PT
Power Transformer
SQL
Structured Query Language
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
VDU
Visual Display Unit
VT
Voltage Transformer
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 118 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7.3.1
Introduction
The microprocessor-based Substation Control System shall monitor and control the entire
substation. It shall be a fully integrated system and has to fulfil all secondary tasks
including the serial integration of Intelligent Process Devices of state of the art High
Voltage Switchgear.
It shall fulfil at least the following functions but not being limited to:
•
Telecontrol interface to upstream network control/process control centre with
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-101
•
interface to IEDs (intelligent electronic devices, e.g. protection devices, voltage
regulators, bay computers)
•
interface to intelligent process interface devices
•
Control of switchgear devices, e.g., CBs, isolators, earth switches, etc.
•
Switchgear alarm and status monitoring
•
Switchgear alarm and status display
•
Acquisition, pre-processing and display of measured values
•
Operational metering
•
Sequence of event recording (SOE)
•
Archiving of data comprising of measured values, event and alarm data, including
those obtained from the protection relay
•
Tap changer control
•
Feeder protection
•
Switchgear interlocking
•
Automatic Control Sequences
•
Synchrocheck
•
Monitoring of station batteries and battery charger, LV AC control panel, fire alarm
control panel and other similar devices of the substation
•
Tools (engineering PC with 21 inch screen and software both locally and remotely) for
analysing engineering data and interrogating relays including updating of parameters
and settings
Functions required for this specific project are listed in this specification or marked in the
relevant single line diagrams.
Control devices shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for the
operation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In addition, the plant
shall be remotely controlled and supervised from network control centres or process
control centres. The equipment for this purpose shall be an integral part of the substation
control and monitoring system.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 119 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The substation control and monitoring system including the communication equipment, all
necessary DC and power frequency equipment connections, auxiliary switches, relays
and changeover switches shall be provided under this Contract. The Supplier shall be
responsible under this Contract for the provision of interface cubicles complete with
terminal blocks with isolating facilities and shorting links, where required for connection to
interposing relays and transducers supplied under this Contract.
7.3.2
Experience
Control and protection manufacturers Approved by EAC are the following:
•
AREVA – France, UK
•
ABB – Sweden, Germany
•
SIEMENS – Germany
•
GE Multilin – Canada
The approved manufacturer that shall provide the equipment shall be responsible for the
configuration and commissioning of the system including controllers, relays, other system
devices and communication equipment as well as the SCADA signals.
The Tenderer is required to provide a reference list with the following information:
•
Customer
•
Substation Name
•
Country
•
Voltage Level
•
Number of Bays
•
Order Date
•
Date Commissioned
•
Protocols Used
7.3.3
System Operation
The system shall be state of the art design. It shall be easy to operate, maintain and
extend. Modifications of the configuration shall require no knowledge in source code
programming languages. Monitoring and control of the whole plant shall be possible via
Human Machine Interface (HMI) facilitated with a suitable printer and a 21-inch screen.
To ease trouble-shooting, LEDs shall display bit patterns which indicate the status of
components and modules and give fault information in case of failure. Modern Service
and Diagnostic tools have to indicate to the operator the status of the system, e.g.
connector missing, external voltage missing, etc.
7.3.4
Software Requirements
The system shall be based on standard firmware and software that has already been
implemented in other systems. Software configuration tools shall be available to adapt the
system to the specific switchgear layout, to apply settings, to create displays, to define
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 120 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
event and alarm text etc. Configuration software shall be of the WYSIWYG type and shall
require no knowledge in programming languages or system source code.
The system must have an open architecture to ease data exchange between different
applications and systems, e.g., by providing Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), Optical
Photoconductor (OPC) interfaces, and Structured Query Language (SQL) access to it’s
data base. Application Programming Interface (API) shall make possible future extensions
that exceed the functions defined in this specification.
7.3.5
System Safety and Reliability
The apparatus and modules of the microprocessor-based substation protection and
control system shall be self-monitoring. Failure of a module or component shall be
immediately detected and displayed thus guaranteeing the highest availability. Depending
on the type of fault detected the affected module shall either be reset or blocked. Failure
of a single module may not impact operation of other system components.
Self-monitoring and diagnostics shall comprise of:
•
Live monitoring for modules and apparatus by reply check procedures
•
Monitoring of internal auxiliary voltages
•
Memory checks
•
Software supervision by watchdog circuit
•
Continuous monitoring of all serial connections
•
LEDs on the I/O-modules to indicate internal and external faults
•
Software tools for the diagnosis of the faults –also for remote access
A loss off power may not cause the loss of configuration data. An additional battery shall
not be necessary. After restoration of power the system shall restart automatically. During
start-up all output contacts shall be reset and blocked until after the completion of the
restart with all settings being set to the default status.
To enhance availability neither fans nor mechanical disk drives or any other constantly
moving mechanical components are acceptable for use in the bay units or the Station
Control Unit.
The complete system shall be connected to the 110 V DC station batteries. All necessary
rectifiers/inverters shall be provided.
7.3.6
Maintenance
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shut-off of the
whole substation automation system.
To ease maintenance and to reduce repair time, defective modules may be replaced
without switching off the Station Control Unit
CTs shall be automatically be shortened when a related module is drawn out.
Spare processor modules requiring customized configuration data for operation shall be
pre-loadable. Being pre-loaded they shall be ready for operation immediately after
replacement without the need of loading any additional software or configuration data.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 121 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.3.7
Monitoring of High Voltage Switchgear
The integration of intelligent process devices in high voltage switchgear for control and
monitoring functions must be supported.
7.3.8
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
To avoid electromagnetic interference causing malfunction the system shall be suitable for
operation under the ambient conditions present in medium up to high voltage substations.
Microprocessor based bay units as well as the system’s Station Control Unit must be
shielded and be based on hardware components designed for operation under such
conditions. These components shall be tested according to applicable international
standards. A copy of test certificates shall be furnished to the Purchaser.
7.4
SYSTEM STRUCTURE
7.4.1
General
Engineering PC
Station HMI
Station
Control Unit
Telecontrol
Substation
level
Protection
Bay
level
Process
level
Switch Control
& Monitoring
Disconnector &
Earthswitch
Circuit Breaker
Control &
Monitoring
Circuit Breaker
Protection Trip via copper wires
Bay Units
(Control & Metering)
CTs/VTs
Transformer
Control &
Monitoring
Transformer
MDU and LCC
22kV
Switchgear
Protection,
Control &
Monitoring
CT connections via copper wires
The system shall be based on a distributed two-tier hierarchical control scheme. The
entire substation shall be controlled and supervised via a Human Machine Interface (HMI)
at the station level while the bay level equipment covers individual bays. The intelligent
process devices of the Switchgear shall be connected via serial bus to the bay level
equipment (Bay Units).
The system shall be formed by microprocessor-based components:
•
Station Control Unit
•
I/O Modules
•
HMI, operator console
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 122 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
I/O Units (Bay Units)
•
Numerical Feeder Protection
•
Combined Protection and Control Units
•
Numerical Switchgear Interlocking Units
System hardware and software is to be scaleable and configurable standard type as
employed for other similar projects. For future modifications or extensions it is to be easily
extendible by adding new components. For new components having the same
functionality as the original system, additional programming shall not be required, only the
configuration data shall be adapted. All software tools required for this purpose have to be
included in the scope of supply.
The system must be a fully coordinated system, and shall ensure:
•
A common data base for all alarms and fault records which come from bay units,
control units, protection relays or I/O modules,
•
Complete operation and analysis using the same software package.
7.4.2
Station Level
The Station Control Unit shall provide substation level protection and control functions
based on the exchanged high-speed peer-to-peer communication messages over the
substation LAN. It shall also provide the Human Machine Interface functionality with the
different IEDs in the substation. It shall support alarm and event reporting, data archiving,
analysis, monitoring, etc.
It shall also include interfaces for communication with the Network Control Centre /
Process Control Centre. Communication shall be based on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
7.4.3
Bay Level
Numerical protective IEDs and Bay Units at the bay level are to be related to individual
feeders.
Bay Units are to be connected to intelligent process devices integrated in the high voltage
switchgear. Bay units shall be independent of each other and any fault that occurs at the
station level or any other bay shall not affect the operation.
The bay units are to constantly collect and pre-process status information, alarms and
measured values from the switchgear. The pre-processed data is to be transmitted to the
Station Control Unit on request for further processing and display. Bay units are to release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the operator at the Station Level, and they
must provide local control capability.
7.4.4
Process Level
Intelligent Process Modules shall be installed directly at the HV breakers, disconnect
switches, CT/VT transformers, Power Transformers and other equipment which will
perform the required functions on the process level. These devices are the following:
•
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring Devices
•
Switch Control and Monitoring Devices
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 123 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Transformer Control & Monitoring Devices
The following substation equipment shall either be connected to the process level or
directly to the Station Control Unit:
•
DC Battery Chargers
•
LV AC Switchboard
•
Fire Alarm System
•
Fire Fighting Equipment
•
132kV GIS and 22kV Room Temperatures
7.4.4.1
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring Device
The Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring Device shall be mounted at the circuit breaker
in the housing of the operating mechanism or for GIS switchgear in the local control
cubicle, which is fixed on the switchgear, and shall be able to replace the whole
conventional control and monitoring scheme. It shall be mainly concentrated on controlling
the circuit breaker and monitoring its readiness for operation. The unit shall be connected
to the Bay Level via the Process Bus. Protection trip shall also be initiated via direct
copper wires.
The unit shall have the following characteristics:
•
Adequate Input/Output ports
•
Communication port
The unit shall perform the following functions but not limited to:
•
Motor current & voltage recording
•
Comparison with reference curves
•
Registration of voltage and ambient conditions
•
Monitoring of motor in idle state
•
Integrate a motor protection (I>)
•
Integrate a short circuit protection (I>>)
•
Supervision of Motor running time
•
Permanent supervision of the sensors
•
Calculation of the time for spring tightening
•
Calculation of the energy supplied
•
SF6-monitoring
•
Calculation and recording of the SF6-density
•
Permanent evaluation of the SF6- gas values
•
Indications:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 124 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
⇒ Loss of SF6 alarm
⇒ General lockout SF6
•
Permanent self-monitoring
•
Tripping coil circuit supervision
•
Supervision of the communication channels
•
Cyclic check of the A/D converters
•
Supervision of the auxiliary voltages
7.4.4.2
Switch Control and Monitoring Device
The Switch Control and Monitoring Device shall be mounted directly in the motor housing
of the HV Disconnector and Earthing Switch or for GIS switchgear in the local control
cubicle which is fixed on the switchgear and shall be able to replace the whole
conventional control scheme. It shall be mainly concentrated on controlling and monitoring
all sensors and actuators of the Disconnector and Earth Switch. The unit shall be
connected to the Station Level and Bay Level via the Process Bus.
The unit shall have the following characteristics:
•
Adequate Input/Output ports
•
Communication port
The unit shall perform the following functions but not limited to:
•
Motor current & voltage recording
•
Comparison with reference curves
•
Calculation of the motor running time
•
Registration of voltage and ambient conditions
•
Monitoring of motor in idle state
•
Integrate a motor protection (I>)
•
Integrate a short circuit protection (I>>)
•
Permanent self-monitoring
•
Supervision of the communication channels
•
Cyclic check of the A/D converters
•
Supervision of the auxiliary voltages
•
Permanent supervision of the sensors
7.4.4.3
7.4.4.3.1
Transformer Control and Monitoring
Voltage Regulating Relays
Automatic Voltage Control of Transformers shall be initiated by Voltage Regulating Relays
mounted at the 22kV Incoming Cubicles, supplied by one of the following manufacturers:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 125 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen – Germany
•
ABB - Relays and Network Control – Finland
The reference voltage to the relay shall be obtained from the LV side of a voltage
transformer of ratio 22000-11000/110, having class 1 accuracy to EN 60044 - 2. The relay
voltage reference balance point shall be adjustable.
The relay bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1,5 and 2,5
times the transformer tap step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the transformer
step percentage.
The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation between the limits of 47Hz and 51Hz.
The relay shall be complete with a time delay element adjustable between 10 and 120
seconds. The relay shall also incorporate an under voltage blocking facility which renders
the control inoperative if a reference voltage falls below 80% of the nominal value with
automatic restoration of control when the reference voltage rises to 85% of nominal value.
The LV voltage transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay shall be monitored for
partial or complete failure with the exception when the circuit breaker controlling the 2211kV side is open or when the tap changer is on manual control.
The relay shall have the following characteristics:
•
Adequate Input/Output ports
•
Communication interfaces for connection with Process Level
The unit shall perform the following functions but not limited to:
•
Parallel control of 3 Transformers
•
Control using circulating current method
•
Control of motor drive unit using the step-by-step method
•
Adjustment of all configurations for the measuring transformers
•
Parameter setting via a PC
•
Remote/Supervisory control
•
Raise/Lower pushbuttons
•
Auto/Manual pushbuttons
•
Voltage reference adjuster
•
Voltage indication
•
Tap Position indication
7.4.4.3.2
Monitoring Device
The Transformer shall be monitored for the following:
•
Buchholz Gas
•
Winding Temperature – Stage 1
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 126 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Oil Temperature
•
Low Oil Level
•
Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail
•
OLTC AC Fail
•
Monitoring of fans
•
AC fail
In addition to trips initiated by differential, restricted earth fault, or overcurrent relays,
direct trips via copper conductors shall be given to the relevant circuit breakers under the
following conditions:
•
Buchholz Oil surge
•
OLTC Oil surge
•
Winding temperature – Stage 2
•
Pressure Relief Operated
•
Buchholz Oil Surge – Earthing Transformer
7.5
STATION CONTROL UNIT
The Station Control Unit wherein the substation database resides shall be a multi-micro
processor computer system. Different microprocessors are to perform different tasks such
as database and system management or communication. Software as well as
configuration data shall be stored in non-volatile EPROM, EEPROM or NV RAM. The
Station Control Unit shall be easy configurable and extendible by plugging additional
modules into free slots and if required, adding extension racks to increase the number of
slots. Only the configuration data is to be updated. The extensions shall not require any
firmware modifications. The different slots of the Station Control Unit shall be
interconnected via an internal bus integrated into a back plane. Future extensions shall
not require any modifications.
7.5.1
Tasks
The Station Control Unit shall permanently monitor itself and all subsystems and shall poll
data from the bay units and I/O modules. This data shall comprise of time tagged
switchgear status information, system status information, alarms, measured values,
metered values and fault records from protective IEDs. The Station Control Unit shall
update the real-time system database and transmit selected data to its communication
processors, which shall pass it on to the network control centre or the HMI(s).
The Station Control Unit shall be capable to connect and exchange data via a bus with
other substation control and monitoring systems or operator stations. Control and monitor
via HMI of all substations connected to this LAN shall be possible.
Beside those general tasks mentioned the Station Control Unit shall perform enhanced
automation functions which include:
•
Station wide automatic control sequences
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 127 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Station wide interlocking
•
Processing of analogue values, e.g., threshold monitoring and alarming
•
Command output time monitoring including the reset of the output contacts after
successful switching
7.5.2
Communication Interfaces
The Station Control Unit shall be equipped with interfaces for communication with:
•
Network control centre(s)
•
Bay units
•
Test and diagnosis PC for commissioning and trouble shooting
•
Time synchronization via a GPS
•
HMI
•
Other Station Control Units, HMIs and bay units
Depending on the application the interfaces shall either be Ethernet connection RS232,
RS422/RS485 or Fibre Optic.
7.5.3
Telecontrol Interface
Telecontrol interfaces for communication with higher-level control centres shall be an
integral part of the Station Control Unit. High performance communication processors
shall manage the data exchange between the Substation Controller and the Control
Centre. Commands, alarms, events, status information, measured and metered values
shall be transmitted to make remote operation of an unmanned substation possible from
the network control centre.
The Network Control Centre uses a 2-wire, 1200-baud, ABB type 23WT22 Modem and
therefore Station Control Unit shall be equipped with a compatible Modem.
The required SCADA signals are detailed in Chapter “Items of Equipment”.
Communication shall be based on protocol IEC60870-5-101.
7.5.4
LAN Interface
Modules for communication via Industrial Ethernet connection, RS232, RS422/RS485 or
Fibre shall be available for the Station Control Unit and the HMI to connect to other
Station Control Units, HMIs or third-party equipment. The databases shall be accessible
via those links. Software to develop the required interfaces and protocols shall also be
available.
7.5.5
Time Synchronization
The Station Control Unit is to include an interface for time synchronization by GPS
signals. Synchronization shall also be possible with messages from the Network Control
Centre or by one pulse per minute from an external clock. It shall synchronize the
microprocessors of the bay units and I/O modules via its serial interfaces.
It must be possible to synchronize the whole system from one source.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 128 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.5.6
I/O-Modules
Slots for different types of I/O-modules shall be an integral part of the Station Control Unit.
The Station Control Unit should be fully extensible. It must be possible to replace the
modules without switching off the Station Control Unit. Further requirements to be fulfilled:
•
The modules shall be protected against touch by a module capsule consisting of
housing shell and cover. They shall have a protection rating of IP20 and provided with
ESD protection.
•
Real time acquisition of process changes
•
Spontaneous acquisition of events
•
Operating and diagnostic indicators: All modules shall be equipped with LEDs on the
front of the housing capsule for the indication of operating states, and internal and
external errors.
•
Process indicators: The digital input, control output and control modules should be
equipped with LEDs indicating the status of the process inputs and outputs. The
process indicators shall be directly assigned to the connection terminals on the front of
the housing capsule.
•
Coding element: Confusion of the connection cables has to be prevented by snapping
in a coding element on each of the function modules and on the front plug connector.
7.6
7.6.1
OPERATOR CONSOLE
Components
An operator console shall be made up of a PC with operating system Windows 2000
running a HMI software package. It is to be connected to the Station Control Unit(s) via a
substation LAN. Up to two HMIs should be connectable to this LAN. Future extensions
shall be possible.
A printer shall be provided to continuously print out the chronological event list and to print
out historical event data and records of analogue values.
7.6.2
Functional Requirements
The HMI shall display switchgear status by a customized overview and by detailed single
line diagrams with colour mimic display of the different switchgear components which
represent status including, but not being limited to, measured values, metered values and
transformer tap position. On-line alarm list and event list shall provide additional
information on historical and present substation status. Multi window capability is required
to present detailed information from different plant sections simultaneously on one screen.
The system shall be suitable to be extended to multi-display mode to control the plant
from different locations. Typical display update time shall be one second. A printer shall
continuously print out time tagged event and alarm data.
The HMI package is to include all software and configuration data for this plant as
described below. Additional tools shall be delivered to modify the configuration on-line
without any programming or knowledge in source code, e.g. display design, alarm and
event processing and display.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 129 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
To meet future requirements and to ease the system integration into existing computer
systems of the Purchaser the software shall be open providing:
•
Access to its database for other applications using ODBC/SQL
•
Capability to integrate objects from other applications (OLE)
•
Dynamic data exchange with other windows applications (DDE)
•
API and related development kit to access the functions of the package with thirdparty software
All displays shall be fully graphical; the colour screen shall present customized displays.
An overview diagram shall show a simplified single line diagram of the entire substation
intended to give a rapid overview on the switchgear layout and its status. The overview
diagram must show:
•
Which feeder is connected to which Busbar
•
How the Busbar sections are interconnected
•
In which feeder there are alarms ready to be acknowledged
•
Busbar voltages
•
Buttons to open other windows
In the overview diagrams, no control or acknowledgement shall be permissible. The
operator has to select a detail diagram where the action may be carried out.
Via buttons in the overview diagram windows presenting detail diagrams of different plant
sections can be opened. Those detail diagrams show all relevant information of feeders,
such as:
•
Status of switches, operational equipment, auxiliary equipment
•
Alarms
•
Metered values
•
Measured values, e.g., current, voltages, power
In the detail picture details of station components can be controlled.
7.6.2.1
Event and Alarm List
The system shall display an event and an alarm list on the screen and archive this
information on the hard disc of the PC. Via buttons in the overview diagram the related
window is opened. One line shall be displayed for each event and alarm comprising the
following information:
•
Time tag with date, hour, minute, second, millisecond,
•
Information with
⇒ Voltage level
⇒ Bay
⇒ Text of the information
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 130 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Value
•
Cause
•
Destination of the command/information
The memory management for the lists shall be configurable by the operator to modify the
time period for recording. Software tools shall be available to export data from the
database to a mass memory to keep a copy of all historical sequence of event data.
Serious alarms displayed in the alarm list requiring to be acknowledged by the operator
shall be marked.
7.6.2.2
Switchgear Control
Sequence of single operation steps. If an operation step is not permissible it shall be
rejected by the system. No more than one command shall be executed at the same time.
A new command may not be released before the previous one has been executed or
cancelled.
To control a circuit breaker or switch the operator shall have to run through the following
procedure:
•
Selecting the switch: A click with the left mouse button on the switch symbol opens the
popup window for choosing the actuating direction. The mouse pointer has to change
its appearance if the mouse is within a region in the picture where mouse clicks are
possible. ToolTips shall give the user additional information.
•
Selecting the actuating direction: Choosing the actuating direction by clicking the
corresponding button in the popup window shall define the command and open the
popup window for command output.
•
Outputting the command: Upon clicking the Execute button in the popup window, the
command shall be executed.
The colour of the switch symbol has to depend upon its state. For the following states,
different colours have to be defined:
•
Normal state
•
Value not up to date
•
HMI state not OK
The switch symbol has to flash spontaneously as soon as the value of the tag assigned to
it has changed and spontaneous has been indicated as the cause, e.g. if a circuit breaker
was opened by a protection trip.
During command output, the switch symbol has to start flashing as soon as the set
actuating direction (ON or OFF) has been chosen. It shall stop flashing when the
command is terminated or aborted.
7.6.2.3
Display and Archiving of Analogue and Metered Values
The HMI is to store historical analogue data continuously with a time interval userdefinable from 500 ms to 1 day in the database. The archived data shall cover measured
analogue values and metered values.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 131 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The data is to be displayed in diagrams and charts. The operator may select the values
and the time period to be displayed, zoom the diagrams and read out values. Settings for
recording and display e.g. time resolution or values to be stored can be modified by the
operator on-line.
An additional tool that comprises at least the functions listed below, shall be available to
process the data stored in the data base:
•
Read out the data from the data base
•
Display the data in diagrams and tables
•
Calculate and display average values (15 min, per hour, per day)
•
Calculate and display minimum and maximum values (15 min, per hour, per day)
The management and the size for the database shall be configurable by the operator.
7.6.2.4
Reporting
The system shall support the operator in creating and printing user-defined reports. The
data for these reports shall cover:
•
Current event and alarm data
•
Archived event and alarm data
•
Diagrams and charts of archived analogue values
•
Hard copies
•
Operator reports
•
System configuration data
The layout shall be user defined, a print preview shall ease the design. Printing of predefined reports can be initiated by events, time schedules, or by the operator.
7.6.2.5
Password Protection
To minimize the risk, which might be caused by unauthorized access, the system must be
password protected. Different groups of users with different jurisdictions shall be
definable, e.g., for monitoring only, for monitoring and control, for configuration, or for
supervision.
7.6.3
Operation Levels and Control Mode Selection
Each of the hierarchical operation levels shall have the possibility to block commands
from all higher levels. The operation level having currently the proper authority to control
the switchgear shall be indicated at the HMI screen and the control centre. A change in
control authority shall be logged in the event list. The following modes of operation shall
be provided:
(a) LOCAL LEVEL
Mode selected via local/remote switch at the process level:
•
LOCAL: Emergency control via push buttons that are independent of the control or
interlocking system.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 132 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
REMOTE: Operation either from
⇒ BAY LEVEL or
⇒ Station Level or
⇒ Control Centre Level
(b) BAY LEVEL
Mode selected at Bay panel:
•
LOCAL/EMERGENCY: Operation without interlocking function. This mode shall be
used as back-up control when the control system is down.
•
LOCAL: Operation with interlocking function via an independent interlocking unit.
•
REMOTE: Operation either from
⇒ STATION LEVEL or
⇒ Control Centre Level
(c) STATION LEVEL
Mode of control selected via the HMI:
•
Local: Operation via HMI at the station control room.
•
Remote: Operation from the control centre.
7.7
BAY UNITS
7.7.1
Bay Units for Transmission Feeders
At the bay level, Bay Units shall communicate with their respective Intelligent Process
Devices.
They shall collect all switchgear information provided by the Intelligent Process Devices
and transmit it to the Station Control Unit.
They shall be the input for all ac-analogue values from CTs and VTs. The analogue
values shall be sampled at a high rate and pre-processed to calculate a variety of
measurement values. The CTs and VTs shall also be directly connected to the Protection
devices via direct copper wires.
It shall be equipped with a large LCD where process and device information can be
displayed as a one-line diagram or as text in different lists.
Their general tasks cover:
•
Controlling of the switchgear via keyboard and display
•
Control figure in display can consist of several pages
•
Implementation of automation sequences
•
Inter-bay communication and exchange of information with other Bay Units without the
Station Control Unit
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 133 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Standalone operation without the Station Control Unit
•
Release of commands
•
Collecting of information from intelligent process devices
•
Supervision of the communication channels
•
Cyclic check of the A/D converters
•
Supervision of the auxiliary voltages
•
Calculation of the rms values of current and voltage
•
Calculation of P, Q, S, φ, cosφ, sinφ, f
•
Synchro-check
•
Display measured values and status information.
•
Self-monitoring routines
Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the
rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threaded pin must be welded on the housing and
the surface surrounding the pin must be coated with high circuit capacity conducting
material.
7.7.2
Bay-Units for Distribution Feeders
Bay Units shall include all the necessary functions for the protection of distribution feeders
and the control and monitor of the circuit breakers in a straight bus system.
All the necessary information concerning the feeder should be transmitted to the Station
Control Unit via the communication interface.
It shall be equipped with a large LCD where process and device information can be
displayed as a one-line diagram or as text in different lists.
Their general tasks cover:
•
Protective Functions (Options as per Schedule):
⇒ Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent Protection –Characteristics according to EN
60255 standard
⇒ Instantaneous Overcurrent
⇒ Sensitive Earthfault (Option)
⇒ Autoreclosing (Option)
⇒ Under/Over Frequency
⇒ Under/Over Voltage
⇒ Breaker Failure
⇒ Reverse Blocking
⇒ Switch on to Fault
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 134 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Control Functions:
⇒ Open/Close of circuit breakers
⇒ Open/Close of Disconnector
⇒ Open/Close of earth switch
⇒ Monitoring of above conditions via double pole auxiliary contacts
⇒ Interlocking checks
•
Monitoring Functions:
⇒ Self-Monitoring of internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware and
software
⇒ Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits
⇒ Trip circuit monitoring
•
Measuring Functions
⇒ Current
⇒ Voltage
⇒ Real & Reactive power
⇒ Power factor
•
Other Functions
⇒ Recording and saving of fault data in chronological order of the last faults
⇒ Recording and saving of waveform capture
⇒ Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals and the
accumulated interrupted currents
⇒ Commissioning aids
Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the
rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threaded pin must be welded on the housing and
the surface surrounding the pin must be coated with high circuit capacity conducting
material.
7.8
SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM
A switchgear interlocking system independent of the substation control system must
prevent inadmissible switching commands to protect persons and to avoid either damage
of equipment and blackout of lines or of the entire grid.
The function and design of the switchgear interlocking systems shall be extremely reliable
and safe. Real-time monitoring and processing of all switchgear positions of the whole
substation must be ensured at any time and unclear information, such as intermediate
switchgear positions, switchgear fault, faulty data transfer, etc., must never allow
switching operations.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 135 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Miss operation of control and regulation facilities such as on-load switching of an isolator,
out of step operation of on-load tap changer control, CB close during asynchronous status
etc., must be blocked. If the station level control and regulation facilities fail, back-up
emergency control must be possible through the interlocking system.
The system shall be designed in such a way that the interlock conditions consider the
status of the whole substation. It shall be distinguished between bay and Station wide
interlocking conditions.
The system shall check all Station wide interlocking conditions depending on bus section
or couplers, bus-tie disconnectors, Busbar earthing etc., e.g. to avoid closing of both
isolators of a double Busbar feeder when the bus-tie is open. The bay units shall check
the interlocking conditions concerning the switchgear status of the respective bay and
request the other bay units to acknowledge that the Station wide interlocking conditions
are fulfilled before it releases a command.
Bay units shall be installed in the bay related control cubicles. Data exchange between
individual bay units and Station Control Unit shall take place via the communication
interfaces.
At the BAY LEVEL the interlocking units shall act as back up for the station control level,
independent of other systems. Key locks shall be integrated to select local, remote and
non-interlocked mode. Via select and execute push buttons control commands may be
initiated during local mode operation. Local control must always have priority; commands
from higher control levels must be rejected when this mode is activated.
Mal-operation of the switching device and the interlocking system itself have to be
indicated on the faceplate and signalled to the higher level control system.
In case of internal fault, the bay unit must always block execution of commands.
7.9
ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE
Different PC packages shall be included to ease operation, maintenance and
modifications of all protection and control devices. Software should run on a PC with a 32bit multitasking operating system, preferably Windows 2000.
7.9.1
System Configuration Tools
The system shall be operated with standard firmware and software and shall be adapted
to the specific substation layout and requirements by configuration. Configuration is to be
carried out using a configuration software tool. After completion of data entry the tool shall
create a configuration data file, which shall be loaded to the Station Control Unit. A
detailed report listing errors and warnings that occurred during creating the configuration
data shall be available. It shall also be possible to download the operating system of the
Station Control Unit.
The software shall be object-orientated and shall require no knowledge in source code or
programming.
The general procedure shall be identical for all steps of configuration. First a new object is
to be defined by copying it from a database with drag & drop, then it’s properties and
connections are defined via context menus, spreadsheets and functional charts.
Plausibility checks shall be performed during data entry.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 136 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Data consistency must be ensured by import/export functions between the
parameterisation tools of the Station Control Unit and the HMI.
The user shall select permissible settings from lists being displayed by the configuration
tool. The tool shall offer default settings for different components, e.g.,
•
Type dependent automatic definition of protection alarms
•
Automatic definition of complete units/boards with all connections
•
Standard setting for Telecontrol structures
•
Basic settings for units and boards
•
Catalogue with all the information of the bay devices (Drag & Drop)
Graphical configuration as described by EN 61131 using continuous function charts shall
ease definition and testing of logical operations. Import and export of listings of data being
interfaced between subsystems is required to simplify configuration.
Plausibility checks shall be automatically performed during data entry. On-line help
function must be available.
To enable the Purchaser to develop new functions the software modules shall be
accessible via APIs. Required C-compiler and documentation shall be provided.
The supplier shall offer different levels of configuration training in English language.
7.9.2
Commissioning and Trouble Shooting
To ease trouble-shooting LEDs shall display bit patterns, which indicate the status of
components and modules and give fault information in case of failure.
Software tools for commissioning and trouble-shooting shall be an integral part of the
configuration tool. The system shall prompt on-line status information from modules and
tasks to the operator.
7.9.3
Monitoring of High Voltage Switchgear
The Monitoring software should help to optimise the maintenance of the high voltage
switchgear.
It has to fulfil at least the following functions but not be limited to:
•
Collecting the data from the intelligent process devices
•
Conserving history in a database
•
Visualization of measured behaviour
•
Show trends of gas density, motor current and spring charging
•
Visualization of the current switch state
•
Password protection
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 137 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
7.10
Substation Automated System based on IEC 61850
Based on the above functional description, an IEC 61850 based substation automation
system shall be offered as an alternative.
Due to the fact that there is no wide experience on IEC 61850 based automated
substations, the Tender in addition to the requested information here below and the
design information for the particular substation, shall offer an extended guarantee for the
security and reliability of the offered system
•
Customer
•
Substation Name
•
Country
•
Voltage Level
•
Number of Bays
•
Time in Operation
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 138 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
8.
8.1
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED
SUBSTATIONS
ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES
Control and relay equipment shall be mounted on panels and boards as specified and
shall be erected in permanent buildings on the substation sites or in adjacent buildings as
specified. Except where otherwise specified, control boards shall be segregated from
metering and protection boards. Unless otherwise approved, the order of the panels shall
be as specified reading from left to right facing the board.
Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same design, colour and
appearance. Also panels provided as extensions or for erection in the same room as
existing boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the existing boards.
Equipment, meters, etc., mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style and scaling
similar to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all connections of
equipment to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully
compatible with and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment.
The characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
Control boards shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilities for the
operation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In addition, the plant
may be remotely controlled and supervised from central system control centres.
The system control and communications equipment will be supplied under a separate
contract but all necessary DC and power frequency equipment, connections including
auxiliary switches, relays, transducers and changeover switches shall be provided under
this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible under this Contract for the provision of
terminal blocks in relay and control cubicles. All circuits provided under this Contract
whether or not they are subject to the system control requirements at the present time,
shall be designed and constructed so that the standard facilities specified can be readily
provided as required in the future.
8.2
8.2.1
CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES
General Construction
Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14SWG). The
construction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other
reinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the maloperation of relays or other
apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs and the size of the
panel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-finished surface.
Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associated with only
one circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP4l degree of protection for
indoor and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorised by EN 60529 in accordance with this
Specification.
Cubicles shall be so constructed that the front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is
removable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 139 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be provided and
hinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access.
Integral handles shall secure doors and provision shall be made for padlocking. Handles
and padlocks shall not be more than 1.5 metres above floor level. Top and bottom doors
shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the cubicle.
Moulded gaskets of non-ageing material shall be used to provide close sealing.
All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point closing device (eg
Espagnolette type).
The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a matt white surface and an interior lamp
suitable for the local LVAC supply and controlled by a door operating switch, shall be fitted
at the top of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each section
and each cubicle shall be well ventilated top and bottom through vermin proof louvers
fitted with brass gauze screens.
Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall provide
for bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates and hardwood
sealing bushes.
Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a minimum of
disturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in achieving this,
cubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not exceed the
width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not be less than
that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatus mounted on
the panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicore cable terminal boards shall be
in accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification.
The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cable terminations
but separate removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as
to provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables.
Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged front
panels, these shall be designed to minimise shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to
impose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be mounted on rear
access doors.
All sections of a composite cubicle shall be suitably labelled in accordance with the
Specification and labels at the rear with the access doors either open or closed shall also
readily identify each section or panel.
The arrangement and mounting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays and
other apparatus shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The exterior finish and colour of
all cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer
8.2.2
Control Cubicles
One cubicle may accommodate apparatus associated with not more than two circuits in
which case vertical barriers must be provided within the cubicle.
8.2.3
Relay Cubicles
Separate cubicles must be provided for the protection relays associated with each primary
circuit. Equipment may be mounted on either a removable panel or a rack-type
arrangement. Each cubicle shall be provided with a front door. The door shall consist of
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 140 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
a full length and width translucent window contained in a steel frame. The window shall
allow a full view of the status of all relays mounted behind the door.
8.2.4
Outdoor Cubicles
They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mounting on concrete
foundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate.
Cubicles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates etc., for
termination of multicore cables.
Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the climate conditions
at site.
The cubicles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be well ventilated
through louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secured to the
inside of the cubicle.
Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforated to assist air
circulation.
A suitable outdoor marshalling cubicle is to be supplied for each separate bay to be
erected at the position shown on the respective drawing. Each such cubicle is to contain
all controls and terminations mentioned in these specifications and in addition the cubicles
are to have adequate space and termination for marshalling the AC and DC supplies, CT,
VT and circuit breaker outputs/signals detailed in the relevant Schedules.
8.3
CONTROLS
8.3.1
General
Control panels provided under the Contract shall afford all facilities necessary for the safe
and effective control of the plant and equipment being supplied under this and associated
contracts.
Controls at each substation shall be operated at the battery voltage of the stations, as
specified under the appropriate section of this Specification.
All switches shall be located at a convenient operating height and so constructed,
mounted and wired to facilitate the maintenance of contacts without the need to
disconnect wiring. Switches shall have locks incorporated in the design. Control switches
must be lockable in the inactive or neutral position and selector switches in all positions.
Labels shall clearly indicate all positions and function of each switch.
8.3.2
•
Control of Circuit Devices
On Local Control Cubicles the control switches for all devices and the lockable
local/remote selector switch shall be mounted behind the lockable glass panelled
front door.
Lockable control switches with spade type handles shall be provided for the
maintenance circuit earth and busbar earth switches.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 141 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Control switches with pistol grip type handles for circuit breakers and spade type
handles for both busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earth
switches shall be provided. These switches shall be lockable.
All control switches shall be effective only when local mode is selected.
A semaphore indicator is required for each device as part of the mimic diagram.
Each semaphore is to be labelled with the device identification reference.
•
On the Remote Control Panels all discrepancy switches and indicators shall form
part of the mimic diagram on the front sheet. The mimic diagram shall be labelled
with each primary device identification reference.
Discrepancy control switches with locking facilities are required for the circuit
breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earth switches as
specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
Discrepancy indicators are required for the maintenance circuit earth and busbar
earth switches. These indicators are to have the same appearance and lamp
facilities as discrepancy switches but without either operate positions or locks.
A lockable remote/supervisory selector switch shall be mounted on the front sheet
for each circuit. The control switches shall be effective only when the control mode
selector switches on both the local control cubicle and the remote control panel are
in the 'Remote' position.
•
8.3.3
Supervisory control of circuit breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators
and circuit earth switches where specified is to be effective only when the mode
selector switch on the local control cubicle is in the 'remote' position and the mode
selector on the remote control panel is in the 'supervisory' position.
Control Switches
Control switches shall be of either the handle type or, where specified, discrepancy type
and shall be arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit devices and
anticlockwise when opening. Discrepancy type switches shall be arranged so that two
discrete movements are required to effect operation, ie. from either the dressed to open or
dressed to close position the switch must be pushed in to permit rotation to the operate
positions.
Handle type switches shall be so designed that when released by the operator the handle
and mechanism shall return automatically to the centred neutral position and interrupt the
supply of current to the operating mechanism of the circuit device. Discrepancy switches
when released from the operate position shall return automatically to the associated
dressed position.
When locked it shall not be possible to move discrepancy switches to the operate
positions. They shall be free to move to either of the dressed positions.
Discrepancy switches shall not be lit when dressed to the same position as the primary
device but shall show a steady light when switch and device are in disagreement. The
switch shall show a flashing light during the period that the controlled device takes to
move fully from one position to the other.
A lamp test facility shall be provided in association with any discrepancy switch.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 142 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Pistol grip type handles shall be used for circuit breaker control switches and not for any
other switch.
All control switches shall have additional labelling giving the reference identification of the
primary device.
8.3.4
Selector Switches
Selector switches shall have spade type handles.
Where key operated switches are specified inserting and turning the key to the required
position shall operate these. The key shall be removable in the 'off' position only. All key
switches for a particular voltage level at a substation shall have a common lock change
number such that with one key available only one switch can be in an operated position at
any one time.
8.4
INDICATIONS
Control boards and panels shall be provided with mimic diagrams to the following colour
code showing the main power connections in single line schematic format at a convenient
height so as to permit ready operation of the circuit-breaker control switches and
discrepancy type indicators which shall be incorporated in such diagrams.
System Voltage kV
Colour to BS.381C
220
N.A.
132
Black
66
Golden Brown No. 414
11
Signal Red No. 537
Background
To be approved
Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with this Specification. Semaphore
indicators shall operate reliably at voltages from 120 to 80 per cent of normal. They shall
be arranged so that a supply failure does not at any time create an erroneous indication.
Position indication signals of switches and breakers for transmission by the supervisory
control scheme shall be derived from separate normally open and closed auxiliary
contacts, provided and connected up, under this Contract, to terminal blocks in the
associated control panels.
All discrepancy lamps shall be arranged to light and give an audible alarm when the
position of the circuit breaker or isolating switch is at variance with that of the indicator
and shall be arranged to extinguish when the indicator is set to the correct position.
8.5
8.5.1
SUPERVISION RELAYS
General
Each auxiliary control circuit but no trip circuit shall be protected by means of two-pole
miniature circuit breaker supplied with an auxiliary contact. The auxiliary contacts of all
mcb's of the same circuit e.g. isolators and earthing switch motor circuits, heater etc. shall
be grouped to give an alarm on the respective control panel annunciator.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 143 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
In addition to the VT no-volt relay specified for synchronising purposes, the following VT
supervision relays are required:
•
A VT fuse fail detector relay mounted in the local control cabinet for alarms and
interlocking purposes, to detect failure of all fuses.
•
A VT supply-monitoring relay mounted in the relay panel to detect loss of
protection supply for such equipment as distance or directional overcurrent and
earth fault protection. This relay should give an alarm when the circuit breaker is
closed and one or more phases of the VT output are dead.
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on d.c.
wiring on adjacent circuits, or due to operation of a trip relay contact. Series resistances
shall be provided to prevent mal-tripping a circuit-breaker if a relay element is shortcircuited. Relay alarm elements should be equipped with self-resetting flag indicators.
8.5.2
Supply Supervision Relays
Supervision relays shall be provided for both A.C. and D.C. supplies.
All protection equipment supplies shall be fully supervised and failure conditions alarmed.
Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided to monitor each trip circuit of the 132kV
circuit breakers. The relays shall have sufficient contacts for visual alarm and indication
purposes.
Supervision relays are required for each protection D.C. supply e.g. Main 1, Main 2,
Back-up, Breaker Fail, Intertrip Send/Receive, Trip Relay Reset. Similarly for each trip
circuit supply e.g. Trip Circuit 1 and Trip Circuit 2 and for each alarms/indications supply.
These supervision relays are to be independent of alarms from the trip circuit supervision
scheme specified in the following paragraphs so that the operator can clearly differentiate
via the available alarms between loss of supply due to a blown fuse/tripped MCB and
failure of a trip circuit supervision relay coil/faulty supervision wiring.
8.5.3
Trip Circuit Supervision Relays
The trip circuit supervision scheme shall monitor the continuity of the circuit breaker trip
coils and as much of the associated tripping wires as possible in either the open or closed
position and independent of the selected operating position. The relay shall also supervise
the alarm supply. The scheme shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The relay shall be able to monitor the coils with the circuit breaker in the open or closed
position. The circuit shall be arranged so that any failure of the supervising relay coil
(short or open circuit or earth fault) will not prevent a trip signal opening the breaker or
cause inadvertent opening of the circuit breaker.
8.6
BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION
For each line feeder a three-phase voltage transformer is to be provided by others, for this
reason an automatic voltage selection scheme shall be provided to derive a busbar
voltage reference from the circuit voltage transformers. The paralleling of voltage
transformer secondary windings is not permitted.
The scheme shall employ voltage transformer secondary windings with the neutral point
earthed and synchronising across Brown (L1) and Black (L2) phases.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 144 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
8.7
8.7.1
SYNCHRONISING
General
Where specified, manual check synchronising facilities shall be employed for all
circuit-breakers controlling feeder circuits, bus section and bus coupler circuits.
The system provided under the Contract is to be to the approval of the Engineer and is to
be such that the synchronising circuit must be established before the circuit-breaker can
be closed.
Synchronising systems and equipment provided as extensions to existing systems are to
provide identical facilities and be of similar style and design to the existing equipment.
Synchronising check relays shall check the phase and magnitude of the voltage difference
at synchronising with contacts connected to prevent inadvertent manual synchronising
outside acceptable limits. Synchronising check relays shall also be used, where
specified, for the automatic reclosing of the feeder circuits equipped with autoreclosing
facilities.
Synchronising check relays shall not operate when any auxiliary supply is absent. A
voltage check feature shall be incorporated to inhibit synchronising if either voltage is less
than a preset value, which shall be adjustable in steps from 80% to 90% of nominal rated
voltage. The synchronising relay shall prevent closure when the phase difference
exceeds 35o, but alternative settings ranging from 20o to 45o at least shall be available
also. Closure shall be prevented also if the slip frequency exceeds a setting, which shall
be adjustable over the approximate range 0,25% - 0,1%.
A guard feature shall be provided to monitor the contacts of the check synchronising
relays to ensure that these are not welded together or otherwise permanently closed.
Should the latter condition be detected, closing of the circuit breaker shall be blocked.
The relay should be capable of operating with either single phase or two phase "running"
and "incoming" voltages.
The relay should be capable of having two parallel functions: a synchro check function
and a voltage check function.
A voltage transformer-monitoring relay shall be so wired using normally open and
normally closed contacts to block the synchro-check process in case of VT supply failure.
Each circuit shall be provided with a synchronising selection switch to enable
MANUAL-OFF-CHECK positions to be selected. This switch shall be key operated, the
key being released in the OFF position only. In both the MANUAL and CHECK position
the synchronising instruments shall be connected to the appropriate voltage transformers
and the circuit-breaker closing circuit prepared. This switch shall operate for the remote
control mode only and shall be rendered inoperative when supervisory control is selected.
The burden imposed on either the running or incoming supply shall not exceed 5 VA.
The check synchronising operation shall be initiated by the remote circuit-breaker control
switch, this mode of operation shall cause the synchronising selector relay to be sealed in
for a period of 5 seconds to ensure completion of the synchronising operation. At the end
of this period the equipment shall restore to its de- energised condition.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 145 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
When supervisory control mode is selected a specific command signal shall cause the
synchronising selection arrangement to be made independently of the above
MANUAL-OFF-CHECK switch.
This will be followed by a breaker close command, which shall be arranged to operate in a
similar way to the remote close command.
Synchronising facilities will not be used in association with the supervisory control scheme
and synchronising signals will not be transmitted.
8.7.2
Synchronising Panel
Where specified, substations shall have a synchronising panel situated preferably in the
centre of the control panel suite with a draw out synchronising panel and hinged such that
it can be viewed easily from either end of the control panel or it may be mounted at the
end of the control board.
The synchronising panel shall be equipped with incoming and running voltmeters
calibrated in percent, synchroscope, frequency indicator, bright synchronising lamps and
synchronising key rest position. A switch shall be provided with each synchroscope to
enable it to be disconnected and the voltmeters left in circuit. The connections of
regulating voltmeters shall be arranged so that they are connected in circuit by means of
the synchronising selection arrangement of any panel equipped with synchronising
voltage transformers.
Synchronising check relays and under frequency relays, where specified, shall be
mounted in either the bus section or coupler control panel.
8.8
INDICATING LAMPS
A switch shall be provided on the bus section or coupler panel labelled "Substation
Attended"/"Substation Unattended" so that all indicating lamps can be switched off, if so
desired, at unattended substations.
Normally energised indicating lamps, if employed, shall in general be normally energised
from the station LVAC supply.
Lamps and relays incorporated in alarm facia equipment may be arranged for normal
operation from the station battery, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Lamp fittings shall allow adequate ventilation and allow for easy removal for replacement
of the lamp in the event of failure.
All indicating lamps and lamp holder assemblies shall be suitable for continuous operation
at the maximum site ambient temperature.
Indicating lamps and lamp holders shall be arranged so that replacement of lamps and the
cleaning of glasses and reflectors employed can be readily effected.
To reduce heating and fouling of the panels, lamps, which are continuously illuminated,
shall have the minimum consumption consistent with good visibility of indications in a
brightly-lit room.
Spare lamps of 100% of each type and size shall be provided.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 146 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Indicating lamp glasses on control and relay panels shall conform to the following
standard colour code:
Colour of Glass
Indication
Red
Device closed
Green
Device open
White
Indications normally alight
Amber
Alarm indication (on which
action is necessary)
Blue
Circuit earthed
Lamp test facilities shall be provided so that all lamps on one panel can be tested
simultaneously by operation of a common key. Where alarm facias are specified, all
alarm and monitoring indications (apart from circuit-breaker and isolator position
indications) shall be incorporated in the facia.
8.9
ALARM SCHEMES
Alarm schemes for equipment at extensions of existing stations shall be linked with and
be fully consistent with existing alarm schemes.
Alarms shall be sub-divided into trip and non-trip functions and each arranged to operate
a common bell or buzzer as specified.
Means shall be provided for silencing alarms whilst leaving the bell or buzzer free to
sound if any other alarm circuit is energised.
Annunciators shall be grouped on a per circuit basis with station alarms on a common
panel. Each group shall have accept, reset test push buttons. When an alarm is initiated
an audible alarm shall sound and the facia lamp shall flash. Operation of the accept
button shall silence the audible alarm and set the facia to show a steady light.
An acknowledgement button shall also be mounted on a common panel, which will silence
the audible alarm initiated by any annunciator on that suite of panels. The annunciator
shall however remain in the flashing mode until individual accepted and reset.
Annunciators that are initiated from signals of short duration (fleeting alarms) shall be
retained by the equipment through the audible, flashing and steady state sequence.
Operation of the reset button shall clear the annunciation but this button shall not be
effective until after the alarm has been accepted. Where a fleeting alarm is re-initiated
after acceptance but before reset, the annunciator shall return to the first state of audible
alarm and flashing facia.
Annunciators which are initiated from signals of a long duration (persistent alarms) shall
not reset until the initiating device returns to the normal non-alarm state.
Annunciator circuits shall be readily adaptable for use with either fleeting or persistent
alarm initiation signals. Spare ways shall be fully equipped, half of which should be ready
to accept fleeting alarms.
The test button on equipment of each circuit shall operate a full functional test sequence
on the associated annunciators including the spare ways.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 147 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The flasher relays shall be arranged to be cut-out by the auxiliary contacts of the
"substation Attended/Substation Unattended" switch, which is specified.
When no alarm facia is specified alarms shall be displayed by means of individual lamps
mounted on the control panels.
Where multi-window alarm fascias are specified, individual display of alarms should be in
accordance with the Schedule of Requirements.
Where no separate control panel is specified for the Bus Section the common alarms
together with the discrepancy indicators for the bus section isolators, should be
accommodated on the two control panels, which are adjacent to the Bus Section.
The facia legends shall comprise black letters on a white background, which should not
be of the 'secret' type. The duration of the lamp flash shall be such that the legend can be
easily read with not more than 3 flashes per second.
The design of the facia shall be such that a coloured screen or bulb cap can be added at
a later date.
All lamps shall be accessible from the front.
Facilities shall be provided to enable the whole alarm and indication equipment to work
into a Remote/Supervisory System.
The operation of the substation attended/unattended switch shall not affect the sending of
alarms to the control centre.
The alarm annunciator equipment shall be equipped with initiation repeat contacts.
Where supervisory alarm initiation contacts are not provided directly on a particular device
these repeat contacts may be used. The repeat contacts must mimic exactly the
operation of the contact on the initiating device so that both remote and SCADA alarm
systems operate independently.
Where stabilising power packs are used these shall be on a per circuit group basis and
output monitored. Failure shall be alarmed on a per circuit basis using an alternative a.c.
source. A contact shall also be available and wired out to give a SCADA repeat alarms
failure per circuit.
Both the audible alarm and all fascias, other than supply failure, shall be cancelled
automatically after a time delay. The timer shall be adjustable over wide limits and shall be
fitted with an override control switch mounted on the front of the common panel.
8.10
RELAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES
All relays shall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspection or adjustment
is less than 450 mm or more than 2 metres above floor level. Where practicable the
clearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less than 30 mm and in
no case less than 25 mm.
Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and
withdrawable.
Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriate phase
identification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addition to the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 148 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
labelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components shall be
identified from the rear of the panels.
The use of permanently energised relays shall be kept to a minimum and where approved
these shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery.
Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the
isolation of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other work on the panel
without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels. Carriers
and bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloured white for links and black for
fuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. As an alternative
to fuses and links, miniature circuit breakers will be accepted.
Where miniature air circuit-breakers are used on control, protection and alarm supplies,
tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed.
Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not be accepted. Fuse
holders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of
screw clamping devices.
Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mounting of fuses and
links shall conform with the existing panels, MCBs fuses and links associated with tripping
circuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bottom of the front face
of relay and control boards.
Other links, fuses and Mcb’s shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of
the cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped and spaced
according to their function in order to facilitate identification.
Spare fuses and Mcb’s of at least 50% of each type and size shall be provided and
delivered to the Purchaser.
Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size M6 hexagon
nuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronze or stainless
steel.
All incoming circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall be fed through
insulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottom terminal, which
shall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded
so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is
withdrawn.
Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are
on a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud terminals.
Setscrews shall not be used.
8.11
INSTRUMENTS
All instruments shall be of the flush mounting type and shall be fitted with non-reflecting
glass.
All instruments and apparatus shall be capable of carrying their full load currents without
undue heating. They shall not be damaged by the passage of fault currents within the
rating of the associated switchgear through the primaries of their corresponding
instrument transformers. All instruments and apparatus shall be back connected and the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 149 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
cases thereof shall be earthed. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment of
instruments without dismantling.
All voltage circuits to instruments shall be protected by a fuse in each unearthed phase of
the circuit placed as close as practicable to the instrument transformer terminals, or,
where instruments are direct-connected, as close as practicable to the main connection.
All power factor indicators shall have the star point of their current coils brought out to a
separate terminal, which shall be connected to the star point of the instrument current
transformer secondary windings.
All indicating instrument scales shall be clearly divided and indelibly marked and the
pointers shall be of clean outline. The marking on the dials shall be restricted to the scale
marking. Instrument transformer ratios, maker's name and accuracy grades shall not
appear on the dials. Busbar voltmeters shall be calibrated while hot.
Instrument scales shall be submitted for approval. All instruments mounted on the same
panel shall be of similar style and appearance. Instruments shall have 2400 circular
scales.
Interposing current transformers shall be used in all instances where the instruments or
transducers are not designed to carry full fault current.
8.12
CABLE TERMINATIONS
For the reception of external cables removable gland plates shall be provided.
All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to the equipment
fitted boards shall seal them. These shall be of an approved, non-flammable, insulating,
vermin- proof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20 mm above the
gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or conduits.
Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate.
Separate gland plates shall be provided for each circuit plate with glands suitable for
PVC/PVC/SWA PVC cable.
8.13
TESTING FACILITIES
Testing facilities for secondary injection of current transformers and protective relay
systems shall be provided. These facilities shall be such that testing can be carried out
without disconnection of any permanent wiring.
If these facilities are provided as part of draw-out type relays any test plug appropriate to
the design shall be provided.
8.14
EARTHING
All control or relay panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 85
mm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged so that the bars of
adjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All joints shall be tinned.
The common earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main
station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than 85 mm2
Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall be connected to
this bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 150 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in
themselves and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible
position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled.
The links shall be of the bolted type, having M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.
8.15
8.15.1
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS
General
A separate floor mounting marshalling cabinet shall be provided by others to form the
interface between the switchgear in the substation yard and the remote supervisory
control equipment. The rest of the measuring, indication and control functions shall be
marshalled in the remote control panels and/or relay panels.
In addition to the standard requirements for control/relay panels and marshalling kiosks
specified in this document each termination shall incorporate terminal blocks, each
terminal of which, with the exception of those connected to current transformer circuitry,
shall be provided with an open-circuiting link which may be operated without disturbing the
connected wiring.
Terminations connected to current transformers circuitry shall be provided with shorting
links on the switchgear side of the terminals, which may be operated without disturbing
the connected wiring.
Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the related
circuit description (eg feeder circuit, transformer circuit etc.).
The plant side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits.
Intermixing of circuit terminations will not be accepted. The SCADA side terminal blocks
shall be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Control. All
cross connections facilities between the terminal blocks shall be supplied under this
Contract.
All supervisory indicating devices, alarm initiating devices and controls etc. shall be
arranged as required to ensure satisfactory operation in conjunction with the supervisory
channel. Further, the duration of the pulse employed by the supervisory channel
equipment, shall be two seconds and any further delay required by the Switchgear
contractor for the satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be arranged under this
contract.
8.15.2
Reception of Remote Controls
Wiring to enable the following signals to be received from the tele-metering and
supervisory equipment is to be cabled to the marshalling cabinet.
•
Control (trip/close) of all circuit breakers.
•
Control (open/close) of all power operated disconnectors.
•
Resetting of electrically reset type trip relays.
Interposing relays are to be provided under this contract in the control or relay panels with
contacts capable of handling the switchgear tripping and closing currents. The operating
coils of these relays are to be suitable for operation from a 50V battery and shall have a
resistance to suit the supervisory control scheme automatic checking facility; all relay coil
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 151 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
resistances shall be identical and the value required till be determined during the design
stage.
8.15.3
Teleprotection Signals
At the protective relay panels, the cables for the teleprotection signals are to be
terminated on terminals, which are wired directly to isolating links. This is to enable the
teleprotection equipment to be readily isolated from the protective relays and the 110V
d.c. tripping and control supplies. Disconnecting links incorporated in the terminal blocks
will not be accepted for this purpose.
For each discrete intertripping channel, a two-position test switch ("Test/service") is to be
installed on the front of the relay panel to enable the functioning of the intertripping
channel to be tested. the switch is to be lockable and provided with a lock and duplicate
keys. An indication lamp is to be provided for indicating that the test switch is in the "test"
position. A pushbutton is to be provided to initiate a test trip signal to the teleprotection
equipment. A second indicating lamp shall be provided to indicate that a test trip signal
has been received from the remote station.
8.16
MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Protection and control schemes should, in general, be based on the use of single 1.5 mm2
cores, except where 1/0,9 (0,8) mm telephone cores are specified.
8.17
8.17.1
TRANSDUCERS
General
To provide the Supervisory Control Centre with an accurate view of the network situation,
transducers shall be required as specified. The transducers will be driven from the
substation VTs and CTs.
The transducers shall be installed in the respective control panels.
The Transducers shall comply with EN 60688 and the requirements listed below.
Transducers shall be of the static type.
The Transducer output shall be proof against short-circuit and open-circuit conditions and
shall be rated to drive a load of up to at least 1000 Ohms connected to the SCADA
interface terminals (after allowing for any other loads).
User adjustment of Transducer output shall be provided. All necessary instructions for
adjustment and calibration shall be provided. The Tenderer shall suggest calibration
instruments for the approved types of transducers.
Transducers connected to CT secondary windings shall have a short-term overload
withstand capability of 25 times rated input current for 3 seconds. Additionally, the current
circuits shall withstand twice the rated current continuously. The continuous overload
rating of the transducers shall not be less than 1.3 times the rated voltage and 2 times the
rated current.
The burden imposed upon a CT circuit by a Transducer shall not exceed 1 VA. The
corresponding burden imposed upon a VT circuit shall not exceed 2 VA.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 152 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Auxiliary electrical supplies required for Transducer operation shall be derived by internal
connections from the voltage circuit input. Where the VT circuit powers a Transducer the
total burden imposed shall not exceed 10 VA. Self-powered current Transducers shall not
impose a burden greater than 3 VA.
Shorting and isolating links shall be provided in the secondary current circuits to prevent
open circuited CT's under any conditions and to permit disconnecting or testing of current
transducers without disturbing the protection circuits. Isolating links for voltage circuits
shall be provided.
The accuracy shall be class 0.5 or better for voltage and current and between 0.1% and
0.3% of reading for watt and var (but not for the fiducial value). The Transducer response
time shall not exceed 0.5 seconds.
Ripple current in the Transducer output shall not exceed 0.5% r.m.s. (1.4% peak to peak).
The rated input parameters shall be:
•
Input Voltage:
110 V
•
Input Current:
1A
•
Frequency:
50Hz
The Transducer rating label shall include, as applicable:
•
VT ratio, CT ratio, mA output for rated input (110V, 1A) and the instrument
scale for which the Transducer has been calibrated.
•
Circuit diagrams, component layout drawings as well as operation and
servicing instructions shall be supplied.
A comprehensive list of recommended spares for three years maintenance shall also be
supplied.
8.17.2
Active and Reactive Power Transducers
These Transducers shall provide a dc output current proportional to the ac power or
reactive VA input for the measurement of three-phase unbalanced loads and shall be
suitable for reversible flows.
Where active and reactive power measurements of the same power circuit are required, a
single transducer with two corresponding outputs can be used.
Output shall be in accordance with the following requirements:
Input Voltage (%)
100
100
100
100
100
Input Current (%)
120
100
0
100
120
4
+5,333
12
18,66
20
Output (mA)
An output greater than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow out of the busbar of the
switchgear concerned whilst an output less than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow
towards the bus bar.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 153 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
8.17.3
Voltage Transducers
The Transducers will be used for busbar and synchronising voltage measurements.
Output shall be according to the following requirements
Voltage Input
Output
%
(mA)
0
0
60
4
100
10,66
120
20
The voltage Transducers for phase angle measurement shall have an inverted output of
20 to 4 mA, corresponding to an input voltage range of 0 to 264V.
8.17.4
Current Transducers
The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of 0
to 120% of the nominal input.
8.17.5
Frequency Transducers
The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of
45 to 55 Hz.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 154 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
9.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
9.1
General
Protective equipment shall be designed to disconnect faulty circuits with high speed and
certainty, without interference with healthy circuits. They shall also be so designed that,
when properly applied, incorrect operation of the circuit-breakers does not occur as a
result of transient phenomena not arising from a faulty condition of the section of line or
plant associated with each set of relays but which may occur during fault periods due to
disturbances on the system.
Protection equipment shall be designed and applied to provide maximum discrimination
between faulty and healthy circuits. All equipment is to remain inoperative during transient
phenomena, which may arise during switching or other disturbances to the system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the protective
equipment and shall at least 3 months before commissioning submit for approval
recommended relay settings, supported by design calculations for all protective equipment
being supplied.
Within three months of the award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit calculations to
demonstrate that the protection shall be sufficiently sensitive to cater for faults under the
specified minimum fault levels indicated.
The protection equipment and all associated current transformers shall also be suitable in
all respects for a prospective system 3 phase fault level at all substations equivalent to the
specified switchgear rating.
Overall fault clearance times of main protection equipment and circuit breakers (i.e. from
fault initiation to arc extinction) of transmission circuits shall not exceed 100 ms. This fault
clearance time shall be achieved under all system conditions including maximum dc offset
and any time delay caused by the use of capacitive voltage transformers.
9.2
Protective IEDs
9.2.1
General
All protective IEDs shall be manufactured by one of the following suppliers, approved by
EAC:
•
AREVA – France, UK
•
ABB – Sweden, Germany
•
SIEMENS – Germany
•
GE Multilin – Canada
Protection equipment shall be numerical and unless otherwise stated only the latest
algorithm based protective IEDs that are in commercial operation shall be accepted.
Protective IEDs shall be of approved types complying with EN 60255 or equal, shall have
approved characteristics and be flush mounted in dust-proof and moisture-proof cases
complying with IP 51 according to EN 60529. The connection terminals shall be allocated
at the case rear side and shall allow alternatively screw or crimp-snap-in connection.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 155 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Protective IEDs shall have an integrated setting keypad and an alphanumeric LCD
display. The setting shall be menu-guided and setting values shall be entered as
numbers. The setting ranges shall be limited and checked for plausibility. Setting shall be
possible on-line without restart of the microprocessor system. The setting values shall
only be valid after a final code word check.
The display shall normally indicate selectable load values, such as currents or voltages,
and shall automatically change over to fault indications, such as faulted phase, tripping
time etc, when a system faults occurs.
Protective IEDs shall possess an RS 232 serial interface at the relay front for local setting
and read-out of data using a PC.
Menu-driven operating programs shall be delivered that run on PC's using a Windows
operating environment.
The numerical protective IEDs shall be multi-functional and additional protection functions
such as auto-reclosure, carrier interface or fault locator shall be integrated as software
routines.
It shall be possible to switch additional functions on or off. The setting parameters of the
switched-off additional function shall not be displayed to reduce the number of setting
parameters.
The protective IEDs shall be self-monitored and relay failures shall immediately be
detected. Additionally, the measuring inputs shall be supervised by plausibility checks.
This way the availability of the protective IEDs shall be significantly increased.
The numerical protective IEDs shall further provide metering function for local display or
transmission to local or remote control centres (I, V, P, Q, cosφ, f, as applicable).
The events of the last three faults shall be stored and kept available for read-out by a PC
or by the digital substation control. Distance protective IEDs shall store up to 3 s, three
voltages and four currents with a resolution of 1 ms.
The serial interface and the data protocols for the communication with local control
systems shall be standardized according to IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC 61850.
The function assignment of binary inputs, relay outputs and indications shall be freely
programmable. It shall also be possible to build group alarms or group indications.
It shall further be possible to store up to four setting groups in impedance and overcurrent
protective IEDs. The required setting group can be enabled by digital inputs.
All metal bases and frames of protective IEDs shall be earthed except where the latter
must be insulated for special requirements. All principal protective IEDs shall be mounted
on the front only of each bay panel.
Protective IEDs shall be of approved construction and shall be arranged so that
adjustments, testing and replacement can be effected with the minimum of time and
labour. Protective IEDs shall be capable of being reset without opening the case.
Current transformer operated relay coils shall have continuous thermal ratings of not less
than the maximum continuous secondary current of the current transformer at the full
rating of the circuit in which the current transformer is connected.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 156 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All DC protective IEDs used shall operate over the voltage range specified in EN 62271 100 and 62271 - 1 and shall be compatible under all operating conditions of the battery
system installed. Protective IEDs shall be rated for 125V dc and shall be capable of
satisfactory operation over the range 88-137, 5V without the use of voltage dropping
resistors or diodes.
Any auxiliary supplies necessary to power solid-state circuits shall be derived from the
main station battery and not from batteries internal to the protection. Protective IEDs shall
be protected against externally impressed transient voltages, which could reach the
circuitry via connections to instrument transformers or the station battery.
The routing of cables shall be such as to limit interference to a minimum. Latest
technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall comply with the Impulse Withstand and
High Frequency disturbance tests specified in EN 60255, and Type Test reports covering
these tests for all latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall be provided.
Protective IEDs shall also remain stable under conditions of Radio Interference. Radio
Interference tests acceptable to the Engineer shall have been carried out by the
Manufacturer and in this case RFI test reports shall be submitted for the Engineers
Approval. If such tests have not been carried out, the contractor shall carry out RFI tests
to the satisfaction of the Engineer and submit test reports for approval.
Reliable shielding against electromagnetic interference shall be assisted by the following
measures:
•
Metal relay case
•
Shielded input-transformers
•
Opto-coupler binary inputs
•
DC/DC converter supply
•
Relay outputs
•
Optical fibre serial interfaces
Relay contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents, which
they may be required to control in normal service. Separate contacts shall be provided for
alarm and tripping functions.
Protective IEDs shall not be affected by mechanical shock or vibration, or by external
magnetic fields consistent with the place or method of mounting. The contacts shall be
capable of repeated operation without deterioration. Relay contacts shall make firmly
without bounce.
All tripping relays shall be of the high speed, high burden type.
Withdrawable pattern protective IEDs shall be designed so that, when in the withdrawn
position, associated current transformers shall be automatically short-circuited. An
interlock shall be provided to prevent withdrawal of the protective IEDs before
disconnection of the contact associated with tripping.
Protective IEDs, which rely for their operation on an external DC supply, shall utilize for
this purpose the trip supply of the associated circuit breaker. This supply shall be
monitored and an alarm provided in the event of failure.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 157 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Protective IEDs mounted in panels shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels
describing their application and rating in addition to the general-purpose labels.
In order to minimize the effects of electrolysis, operation indicator coils and dc relay
operating coils shall be so placed in the circuit that they are not connected to the positive
pole of the battery except through contacts, which are normally open.
Attention is particularly drawn to the tropical climate and relay designs should be entirely
suitable for duty under these conditions.
9.2.2
Displays on the Protective IEDs
The following important information must be displayed without operator action:
•
Protection information arising from network disturbances
•
Information about internal faults and monitors, possibly group indications and status
indications. These indications may be given by LED’s or LCD displays. For complex
systems such as distance protection, it is required to have some of these indications
freely programmable in order to meet customer-specific requirements.
•
Protection information about network disturbances, internal faults and monitors shall
be indicated with red LED’s.
•
Status shall be indicated with white or yellow LED’s
•
Ready for operation shall be indicated with green LED’s.
•
Freely programmable indications shall be indicated with red LED’s.
•
Protective IEDs must be designed in such a way so as to show the last event.
Information must be retained if the power supply fails and displayed when power is
restored.
Furthermore, protective IEDs shall display further information on request like fault
impedance, fault current at instant of trip command, line primary values etc. The software
version must be displayed on request.
9.2.3
Contacts
As with the LED indicators, some contacts must be freely allocated.
9.2.4
Remote Interrogation via Serial Ports
Provision must be available which will allow information to be interrogated from serial
ports for off-line PC’s and on-line central units. The scope of data depends on the
protection type and application like system fault reporting, fault records (currents and
voltages, time resolution 1 to 2 ms), status indications, relay monitor, line parameters and
setting values.
When the protection relay is used for detection and storage of protection information
and/or fault record then fault reporting data shall be stored for at least the last three
events (three general start signals). The memory shall be arranged in a first-in, first-out
manner. The memory capacity shall cover sequences up to 3 sec. Fault records must be
started by the general pick-up signal and the preceding 100 ms must also be recorded.
When the memory is full, always the earliest record shall be erased.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 158 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The relationship between protection information and analogue disturbance values must be
definitive.
Disturbance data shall also be transmitted to the Substation Controller and shall there be
archived together with real time data from the control system. A single tool for evaluation
of data from both sources shall be available to ease fault analysis.
9.2.5
External Signal Inputs
It is desirable for complex protective IEDs to have suitable signal inputs to receive
individual signals from other protective IEDs.
9.2.6
Fault Reporting
Numerical protective IEDs shall be interrogated both from an integral keypad and from a
serial port.
9.2.7
Operation from Keypad
9.2.7.1
Resetting Indicators
Resetting must be possible at the relay but must only affect the indications and not the
memory content. The same applies for remote reset. For protective IEDs in individual
housings, reset must be possible without opening the case. A reset button must be
provided on the front of protective IEDs built into cabinets.
9.2.7.2
Erasure of Stored Information in Memory
It must be possible to erase data stored in memory but the method must be such that
accidental erasure is prevented.
9.2.7.3
Selection of Indications
Selection of indications on the LED’s or the LCD display must be possible both locally and
remotely.
9.2.7.4
Setting and Interrogation
For setting and interrogation of the set values, protective IEDs must have integral
operating elements. These functions must be possible without reference to the handbook
menu guide for sufficient instructions on the relay.
Inputs, which are outside the design range, must be rejected. Design must prevent
accidental or careless alteration of set values by the use of a password. Input of
parameters must be in secondary values.
9.2.8
Man-Machine Dialogue via Serial Port
With complex protective IEDs it must be possible to comfortably set and interrogate
protective IEDs using an external device. Operation and setting of the various makes and
types of protective IEDs must be possible with common PC hardware. Communication
shall be based on standard protocols.
9.2.9
Self Monitoring and Failure Annunciation
The protection systems must provide the best possible level of self-monitoring. Failure of
the self-monitoring function must be indicated and signalled. The scope of the selfmonitoring must be comprehensively documented. Internal relay faults and monitoring
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 159 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
must be selectively stored as far as technically possible and indicated and signalled as
group alarms. The occurrence of a single fault (hardware or software) shall not lead to an
over-function in the command range of the relay. For critical relay failures during faults on
the protective system, the relay must be able to be selectively blocked. Blocking means
disabling of one or more functions.
A separate, potential-free contact shall be provided for DC supply monitoring. The signal
must be reset and the relay automatically made ready for service when the supply returns.
9.2.10
Serial Communication Interface
For integration into a numerical, co-ordinated protection and control system, protective
IEDs must be provided with an additional serial interface.
Interfaces and protocols must be unified, to ensure compatibility between different
manufacturers. Communication shall use the standard protocol IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR
IEC 61850.
Interfaces must comply with international standard requirements with respect to the
insulation and interference values given for circuits, which are connected to external
terminals. The "interference radiation test" and "test with electrostatic discharge (ESD)"
and the "fast transient disturbance test" must be observed. The necessary measures may
also be fitted in the plug module of the corresponding interface.
The interface for the connection of external operating and diagnostic equipment must be
accessible at the front of the relay. The requirements regarding insulation and
interference tests applicable to other interfaces do not apply to these interfaces but it must
be permissible to carry out these functions during normal operation of the relay.
Protective IEDs relying for their operation on an external DC supply shall utilize for this
purpose the trip supply of the station battery. This supply shall be monitored and an alarm
provided in event of failure.
DC/DC converters shall provide galvanic isolation between the internal static circuits and
the external station battery circuits.
An integrated DC voltage buffer shall ensure uninterrupted performance of the relay in
case of DC voltage interruptions <50 ms.
9.3
Test and Earthing Facilities
Separate test facilities shall be provided for each current and voltage transformer
secondary circuit so as to give access for testing of protective IEDs and associated D.C.
circuits without any need of taking the circuit out of service. The facilities may consist of
either test terminal blocks of approved type for front of panel mounting with provision for
automatic short circuiting of current transformer secondary circuits by means of a switch
or by movement of links from their normal operating position or any other testing
arrangement approved by the Engineer.
If any forms of modular protective IEDs or systems are provided for which specialized test
blocks or test plugs are available, these should be provided for each complete relay or
scheme. If any other specialized test blocks are required to obviate any disturbance to
external wiring during testing, monitoring of currents or voltages or to enable secondary
injection testing to be carried out, these shall also be provided.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 160 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one point
only.
Links shall be provided for isolation of trip circuits such that operational checks may be
carried out on individual components with the remainder still in service. The links shall be
readily accessible, preferably on the front of the panel and shall be clearly labelled.
9.4
132 kV Feeder Protection
9.4.1
General
Only latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall be provided. The autoreclosing and synchronizing check features shall be incorporated in both Main 1 and Main
2 protective IEDs.
Each 132kV feeder shall be provided with two main and one back-up protective IEDs.
The two main protections shall operate either on different principles or using protective
IEDs from different manufacturers.
For O/H transmission lines the first main protection shall be based on "distance
protection" principles and the second main protection scheme on "current differential"
principles.
For underground cables the first main protection shall be based on “current differential”
principles and the second main protection shall be based on “distance protection”
principles.
Back-up protection shall provide both phase and earth fault overcurrent protection with
selectable inverse and definite time characteristics.
Each 66 kV feeder shall be provided with only one main and one back-up protection relay.
The main protection shall be distance in overhead line feeders and current differential in
underground cable feeders. Back-up protection shall be of the same type as that of a 132
kV feeder.
Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protection In/Out switches to enable the isolation
of all tripping, fault recordings, alarms etc for testing purposes. An LED on the relay shall
indicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repeated into the
remote/supervisory system.
•
Feeder protection protective IEDs shall have the following features:
•
Self monitoring facility and power-on diagnostic routine
•
Giving alarm for loss of voltage, algorithm failure etc
•
Event recording (pre-fault) and fault recording data storage
•
Fault locating facility
•
Remote interrogation via a serial link.
9.4.2
Distance Protection
Distance protection shall be of the latest technology and shall be able to provide full
numerical processing of all its functions in the device from the acquisition of the measured
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 161 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Only protective IEDs having
proof of successful commercial use will be accepted. A reference list shall be provided.
The relay shall have sufficient programmable and/or non-programmable outputs for
independent tripping of duplicated circuit-breaker trip coils. Appropriate number of
programmable and non-programmable inputs for monitoring and control purposes shall
also be provided.
The protection shall operate for all types of phase and earth faults in the protected zone
and direction and the operating time on each step shall be substantially independent of
the magnitude of fault current. Measuring characteristic of the distance relay shall be of
the mho and/or quadrilateral type and shall be suitable for underground cable feeders
where specified in the Tender.
Six Independent measuring elements shall be provided for a minimum of four distance
zones. The reach of each measuring zone shall be individually adjustable as forward,
reverse, or non-directional reaching. Phase and earth fault compensation features shall be
incorporated to ensure accurate distance measurements on all types of fault and to allow
for variation in the path of earthfault currents returning to the system.
The Tenderer will be required to guarantee that the distance relay offered will operate
satisfactorily under the system and fault level conditions described herein.
Direction determination shall be done with quadrature voltages and voltage memory.
Under no circumstances shall the relay operate for reverse faults even when the voltage
supplied to the relay falls to zero on all three phases. Nor shall they operate due to the
transient response of the line capacitive voltage transformers during or following the
clearance of close up faults behind the relay. The relay characteristics shall ensure
adequate fault resistance coverage under minimum plant and single outage conditions
specified.
Distance protection shall be suitable for use with power line carrier signalling equipment
or multiplexed fibre optic channels for aided tripping.
Failure of the teleprotection equipment or the communications link shall cause the
distance relay scheme to revert to a normal distance scheme with correct zone
discrimination.
Distance protection shall offer the following in-built schemes selectable through software
on the relay to allow them to be re-used on future schemes:
•
Basic Scheme
•
Zone 1 extension scheme
•
Permissive underreach scheme
•
Permissive overreach scheme and
•
Blocking scheme.
In the case of the permissive overreach and the blocking schemes it is preferable if
separate underreaching measuring elements which trip independently of the end to end
signalling are provided for additional reliability.
A weak infeed function shall be provided to allow tripping for faults that cannot be
detected due to weak or zero infeed.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 162 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
A switch on to fault (SOTF) feature shall also be provided to ensure instantaneous tripping
in the event that the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previous de-energized line.
Starting shall be by impedance measuring. Overcurrent starting will not be accepted.
The thermal rating of the relay shall be such that the relay shall be undamaged by the
continuous application of 1,1 times the nominal voltage, 1,2 times the nominal current
transformer output and maximum auxiliary power supply voltage.
Distance protection equipment shall be of the high-speed type. The operating speed shall
be such that the general protection speed requirement shall be achieved for faults up to
80% of the Zone 1 reach with any communication link between distance protective IEDs
out of service and with source/line impedance up to 50/1.
Operating times of the protective equipment shall be substantially independent of fault
current magnitude. The operating times shall be stated in the Schedules and, in addition,
curves showing the effect of variation in line and source impedance and operating current,
shall be provided. Tenderers are also required to submit evidence of the degree of
tolerance of impedance measurement to varying values of fault arc resistance and by
what means this tolerance is achieved.
The distance protection shall include a voltage transformer supervision feature to prevent
possible unwanted operation in the event of a failure of one, two or three phases of
voltages caused by open or short circuit faults in the voltage transformer secondary
circuits or due to opening of VT mcb’s. In the event of loss of one, two or three phases,
the distance relay shall be blocked and a time delayed alarm initiated.
The VT supervision shall not operate during energization of the line or of any power
system transformers, nor during any other power system primary disturbance.
The VT supervision unit shall be faster than the distance relay-measuring units under any
circumstances.
The distance protective IEDs shall incorporate indicators to show the zone in which the
relay tripped and the phase or phases faulted, whether the relay operation was due to an
aided trip, switch onto fault, power swing blocking, VT fuse fail or directional earth fault if
appropriate. Indication must not be lost in event of a supply failure. Metering facilities
shall also be provided.
Where specified each distance protection for the 132kV feeders shall incorporate 3-phase
autoreclosing and synchrocheck function.
Protection protective IEDs shall remain fully operational during and after an auto-reclosing
cycle irrespective of load transfer during these periods.
In case of parallel feeders means shall be provided to block auto-reclosing feature in case
auto-reclosing has already been initiated in the parallel circuit.
Selection facilities are required to either block auto-reclose or allow initiation of three-pole
auto-reclose as desired.
The distance protection shall also include an echo feature to facilitate tripping of the local
circuit breaker if a line fault occurs at a time where the remote end circuit breaker is open
for maintenance or any other reason.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 163 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The distance protection shall also have power swing blocking and current guard reversal
facilities.
Distance protection shall also incorporate a fault locator. The fault distance shall be
displayed in km, in secondary or primary ohms or as a percentage of the protected line.
Compensation of the mutual effects of parallel lines shall be possible.
The relay shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keys and a liquid crystal
display and via a personal computer for reading and setting the relay. Protective IEDs
shall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integration into a numerical coordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shall be effected
via IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC 61850 protocol. All the associated software and
hardware required to communicate with the relay shall be provided.
The relay shall be reset without removing its cover.
Tenderers are required to submit AC and DC schematic diagrams with full descriptive
literature and sequence of operations. The Tenderer shall submit information on where
and how many identical sets of equipment are installed.
Design calculations for current transformers for use with the distance protective IEDs shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval within three months of contract award. CT
design shall be based on a maximum fault level equivalent to the 132 kV switchgear rating
and the X/R ratios quoted in this Specification.
9.4.3
Fibre Optic Current Differential Protection
Current differential protection shall consist of a fully numerical and flush mounted current
differential protection relay. The relay shall offer phase segregated current differential
protection with high sensitivity for two terminal feeders.
It shall be suitable for use with a dedicated optical fibre link or a multiplexed 56/64 kbits/s
channel. The communication channel shall be monitored by the relay and when it fails an
alarm shall be initiated. Continuous channel propagation delay and measurement shall be
carried out by the relay.
Intertripping commands through differential protection or through plant status inputs to the
relay shall also be carried out.
The user shall communicate directly with the relay via an alphanumeric liquid crystal
display together with a push button keypad. A serial communication facility shall also be
provided for interrogating the relay via a PC either locally or remotely. An additional serial
communication interface for integration into a numerical co-ordinated protection and
control system shall be also provided. Communication with the relay shall be
accomplished via IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC 61850 protocol. All the associated
software and hardware necessary to communicate with the relay shall be provided.
Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay.
In the event of failure an error message shall be displayed on the front panel LCD and the
relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected.
Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the relay.
Plant status and control signals shall be received by the relay via opto-isolated inputs or
binary inputs and output relays shall be provided for tripping and signalling.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 164 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Tripping indication and fault identification facilities shall also be provided. Resetting of the
relay shall be made without removing its front cover.
Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protection In/Out switches to enable the isolation
of all tripping, fault recordings, alarms etc for testing purposes. An LED on the relay shall
indicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repeated into the
remote/supervisory system.
In case of a multiplexed fibre optic channel the Contract shall include the connection of
the protective IEDs to the telecommunication multiplexer equipment, which will be
supplied by others. The connection to the relay shall be by means of optical fibres to
ensure the integrity and reliability of signal transmission whereas the connection to the
multiplexer equipment shall be made via an optical to electrical converter. The optical
fibres shall be 50/125 µm, multimode 850 nm with suitable optical connectors at the two
ends for the connection to the relay and the converter.
The converter shall support a G703 interface and shall be physically located inside the
multiplexer equipment in the telecommunications room.
The multimode fibres, the optical to electrical converter and the cable connecting the
converter with the multiplexer equipment shall be provided by the Contract. The
interconnecting cable shall be suitably terminated so as to be connected to the converter
at the one end whereas on the other end loose wires shall be provided.
In case of direct connection of the current differential protective IEDs at the two ends, the
fibres shall be single mode 1300 nm or 1550 nm. The connection of the protective IEDs to
the optical dedicated channel is made with single mode fibres of 1300 nm or 1550 nm
wavelength with suitable optical connector on the one end depending on the relay and
with FC/PC type of connector on the other end so as to be connected to the fibre optical
connection box.
9.4.4
Back up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection
Overcurrent protection shall include a fully numerical, non-directional, flush mounted relay
appropriate for both phase and earth faults. The relay shall comprise minimum a two pole
phase fault and a one pole earth fault low set and high set overcurrent elements. Both the
current and time settings of the relay shall be adjustable, the design of the relay being
such that the setting adjustments can be carried out on load without taking the relay out of
service. The relay shall have both definite time and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
characteristics according to EN 60255 independently selectable for both phase and earth
faults.
Relay setting parameters shall be input via the relay front panel function keys and the
liquid crystal display. Interrogation with the relay shall be possible also via a PC. An
additional serial interface shall also be provided for an integrated numerical co-ordinated
protection and control system. Serial communication with the relay shall be implemented
via IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC 61850 protocol. All required communication software
and hardware shall be provided.
The relay shall be provided with the appropriate number of programmable inputs and
outputs for monitoring its operation and for signalling and tripping purposes respectively.
The relay shall have tripping indication and fault identification facilities either through
programmable LED’s on the relay front panel or through the relay LCD display. The relay
shall be reset without removing its cover.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 165 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The relay shall incorporate also the following functions:
•
Display of on load measured current values
•
Trip circuit test
•
Fault recorder
•
Event recorder
The range of current settings for the phase fault elements shall be 0,1 to 2,0 times the
rated current in 0,01 steps for the low set and 0,1 to 20 times the rated current in 0,01
steps for the high set.
For the earth fault element the current setting shall be 0,05 to 0,8 times the rated current
in steps of 0,01 for the low set and 0,05 to 8 times the rated current in 0,01 steps for the
high set.
Time settings shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 sec in 0,01 steps for the definite time
characteristics and for the IDMT characteristics the time multiplier setting shall be
adjustable between 0,05 to 1,2 sec in steps of 0,025 sec.
High set instantaneous elements with low transient overreach shall be provided.
The relay shall be thermally rated such that the operating time of the relay at the highest
practical current levels on any combination of current and time multiplier settings shall not
exceed the thermal withstand time of the relay.
9.5
9.5.1
Transformer Protection
Transformer Differential Protection
Overall differential protection shall be of the low impedance, two winding biased current
differential type providing protection for phase and earth faults.
The relay shall be a fully numerical, flush mounted and shall contain a biased differential
element per phase. Both the bias and the differential current settings shall be individually
adjustable. The minimum differential current setting shall not be greater than 20 per cent
of the rated load current of the relay. The relay shall have both a low set and a high set
differential elements.
Protective IEDs shall be three phase units with internal vector group compensation and
line current transformer ratio correction eliminating the need for external interposing
current transformers.
The low set differential protection setting shall be in the range 0,15 to 0,5 of rated current
and the high set differential setting shall be between 5 to 20 times the rated current.
The relay shall have a dual bias characteristic with the initial slope allowing a maximum of
20% transformer tap changer deviation and current transformers ratio errors. The bias
shall increase for higher currents above rated in order to compensate for CT saturation
errors under maximum through fault conditions with maximum DC offset in the fault
current. For the purpose of stability calculations, an infinite source is to be assumed and
the through fault current calculated using the transformer impedance only.
The relay shall provide harmonic stabilization against inrush and over-excitation.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 166 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The user shall be able to communicate directly with the relay via an alphanumeric liquid
crystal display together with the relay front panel function keys and by a PC. A separate
serial communication interface shall be provided for an integrated co-ordinated protection
and control system. Communication interface shall be IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC
61850. The necessary software and hardware required for communicating with the relay
shall be provided.
Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay.
In the event of a failure, an error message shall be displayed on the front panel LCD and
the relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected.
Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the relay.
Plant status and control signals shall be input to the relay via programmable or nonprogrammable optically isolated binary inputs and the relay shall give a tripping or
signalling command through programmable or specifically assigned output relays.
Tripping indication and fault identification facilities shall be also provided. Resetting of the
relay shall be made without removing its front cover.
The relay shall display the magnitude of the phase currents for each input, the differential
current and the restraining current.
Operation of main and HV back-up protection shall trip both HV and LV circuit breakers
9.5.2
Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Restricted earth fault protection for both transformer windings shall be preferably
incorporated in the transformer differential protection relay.
When restricted earth fault protection is not integrated within the transformer main
protection relay, a separate relay shall be provided.
Restricted earth fault protection relays shall preferably be of the high impedance type.
The protection shall be connected to class PX current transformers on the transformer
neutral connections and shall share the same line current transformers as the biased
differential protection.
Restricted earth fault protection shall be so arranged that it does not operate with any type
of fault external to the transformer winding. The setting of the relay shall be such that it will
operate reliably with current of the following magnitude in the primary winding of the
neutral current transformer alone:
When the protected winding of the transformer is connected to a solidly earthed power
system, the fault setting shall be between 10 per cent and 60 per cent of the rated current
of the protected winding. When a transformer winding has more than one rating, the
percentage setting shall be based on the lowest of the ratings. When more than one
transformer winding is connected in parallel, the percentage setting shall be based on the
lowest of the rated currents of the individual transformers.
Where the prescribed settings cannot be obtained special approval of the performance
shall be obtained.
All necessary stabilizing resistors of adequate rating and non-linear overvoltage protection
resistors shall be included.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 167 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the high impedance
restricted earth fault scheme. The method and calculations shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
9.5.3
Back-up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection
132 kV transformer back up overcurrent protection shall comprise a 3-pole overcurrent
and single pole earth fault relay complying with the requirements described elsewhere in
this Document.
Additionally, high set overcurrent elements shall be provided for instantaneous
overcurrent protection of the transformer main 132kV connections and these shall be of
the low transient overreach type.
9.5.4
Other Transformer Protection
9.5.4.1
General
Transformer Buchholz, temperature and tap changer protective devises and relevant
intelligent I/O devices shall be supplied and mounted under this Contract.
9.5.4.2
Buchholz Protection
Power and earthing transformers will be supplied fitted with Buchholz devices. The
Buchholz device will be of the two element type giving operation under gassing and under
surge conditions.
9.5.4.3
Oil and Winding Temperature
Transformers will be provided with oil and winding temperature protection. These will be of
the two stage type with adjustable settings giving alarm and trip facilities.
9.5.4.4
Low Oil Level and Pressure Relief Devices
Transformers will be provided with low oil level and pressure relief devices, each of which
having contacts for purposes of remote alarm.
9.5.4.5
Tap Change Oil Surge
Transformers will be provided with an oil surge or pressure operated device having
contacts for purposes of remote alarm or trip as directed by the Engineer.
9.5.4.6
Earthing Transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection
The LV winding of the Earthing Transformer shall be protected by Restricted Earth Fault
Protection. The protection shall be connected to class PX current transformers on the
transformer neutral connection and to line current transformers on the LV AC distribution
board.
The restricted earth fault relay shall comply with the requirements described elsewhere in
this document.
9.6
132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection
The busbar protection shall be of the numerical, low impedance, phase segregated
current differential type and shall protect against phase and earth faults.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 168 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
It shall comprise of a central unit (master) situated on the bus-section bay panel and one
bay unit for each feeder circuit situated on the bay relay panel. The bay unit shall be the
interface between the protection and the primary system process comprising of main CTs,
isolators, and circuit breaker and shall perform the associated data acquisition, preprocessing, and control functions.
The central unit shall be the system manager. It shall configure the system, contain the
system replica, assign bays within the system, manage the sets of operating parameters,
act as process bus controller, assure synchronization of the system, and control
communication with the station control system.
The busbar protection shall give clear indication of the phase involved in the fault and in
case of external faults it shall ensure high stability even in case of CT saturation.
The measuring current circuits must be continuously monitored. In the event of exceeding
a set threshold, phase segregated and busbar section selective blocking and signalling
must be provided. The tripping circuits within the device must be continuously monitored.
Testing of the tripping paths of the circuit breaker must be provided. The isolator positions
and the transition times must be monitored and faults selectively signalled.
The busbar protective equipment shall not be affected by harmonic circulating currents
such as may be experienced in a multiple earthed power system.
The unearthed side of CT circuits shall pass through a two-position bolted type test link
before being connected to any common bus-wires or to any other apparatus. In one
position the link shall short-circuit the transformers as well as disconnect the unearthed
side of the residual circuit from the rest of the equipment and in the other position the link
shall give normal connection. It shall be possible to change the test link from one position
to the other on load without open circuiting the current transformers. Suitable Klippon
type terminals can be utilized for this purpose.
Where common circuit-breaker trip coils are used for busbar and circuit protection, the
busbar protection shall not use a separate trip supply common to all breakers. Instead,
the segregation of trip circuits shall be maintained by taking the trip supply for each
breaker from its associated bay panel.
Means shall be provided for interrupting, the trip and intertrip functions of the busbar
protection while leaving the operation and indication of the equipment otherwise
unimpaired. These means shall comprise insulated links, distinctively labelled, and
connected in the trip and intertrip circuit connections. One master two-way switch of
approved type shall be provided for each zone of the busbar protection. These switches
shall include contacts for alarm and indication functions.
Means shall be provided to permit tripping and intertripping of individual circuit breakers
from test operations of the protection without tripping all circuit breakers connected to the
protected busbars.
Full provision for testing each part of the equipment shall be made so that it is not
necessary to disconnect wires from terminals.
Current transformer rings shall be formed at the protection relay cubicles and not at the
switchgear cubicles.
Current transformer secondary bus wiring should be suitably dimensioned to reduce
current transformer burdens to a minimum.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 169 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Circuit Breaker failure protection shall be integrated in the busbar protection.
The breaker failure protection on circuit breakers shall be initiated by all protection
devices, which normally initiate tripping of that breaker. In the event of the circuit breaker
failing to open within a pre-selected time, the breaker failure protection shall initiate
tripping of all adjacent circuit breakers. It shall also incorporate provision for initiating
direct intertripping of any remote infeed via teleprotection channels and the lower voltage
circuit breaker on transformer circuits.
The protective IEDs shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keys and a liquid
crystal display and via a personal computer for reading and setting the relay. Protective
IEDs shall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integration into a
numerical co-ordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shall
be effected via IEC 60870-5-103 AND/OR IEC 61850 protocol. All the associated software
and hardware required to communicate with the relay shall be provided.
The Contractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the busbar
protection scheme. The method and calculations shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
The calculations should be based on the characteristics of the actual equipment to be
used on this Contract e.g. Current Transformers, Relays, wiring etc. and such
characteristics should be given in the data section of the calculations.
9.7
Auto-Reclosing Function
For the purpose of this Specification, the following definitions shall apply:
(a) Dead Time (DT) -The minimum time interval between the opening of a circuit breaker
to eliminate that branch infeed of fault current to the associated part of the network
and the subsequent reclosure of that circuit breaker to re-establish supply to the
network.
(b) Reclaim Time (RT) -The time interval following reclosure during which a primary
system fault causes the auto-reclose program to continue as if the fault had been
present on reclosure.
(c) Close Pulse Time (CP) -The time period during which a continuous closing signal is
applied to the circuit breaker mechanism during an auto-reclose cycle.
The following requirements shall govern auto-reclosing:
•
Reclosure shall only take place on overhead line circuits and shall be initiated
following tripping by the current differential protective IEDs, the distance relay Zone 1
equipment or receipt of a carrier acceleration intertripping signal.
•
Reclosure shall not be initiated in the event of any type of fault in the second or third
back-up zones or when the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previously deenergized line.
It shall also be possible to block auto-reclose from other protection, such as busbar
protection, overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection.
Dead time shall be adjustable in the range between 0,01 - 320 sec.
The reclaim time, i.e., the time period following the automatic reclosing of the circuit
breaker during which further faults result in three phase tripping and lockout, shall be
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 170 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
chosen to match the duty cycle of the circuit breakers, assuming the shortest available
dead time is chosen.
The reclaim time shall be settable between 0,05 – 320 sec (the reclaim time commences
at the instant the re-close command is given to the circuit-breaker and, therefore, includes
the circuit breaker closing time).
The closing command shall be limited to the set close pulse time after which time the
reclosing equipment shall be automatically reset without resetting the reclaim timer.
Where synchronism supervision is applied, the reclosing command shall be blocked if the
dead line live busbar check and synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled.
A counter shall be provided to record the number of reclosures.
Auto-reclosure shall be blocked if the circuit breaker has been switched off manually such
that an inadvertent initiation of the auto-reclosure equipment does not close the circuit
breaker on a de-energized line. Auto-reclose shall be blocked for a settable time after
energizing the line.
•
Facilities shall be provided to initiate the following indications:
•
Autoreclose successful
•
Autoreclose blocked
•
Autoreclose out of service
•
Autoreclose in progress
•
Final trip
Some or all of the above may be required to initiate alarm depending on the nature of the
scheme requirements.
The automatic reclosing equipment shall be capable to accept a circuit ready contact to
prevent automatic reclosing unless the circuit breaker is in a healthy state to enable it to
perform a further trip for a permanent fault.
9.8
Synchronizing Check Function
The synchronizing check function shall monitor the magnitudes of the voltage on both
sides of the open circuit breaker terminals as well as the phase angles and frequency
difference between the voltages. Closing will be permitted when these are within pre-set
limits.
Separate voltage settings must be allowed for live and dead conditions. The voltage
setting shall be adjustable between 40 to 130 Vac in steps of 1 V.
The phase angle setting shall be adjustable between 0 to 45 ° in steps of 1 °.
The slip frequency shall be settable between 0 to 1 Hz in steps of 0,01 Hz. Synchronism
check function shall be provided for all specified circuit breakers.
The synchronizing check function shall also have the following features:
•
Energizing for DL/DB, DL/DB or DL/DB.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 171 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Different energizing settings for manual close command and auto-reclose command.
•
The system shall allow manual close without the synchronizing function but the
following information shall be displayed graphically on the station MMI when using this
feature:
⇒ incoming and running volts
⇒ slip frequency (synchroscope) and
⇒ frequency
The voltages that must be selected for the synchro-check functions depend on the
positions of the breakers and/or the disconnectors. By making use of the auxiliary
contacts of the breakers and disconnectors, the control system should provide to the
respective relay the right voltage for the synchronism and energizing function.
9.9
Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment
Teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided under a separate Contract and shall
be suitable for operating with optical fibres. Where specified intertrip send/receive
teleprotection equipment shall be suitable for high speed intertripping and the operating
speed should not exceed 40ms. Provision shall be made to continuously monitor the
integrity of the communications circuit and provide an alarm if a fault on the
communications circuit is detected.
9.10
Tripping Relays
All tripping relays, where specified shall be of the heavy-duty type suitable for panel
mounting.
Tripping relays built into protective IEDs shall be preferred.
Trip relay contacts shall be suitably rated to satisfactorily perform their required duty and
relay operating time shall not exceed 10 ms from initiation of trip relay operating coil to
contact close.
Where specified latching type relays shall have hand or electrically reset contacts and
hand reset flag indicators. Resetting of the flag indicator and the contacts shall be
possible without having to open the relay case. Remote resetting should also be possible.
Tripping relays rated for operation on a 110 volts battery shall have a normal working
voltage of 125 volts and an operating voltage range of 66-143 volts. The minimum
operating current shall not be less than 50 milliamps and the trip relay shall not operate
when a 10-microfarad capacitor charged to 150 volts is discharged into the tripping relay
operating coil. The tripping relay shall have a thermal withstand of 143 volts for 8 hours.
9.11
Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes
Trip circuit supervision shall preferably be provided by the main protective IEDs.
The trip circuit supervision scheme shall provide continuous supervision of the trip circuits
of the circuit breaker in either the open or closed position.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 172 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on DC
wiring on adjacent circuits or due to operation of a trip relay contact.
Trip circuit supervision circuits shall prevent false tripping of a circuit breaker if a relay
element is short-circuited.
Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with self-resetting flag indicators. Sufficient
contacts should be provided for alarm and blocking of the close circuit.
The relay shall give alarm signals and also block the closing circuit when operated.
9.12
Segregation
Wherever practical physical segregation shall be arranged so that no common plant
failure will render First and Second Main protection inoperative. This includes
consideration of a multicore cable failure but excludes consideration of a multicore trench
failure.
9.13
9.13.1
22-11 kV Feeder Protection
General
A numerical, multi-functional, protective and control device shall provide the 22-11kV
feeder protection. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the measured quantities, issuing of
commands to circuit breakers and other primary power system equipment, shall be
processed in a completely digital way.
The required functions for the protection of 22-11kV underground feeders are the
following:
•
Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent Protection - Characteristics according to EN
60255 standard
•
Directional Overcurrent (Option)
•
Under Frequency
•
Breaker Failure
•
Reverse Blocking
•
Switch on to Fault
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
For the protection of 22-11kV overhead feeders the following additional functions are
required:
•
Instantaneous Overcurrent
•
Autoreclosing
•
Sensitive Earth Fault
The required functions are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 173 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
9.13.2
Overcurrent Protection
Time-overcurrent protection shall be the main protective function of the relay. It shall have
all features as mentioned in Paragraph “Back up Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection”
for 132 kV Feeders. In certain cases the overcurrent protection may be directional. The
specific relay requirements are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules.
In addition to the above, a reverse blocking function shall be available. All overcurrent
elements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device shall be able to be blocked via
an external signal to the binary inputs of device. Removal of the external signal to the
binary input shall re-enable these elements.
The relay shall be provided with Switch-On-To-Fault function. Under this situation, the
time delay shall be by-passed via an impulse from the external control switch, thus
resulting in high speed tripping.
9.13.3
Sensitive Earth Fault
Sensitive Earth Fault function shall comply to the general requirements of overcurrent
protection. It shall have adjustable settings for both operating current and time over a
range of at least 1% to 15% of rated CT current and at least 0,5 to 15 seconds for time.
The relay shall be equipped with a separate current input to be fed from a core balance
neutral CT.
9.13.4
Under Frequency Protection
The Under Frequency protection shall be able to detect any low frequency present in the
system and initiate tripping of the feeder if it exceeds the preset frequency value.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation shall be
free from harmonic influences and very accurate.
Setting ranges shall be from 45 Hz to 52 Hz in steps of 0,1 Hz.
9.13.5
Breaker Failure Protection
The breaker failure protection shall monitor the reaction of the circuit breaker to a trip
signal. If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opened, a breaker
failure trip signal shall be issued and all adjacent circuit breakers that represent sources to
the fault shall be tripped.
The criteria to determine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip
signal shall be both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the
circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
The initiation of the breaker failure function shall be either from the internal protective
function of the relay or from external trip signals via binary inputs.
The evaluation of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact shall depend on both “a” and “b”
type auxiliary contacts connected.
If one of the criteria that led to pickup of the breaker failure scheme is no longer met
before the time delay elapses, then the breaker failure timer shall drop out and no trip
signals shall be issued.
To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization of
the binary inputs for external trip signals shall take place. The external signal must be
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 174 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
present for the entire period of the delay time, otherwise the time shall reset and no
tripping signal shall be issued.
9.13.6
Automatic Reclosing Function
Where specified relays shall be provided with a single shot automatic reclosing function.
The function shall be initiated from the instantaneous elements of the overcurrent
protection after the circuit breaker has tripped.
It shall be possible to easily enable or disable the Autoreclosing function without entering
into the menus of the relay.
The automatic reclose function shall lockout after unsuccessful reclosure and an LED
shall indicate the status. It shall not be possible to close the circuit breaker without
resetting the Autoreclose lockout condition. Resetting of the lockout condition shall be
possible locally through the MMI or the Energy Centre.
The Autoreclosing function shall be able to record the number of operations.
The relay shall have provision for adjustment of the dead and the reclaim times. The dead
time shall be adjustable between approximately 5 and 20 seconds. The reclaim time (the
time period following automatic reclosure during which further fault occurrences result in
lockout) shall be adjustable between 5 and 25 seconds, or such values required by the
circuit breaker manufacturer.
The instantaneous element shall be blocked during the reclaim and when the automatic
reclosing function is disabled.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 175 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
10. MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND
PERFORMANCE
10.1
SWITCHGEAR TYPE
The specified switchgear including the busbars shall be SF6-insulated, type-tested, metalclad, and suitable for indoor installation. The rated voltage shall be 22kV. According to the
corresponding version, the switchgear panels (transformer incomers, bus section, feeders,
and capacitor bank feeders) have to be equipped with maintenance-free vacuum circuit
breakers and three-position switches. The switchgear shall be designed as single-busbar
switchgear.
10.2
CURRENT RATINGS
The temperature rise of each current carrying component of the equipment supplied when
operating continuously at the specified ratings or under short circuit conditions at the
specified site rating or under the specified maximum design ambient conditions shall be
according to EN 60694.
Every part of the switchgear and equipment shall also withstand, without mechanical or
thermal damage, the instantaneous peak currents and rated short time current pertaining
to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breakers.
Tenderers are requested to state in the Schedule of Particulars the permissible overload
rating for the switchgear operating under emergency conditions, complete with its
associated auxiliary equipment such as current transformers etc, together with the
duration and ambient temperature for which it applies.
10.3
PANEL DESIGN
In accordance with the required version, a switchgear panel should be subdivided into the
following functional components:
•
Busbar module
•
Circuit breaker module with vacuum circuit breaker
•
Cable connection compartment
•
Low voltage compartment
•
Panel Enclosure
Circuit breaker modules and busbar modules shall be made of a welded, anticorrosive
stainless steel enclosure or alternatively aluminium enclosure. These modules should be
interconnected electrically by means of a fully insulated connection system without the
need of SF6 gas work on site. A similar system shall also be used to connect the busbar
modules from panel to panel enabling switchgear extension or panel replacement without
any SF6 gas work on site. Tenderers should submit with their tender a detailed description
of the method used on site for switchgear extension and / or panel replacement indicating
clearly the technology used to facilitate the described work without any SF6 gas work on
site.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 176 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The external effects of an internal arc shall be limited by a suitable design to prevent any
danger to an operator during the time he is performing his normal duties. Test evidence to
verify the design will be required.
Pressure shall be relieved through a rear duct directed to the top.
The degree of protection for the high-voltage part must be at least IP65.
The cable and low voltage compartments shall be capable of operating in humid
conditions and electric heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation
Cast iron shall not be used for any part, which may be subjected to mechanical shock.
Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking.
The switchboard shall be suitable for installation in a building with a cable basement or
trench. All necessary foundation or fixing bolts and rails shall be provided.
Electrical wiring in compartments containing primary connections or equipment is to be
enclosed in metal conduit or equivalent.
10.4
MODULES CONTAINING SF6
Modules shall be filled with SF6 gas. Gas density must be monitored with temperature
compensation. Its status has to be transmitted and signalled to the outside.
The pressure of the module housings must be relieved through rupture diaphragms away
from the operator.
The modules must be welded in order to ensure tightness for a lifetime greater than 30
years according to EN 62271 - 200.
10.5
CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULES
Circuit breaker modules shall consist of the welded high-voltage part and an external
operating mechanism. The module housing has to contain the circuit breaker poles with
the vacuum interrupters.
The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service operation and the
making and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit breakers.
Circuit breakers shall be covered by test certificates, certifying the operation of the circuitbreaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit-breakers.
The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test
Certificates shall be submitted with the tender.
Circuit breakers shall be suitable for rapid autoreclosure. The rated operating sequence
shall be as follows:
0 - 0,3 sec - CO - 3 min - CO
In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit
breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by the switching
of transformer magnetizing current and of capacitor current associated with overhead linecharging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as may be applicable.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 177 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the above duties shall
be submitted with the Tender.
Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the
circuit breakers are capable of, before maintenance is required.
Circuit-breakers shall be mounted on insulators strong enough to withstand the shock
load produced by the circuit-breaker when clearing rated short-circuit current.
The live tank shall be of robust manufacture to withstand the internal pressure produced
when clearing rated short-circuit currents. The material shall be declared by the
manufacturer.
Circuit breakers shall either have facility to measure wear of contacts or preferably have
automatic compensation for contact erosion.
10.6
OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism must be maintenance-free for 30 years under normal
environmental and service conditions. It will be equipped as follows:
•
Motor-operated stored-energy spring mechanism (capable of auto-reclosing)
•
Auxiliary switch contacts
•
Operation cycle counter
•
Circuit breaker trip indication
•
Shunt release
•
Spring charged indication
•
Mechanical switch position indication
•
Mechanical OFF pushbutton (emergency OFF)
•
Mechanical ON pushbutton
•
Mechanical lockable earthing lock-in
•
Mechanical interlock between disconnector/earthing switch and circuit breaker
In the event of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position the circuit breaker
shall be arranged to open at normal speed.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and
solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature
range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated
in EN 62271 - 100.
It shall be possible to charge the mechanism spring with the circuit breaker in either the
'open' or 'closed' positions. It shall not be possible for the circuit breaker to close unless
the spring is fully charged. A visual indicating device, preferably mechanical, shall be
provided to indicate the state of the spring. The device shall indicate 'SPRING
CHARGED', in red on white background when the spring is in a condition to close the
circuit breaker and 'SPRING FREE', in black on white background when the spring is not
in a condition to close the circuit-breaker. Provision shall also be made for supervisory
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 178 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
and, if applicable, remote indication of the state of the spring. Closure whilst a spring
charging operation is in progress shall be prevented. If a charged spring is released when
the circuit breaker is closed, the circuit breaker shall not open and neither shall such
operation result in damage.
AC motors shall be used for charging the spring mechanism. Re-charging of the
mechanism operating spring shall commence immediately and automatically upon
completion of each circuit-breaker closure. The maximum rewind time shall be 35
seconds if a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation
within a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and
an alarm initiated. Provision shall be made for making available this alarm to the
supervisory Control Centre.
An emergency hand operated charging device shall be supplied. No electrical or
mechanical operations of the mechanism during this process shall endanger the operation
or damage the equipment.
10.7
ISOLATING FACILITIES
The circuit breakers shall be connected to the busbars and feeder circuits through three
position switches. The devices shall be off load type but shall be suitable for operation
whilst the busbars or feeder circuits are live. It shall not be possible to operate the
isolating devices if the circuit breaker is in the closed position.
The main isolating contacts shall be silver plated, self-cleaning and shall be mounted in
porcelain or cast resin bushings.
10.8
EARTHING FACILITIES
Means shall be provided to earth both outgoing circuits and busbars by either closing an
integral fully rated spring-assisted switch or a maintenance earthing switch through a
circuit breaker.
It shall not be possible to select an earthing position unless the circuit breaker is in the
open position.
Also, it shall be impossible to return the circuit breaker to the normal service position
without bringing first the earthing switch in the “OFF” position.
The earthing switch to be employed for earthing either the outgoing circuits or the busbars
of the switchboard shall be fully rated, i.e., it shall be able to make and carry the specified
short-circuit rating of the switchboard.
10.9
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING
SWITCHES
A fault making earthing switch for use with switchgear in accordance with this
Specification shall be of the 3-pole type and shall comply with EN 62271 - 102.
The switch shall have a rated short-circuit making current and a rated short-time current at
least equivalent to those of the switchgear with which it is to be used. It shall have two
positions: "EARTH OFF" and "EARTH ON".
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 179 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The closing of the switch shall be by independent manual operation. It shall not be
possible for the operating mechanism to be left in such a condition that any energy stored
in the initial part of an incomplete operation remains in the spring when the switch is in the
"EARTH OFF" or "EARTH ON" positions.
It shall be possible to lock the operating mechanism in either the "EARTH ON" or "EARTH
OFF" position.
Mechanical indication of the operating position of the switch equipment shall be provided.
The indicator shall be positively driven in both directions from the switch operating
mechanism so as to show whether the equipment is in the "EARTH ON" or "EARTH OFF"
position. The positions shall be clearly indicated and the indicators shall be inscribed
"EARTH ON" in black letters on a bright yellow background and "EARTH OFF" in white
letters on a Grass Green background.
10.10 EARTHING OF METAL PARTS
Labels shall be provided to indicate clearly the methods of earthing used on the
equipment. A suitable form of indication shall be provided to show whether the equipment
is prepared for "SERVICE", "BUSBAR EARTH" or "CIRCUIT EARTH" as the case may be.
For bus section equipment it shall show whether "LEFT-HAND BUSBAR EARTH" or
"RIGHT-HAND BUSBAR EARTH" is applied.
All metal parts, including any relays, instruments, etc., mounted on the switchboard, shall
be connected to a copper earth bar, which runs along the full length of the switchboard.
The cross-section of the bar shall be sufficient to carry the rated short time withstand
current of the switchgear for the rated short time withstand of the switchboard.
10.11 CABLE CONNECTION
Cable connections shall be performed exclusively under this Contract with fully insulated
cable plugs according to the outside-cone or inside-cone system. All functional
components of the primary part must be safe-to-touch and mounted in an arc-resistant
panel enclosure.
For turnkey projects, the terminations of all incoming cables to transformer panels shall be
carried out by the Contractor.
Cable testing must basically be possible from the front.
Cables must be supported by cable brackets.
The cable connection compartment must be totally enclosed and accessible through a
removable cover.
10.12 MODULE COUPLINGS
Module couplings, where used, should be solid-insulated and screened (semi-conductive,
earthed screen). They must enable the connection and separation of all modules without
gas work.
It must be possible to assemble and disassemble the couplings without changing the
position of the modules.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 180 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
10.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be suitably designed possibly as LV ring-core transformers.
They must be fitted outside the high voltage part and outside the gas compartment.
Feeder current transformers have to be placed above or below the circuit breaker,
according to the panel version. It must be possible to replace current transformers without
gas work.
Current transformers shall be supplied suitable for the duty specified in the Schedule of
Requirements and comply with the requirements of EN 60044 - 1.
All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken, by means of
separate insulated leads, to a suitable, accessible terminal board.
Current transformers, including primary winding conductors, shall have a short-time
current rating and duration on all taps not less than that corresponding to the design
short-circuit level of the associated switchgear.
All current transformers must have a maximum continuous primary current rating not less
than the primary equipment rating of the bay in which they are installed. Furthermore,
current transformers shall have rated continuous thermal current of 120% of the rated
primary current. The current error and phase displacement at rated primary current rating
shall be retained up to the extended current rating.
The secondary windings of each current transformer shall be earthed at one point only
through links situated in an accessible position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed
through a separate link, suitably labelled.
The current transformers and CT secondary wiring of feeders controlling capacitor banks
should be suitable to avoid secondary flashover due to transient inrush currents through
the circuit breaker.
Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each
type and rating of current transformer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity is adequate for the operating of the
associated protective devices and instruments at the lead burdens involved.
Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs, their suitability to
withstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be ensured or
saturable interposing current transformers fitted.
Each current transformer shall be individually labelled and serial plates are to be provided
for fitting to the outside of current transformer chambers, etc. Where multi ratio secondary
windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary terminals of the current
transformer indicating clearly the connection required for each ratio. These connections
shall be shown on the appropriate schematic and connection diagrams.
10.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be suitably insulated (preferably cast-resin) within a metal
enclosure, safe-to-touch. They must be located outside gas compartments. For cable
testing purposes they must be easy to detach or isolated using suitable disconnecting
facilities. Cable testing should be made possible through a suitable adaptor.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 181 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Voltage transformers shall be supplied as specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
They shall comply with EN 60044 - 2 and IEC 60186. They shall be three-phase with a
secondary phase-to-phase voltage as specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
Voltage transformers for protection shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear,
voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers and metering.
When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth
fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall be provided.
The transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of 1,5 in accordance with EN 60044
and IEC 60186 and have a rated burden of 100 VA with class 1,0 3P accuracy to the
specified standards.
Where provided for directional overcurrent and directional earth fault protection, the
residual voltage winding shall have a voltage factor of 1,9 and a rated residual burden of
50 VA per phase with class 1,0 3P accuracy to the specified standards.
Secondary winding shall be connected through suitable miniature circuit breakers,
isolating terminals and links labelled to indicate their functions and phase colour to the
appropriate circuits. MCBs shall comply with EN 60947.
Secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled. Meters or other
instruments with voltage input shall be connected directly to the VT of the respective
circuit, if available. When meters or instruments are provided with voltage signals from
VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then a voltage
selection scheme shall be established and the voltage signals shall be wired through
auxiliary contacts of the respective circuit breakers and also of the bus section circuit
breakers to break the circuit automatically when the circuit-breaker is open.
The voltage transformer connection shall be capable of carrying a current of 200A
continuously so that primary injection testing may be carried out.
10.15 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM
For the safe isolation from supply the switchgear shall be equipped with a capacitive
voltage detection system with the following functions:
1. Voltage indication per phase
2. Relay outputs with potential-free contacts for signalling and interlocking
3. Test socket for phase comparison
10.16 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE
The arc-resistant switchgear enclosure shall consist of the following pressure-resistance
units:
•
Panel front
•
Rear wall with pressure relief duct
•
Panel roof
•
Lateral switchgear termination (end walls)
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 182 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Partitions between panels
The switchgear must have been successfully arc-fault tested according to EN 62271 200, for the quoted short-circuit currents. Corresponding test reports have to be enclosed.
10.17 INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS
10.17.1
Interlocks
The circuit breakers shall be provided with an interlocking system, which ensures safe
operation of the equipment under all service conditions. Preventive interlocks or measures
shall comply with EN 62271 - 200 and EN 62271 - 1.
Interlock mechanisms shall be mechanical and, when manually operated, they shall be
provided with labels, which are readily visible and contain clear, concise instructions for
operation.
Mechanical interlocking shall be effective at the point where hand power is applied so that
stresses cannot be transferred to parts remote from that point.
10.17.2
Controls
Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically controlled locally at the
switchboard. In addition circuit breakers shall have facility for remote and/or supervisory
control.
Where separate control panels are specified, a multi-pole lockable changeover selector
switch shall be provided at the circuit breaker and labelled "Local" and "Remote". Where
only local and supervisory control is specified, circuit breakers shall be supplied with a
multi-pole lockable changeover switch labelled "Local" and "Supervisory".
Where remote or supervisory control facilities are required, electrical interlocking shall
also be provided to prevent closure of the circuit, by interrupting the operating supply to
the spring release coil of the spring closing mechanism.
10.18 LOCKING FACILITIES
In addition to the interlocking facilities specified above, locking facilities shall be provided
to the access doors or gates to the circuit breaker compartment and circuit enclosures.
Where a mechanism is to be locked in a specific position provision shall be made at that
part of the mechanism where the operating power is applied, and not to remote or
ancillary linkages.
Each requirement shall be met by the fitting of a separate single padlock and shall not
entail the fitting of any loose components prior to insertion of the padlock. It shall not be
possible readily to gain access to the tripping-toggle or any part of the mechanism, which
would permit defeat of the locking of the manual tripping.
10.19 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS
The circuit breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches to relay circuit
information for the purposes of control, remote and supervisory indication, circuit
supervision, protection and metering as required by the specification. Switches shall be
provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the circuit
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 183 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. In addition, at least two
normally open and two normally closed auxiliary switches of the same type and rating as
those specified above shall be provided as spare items on each circuit breaker.
The contacts of all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall be positively driven in both
directions with a wiping action, and where necessary discharge resistors shall be provided
to prevent arcing when breaking inductive circuits. They shall be mounted so as to be
readily accessible for maintenance and adjustment.
10.20 BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS
The busbars and connections shall comply with the requirements of BS 159 and shall be
continuously rated for the site conditions and current specified. Only copper material is
accepted for the construction of the busbars. The insulating material used shall be
capable of withstanding the heating effects of the rated short time withstand current
without permanent deformation or deterioration.
The busbars shall be adequately supported against short-circuit forces and provision shall
be made to allow for thermal expansion of the conductors due to normal load currents and
short-circuit currents.
The busbars shall be contained in a separate compartment within the general casing of
the switchgear and shall be extensible at both ends.
All bus sections shall be individually earthed through suitable three-position switches.
10.21 CIRCUIT LABELS
The switchgear shall be adequately labelled at the front and rear of the fixed portion of the
equipment, and on moving portions in a clear and concise manner. Each switchboard
shall be fitted with a main label sized 50 mm x 150 mm x 3 mm in a prominent position.
Circuit labels shall not be fitted on detachable doors or covers.
All circuit labels shall be engraved with black lettering on a white background.
Labels shall be secured with brass or steel screws, which have received an approved rust
preventative treatment.
10.22 SWITCHGEAR FEATURES
10.22.1
Operational Reliability
Any external influence on the primary circuits must be excluded. The switchgear may only
comprise systems and components that have been proven for many years.
10.22.2
Personal Safety
Internal enclosure of the modules, arc-resistant design, mechanical and electrical
interlocking concept, and easy operation should ensure personal safety.
10.22.3
Ergonomic Design
All switchgear devices must be operated from the switchgear front. The control elements
and indicators must be located at an ergonomic height.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 184 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11. POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS
11.1
GENERAL
11.1.1
Types of Transformers and Operating Conditions
11.1.1.1
General
All transformers shall be of the oil immersed type and suitable for outdoor installation and
shall comply with EN 60076, Parts 1 to 5 inclusive.
For indoor substations the transformers shall be installed within cells as shown in the relevant
Tender drawings. The transformer cells shall be forced ventilated as specified elsewhere in
this Specification so that the maximum temperature that can develop within a transformer cell
with the transformer operating at full load, under the highest ambient temperature, will not
exceed 45oC at a height of 1,8 m from the transformer floor. For the purposes of this
calculation the temperature of the incoming airflow should be taken as 40 0C.
11.1.1.2
Cooling
The types of cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements and the letters
relating to the method of oil circulation and cooling used hereafter in the Specification and
Schedules shall be in accordance with EN 60076.
Where a combination of two methods of cooling is applied to one transformer as for
ONAN/ONAF Units, the transformer shall be capable of operating under the ONAN condition
up to a certain load as stated in the Schedule of Requirements, after which the cooling
equipment is to come into operation and the transformer will operate as an ONAF Unit.
The forced cooled transformer shall be fitted with two coolers or two banks of radiators each
capable of dissipating 50% of the losses at continuous maximum rating. It shall be capable of
remaining in operation at full load for twenty minutes in the event of failure of blowers
associated with both coolers without the calculated winding hot spot temperature exceeding
140oC.
Failure of one fan in each group of blowers shall not reduce the continuous maximum rating
of the transformer.
In addition to forced cooling directly connected on the transformer radiators, extraction fans
shall be incorporated, fitted on the side wall of the transformer cell. These extraction fans
shall be at least equivalent in air flow capacity as with the air blowers on the transformer
radiators and shall be controlled by suitable thermostats.
11.1.1.3
Parallel Operation
Transformers supplied of same rating and nominal voltages shall be suitable to operate
satisfactorily in parallel with one another when operating on the same tap.
11.1.2
Continuous Maximum Rating
11.1.2.1
Basis of kVA Rating
Transformers shall have on both the High Voltage and the Low Voltage Windings the rating
stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall comply with the requirements as regards
temperature rise and overloads on all tapings irrespective of the direction of power flow and
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 185 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
with the voltage of the lower voltage winding at the normal voltage stated in the Schedule of
Requirements.
In the case of multi winding units the rating shall permit delivery of the specified loads at the
terminals specified and they shall also comply with the requirements as regards temperature
rise and overloads on all tapings with the voltage of the intermediate voltage winding at the
normal voltage stated in the Schedule of Requirements.
The transformers shall be capable of delivering at all tapings rated currents at an applied
voltage equal to 110% of the tapping voltage as per clause 4.4 of EN 60076 -1.
The overload capability shall be in accordance with EN 60354.
The service conditions will be those specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
11.1.2.2
Basis of Voltage Rating
The voltage rating shall be based on the turns ratio, i.e., no load values.
The voltages between phases on the higher and lower voltage windings of each transformer
measured at no load shall be those corresponding to the normal ratio of transformation stated
in the Schedule of Requirements.
Means shall be provided for varying the normal ratio of transformation in accordance with the
Schedule of Requirements.
11.1.3
Electrical Connections
Transformer windings shall be connected in accordance with the EN 60076 group symbol
specified in the Schedule of Requirements.
All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed but, subject to approval,
mechanically crimped joints may be used for round stranded conductors on tapping, bushing
or earthing connections and on bundle conductors where design has been proved by type
test and application is subject to rigorous quality control.
11.1.4
Ability to Withstand Short Circuit
11.1.4.1
General
All transformers shall be capable of withstanding, on any tapings and without damage the
thermal and dynamic effects of external short circuits under the conditions stated in EN
60076, Part 5. For this purpose the design short circuit level for each system voltage is
stated in Schedule of Requirements.
11.1.4.2
Calculations and Tests
Evidence shall be submitted with the Tender as to the extent to which the manufacturer has
proved by test the ability of the specified transformer to withstand short circuit.
The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars a brief description of those
transformers or parts thereof, which have been subjected to short circuit test. It is preferred
that this information relates to designs comparable with the transformers Tendered but in the
event this is not so the Engineer reserves the right to require calculations to prove that the
design of transformers tendered will satisfactorily comply with this Clause.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 186 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11.1.5
Stabilizing Windings
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Requirements, the product of the number of
turns of the stabilizing windings and the cross-sectional area of one such turn must not be
less than 33% of the corresponding product for the untapped main winding.
When required in the Schedule of Requirements, the stabilizing winding shall be capable of
carrying continuously the load specified therein.
11.1.6
Losses and Evaluation of Losses
The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars guaranteed values for component
losses (i.e. no-load loss, load loss at CMR and auxiliary loss) of the total loss which shall be
as low as is consistent with transport restrictions, reliability and economic use of materials.
Tenders will be assessed using the following:
Total Cost = P + 10,27 (Fe + Cu + Aux)
Where,
P = Tender price of transformer in CY£
Fe = Product of “no-load” loss in kW and CY£225
Cu = Product of “full load” copper loss in kW and CY£15
Aux = Product of the transformer auxiliaries full load in kW and CY£4
The acceptance of transformers yielding component losses higher than the guaranteed
values shall be governed by either of the following:
(a) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values but within the tolerance permitted
under EN 60076, Part 1.
Transformers shall be acceptable subject to full compliance with all other technical
particulars including temperature rises at CMR and subject to the Tenderer accepting
deduction from the Contract Price of charges for each KW or part thereof of component
losses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the above evaluation rates.
(b) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values and exceeding the tolerance permitted
under EN 60076, Part 1.
The acceptance of the transformers shall be entirely at the discretion of the Purchaser
and subject to the Tenderer accepting deduction from the Contract Price of charges for
each kW or part thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the
above loss evaluation rates.
In the event of transformers yielding component and total losses which are either equal to or
below the guaranteed values, the Tenderer will not be entitled to any premium in respect of
reduction in losses below the guaranteed values.
11.1.7
Impedance
The value of reactance measured on all tapings shall be as stated in Schedule of
Requirements. The transformers are required to operate in parallel with up to two other
similar units.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 187 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11.1.8
Noise
The transformer noise levels shall be measured as a type test and in accordance with EN
60551. The acceptable mean sound level of the transformers shall be as stated in the
Schedule of Requirements.
In addition, the transformer noise level shall be measured as a special test, with the
transformer energized at the maximum operating flux density. The acceptable mean sound
level of the transformer shall not exceed 80 dB(A) at the worst possible operating conditions.
Where the bottom plate of the transformer tank will be in direct contact with the surface of the
foundation, anti-vibration pads shall be provided under the contract for insertion between the
transformer and its foundation.
11.1.9
Harmonic Suppression
Transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic
voltages, especially the third, fifth and seventh harmonics and minimize the detrimental
effects resulting therefrom.
11.2
MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS
11.2.1
Magnetic Circuit
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges, development of
short circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure, and the production of flux
components normal to the plane of the laminations. Each lamination shall be insulated with a
material stable under the action of pressure and hot oil.
The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an unobstructed flow
of cooling oil through core cooling ducts to ensure efficient core cooling.
The magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts, and shall be capable of
withstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2.000 V RMS for one minute.
11.2.2
Flux Density
Cores shall be constructed from cold rolled grain oriented steel sheets. Design shall be such
that there will be no adverse effects due to core or stray flux heating with the quality of steel
employed, and that when operating under the most onerous conditions envisaged in EN
60076 and EN 60354, flux density in any part of the magnetic circuit does not exceed 19.000
lines per square centimetre (i.e. 1,9 Tesla). The maximum flux density of the transformers
when operating with rated winding voltage at the principal tap shall not exceed 1,50 Tesla.
The Contractor shall determine the operating conditions under which the maximum flux
density will be attained within the following simultaneously applied limits:
Frequency
48 Hz
Voltage HV
Up to but not exceeding the maximum system voltage specified in the
Schedule of Requirements.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 188 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Load
The transformers may be subjected to intermittent overloading in
accordance with EN 60354 with:
Load = 150% of Rated MVA & Power Factor = 0.85 Lagging.
11.2.3
Windings
The transformers shall be designed to withstand the impulse-voltage levels and power
frequency voltage tests specified.
The windings shall be located in a manner, which will ensure that they remain electrostatically
balanced and that their magnetic centres remain coincident under all conditions of operation.
The windings shall also be thoroughly seasoned during manufacture by the application of
axial pressure at a high temperature for such length of time as will ensure that further
shrinkage is unlikely to occur in service.
The windings and leads of all transformers shall be braced to withstand the shocks which
may occur through rough handling and vibration during transport, switching and other
transient service conditions including external short circuit.
If the winding is built up of sections or of disc coils separated by spacers, the clamping
arrangements shall ensure that equal pressures are applied to all columns of spacers.
11.2.4
Internal Earthing
11.2.4.1
General
All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core laminations, core
bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be maintained at some fixed potential.
11.2.4.2
Earthing of Core Clamping Structure
The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strap.
The bottom main core clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following
methods:
(a) By connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure.
(b) By direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the core
and windings.
(c) By connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection to the tank.
11.2.4.3
Earthing of Magnetic Circuits
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only through a
removable link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opening in the tank
cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core and clamping
plates, etc., to be tested at voltages up to 2,0 kV. The link shall have no detachable
components and the connection to the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main
earth connection. These requirements are compulsory.
Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a separate
link for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Where oil ducts or insulated barriers parallel to the plane of the
laminations divide the magnetic circuit into two or more electrically separate parts, the ducts
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 189 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
and insulating barriers which have a thickness greater than 2,5 mm are to be bridged with
tinned copper strips so inserted as to maintain electrical continuity.
11.2.4.4
Earthing of Coil Clamping Rings
Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring shall be connected to the
adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the transformer as the main earth
connection.
11.2.4.5
Earthing of stabilizing windings
Where a stabilizing winding is provided, one corner of the delta winding shall be earthed
externally by a removable link to the main tank earthing terminal.
11.2.4.6
Size of Earthing Connections
Main earthing connections shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 80 mm2 but
connections inserted between laminations may have cross-sectional areas reduced to 20
mm2 when in close thermal contact with the core.
11.3
TANKS
11.3.1
Transformer Tanks
Each transformer shall be enclosed in a suitably stiffened welded steel tank such that the
transformer can be lifted and transported without permanent deformation or oil leakage. The
construction shall employ weldable structural steel of an approved grade. Welding of
structural steel shall be to an approved International Code of Standard.
Lifting lugs shall be provided, suitable for the weight of the transformer, including core and
windings, fittings, and with the tank filled with oil. Each tank shall be provided with at least
four jacking pads not less than 350 mm to the transformer foundation, and where required,
with lugs suitably positioned for transport on a beam transporter.
The transformer tank and conservator vessel, when empty of oil, shall be designed to
withstand full vacuum without deflection exceeding the value stated in the Schedule of Tests.
Ancillary apparatus e.g. tap changers etc need not be so designed if provision can be made
not to subject them to full vacuum during any site processing and their inability not to
withstand full vacuum does not inhibit full vacuum being applied to the tank and conservator
vessel.
The transformer tank must be designed and secured to withstand the vibrations from
earthquakes as set out in this Specification including a strengthened base and anchorage of
the core and windings to this base.
Where the design of the tank is such that the bottom plate will be in direct contact with the
surface of the foundations, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness:
Length of Transformer Tank
Minimum Thickness
Side Plates
Bottom Plates
Less than 2500 mm
6 mm
19 mm
Greater than 2500 mm
9 mm
25 mm
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 190 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Greater than 7500 mm
9 mm
32 mm
Where skid type bases are provided, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness:
Length of Transformer Tank
Minimum Thickness
Side Plates
Bottom Plates
Less than 2500 mm
6 mm
9 mm
Greater than 2500 mm
9 mm
12 mm
The base of each tank shall be so designed that it is possible to move in any direction the
complete transformer unit, full with oil and fitted with all specified fittings, without injury when
using rollers, plates, crane or rails without overstraining any joints and without causing any
subsequent leakage of oil. A design which requires that slide rails be placed in a particular
position is not to be used. Pulling eyes shall be provided at the base of the transformer for
enabling skidding of the transformer to either centre line of the transformer.
Unless elsewhere specified transformers may have either flat or skid bases, but unless
specifically approved by the Engineer, detachable underpasses must not be used.
All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded.
The tank and cover shall be designed in such a manner as to leave no external pockets in
which water can lodge, no internal pockets in which oil can remain when draining the tank or
in which air can be trapped when filling the tank, and to provide easy access to all external
surfaces for painting.
Where built-on radiators are used, each radiator bank shall be connected to the main tank
through flanged valves mounted on the tank at top and bottom and each bank shall be fitted
with drain valve and air release plug.
Where cooling tubes are used, each tube shall be of heavy gauge steel welded into the tank
sides, top and bottom.
Where separate coolers are used drilled flange facings shall be provided at both ends of the
tank so that the cooler can be mounted at either end. Valves shall be provided on the tank at
each point of connection to the cooler, and between the pump and bottom header of the
cooler to facilitate the removal of the pump. Gasketted blanking plates shall be provided for
the alternative oil connections to the tank. The alternative oil inlet to the tank shall be
complete with shut-off valve and gasketted blanking plates to facilitate site handling.
Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, must not distort when lifted and shall be
provided with suitable flanges having sufficient and properly spaced bolts. Inspection
openings shall be provided to give access to and removal of the internal connections of
bushings, current transformers, winding connections and earthing links. Each opening shall
be correctly located and must be of ample size for the purpose for which it is intended. Each
inspection opening cover shall be provided with lifting handles and its weight shall not exceed
25 kg.
It must be possible to remove any bushing without removing the tank cover.
Pockets shall be provided for a stem type thermometer and for the bulbs of temperature
indicators where specified. These pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil
temperature and it must be possible to remove any bulb without lowering the oil level in the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 191 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
tank. Captive screwed caps shall be provided to prevent the ingress of water to the
thermometer pockets when they are not in use.
Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, accommodation shall be provided for
outdoor weatherproof neutral current transformers.
11.3.2
Conservator Tanks, Breathers and Air Dryers
Each transformer shall be provided with an overhead conservator tank formed of substantial
steel plates and arranged above the highest point of the oil circulating system. Connections
into the main tank shall be at the highest point to prevent the trapping of air or gas under the
main tank cover.
The location of the conservator tank shall be so arranged that it does not obstruct the
passage of high voltage conductors above the transformer. The pipe work between the
conservator and the transformer shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General
Technical Requirements section and a valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off
the oil supply to the transformer.
The capacity of each conservator tank shall be adequate for the expansion and contraction of
oil in the whole system under the specified operating conditions. Conservator tanks shall also
be provided with the following:
(a) A removable end for cleaning purposes
(b) A filling orifice with cap
(c) A sump formed by projecting the feed pipe a minimum of 75 mm above the bottom inside
surface of the conservator
(d) A drain valve with captive cap arranged to drain the conservator including the sump
(e) An isolating valve arranged on the conservator side of the oil and gas actuated relay
(f) An oil level indicator, magnetic type, with indicating levels corresponding to top oil
temperature of 5 oC, plus 30 oC and plus 60 oC and mounted so that it is readable by a
person standing on the ground within 600 mm of the end of the conservator. To be
supplied with low oil level alarm contacts
(g) Each conservator shall be fitted with an oil seal type silica gel breather. This shall be a
type, which permits the silica gel crystals to be removed for drying. Due to the climatic
conditions at site, this breather shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate
climate. All breathers shall be mounted at a height of approximately 1400 mm above
ground level.
11.3.3
Valves and Location
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following valves as a minimum requirement.
Main Tank
(a) One horizontally mounted 50 mm bore filter valve located near to the top of the tank.
(b) One 50 mm bore filter valve located near to the bottom of the tank and diagonally
opposite to the filter valve required against (a). Where design permits, this valve may be
combined with item (c).
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 192 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) One 50 mm drain valve with such arrangements as may be necessary inside the tank to
ensure that the tank can be completely drained of oil as far as practicable. This valve
shall also be provided with an approved oil sampling device 15 mm diameter.
(d) One 25mm bore valve at the bottom of the main tank and directly opposite to valve item
(b) for connecting the pressure transducer of the oil filtration unit.
Conservator
(e) One valve between the conservator and gas actuated relay for the main tank and, where
appropriate, for the tap change diverter switch tank.
(f) One drain valve for oil conservator tank so arranged that the tank could be completely
drained of all oil.
(g) One horizontally mounted 50 mm bore valve that has to be at the bottom of the
conservator for the oil inlet of the oil filtration unit similar to valve item (b)
Tap Changer Selector Switch
(h) One 50 mm filter and one 50 mm drain valve where selector switches are contained in a
separate tank.
Diverter Switch
(i) One 50 mm drain valve to be fitted to each tank. An approved oil-sampling device shall
also be provided.
Blank flanges, plates or captive screw caps shall be fitted to all valves and pipe ends not
normally connected in service.
The omission of any, or the provision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements,
will not be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
11.3.4
Joints and Gaskets
All joint faces shall be arranged to prevent the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a
minimum of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.
Oil resisting synthetic rubber gaskets are not permissible except where the synthetic rubber is
used as a bonding medium for cork or similar material or where metal inserts are provided to
limit compression.
Gaskets, having a minimum thickness of 5 mm, shall be as thin as is possible consistent with
the provision of a good seal except that where jointing faces are precision machined thinner
gaskets may be used and full details of all gasket sealing arrangements shall be shown on
the Plant drawings submitted for approval.
One set of gaskets should be supplied separately for each transformer so that new gaskets
are available for use during the assembly of any part of the transformers, which are
dispatched separately (e.g. radiators, conservators, valves etc.).
11.3.5
Pressure Relief Device
An approved pressure relief device of sufficient size for the rapid release of any pressure that
may be generated in the tank and designed to operate at a static pressure lower than the
hydraulic test pressure called for in the Schedule of Works Tests, shall be provided.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 193 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
An equalizer pipe connection shall be provided between the pressure relief device and the
conservator. The relief device is to be mounted on the tank cover or sides and is to be
provided with a skirt to project at least 25 mm into the tank to prevent gas accumulation.
In the event that the device is a spring operated valve type, it shall be provided with one set of
normally open signalling contacts.
11.3.6
Earthing Terminals
Four steel flag terminals having two 14 mm diameter holes on 55 mm centres shall be located
one on each side and near to the bottom of the transformer to facilitate connection to the local
earthing system. Their location should be indicated on the drawings.
11.3.7
Rating, Diagram, and Valve Plates
The following plates, or an approved combined plate, shall be fixed to each transformer tank
at an average height of 1500 mm above the ground level:
(a) A rating plate bearing the data specified in EN 60076, Part 1. This plate shall also include
a space for the Purchaser's serial number and in addition include the short circuit current
rating and time factor for each winding.
(b) A diagram plate showing in an approved manner, the internal connections and the
voltage vector relationship of the several windings, in accordance with EN 60076, Part 1,
with the transformer voltage ratio for each tap and, in addition, a plan view of the
transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals.
(c) A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs.
This plate shall also if necessary warn operators to refer to the Maintenance Instructions
before applying vacuum. The mass of oil shall be stated in litres and kg.
Plates are to be of stainless steel or other approved material capable of withstanding the
rigors of continuous outdoor service at site.
11.4
11.4.1
COOLING PLANT
Cooling Plant General
Radiators and coolers, where required, shall be designed so that all painted surfaces can be
thoroughly cleaned and easily painted on site with a brush or spray gun. The design shall
also avoid pockets in which water can collect and shall be capable of withstanding the
pressure tests specified in the Schedule of Works Tests for the transformer main tank.
The clearance between any oil or other pipe work and live parts shall be not less than the
minimum clearances stated in the Schedule of Requirements.
The cooling of the transformers shall be such that failure of any one part of the cooling plant
will not result in the loss of more than 50 per cent of the total forced cooling capacity.
11.4.2
Radiators Connected Directly to the Tank
Radiators connected directly to the tank shall be detachable and shall be provided with
machined or ground flanged inlet and outlet branches. Plugs shall be fitted at the top of each
radiator for air release and at the bottom for draining.
A valve shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 194 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11.4.3
Cooler banks
Each cooler bank shall be provided with:
(a) A valve at each point of connection to the transformer tank.
(b) A valve at each point of connection of radiators.
(c) Loose blanking plates to permit the blanking off of the main oil connections.
(d) A 50 mm filter valve at the top of each cooler bank.
(e) A 50 mm drain valve at the lowest point of each interconnecting oil pipe.
(f) A thermometer pocket, fitted with captive screw cap, in the inlet and in the outlet oil pipes.
(g) Air release and drain plugs on each radiator.
The omission of any, or the provision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements
will not be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.
11.4.4
Forced Cooling
The type of forced cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees.
Forced cooling equipment for transformers of similar rating and design shall be completely
interchangeable with one another without modification on size.
11.4.5
Oil Pipes and Flanges
All oil piping necessary for the connecting of each transformer to the cooler banks shall be
supplied under this Contract.
The oil piping shall be of approved material with machined flanged joints.
Copper pipe work is to comply with BS 61.
Dimensions of steel pipes shall be in accordance with EN 10220 and the drilling of all pipe
flanges shall comply with BS 4504.
An approved expansion piece having anti-vibration characteristics shall be provided in each
oil pipe connection between the transformer and each oil cooler bank.
It shall be possible to drain any section of pipe work independently of the rest and drain
valves or plugs shall be provided as necessary to meet this requirement.
11.4.6
Air Blowers
Air blowers for forced air-cooling shall be of approved make and design and be suitable for
continuous operation outdoors and indoors. They shall also be capable of withstanding the
stresses imposed when brought up to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the
motor.
To reduce noise to the practical minimum, motors shall be mounted independently from the
coolers or, alternatively, an approved form of anti-vibration mounting shall be provided.
It shall be possible to remove the blower complete with motor without disturbing or
dismantling the cooler structure framework.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 195 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Blades shall be of galvanized steel unless otherwise approved.
Blower casings shall be made of galvanized steel of thickness not less than 2,6 mm (14
SWG) and shall be suitably stiffened by angles or tees.
Galvanized wire with mesh not exceeding 12,5 mm guards shall be provided to prevent
accidental contact with the blades. Guards shall also be provided over all moving parts.
Guards shall be designed such that blades and other moving parts can not be touched by
test fingers.
11.4.7
Cooler Control
Where multiple fan cooling using small single-phase motors is employed, the motors in each
cooling bank shall be grouped so as to form a balanced three-phased load.
The supply to the cooling fans shall be controlled by means of a suitably rated isolating switch
capable of being locked in the open position. A phase failure relay is to be provided in the
main cooler supply circuit.
Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a three pole electrically operated
contactor and with control gear of approved design for starting and stopping manually.
Auxiliary contacts on each contactor shall provide an alarm to the remote control panel when
any of these contactors is open.
Where forced cooling is used on transformers, provision shall be included under this Contract
for automatic starting and stopping from the contacts on the winding temperature indicating
device. The control equipment shall be provided with a short time delay device to allow the
starting of only one group of fans at a time, in case of multiple fans cooling.
Each motor shall be protected by a suitable circuit breaker with thermal and short circuit
protection. Each motor circuit breaker shall have an auxiliary contact to provide an alarm to
the remote control panel in the event of the circuit breaker being open.
The control arrangements are to be designed to prevent the starting of motors totalling more
than 15 kW simultaneously either manually or automatically.
All contacts and other parts, which may require periodic renewal, adjustment or inspection,
shall be readily accessible.
All wiring for the control gear accommodated in the marshalling kiosk together with all
necessary cable boxes and terminations and all wiring between the marshalling kiosk and the
motors shall be included in the Contract.
11.5
11.5.1
VOLTAGE CONTROL
General
Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers shall be provided with
voltage control equipment of the tap changing type for varying the effective transformation
ratio.
Winding taps as called for in the Schedule of Requirements shall be provided on the high
voltage winding.
All terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked with numbers corresponding to the
cables connected thereto.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 196 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Tap positions shall be numbered consecutively ranging from one upwards. The lowest
number shall represent the tapping position corresponding to the maximum number of high
voltage winding turns.
11.5.2
On-Load Tap Changers
11.5.2.1
General
On-load tap changers shall comply with EN 60214 and shall be suitable for power flow in both
directions. Only designs that have been type tested in accordance with these standards will
be accepted. Tapchangers shall be manufactured by any one of the following approved
manufacturers:
(a) Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen – Germany
(b) ABB Components - Sweden
Current making and breaking switches associated with the tap selectors or otherwise where
combined with tap selectors shall be contained in a tank in which the head of oil is maintained
by means, completely independent of that on the transformer itself. The head of oil in this
tank shall be maintained either by a separate compartment of the main conservator or by a
separately mounted tank. An oil surge detector relay, an oil level indicator and a dehydrating
breather shall be provided. These requirements shall apply also for designs in which tap
selection and current making and breaking are accomplished by the same contacts within a
tank separate from the transformer.
The switches and the oil of compartments containing such switches used for making and
breaking current shall be capable, without maintenance, of performing 20.000 on-load tap
change operations or two years service, whichever comes first.
Contacts used for making and breaking current shall be capable of performing at least
100.000 on-load tap change operations under maximum rated current conditions without
replacement.
Transition resistors for on-load tap change equipment shall be mounted in the compartment
containing contacts used for making and breaking current and their measured values shall be
inscribed on the rating plate.
Details of maintaining oil separation, oil levels, detection of oil surges and provision of alarm
or trip contacts will be dependent on the design of tap-changer and be to the approval of the
Engineer.
11.5.2.2
Mechanisms
The tap change equipment shall be suitable for operation from a single phase 230 V or three
phase 400 V 50 Hz supply. Means shall be provided adjacent to the tap-change motor for
isolating the motor and the control gear from supply.
The tap change mechanisms shall be designed such that when a tap change has been
initiated, it will be completed independently of the operation of the control relays and
switches. If a failure of the auxiliary supply during tap change or any other contingency would
result in that movement not being completed an approved means shall be provided to
safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment.
Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the tap changing mechanism.
These shall be directly connected in the operating motor circuit. In addition, mechanical stops
shall be fitted to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any conditions. For on-load
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 197 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
tap change equipment these stops shall withstand the full torque of the driving mechanism
without damage to the tap change equipment.
Thermal devices or other approved means shall be provided to protect the motor and control
circuit.
A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be provided and fitted inside the tap change
mechanism box.
Switches, contacts and the driving mechanism shall be mounted in suitable compartments
placed in accessible positions on the transformer. Any enclosed compartment not oil-filled
shall be adequately ventilated and provided with low temperature heaters. All contactors,
relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to
condensation.
11.5.2.3
Local and Remote Control
Equipment for local manual and electrical operation shall be provided in an outdoor cubicle.
Electrical remote control equipment shall also be supplied as specified in the Schedule of
Requirements.
The mounting of driving mechanisms shall minimize projection from the transformer and shall
be arranged such that the detachable manual operating handle in the driving mechanism is
approximately 1,4 meters above ground level.
Storage for the handle shall be provided within the casing of the tap changer driving
mechanism.
The following operating conditions are to apply to the on-load tap selector controls:
(a) It must not be possible to operate the electrical drive when the manual operating gear is
in use.
(b) It must not be possible for two electric control points to be in operation at the same time.
(c) Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only
unless the control switch is returned to the off position between successive operations.
(d) It must not be possible for any transformers operating in parallel with one or more
transformers in a group to be more than one tap out of step with the other transformers in
the group.
(e) All electrical control switches and local manual operating gear shall be clearly labelled to
indicate the direction of tap changing i.e. raise and lower tap number.
11.5.2.4
Indications
Apparatus of the latest technology and of an approved type shall be provided on each
transformer:
(a) To give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control
point of the number of the tapping in use. This indication shall not be capable of being
reset.
(b) To give electrical indication, separate from that specified above, of tap position at the
remote supervisory point.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 198 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) To give indication at the remote control point that a tap change is in progress, this
indication to continue until the tap change is completed.
(d) To give indication at the remote control point and at the supervisory control point when
the units of a group of transformers operating in parallel are operating at more than one
tap apart.
(e) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the number of operations completed by the
equipment.
(f) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the maximum and minimum position to which
the mechanism has moved. These indications to be resettable.
11.5.3
Automatic Voltage Control
Automatic control, where specified, shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel,
up to three transformers in the future.
In addition to the methods of control covered in the Clause above, the following methods shall
also be provided.
(a) Automatic Independent: It shall be possible to select automatic independent control for
each transformer irrespective of the method of control selected for any other of the
associated transformers.
(b) Automatic Parallel: It shall be possible using the minimum circulating current method or
where specified the Master/Follower method.
11.6
11.6.1
TERMINAL BUSHINGS
General
Unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers are to be provided
with outdoor type bushing insulators for phase and neutral terminals.
The conductor used must be to the requirements of EN 60137 using Copper based solid rod
or stranded draw-lead fitted to a suitable outer terminal.
All bushings shall be designed and tested in accordance with EN 60137 and the minimum
creepage distance for outdoor bushings shall be as specified in the Schedules.
Bushings for 66 kV and above shall be provided with adjustable arcing horns.
Bushings shall be of sealed construction suitable for service under the very humid conditions
at site and, in addition, to the very rapid cooling of equipment exposed to direct sunlight when
this is followed by sudden heavy rainstorms.
The insulation should be free at all times of partial discharge at all voltage levels within the
working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges during manufacture.
Typical sections of bushing insulators showing the internal construction, method of securing
the top cap and methods of sealing shall be included in the Tender.
On all condenser bushings a tapping shall be brought out to a separate terminal for testing
purposes on site. Space on the bushing nameplates shall be provided for stamping values of
initial field dissipation factor (tan δ) tests.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 199 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11.6.2
Porcelain
Hollow porcelain shall meet the test requirements of BS 4963 (IEC 62155) and shall be
sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Designs based on jointed porcelains will not
be acceptable. The glaze must not be depended upon for insulation.
The glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall cover completely all
exposed parts of the insulator. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by
atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in
temperature that may be experienced under working conditions.
The porcelain must not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, gaskets shall
be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces in
contact with gaskets shall be accurately ground and free from glaze.
All fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and must not enter
into chemical action with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Cement
thickness are to be as small and even as possible and proper care is to be taken to centre
and locate the individual parts correctly during cementing.
All porcelain insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning.
11.6.3
Marking
Each porcelain insulator shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark,
year of manufacture serial number, electrical and mechanical characteristics in accordance
with EN 60137. These marks shall be clearly legible and visible after assembly of fittings and
not impressed but shall be imprinted before firing.
When a batch of insulators bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further
insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer
that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected
batch in such a way that there can be no possibility of the insulators being re-submitted for
the test or supplied for the use of the Purchaser.
11.6.4
Mounting of Bushings
Bushing insulators shall be mounted on the tank in a manner such that the external
connections can be taken away clear of all obstacles. Neutral bushings shall be mounted in a
position from which a connection can be taken to a neutral current transformer mounted on a
bracket secured to the transformer tank.
The clearance from phase to earth must not be less than those stated in the Schedule of
Requirements.
The line current transformers, where required, will be provided under this Contract and the
bushings are to be so arranged that these can be removed without disturbing the current
transformers, secondary terminals and connections or pipe work.
A flexible pull-through lead suitably sweated to the end of the winding copper shall be
provided for the 66 kV and higher voltage bushings and is to be continuous to the connector
which is housed in the helmet of the bushings.
When bushings with an under-oil end of a re-entrant type are used the associated flexible
pull-through lead is to be fitted with a suitably designed gas bubble deflector.
The bushing flanges must not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 200 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The quality of flange surfaces shall be N7.
Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized and all bolt threads
are to be greased before erection.
11.7
11.7.1
CABLES AND TERMINATIONS
Cable Boxes and Sealing End Chambers
Where 132 kV, 66 kV, and 22 kV cables terminate on transformers, suitable cable boxes shall
be provided.
Means shall be provided for easy disconnection of the cables from the transformer bushings
for testing purposes.
11.7.2
Testing
The cable box and disconnecting or sealing end chamber shall be capable of withstanding for
fifteen minutes both at the time of the first test on the cables and at any subsequent time as
may be required, between phases and phases to earth, a test voltage equal to:
2E kV DC or an AC test equal to 1,3E kV,
where, E = RMS nominal system voltage in kV between phases.
During these tests, the links in the disconnecting or sealing end chamber will be withdrawn
and the transformer windings with connectors thereto will be earthed.
11.7.3
Supply of Cables
Auxiliary power and multicore control cables between the integral parts of the transformer, its
marshalling kiosk or tank mounted cubicle and ancillary equipment shall be installed, glanded
and have individual cores identified and terminated under this Contract.
Similarly, cables from each transformer to its associated protective equipment, to auxiliary
supply switchboards and interconnections with other transformers will be supplied, glanded
and have individual cores identified under this Contract.
11.7.4
Cable Support Brackets
Where 132kV, 66kV, and 22kV cable boxes are fitted the transformers shall be supplied with
suitable cable support brackets for supporting adequately the cables both under normal
operating conditions and under upnormal conditions such as during short circuit.
11.8
11.8.1
TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING
CUBICLES
Temperature Indicating Devices and Alarms
The transformers shall be provided with two approved devices for indicating the hottest spot
HV and LV temperatures. The devices shall have a dial type indicator, and in addition, a
pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding temperature device shall
have three separate contacts fitted, one of which shall be used to control the cooling plant
motors, one to give an alarm and one to trip the associated circuit-breakers. The dial of the
temperature indicators shall have a scale ranging from 30oC to 150oC preferably uniformly
divided. The temperature indicators shall be equipped with transmitter for remote indication.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 201 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
To simulate indication of the hottest spot temperature of the windings the device shall
comprise a current transformer associated with one phase only and a heating device
designed to operate continuously at 130 percent of transformer CMR current and for thirty
minutes at 150% of CMR current, associated with a sensing bulb installed in an oil tight
pocket in the transformer top oil. One CT shall be installed in the HV winding termination and
the second in the LV winding termination.
The winding temperature indicators shall be housed in the marshalling cubicle. The tripping
contacts of the winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable to close between 80oC and
150oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by not more than 10oC.
The alarm contacts and the contacts used to control the cooling plant motors and initiate
automatic start-up of the reserve cooler on the above devices shall be adjustable to close
between 50oC and 100oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by a desired
amount between 15oC and 30oC.
All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale and must be accessible on the removal of the
cover. Alarm and trip circuit contacts shall be suitable for making or breaking 150VA between
the limits of 30V and 250V AC or DC and of making 500VA between the limits of 110V and
250V DC. Cooler motor control contacts shall be suitable for operating the cooler contactors
direct, or if necessary, through an interposing relay.
The temperature indicators in the marshalling kiosk shall be so designed that it is possible to
move the pointers by hand for the purpose of checking the operation of the contacts and
associated equipment.
The working parts of the instrument shall be made visible by the provision of cut-away dials
and glass-fronted covers and all setting and error adjustment devices shall be easily
accessible.
Connections shall be brought from the device to terminal boards placed inside the
marshalling cubicle.
Isolating and test links and a 63 mm moving iron ammeter shall be provided in the
marshalling kiosk for each winding temperature indicator for:
(a) Checking the output of the current transformer.
(b) Testing the current transformer and thermal image characteristics.
(c) Disconnecting the bulb heaters from the current transformer secondary circuit to enable
the instrument to be used as an oil temperature indicator.
The calibration of the indicator shall be related to the winding having the maximum
temperature rise. If the values on the winding temperature indicator vary by more than plus
or minus 3oC from the values derived during the temperature rise tests specified in the
Schedule of Particulars, adjustment shall be made to the equipment to achieve these limits.
11.8.2
Gas and Oil Actuated Relays
Each transformer shall be fitted with gas and oil-actuated relay equipment having alarm
contacts, which close on collection of gas or low oil level, and tripping contacts which close
following oil surge conditions.
Each gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible pipe
connection for checking the operation of the relay.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 202 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Each relay shall be fitted with a calibrated glass window for indication of gas volume.
A machined surface shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate the settings of the
relays and to check the mounting angle in the expansion pipe and the cross level of the relay.
A straight run of pipe shall be provided for a length of five times the internal diameter of the
pipe on the tank side of the gas and oil actuated relay and three times the internal diameter of
the pipe on the conservator side of the gas and oil-actuated relay.
To allow gas to be collected at ground level, a small bore pipe shall be connected to the gas
release cock of the gas and oil-actuated relay and brought down to a point approximately
1.400mm above ground level, where it shall be terminated by a cock which shall have
provision for locking to prevent unauthorized operation.
The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipework and the cooling
plant shall be such that maloperation of the relays will not take place under normal service
conditions, including starting or stopping of oil circulating pumps, if available, whether by
manual or automatic control under all operating temperatures.
The pipework shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the transformer will pass into the
gas and oil-actuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay must not form a delivery path in
parallel with any circulating oil pipe, nor is it to be teed into or connected through the pressure
relief vent. Sharp bends in the pipework shall be avoided.
The transformer shall be provided with two gas and oil-actuated relays piped separately to
the conservators for the transformer main tank and for the tap changer.
11.8.3
Marshalling Cubicles
The transformer ancillary apparatus shall be mounted in an approved heated and ventilated
cubicle, attached to the transformer.
The cubicle shall preferably be divided into four separate compartments for the
accommodation of the following equipment.
(a) Temperature indicators, cooler control "Auto-Hand" selector switch and test links and
ammeter for the winding temperature indicator circuits.
(b) Control and protection equipment for the tap change gear including an isolating switch in
the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of the motor and
of being locked in the open position.
(c) Control and protection equipment for the cooling plant including an isolating switch in
the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of all cooling
plant motors and of being locked in the open position. The control facilities shall
include a cooler selector switch, which can be padlocked in either position to select
either cooler for remote control. Local control of the selected cooler shall be provided.
(d) Terminal boards and gland plates including glands where specified for incoming and
outgoing cables. Provision shall also be made for termination of secondary wiring of
current transformers where specified.
All doors shall be fastened by integral handles with provision for locking each door.
The Temperature indicators shall be so mounted that the dials are not more than 1700mm
from ground level and the door(s) of the compartment shall be provided with glazed windows
of adequate size.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 203 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Facilities shall be provided to permit the temperature indicators with capillary tubing and bulbs
to be removed from the cubicle. Mechanical protection shall be provided and sharp bends
avoided where the capillary tubes enter the cubicle.
To prevent internal condensation an approved type of metal clad heater shall be provided
controlled by a switch and a 5A fuse inside the cubicle to be supplied from a separate
substation "heating" supply circuit.
All internal wiring shall be so placed as not to obstruct access.
Labels in addition to those specified elsewhere shall be provided on the outside of the kiosk
to identify the compartments.
All three-phase relays, contactors, isolating switches and thermal devices shall be marked
with appropriate phase colour. Apparatus in which the phase elements are mounted
horizontally shall be coloured brown, black, grey from left to right when viewed from the front
of the panel, and when mounted vertically they shall be coloured brown, black, grey from top
and bottom.
The kiosk shall be fitted with the following interlocked switch sockets, mounted externally to
provide auxiliary supply points:
•
Weatherproof 15A 3-pin switched socket, Walsall type SP51/55 list No. 2193 for 240V AC
complete with plug. The switched socket shall be connected to the cubicle heater supply
circuit through a 15 A fuse or MCB in the live lead.
All supply circuits in the marshalling cubicles shall be monitored to alarm to the remote control
panel in case the supply to the circuit is OFF or tripped.
11.9
DRYING OUT
All transformers shall be dried out by an approved method at the manufacturer's works and
so arranged that they might be put into service without further drying out on site. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the method which they
recommend should be adopted for drying out the transformers on site should it prove
necessary to do so.
Clear instructions shall be included in the Maintenance Instructions regarding any special
precautionary measures (e.g., strutting of tap changer barriers or tank cover) which must be
taken before the specified vacuum treatment can be carried out. Any special equipment
necessary to enable the transformer to withstand the treatment shall be provided with each
transformer. The maximum vacuum which the complete transformer, filled with oil, can safely
withstand without any special precautionary measures being taken is also to be stated in the
Maintenance Instructions.
11.10 OIL
The Contractor shall supply the first filling of transformer oil, which shall be in accordance with
BS 148 or to IEC 60296. Details of the oil to be supplied should be given in the Schedule of
Particulars.
Where the transport weight of transformers does not exceed 50.000 kg these can be shipped
partly oil filled with sufficient oil to cover the windings and the insulation.
The oil shall be under controlled nitrogen pressure of about 0,3 atmospheres.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 204 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Alternatively the transformers can be shipped without oil with the tanks filled with nitrogen
under pressure of about 30,4 kPa. The Tenderers shall submit with their offer details on how
they propose to ship the transformers for approval by the Engineer. The Tenderers must also
supply full details on filling up the transformers with oil after delivery. Earthing transformers
shall be delivered full with oil.
11.11 EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS
11.11.1
General
The earthing transformers shall comply with EN 60289 and shall be of the oil immersed
ONAN type suitable for outdoor installation and are to have a main interconnected star
winding which will be directly connected to the lower voltage terminals of the associated
system transformer.
The neutral point of the interconnected star winding shall be brought out of the tank
through a bushing insulator. This point may be isolated or connected to earth directly or
through an impedance in order to provide an earthing point for the neutral of the system.
The earthing transformers shall also be provided with a delta connected tertiary winding
and also with a star connected auxiliary winding arranged to give a 400/230V, threephase, four-wire supply. The auxiliary winding shall have the continuous rating stated in
the Schedule of Requirements and shall conform to EN 60076.
11.11.2
Electrical and Short Circuit Characteristics
The earthing transformers shall, when operating continuously at any load up to continuous
maximum rating of the auxiliary winding be capable of withstanding for a period of three
seconds the application of normal three-phase line voltage to the line terminals of the
interconnected star winding with one line terminal and the neutral terminal connected
solidly to earth. The zero phase sequence impedance and resistance of the
interconnected star winding under these conditions shall be as stated in the Schedule of
Particulars and Guarantees.
Additionally, the earthing and auxiliary transformers shall, when operating continuously at
any load up to CMR, be capable of withstanding for three seconds the current obtained
when a short circuit is applied between any or all of the lower voltage terminals with full
line voltage maintained at the higher voltage terminals.
The foregoing conditions shall assume an initial winding temperature which is the sum of
the maximum ambient temperature stated in the relevant Schedule and the temperature
rise obtained by continuous operation at CMR.
The interconnected star winding of the earthing transformers when at its maximum
temperature due to continuous full load on the auxiliary winding shall be designed to carry
for thirty seconds without injuries heating an earth fault current not less than the full load
lower voltage current of the main transformer to which it is connected or otherwise the
current stated in Schedule of Requirements.
11.11.3
Tanks and Fittings
The earthing transformers shall be provided with the following fittings:
(a) Conservator vessel with removable end cover and prismatic oil gauge
(b) Buchholz relay
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 205 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) One thermometer pocket with captive screw cap
(d) Suitable breather of the oil seal type at least one size larger than would normally be
supplied for the use in a temperate climate
(e) Pressure relief device
(f) Filter valve and combined filter and drain valves
(g) Oil sampling device
(h) Rating plate
11.11.4
Auxiliary Winding
The three-phase, four-wire auxiliary windings shall be terminated at a three-pole
combined fuse switch unit to EN 60947-3 with bolted neutral link and gland entry for a 185
mm2 3 1/2 - core CEANDER type XLPE cable or other equivalent. This shall be
accommodated in a lockable, fully weatherproof compartment together with a neutral
earthing link. The purpose of the neutral earthing link is to connect the 400V system
neutral to earth. It shall be connected between the transformer winding end and a suitably
located earthing terminal to which the system earth can be connected.
Three spare fuses shall be supplied with each transformer.
11.11.5
Tappings
Tappings shall be provided on the low voltage winding to give the no-load voltage
variation specification in Schedule of Requirements.
11.11.6
Tap Changing
Tap changing shall be carried out with the transformer off-circuit by means of an externally
operated self-positioning tapping switch. All phases of the tapping switch shall be
operated by one handwheel, which shall be positively located and lockable at each
tapping switch position. Indication plates shall be fitted to show clearly the tap position
number at which the transformer is operating. Switch position number one shall
correspond to the maximum plus tapping.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 206 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12. STATION DC EQUIPMENT
12.1
12.1.1
BATTERY CELLS
General
The Battery shall be of long service life, high reliability and have an outstanding resistance
to electrical abuse. The battery cells shall be of the high performance nickel/cadmium type
(low internal resistance) and shall be designed for a life expectancy of at least 25 years
under the conditions of service likely to be encountered by the equipment detailed in this
Specification.
The nickel/cadmium batteries shall comply generally with EN 60623, any variations being
subject to the approval of the Engineer/client.
12.1.2
Battery Voltage Characteristic
The Charge/Discharge characteristic of the battery shall be submitted with the tender and
an optimal float charge voltage per cell, which is just below the gassing level, shall be
deducted such that the battery can recover to between 75% to 100% capacity within 24
hours from a fully discharged condition, with minimum electrolyte loss.
The final volts/cell for boost charging shall be as high as possible to maintain amperehour efficiency.
12.1.3
Battery Construction
The cells of alkaline batteries shall be of long service life high reliability and shall be of
robust construction and resistant to both mechanical and electrical abuse. The cells shall
be designed for a life expectancy of 25 years under the conditions of service to be
encountered by the specified plant. They shall be suitable for use in remote locations or
where maintenance shall be minimal and shall be suitable for tropical climate.
The electrolyte capacity and general design of the batteries shall be such that inspection
and maintenance, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less
than twelve months.
12.1.4
Cell Boxes
Cell boxes shall be designed to give ease of maintenance and provide mechanical
strength and stability of the material used throughout the extended life.
Cell boxes shall be manufactured from translucent or transparent high impact, durable
plastic polymers, making the product well suited to the environment. The containers shall
not deform or buckle under high room temperature, abnormal heat generated under heavy
charging conditions and high gas pressure in case of blocked vent plugs.
12.1.5
Positive Pocket Plates
The positive pocket plates shall be designed for optimum performance and shall utilize
high quality nickel-plated perforated steel, which shall form pockets containing the active
material. The individual pockets shall form a homogenous plate enclosed in an outer
frame for robustness. Latest means of providing an excellent electrical conductivity shall
be adopted.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 207 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Sufficient space shall be provided beneath the plates to accommodate any deposit, which
may accumulate at the bottom of the cell without short-circuiting the plates. The life of the
cell shall not be limited by the accumulation of deposit.
12.1.6
Negative Pocket Plates
The design of the negative pocket plates shall be similar to that of the positive pocket
plates above with high perforation density and cadmium-plated.
12.1.7
Plate Inter-Connections
All the positive and negative plates shall be welded together in their respective groups and
brought out to the terminal posts in such a way as to provide a low resistance path for
optimum cell electrical performance.
12.1.8
Separators
Separators shall be provided between plates to prevent metallic conduction whilst
permitting electrolyte conduction. Separators shall be suitable for continuous immersion
in the electrolyte without distortion.
The inter-plate separators shall ensure minimum electrical resistance and shall last at
least as long as the life of the cell.
12.1.9
Terminals
The terminals shall be of a high conductivity and corrosion free materials and the terminal
pillars shall match the size and discharge currents of the cell.
12.1.10
Inter-Cell Connectors
Inter-cell connectors shall be manufactured of high conductivity materials to keep the
voltage drop between the cells to a minimum. The size and number of these connectors
shall be capable of carrying the full discharge current.
The connectors shall be of rigid construction and shall be interchangeable. "Bolted-on"
type of connector is preferred.
12.1.11
Vent Plugs
The design of the vent plug shall be such that it can effectively prevent the electrolyte from
spraying when the cells are under boost charge and at the same time providing sufficient
ventilation for the gas to escape under the worst charging condition. The vent shall also
be designed such that it can effectively act as a flame retardant.
The size of the plug holes shall be large enough to permit convenient normal filling and
topping of the electrolyte and extraction of the fluid using a syphon hydrometer for test
purposes.
The plugholes shall be so designed such as to minimize spraying of the electrolyte when
the cells are accidentally rocked or moved from places with the plugs withdrawn.
During transit blank plugs shall be fitted to prevent the formation of carbonate in the
residual electrolyte that might be available and also to prevent the collection of dust and
foreign particles.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 208 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12.1.12
Polarity Identification
The positive (+) identification terminal shall be indicated on a red disk on the appropriate
pillar and/or lid next to the pillar. Similarly for the negative (-) identification terminal which
shall be marked on a blue disk.
12.1.13
Type Reference
The cell type reference shall be marked on both sides of the cell.
12.1.14
Electrolyte Level
The upper and lower electrolyte level markings shall form continuous lines on both sides
of the containers. The levels shall be clearly drawn or formed as part of the container and
they shall denote the upper and lower permissible levels of the electrolyte under normal
operations and appropriately marked as "UPPER" and "LOWER" respectively.
12.1.15
Battery Crates
For convenience of handling, the plastic cells may be supplied in taped block form.
12.1.16
Battery Fuse Box
Each battery shall be provided with a suitable size set of fuses, mounted in a wall
enclosure. The fuses shall be removable using suitable fuse handle.
12.2
12.2.1
BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORIES
Battery Mounting
Batteries shall be mounted on framed timber (or steel) single tier multistep racks of robust
construction and shall be arranged in single parallel rows that shall not exceed a total
height of one meter and a depth of 90 cm. Stands shall be treated with two coats of acid
resisting enamel of approved colour and arranged such that each cell is readily accessible
for inspection, test and maintenance including topping up of electrolyte.
The stands shall be mounted on porcelain insulators and shall be so dimensioned such
that the bottom of the lower step is not less than 30 mm above the floor. A separate stand
shall be supplied for each battery bank.
12.2.2
Connectors and Termination Lugs
Apart from the requirements of inter-cell connectors previously described, connectors and
termination lugs shall be supplied complete for tapping of the battery cells and termination
of multicore cables to the battery chargers. All connectors and cable lugs shall be rated
according to the current discharge rating of the batteries.
12.2.3
Accessories
Each battery installation shall be provided with a durable instruction card placed inside a
strong wooden or suitably treated steel box with a full set of test accessories, installation
tools, etc., which shall include the following minimum requirements:
(a) 3-0-3 volts Voltmeter for cell testing,
(b) Small syphon hydrometer,
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 209 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) Large syphon hydrometer,
(d) Cell bridging connector,
(e) Level testing tube,
(f) Topping up bottle/equipment as appropriate to the type of installation.
Labels shall be provided to number each separate cell in numerical order. These shall be
supplied loose and affixed at site once the cells are connected together.
12.2.4
Battery Spares
Spares shall be provided for the battery installation as follows:
•
Electrolyte (concentrated): 10%
•
Stand and cell insulators: 5%
•
Battery cell: 4
•
Inter-cell connectors: 2%
•
Mineral jelly: 1 standard tin
The mineral jelly shall be specially selected for greasing of terminals and connectors for
all cells.
The above spares are deemed to be consumable spares and as such are to be
considered as part and parcel of the main battery equipment. Correspondingly, these are
not shown separately on the Schedule of Spares.
12.2.5
Shipping and Site Assembly
The batteries shall be shipped dry to be assembled on site.
12.3
12.3.1
DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT
General
The DC charging equipment shall be contained in a ventilated, floor standing, steel
cubicle, having a hinged front door with locking facilities, complying with the general
requirements of this Specification and giving full access to all components and cable
connections. The Charger cubicle shall be mounted in a separate cubicle from the 110 V
DC distribution panel and the 110/48 V DC converters that shall form a combined
Distribution Board/DC to DC converter cubicle. As detailed in the drawing the battery
chargers shall be physically situated in the substation battery room, the 110 V DC
distribution board with the DC to DC converters and the 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter
shall be situated in the relay room and the 48 V DC distribution board shall be situated in
the telecommunication room.
Where ventilation openings are provided, these shall be fitted with drip-proof louvers and
fine mesh wire or perforated screens to exclude small insects and vermin. Cubicle design
shall be equal to IP31 or better.
Status indication shall be provided locally by means of LEDs mounted on the front of the
charger cubicle and in addition relays shall be provided, having a minimum of two
normally open contacts, for the transmission of remote alarms.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 210 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Chargers shall be designed to operate from a three-phase 400 V AC supply, except when
the input rating is low enough for a single-phase 230 V AC supply to be used.
Chargers shall be self-protecting in the event of continuous overload or short circuit and
shall have current limiting facilities. They shall be suitable for re-adjustment to correct for
the aging of rectifiers and other parts.
The charger shall be of constant voltage, current limiting type that shall be suitable for
unattended charging of station batteries.
The design of the Charger components shall be of modular construction with chassis
mounting such as to facilitate fault locating and testing of individual electronic control
unit/card. Easy access from the front or top of the cubicle shall be allowed for dismantling
each component/unit package.
The block schematic of the whole DC system is shown in the following figure. The DC
system mainly incorporates two 400 V AC / 110 V DC Chargers, one 110 V DC
Distribution Board, a battery set, two 110/48 V DC to DC converters, a 110 V DC to 230 V
AC inverter and a 48 V DC Distribution Board.
12.3.2
Application
Generally the chargers shall be suitable for the following applications:
(a) Unattended charging for Nickel/Cadmium Alkaline batteries as specified elsewhere in
this specification to provide high security DC supply.
(b) Simultaneous supply of load current and re-charge current.
(c) Switch duties such as tripping and closing of circuit breakers for short durations with
high peak current.
12.3.3
Operation
The automatic charger shall maintain the battery installation normally in the float/trickle
charge mode, such that no discharge occurs with the normal standing loads and the
battery remains fully charged.
Battery Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically irrespective of the
fluctuations in the voltage and frequency of the AC supply within the specified limits.
12.3.4
Regulation
Each charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that, with the
output voltage set at approximately 1,45 volts per cell, the output voltage shall not vary by
more than ±1% with any combination of input supply voltage and frequency variations as
stipulated under this Specification and output current variation from 0-100%.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 211 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
400 Vac
110 Vdc
Battery
Charger 1
110 Vdc
Battery
Charger 2
110 Vdc
110 Vdc
Battery Room
Relay Room
(DC Distribution Panel)
+
110 V
110 Vdc
Distribution
Board
_
0V
110 Vdc
Station Control Unit,
HMI, etc
230 Vac
110 Vdc/230 Vac
Inverter
Telecoms Room
48 Vdc
DC/DC
Converter 1
110/48 Vdc
48 Vdc
Distribution
Board
48 Vdc
DC/DC
Converter 2
110/48 Vdc
Figure 12-1Typical Diagram of DC System in Transmission/Distribution Substations
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 212 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12.3.5
Output Voltage
The output voltage regulator shall be adjustable within reasonable limits and shall be so
designed such that the setting cannot be inadvertently disturbed.
Under all circumstances the following minimum range of charger output voltage
adjustments shall be allowed:
•
Float: 100% to 125%
•
Boost: 110% to 145%
The float voltage level shall be set at or as near as possible to the upper limit to which the
load can accept with the battery charged at just below gassing level.
An approved overvoltage detection relay shall be provided on each charger to give local
indication and remote alarm when the charger voltage rises by more than 5 volts above its
normal automatic float voltage. This alarm shall be disconnected whenever boost charge
is selected.
12.3.6
Charger Rating
The selected rating of the battery charger shall be such that the following duties can be
met:
(a) The charger shall be capable of bringing a completely discharged battery to a fully
charged state in 10 hours with the normal load disconnected.
(b) Following a 4-hour discharge into the normal load circuit, the charger shall be capable
of restoring the battery to a fully charged condition in 8 hours with the load still
connected.
(c) Where dual batteries are specified, provision must be made to ensure that the above
conditions (a) and (b) can be met for both batteries even if one charger should fail.
The rating of the float charger shall be equal to the normal battery standing load plus the
recommended finishing charger rate for the battery which shall not be less than
numerically equal to 10% of the battery capacity at the 10 hour rate.
The chargers shall be capable of delivering the following minimum continuous output
currents:
•
300 Ah system – 90 A
•
200 Ah system – 60 A
•
100 Ah system – 30 A
12.3.7
Power Rating
All charger components shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of the nominal full load for
continuous operation.
12.3.8
Boost Charging
A boost charger shall be provided to quickly recharge the battery after a heavy discharge.
The voltage/current characteristics of the boost charger shall be such as to minimize
gassing during the finishing period of a conditioning charge. The maximum voltage of the
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 213 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
boost charger when delivering the recommended finishing charge shall be not more than
1,8 volts per cell for a nickel/cadmium battery.
Regardless of how much charging capacity is available, a charging rate of the NominalAmpere-Hour/5 will not normally be exceeded.
Boost charging must be afforded with the load disconnected or with a dropping diode
assembly inserted in the load circuit, to prevent applying overvoltage to the load.
12.3.9
Fast Charge Facility
Beside the above 2-level float and boost charge modes which can be selected manually,
the Charger design shall incorporate automatic fast/quick charge mode when on float.
The fast charge mode shall be triggered through a voltage-sensing device after a mains
failure over a preset period of between 0 to 10 hours. After the voltage level has
recovered to a preset value and/or reached a preset time period of 0 to 24 hours, the
charger will automatically return to the float/trickle charge mode. During this charging time
the rectifier should change automatically from current limit to constant voltage mode in
order to avoid exceeding 1,65V battery voltage.
A third level charging mode for manual boost charging and for testing and commissioning
purposes shall be provided for in the above situation.
12.3.10
Control Unit
Control circuit failures in S.C.R. type of battery charger is rather common and as such, a
spare control card, together with one main circuit S.C.R. shall be permanently
accommodated in each charger and labelled accordingly.
12.3.11
Transformers
Each charger shall be completed with a transformer of suitable rating and connection
design for the specified auxiliary supply voltage.
It shall be of indoor, natural air-cooled type, enclosed in a ventilated sheet-steel case.
12.3.12
Rectifiers
Unless otherwise approved all rectifiers and semi-conducting devices employed in the
charger shall be of the silicon type. They shall be adequately rated with regard to the air
temperature within the charger enclosure for the maximum ambient temperature. The
output from the rectifier shall be controlled in response to originals from the control circuits
and appropriately smoothed.
12.3.13
Battery Earthing and Earth Fault Indication
110 V (nominal) batteries shall operate unearthed. Means shall be provided to detect low
insulation resistance of all the wiring connected to the battery by the following method and
to give an earth fault alarm.
The earth fault detection circuit shall consist in principle of a resistance connected across
the battery output on the distribution side of the fuses with a relay connected between the
centre point of this resistance and the earth terminal. Any unbalanced leakage current due
to the low insulation resistance of the wiring connected to either pole of the battery shall
cause a current to flow in the relay, which will operate at the predetermined value. The
relay shall discriminate between positive and negative earth faults and test circuits shall
be incorporated to simulate positive or negative earth faults by operation of push buttons.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 214 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12.3.14
Charge Fail Indication
An approved charge fail relay shall be provided for each charger to detect failure of the
DC output of the low-rate charger and also fall of battery voltage below the low-rate value.
This relay shall not operate on transient loss of charger input voltage due to faults on the
power system or due to normal surges. The alarm shall not be initiated when any one
charger is switched off.
12.3.15
Overload Protection
Independent current limiting circuits shall be provided on both float and boost operations
for overload protection, which extends down to continuous short circuit, without damage to
internal components or blowing of fuses.
Automatic recovery to a constant voltage characteristic shall be allowed at the end of an
overload.
12.3.16
Fault Protection
The following fault protections are normally employed and shall be incorporated:
(a) Thermal input circuit breakers
(b) High speed fuse in the transformer secondary and DC output for protection of thyristor
stack and reverse battery connection
(c) RC suppression network for protection of thyristor stack
(d) Voltmeter fuse
12.3.17
Instruments, Indications, and Controls
Each charger shall be provided with the following instrumentation, indication and control
facilities:
12.3.17.1 LED
•
Mains ON (green)
•
Charger fail (red)
•
Charger on Float (white or red)
•
Charger on Boost (orange or red)
•
Battery earth fault
•
Battery low-voltage
•
Battery over-voltage
12.3.17.2 Voltmeter
•
Charger output DC voltage
•
Charger input AC voltage
12.3.17.3 Ammeter
•
Charger output DC current
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 215 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12.3.17.4 Selector Switch
•
Float/Boost selection
12.3.17.5 MCB
•
Mains ON/OFF input
12.3.17.6 Push Button
•
Lamp test
In addition, each charger shall be equipped with either an off-load isolator or
disconnecting links for the DC output.
12.3.18
Alarm Facilities
The following alarms shall be provided for remote indication:
•
Mains failure
•
Charger fail
•
Battery earth fault
•
Battery under-voltage
•
Battery over-voltage
In addition to the above, a common alarm to sum up all the alarms shall be provided for
supervisory connection to the grid control centre.
All alarm relays shall be supplied complete with the charger.
12.3.19
Other Facilities
Particulars shall be given on the method of adjustment included to compensate for aging
of rectifier elements.
Means shall be provided, to limit the voltage at the outgoing terminals of the distribution
board to a value not greater than the lowest continuous maximum voltage rating of the
relays, instruments etc., connected to it. The scheme, which may incorporate counter
cells or back-off diodes, shall function particularly during boost charging. Means shall be
provided for an automatic selection of silicon diodes positioned between the battery and
the loads to drop the excess voltage. This requirement does not apply to duplicate battery
and charger system.
For the dual charger schemes, blocking diodes shall be connected in the output lead of
the charger to allow independent sensing and ensure minimum battery drain by auxiliary
circuits.
Where necessary, a DC output suppressor shall be fitted to provide an alternative energy
path for inductive DC current and thus preventing it from damaging the thyristor stack.
12.3.20
Wiring of Charger Unit
All wiring internal to the charger i.e. between the various relays, controller, etc., should be
numbered (ferruled) so as to facilitate circuit tracing in the occurrence of a circuit failure.
A schedule of the wiring so numbered shall be provided for each charger equipment.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 216 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
12.3.21
Wiring Diagrams
Each charger unit shall be provided with a set of schematic drawings of the components
installed in the unit. Block diagrams as well as complete internal circuit diagrams and
connections shall be included together with a booklet with circuit description and operation
alarms, relays etc., with fault diagnostic procedures.
A durable instruction card complete with systems block diagram shall be placed in a slot
on the inside of the Charger's cubicle door.
12.3.22
Wiring Termination
The wiring termination and terminal block requirements shall be in accordance with the
specification.
12.3.23
Labels
Labels complying with the specification shall be supplied to denote and signify all
instruments, controls and indications. Labels shall also be fixed on the charger's main
components for identification of the functions/controls.
12.3.24
Spares
The following spares are considered part and parcel of the charger system:
•
Neon bulbs and LEDs: 20%
12.4
12.4.1
DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
General
110 V DC distribution panels shall be mounted in a stand alone cubicle together with the
two DC to DC converters and the 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter as specified in detail in
the Schedules and indicated in the drawing and shall generally comply with the
requirements of cubicle type control panels of this specification.
48 V DC distribution panels shall be mounted in the telecommunications room.
12.4.2
Cubicle Construction
The DC Boards, either 110 V DC or 48 V DC, shall be enclosed in a suitable free-standing
steel cubicle. The cubicle shall be constructed of sheet steel or cold rolled steel not less
than 1,5 mm thick and shall be preferably of folded construction. Doors should be 2 mm
thick or more.
Within three months of Tender Award the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the DC
Board and cubicle designs for his approval.
12.4.3
Ratings
The 110 V DC Board shall have the following minimum incoming and outgoing circuits:
•
1 Incoming double pole MCB - At least 63 A
•
5 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs – 6 A each
•
11 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs – 16 A each
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 217 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
2 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs – 20 A each
•
2 Outgoing double pole MCBs – At least 32 A
Adequate space to accommodate at least 20 outgoing MCBs.
The 48 V DC board shall have the following minimum incoming and outgoing circuits:
•
1 Incoming double pole MCB – At least 32 A
•
6 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs – 6 A each
Adequate space to accommodate at least five (5) 6 A outgoing MCBs shall be provided.
12.4.4
Busbars
The busbars shall be rated not less than the load requirements of the outgoing circuits
specified above.
The busbars shall be connected directly to the 110-volt battery and charger system
through double pole switches. Where duplicate battery and charger systems are specified
they shall be paralleled to the busbars with the switches interlocked to the float/boost
switch.
Busbars shall have colour markings to indicate the positive and negative polarities similar
to battery markings.
12.4.5
Converters
12.4.5.1
General
The 110 V DC to 48 V DC converters shall be mounted in the DC distribution cubicle.
12.4.5.2
Ratings
The output of the DC/DC converter shall be 48 V ±5% with 20 A continuous current rating.
A minimum of 80% power efficiency conversion shall be considered. Each 48 V DC
converter output shall be isolated using a double pole switch.
12.4.6
Interlocks
As stated in the above paragraphs for duplicate battery and charger system, the charger
incoming switches shall be interlocked to the charger float/boost selection switch such
that,
(a) A charger being connected to the busbar cannot be switched to boost charge.
(b) A charger can only be connected to the busbar when selected on float charge. (Or
alternatively, if the charger is connected to the load while on boost charge, then the
charger will automatically return to float charge).
(c) Both chargers can be operated in parallel on float charge.
12.4.7
Fuses, Links, and Switchgear
The switchgear shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of the Specification
incorporating fuse-switch units of quick-break type, which shall be suitable for carrying
continuously the rated current and of making or breaking this current. Where a link-
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 218 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
switch is specified in the Schedules an assembly similar to the fuse-switch shall be
supplied, but the fuses shall be replaced by bolted copper links.
The equipment shall be capable of carrying, making and breaking the maximum possible
fault current and details of the make-up of this shall be provided. Curves of battery
current plotted against time under short-circuit conditions shall be supplied.
Outgoing distribution cables shall be connected directly to the relevant fuse and/or link, or
circuit-breaker.
Ratings appropriate to the wiring cross-section shall be used such that only the lower
rated fuse will blow in the event of two earth faults occurring on the same circuit.
Double pole isolators shall be incorporated in the incoming DC supply from the charger
and for the battery connections.
12.4.8
Earthing
The battery system specified here shall be of the floating type whereby the only earth
connection is through the high-resistance battery earth fault relay. This has the
advantage in that for an earth fault affecting one polarity only, all the battery circuits will
still remain operative.
12.4.9
Cable Glands and Terminations
Outgoing wiring shall be done using multicore cables connected at the terminal blocks to
the circuit switches. Cable gland plate for bottom entry shall be provided for in the cubicle
layout.
12.4.10
Labels
Each circuit shall be suitably labelled at the front of the panel and at the cable termination
where the terminals shall be additionally identified.
12.4.11
Spares
The spares listed below shall be considered as part and parcel of the contract for the DC
Switchboard:
•
Fuses for each rating: 20%
12.4.12
Drawings and Instruction Manuals
Drawings of all wiring, schematic and layout diagrams shall be submitted for approval
within the time-period as stated in the specification. Instruction manuals for the
Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of the batteries, chargers and distribution boards
shall be in accordance with the general requirements of the instruction manuals in this
specification.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 219 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13. POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132 kV
13.1
13.1.1
GENERAL
Scope
The Contract includes the supply and installation of all power and control cabling including
terminations and other cabling materials such as racks, cleats, trays, supports, junction
boxes etc. required for the satisfactory operation of the plant.
The Contractor will supply all power cables required for the completion of works as per the
relevant Schedules. All accessories for terminating these power cables will be supplied by
the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for laying, terminating, glanding, earthing, supporting,
cleating, sealing, protecting, testing and commissioning of all cables under this contract.
All ducts, cable racking and supports are to be supplied under the Contract and shall be to
the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the competence of the
electricians and jointers he proposes to use or to employ on the cable installation and
jointing works.
13.1.2
Types of Cable
The cables to be supplied shall be of the following types as specified in detail in the
following sub-sections, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer.
•
132kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and copper conductors.
•
66kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and copper conductors.
•
22kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and 630 mm2 copper
conductor for connecting the power transformer to the 22 kV switchboard.
•
22 kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and 300 mm2 aluminium
conductor for connecting the power transformer to the earthing transformer.
•
Power and multicore cables (1000 V grade) with copper conductors, XLPE insulation,
single wire armouring and flame retardant compound type LTS1 outer sheath.
•
Multipair telephone type cables for telemetry, control and measurement signals.
13.1.3
Determination of Conductor Size and Rating
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the design parameters on which to
base his cable designs.
All cable sizes quoted in this tender are indicative only and no claim will be considered in
connection with these.
13.1.4
Drawings
The Contractor will be required to prepare schematic drawings as called for in this
Specification, which are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 220 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Drawings showing the general arrangement of the cable runs shall be provided by the
Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for preparing detailed cable layout
drawings and details of the supports before the commencement of the works. The cabling
drawings shall also include all cables supplied by others as well as the requirements for
equipping in future all substation circuits, which are indicated in the drawings.
The Contractor shall also provide final record drawings of all cable works as laid to the
approval of the Engineer.
13.1.5
Quantities and Schedules
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that quantities manufactured and
shipped are adequate to complete the work.
All multicore type control cables, auxiliary power cables and telephone type control cables
shall be supplied by the Contractor who shall determine the cable types, quantities and
installation materials he may require to complete the work.
Schedules indicating the point of origin and termination of all cables shall be prepared and
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval before erection work
commences.
13.1.6
Reliability
All cables shall be designed for operation on systems where continuity of supply is the first
consideration. They shall also be satisfactory in operation under the atmospheric and
climatic conditions prevailing at the site and under such variations of current, voltage and
frequency as may be met under fault and surge conditions on the system.
13.1.7
Type Approval
Cables and accessories for use at 22kV, 66kV and 132kV shall have satisfactorily passed
type approval tests equal to those required by the International Electrotechnical
Commission or equivalent British Standard and details for the cable designs offered shall
be given in the appropriate place in the schedules hereto.
The Contractor is to certify that the cables and/or accessories offered will be identical in
all essential particulars in respect of design, materials and workmanship with the cables
and/or accessories for which type approval certificates are offered in support of his tender.
The Contractor shall also ensure that all materials used will be subjected to and shall
have satisfactorily withstood such tests as are customary in the manufacture of the types
of cable specified. Records of such tests shall be available for inspection, if required by
the Engineer.
13.1.8
Quality of Materials
All materials shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under
the conditions specified. They must be capable of withstanding the normal variations of
temperature and service conditions without disturbances or deterioration or the setting up
of undue stresses in any part and without impairing the strength and stability of the
various parts for the work, which they have to perform. The repair of defective parts during
manufacture will, normally, not be permitted but, in the exceptional circumstances where
this rule is waived, the repair shall not be put in effect without the written permission of the
Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 221 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.1.9
Design Particulars
Cables shall comply with the design details entered in the Schedule of Particulars and
Guarantees hereto and, except where otherwise specified, their individual components
shall meet the requirements of the current International Standards / Recommendations
where these are applicable.
13.1.10
Cable Lengths
Where applicable, cables shall be supplied in maximum drum lengths bearing in mind the
transport limitations in gaining access to the site. No drum shall contain more than one
length.
13.1.11
Sealing and Drumming
Immediately after the Works Tests both ends of every length of metal-sheathed cable
shall be sealed by means of a metal cap fitted over the end and plumbed to the sheath.
Other cables shall be sealed by enclosing the ends in approved caps, which shall be tight
fitting and adequately secured to prevent ingress of moisture. The ends of each drum
length of multicore cables shall be marked red and green in accordance with BS 6346 or
BS 5467.
The cable end which is left projecting from the drum shall be adequately protected against
damage.
Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made of timber, pressure impregnated
against fungal and insect attack or made of steel suitably protected against corrosion.
They shall be arranged to take a round spindle and be lagged with strong closely-fitting
battens in accordance with EN 1559.
Each drum shall bear a distinguishing number, either printed or neatly chiselled on the
outside of one flange.
Particulars of the cable, i.e. voltage, length, conductor size, number of cores, finish,
section and length number, gross and net weights, shall be clearly shown on one flange of
the drum. The method of drum making shall be to the Engineer's approval.
All cables and accessories shall be carefully packed for transport and storage on Site in
such a manner that they are fully protected against all climatic conditions, particular
attention being paid to the possibility of deterioration during transport to the Site by sea or
overland and to the conditions prevailing on the Site.
Wooden drums shall be suitably constructed to avoid problems due to shrinkage, rot and
attack by insects.
Drums, crates, cases, etc., for maintenance spares shall be non-returnable. Cable
maintenance lengths and spare lengths shall be wound onto steel drums before they are
handed over to the Purchaser's stores. Particulars of the cable (as stated above) shall be
clearly marked.
13.1.12
Spare Cable
Spare cable and accessories as detailed in the schedules are required to be included in
the Contract.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 222 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.1.13
Jointing Accessories
13.1.13.1 Cable Joints
Joints shall be of the premoulding or prefabricating or cold shrink, or slip-on technology
and shall be as compact as possible.
Moulded components shall be tested during manufacture including, X-ray testing for voids,
electrical testing at 1,5 times working stress and partial discharge measurement.
Cable conductors shall be connected by well established and tested crimping means,
designed, manufactured and site constructed to assure that retraction of the cable
insulation is unable to occur or is not critical to the accessory design. The connecting
ferrule shall be of the open barrel type.
All jointing accessories are to have been specifically designed to work in the cable system
in which they form apart. In particular, the Contractor's attention is drawn to the
requirement that all jointing accessories shall be entirely suitable to operate the Cable
sheath sections as a fully insulated sheath system with the provision for periodically
testing the integrity of the sheath by the application of 10 kV D.C. across the cable sheath
and the outer graphite or semiconductive surface of the sheath.
Before manufacture commences the Contractor shall submit drawings showing the types
of joint boxes proposed for the cable included in the Contract. The joint boxes shall be
constructed of approved materials and shall be watertight, free from sharp points or ridges
and thoroughly clean internally.
Joint boxes shall be laid direct in the ground and they shall be protected by an outer box
of approved design and filled with compound. Each joint and its outer box shall be
permanently labelled in an approved manner and the marking shall include the serial
number of the joint and the phase colour.
13.1.13.2 Glanding
Mechanical glands for the termination of elastomeric or thermoplastic insulated cables into
straight-through joints and termination accessories shall meet the requirements of EN
50262 and shall be correctly designed for the termination of the armouring. The gland
shall not only adequately secure the armour to provide efficient electrical continuity but
shall also provide a watertight seal between the oversheath and the inner extruded or
taped bedding to prevent the ingress of moisture. The glands shall preferably project 10
mm above the gland plate to avoid entry of moisture and be provided with watertight seals
between the cable outer sheath and gland and between the inner sheath and threaded
fixing component. All glands shall be fitted with a substantial earth bond terminal.
The armour-clamping device shall be capable of clamping the cable armour so that the
clamp withstands any short circuit current from the armour wires, through the gland body
to the integral bonding connector.
13.1.13.3 Cable Sealing Ends and Terminal Boxes
Terminations shall be constructed as outdoor, indoor SF6 or transformer sealing-end and
shall be dry. Outdoor sealing ends shall be prefabricated and indoor SF6 and transformer
sealing ends pluggable prefabricated.
The terminations shall have built in stress cone designs and be designed to accommodate
minor cable movement, radial and longitudinal, without significant change in the dielectric
stresses.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 223 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Moulded components shall be tested during manufacturing, including X-ray testing for
voids, electrical testing at 1,5 working stress and partial discharge measurement.
Detailed drawings showing the types of cable sealing ends, terminal boxes and glands
proposed for the installation shall be submitted at the time of Tendering.
All sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be fitted with insulated glands to facilitate outer
sheath testing after installation.
Disconnecting links shall be provided on all sealing ends terminations of metallic sheathed
cables and combined armour and earthing clamps shall be fitted to all boxes terminating
armoured cables where specified.
The design of the sealing and terminations shall be suitable for use as single point
bonding system, if required, in order to enable higher cable ratings. The necessary
overvoltage suppression fittings shall be included in the supply.
The external dimensions, fixing details and terminal arrangements for all sealing ends and
terminal boxes shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
Outdoor terminations shall have an adequate silicon rubber post insulator housing.
The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic conditions,
ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likely to arise when
operating in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning.
When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark has been rejected, no further
insulators bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insulators which have
been rejected in such a way that there shall be no possibility of such insulators being resubmitted subsequently for test or being supplied.
Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark and the
year of manufacture. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings and shall be
imprinted and not impressed. The marks shall be imprinted before firing and shall be
clearly legible after firing and glazing.
The Contractor shall state in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees the maximum
working loads for each design of cable sealing end.
Indoor SF6 terminations shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to IEC
60859.
The Contractor shall provide satisfactory evidence, or carry out a programme of Type
Tests, to demonstrate that the complete sealing end assembly is gas and oil-tight under
all conditions of maximum operating and transient pressures and pressures attained
during testing of connected equipment.
At SF6 switchgear terminations the cable supporting steel work may be required to be
totally self-supportive and designed to avoid imposing excessive thrust forces under any
service condition on the switchgear circuit.
Cable supporting steelwork at SF6 switchgear may also be required to be clad in a
lightweight metallic material suitably finished or painted to the Engineer's requirements.
At Gas Insulated Switchgear, the sectionalising insulation shall be protected against
voltage flashover during switching operations by short circuiting links or sheath voltage
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 224 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
limiters spaced 180 degrees around the sealing end, each connection shall not exceed
500mm in length.
13.1.14
Jointing Instructions
As soon as possible after the commencement of the Contract and before materials are
despatched, copies of the jointing instructions applicable to the joints, sealing ends and
terminations to be supplied shall be submitted in English to the Engineer for approval,
together with details of the physical and electrical characteristics of the filling medium
proposed.
13.1.15
Insulated System
The 132 kV, 66kV and 22 kV cable installations shall be insulated sheath systems and the
accessory designs shall include provision for periodic HV DC testing to check the integrity
of the cable anti-corrosion sheath.
All outdoor type cable sealing end bases shall be insulated from the surrounding structural
steelwork by means of post insulators interposed between the bases and the supporting
structure. Cable glands of oil-immersed air insulated and SF6 type sealing ends shall be
insulated from the transformer/switchgear body by an insulated barrier. A disconnecting
link device shall be provided at the base of each sealing end to enable the post
insulators/insulated barrier to be open circuited when required for testing purposes.
13.2
132/66 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES
The Purchaser is required to provide the 132/66 kV XLPE cables as per the relevant
Schedules. Some design details are given below:
13.2.1
Systems and Earthing
The neutral earthing condition for which the cables shall be suitable is solid earthing.
The fault levels for which the 132 kV and 66kV cables shall be suitable is as follows:
Each cable conductor shall be able to carry a maximum required three-phase symmetrical
fault current for one second and its final temperature shall not exceed 250 oC.
The metallic sheaths of each cable circuit shall be able to carry a maximum required earth
fault current for one second and the final temperature shall not exceed 250 oC. The
sheaths of individual cables shall be capable of carrying at least 13 kA fault current for 1
second.
13.2.2
Cable Design
This Specification applies to triple extrusion using a triple extruder heads cross linked
polyethylene insulated single core power cables which shall be generally manufactured to
EN 60502, and meet the test requirements of IEC 60840.
13.2.3
Conductor
Conductors shall be of standard plain annealed high conductivity copper wires as per EN
60228 or BS 6360.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 225 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.2.4
Conductor Screen
The conductor screen shall consist of an extruded semiconducting XLPE compound. The
screen shall fill the interstices between the individual strand wires forming the conductor
and provide a smooth, regular finish over which the insulation layer shall be applied.
13.2.5
Insulation
The insulation shall be of extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) in accordance with
clause 4 of IEC 60502 and shall be applied using a dry cure, dry cooling process
designed, as far as possible, to eliminate microvoids in the dielectric. The thickness of the
insulation shall not fall below the nominal value by more than 10 per cent at any point.
The materials used in the manufacture of compounds for XLPE insulation shall be of the
highest purity, mixed together and processed under such conditions of cleanliness as to
ensure a stable product with the required physical and electrical characteristics, suitable
for prolonged use without deterioration in service under the environmental and operational
conditions prevailing at the site.
13.2.6
Insulation screen
The insulation screen shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked semi-conducting
compound. It shall be in accordance with clause 5.3 of IEC 60502.
The screen shall be bonded. It shall be continuous and cover the whole area of the
insulation and shall have no tendency in service to separate from the insulation due to the
effects of bending, load cycling and short circuit.
13.2.7
Moisture Barrier and Sealing Compounds
A layer of semiconducting swelling tape shall be applied under the metal sheath to avoid
the propagation of moisture in case of damage to the outer sheath. Overlapping to be at
least 50%. In the case of copper wire screen cables two layers of semi conducting
swelling tape shall be applied. One under and one over the copper wire screen.
All compounds used in protective bedding, servings and over metal sheaths shall be of
such a nature that in the finished cable they do not crack or run at any temperature likely
to be attained in transit to the Site or on the Site, before or after laying or when the cables
are in operation. The compound shall adhere properly to the armour and sheath so that
after the coverings are removed it shall be evident that the metal surfaces were
completely covered by closely adherent compound before the removal of the coverings.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the amount of compound applied is retained evenly
around the cable. The compounds used shall have no deleterious effect on the sheath,
armour or protective coverings.
13.2.8
Metal Sheath
The Tenderer shall offer cables having lead alloy metal sheaths, except the 132kV
300mm2 where copper wire screen is required.
The cross-section of the metal sheath or copper wire screen shall be adequate to carry
the earth fault current specified. The minimum thickness of the metal sheath shall not fall
below the declared nominal thickness by more than 0.1 mm + 5% of the specified nominal
thickness for lead alloy.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 226 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The sheath thickness shall be sufficient to ensure adequate mechanical strength and also
to meet the specified earth fault duty. The tenderer shall submit with his tender
calculations to show that the design offered is entirely suitable to carry the specified fault
current and shall state the referred Standard for the basis of his calculation.
In the case of copper wire screened cable an aluminium foil of 0,2mm thickness shall be
applied on top of the second layer of semi conductive swellable tape to prevent the radial
ingress of moisture.
13.2.9
Outer Coverings
The outer covering shall have a minimum radial thickness of 4 mm and be of black
extruded high-density polyethylene type ST4 in accordance with IEC 60840. The
thickness of the outer covering shall not fall below the nominal thickness at any point by
more than 0,1mm + 15% of the specified nominal thickness.
Lead sheaths shall be coated with a thin layer of bitumastic compound or any other
suitable anti-corrosion layer or coating to prevent corrosion of the lead sheath. The outer
covering shall be in intimate contact with and closely follow the contour of the lead sheath.
The sealing compound shall be of a quality and type which will not crack or run in the
finished cable at any temperature likely to be attained in transit to Site, during installation
or when in operation at the maximum sustained load. The compound shall have no
deleterious effect on the lead sheath or outer covering.
If there is any damage to the outer covering, which in the opinion of the Purchaser,
appears to be repairable, the supplier may, after receiving agreement to attempt repair
shall not bind the Purchaser to accept the repaired cable length when it is re-offered for
inspection and test.
The outer covering shall have a graphite coating to form an electrode for the HV DC
sheath integrity tests to be applied at the factory and for periodic HV DC tests after
installation. The coating shall withstand the rigours of installation and shall adhere to the
surface of the sheath when the cable is operating at maximum conductor temperature.
The coating shall be either a conductive layer extruded simultaneously with the
underlaying non-conductive layer or shall be in the form of graphite colloid applied on the
underlaying non-conductive layer in hot jets. Conductive layers obtained by mere
superficial deposition of conductive powder (graphite) are not acceptable.
The outer sheath of 132kV 300mm2 cable shall include an extruded PE sheath with a
flame-retardant outer layer.
13.2.10
Voltage Identification
The outer covering shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer followed by
“ELECTRIC CABLE 132.000 VOLTS” or “ELECTRIC CABLE 66.000 VOLTS” as
applicable, the size of cable, year of manufacture, and type of insulation.
13.3
22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES
The 22 kV cables required to connect the power transformers with the earthing
transformers and the 22 kV incoming circuit breakers are to be supplied by the Purchaser.
Some basic design details are given below:
13.3.1
Cable Design
The project includes cross-linked polyethylene insulated single core and multicore power
cables, which shall be generally manufactured to EN 60502 and BS 6622.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 227 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Conductor stranding, triple extrusion of insulation and screens, and outer protective
covering is to be in accordance with the paragraphs above.
13.3.2
Inner Covering
The inner covering shall be extruded.
13.3.3
Metallic Layer/Screen
A metallic layer of copper wires of 95 mm2 cross section shall be applied over an extruded
bedding.
13.3.4
Voltage Identification
The outer covering shall be embossed with the name of the manufacturer followed by
“ELECTRIC CABLE 22.000 VOLTS”. The size of cable, year of manufacture, and type of
insulation shall also be included.
13.4
13.4.1
AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO 1.000 V
General
The cables shall have stranded copper conductors and shall be XLPE insulated,
armoured, with such bedding and oversheath suitable for fire risk areas. The cables shall
meet the requirements of the standards specified hereafter or of such other standard,
which in the opinion of the Authority offers an equivalent or higher quality. When such
other standard is offered a copy of the standard together with a copy of an approved
English translation of the Standard should be submitted with the offer.
13.4.2
Voltage Designation
The designated rated voltages of the cables shall be 600/1.000V as defined in BS 6724 and
IEC 60502.
13.4.3
Conductors
Conductors shall be of plain stranded copper wires and shall have a minimum crosssectional area of 2,5 mm2. Conductors less than 16 mm2 cross section shall be made of
seven strands. Copper conductors shall meet the requirements of EN 60228 or BS 6360.
Single strand conductor is not permitted.
13.4.4
Insulation
The insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) type GP8 according to BS 6724 and
BS 7655. The insulation shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact
and homogeneous body. The insulation shall meet the compatibility test requirements
specified in the relevant standard.
13.4.5
Identification of Cores
The cores of the cables shall be identified in accordance with BS 6724. When numerals are
used they shall be printed in black on white core insulation at intervals not greater than 70
mm, throughout the length of the core. The print shall be permanent and not easily removed.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 228 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.4.6
Bedding
The bedding of the cables shall be an extruded layer of synthetic material compatible with the
operating temperature of the cable and generally shall be in accordance to BS 6724 and the
requirements specified in paragraph 13.4.8 below. Suitable intermediate powder shall be
included in-between the insulation and bedding for facilitating the removal and separation of
the upper layer without causing any damage to the core insulation.
13.4.7
Armour
The cables shall have wire armour consisting of a single layer of galvanized steel wires
complying with the requirements of BS 6724 of that size and number appropriate to the
thickness of the insulation in order to provide screening factor corresponding to the level of
the disturbing electromagnetic field intensity from the adjacent power circuits which shall
be considered as 15 kV.
13.4.8
Oversheath
The oversheath of the cables shall be in general in accordance to BS 6724 consisted of an
extruded layer of black flame retardant (tested in accordance to IEC 60332-1 and EN
50265), low smoke and minimum acid emission compound type LTS1 in accordance to BS
7655 or any other similar compound which will be proved that fulfils the requirements. The
oxygen AND TEMPERATURE index of the bedding and sheathing materials shall not be less
than 30 when tested in accordance with EN ISO 4589.
The external surface of the sheath shall be embossed with a legend specifying the cable type
as described in the relevant standards BS 6724.
13.4.9
Laying up
Cores shall be laid up in accordance with BS 5467.
Multicore control cables shall contain one of the following stranded numbers of cores: 4,
7, 12, 19, 27 and 37. For control cables having more than seven cores, the direction of lay
shall alternate for each successive layer.
13.4.10
Fillers
Where fillers are necessary to make a circular compact XLPE insulated cable, they shall
be of PE. Textile and other hygroscopic materials are not permitted.
13.4.11
Voltage Identification
The PVC outer sheath of control cables shall be embossed with the legend "ELECTRIC
CONTROL CABLE". The letters shall be raised and consist of upright block characters in
accordance with the requirements of BS 6346 or BS 5467.
13.4.12
Cable Lengths
Cables shall be supplied in maximum drum length. No drum shall contain more than one
length of cable.
13.4.13
Jointing
Cables shall be terminated and jointed with accessories, which have successfully been
type tested.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 229 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Straight through jointing of cable lengths is not normally permitted but in exceptional
circumstances may be allowed subject to the Engineer's approval.
All cables entering or leaving terminal boxes shall be provided with separate terminations
so that any cable out of a number of such cables can be removed or replaced without
disturbing the remainder.
13.5
MULTIPAIR CABLES
Multipair cables are intended to be used for the transmission of analogue measured
quantities such as current, power, and/or audio frequencies and also control and
indication signals of rated voltage 110 Vdc.
The cables shall meet the requirements of BS 5308 Part 1.
The conductors shall be tinned copper stranded and shall comply with BS 5308. The
solderability of the tinned copper conductors shall be demonstrated in accordance with an
approved specification (EN 60068). The size of the conductor shall be of 0,8 mm diameter
(0,9 mm diameter would be accepted).
The insulation of the cores shall be PE (Polyethylene- preferable) or XLPE of approved
thickness and self-coloured for identification purpose - two different colours identifying a
pair in accordance with a specified colour scheme. The insulated cores shall be twisted
together to form pairs except in the case of the two pair cable, which shall be laid up in
quad formation.
Binding tapes constructed from suitable materials shall be applied with open spiral or
overlap as required between layers and over the laid up structure to provide a compact
uniform formation. A rip cord to facilitate removal of the inner sheath of the insulated
cables shall be included during the application of the overall binding tape.
Where required and specified the cables shall be collectively or individually foiled with
drain wire and/or braid screened in order to ensure protection from interference.
Where armoured cables are specified they shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the
requirements of the relevant clause above.
The oversheath of the cable shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the requirements of
the relevant clause above.
13.6
13.6.1
INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE
SUBSTATION BUILDING
General
All cables shall be installed either on trays or racking, in ducts, cleated to steelwork or laid
in concrete trenches.
The installation and handling of the cables shall be undertaken at all times by adequate
staff suitably trained and supplied with all the necessary plant, equipment and tools. The
arrangement of the cables and all methods of laying shall be approved by the Engineer
and shall be planned to provide an orderly formation, free from unnecessary bends and
crossing, which will permit the removal of any one cable without undue disturbance to
adjacent cables. No joints shall be allowed in any cables unless approved by the
Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 230 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.6.2
Segregation
The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services.
Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire risk areas, and to minimise the risk of
damage from any source. Control cables shall be separated from power cables when
installed in air.
Any screening and cable segregation which the Contractor considers necessary to
prevent spurious signals being induced into the cables from other adjacent cables shall be
included and stated in the relevant cable schedules.
13.6.3
Racks, Cleats and Trays
All cables routed in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by means of cleats or
racks. No cable shall be laid on the trench floor. They shall be run in a neat and orderly
manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall be avoided as far as possible.
Where cable runs unavoidably cross a suitable ramp shall be provided so that the runs do
not touch. The manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radii shall be observed.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary steelwork, cleats, racks, fixings, etc to support
and secure the cables adequately, together with any special fittings required for bonding,
earthing or protection against mechanical damage in vulnerable positions. Rawl bolts or
equivalent shall be used for fixing of supports and associated steelwork to masonry. The
method used for fixing such supports shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Supports, racks, etc shall be arranged, as far as possible, for the easy removal of any
single cable in multi cable run without undue disturbance of adjacent cables. Where
cables required for future extensions will be run in the same runs as cables being supplied
under this Contract, provision shall be made in the design of the supports, etc for
accommodating these future cables plus 20% spare space without undue overcrowding or
congestion.
Every cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than 1 m from its termination,
and, where vertical runs pass through the floors, immediately above the floor. The type of
installation used for the support system shall be to an approved method.
"Racks" may be defined as steel members of various forms specially constructed for one
or more of the following purposes:
(a) Carrying cables, cable ladders, or trays, which are otherwise unsupported.
(b) Supporting cleats.
Racks may be mounted:
(a) Directly upon structural steelwork or masonry (NOTE: Drilling or welding of structural
steelwork may only be carried out when approved by the Engineer).
(b) On the floor in the form of single or double sided stands.
Cable trays shall be manufactured from 18 SWG minimum perforated steel or ladder rack
type subsequently galvanised in accordance with EN 729 and shall be supported on
steelwork or directly on the masonry as required. The cable tray must be fully tested with
a uniform distributed load safety factor of 2,5. The cable trays rack shall have cable
retaining edges or pegs and be of a width suitable for the number of cables to be
supported and shall be supplied with purpose made brackets suitable for mounting from
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 231 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
the building structure. Where required extended brackets shall provide a rear space of
150mm between the ladder rack and building structure for on and off access of cable.
Cable trays shall be of adequate width for deploying the cables in a single depth with a
width allowance of 33% for future expansion. Cables up to 35 mm2 shall be held with
cable straps at intervals of 1 m. Larger cables shall be held with suitable cable cleats.
All cable trays shall be electrically continuous by means of 20mmx3mm copper links
across each joint and shall be bonded to the main earthing bar to a number of positions.
Racks shall be constructed of mild steel, and may be either purpose made from standard
sections or a preformed package system of metal frame construction. All sections shall
have sufficient mechanical strength so that distortion is prevented.
Rawl bolts or drilled-in inserts shall normally be used for the fixing of supports and
associate steelwork to masonry.
All ladders and trays shall be securely fastened to supporting steelwork, and shall be
adequately supported to prevent sagging.
The spacing of racks or ladders for cable runs shall suit the type of cables to be erected
but the horizontal distance between centres of racks supporting wire armoured cables
shall not exceed 500 mm and the horizontal distance between centres of racks supporting
unarmoured cables shall not exceed 300 mm. The distance between centres of ladders
supporting any type of cable in a vertical run shall not exceed 750 mm.
Cable support and rack designs shall be submitted for approval before manufacture and
erection commences.
Cables shall be cleated on vertical runs. Cables on horizontal ladders or trays shall be
laid in parallel runs and secured in position by means of plastic ties. The distance
between supporting clamps for control cable in horizontal and vertical runs shall be to the
manufacturer's recommendation but shall not exceed the following:
•
600 mm for cables up to 40 mm overall diameter
•
1000 mm for cables between 40 mm and 60 mm overall diameter
•
2000 mm for cables exceeding 60 mm overall diameter on horizontal runs and
•
1200 mm on vertical runs
Cables run on trays shall be neatly dressed and where not provided with cleats shall be
secured by heavy gauge, type approved metal reinforced, clips or saddles. Not more than
six cables shall be embraced by one and not more than two layers of cables run on one
tray. Care shall be exercised to ensure a "Reduced Fire Propagation" installation.
Single core and multicore cables shall be clamped to the racks with smooth finish split
packing pieces or cleats with bores or the correct size for the cable diameters. For single
cables, claw type cleats shall be of silicon aluminium, glass filled nylon or other tough
non-hygroscopic material. Single core cables erected in close trefoil 3 phase groups shall
be held in position with non-magnetic clamps to the approval of the Engineer. Wooden
cleats are prohibited. Cleats used to clamp single core power cables shall be of adequate
strength to restrain the cables axially and laterally during heat cycling and under short
circuit conditions.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 232 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.6.4
Galvanising
All metal cable trays, cable ladders, racks and steelwork, etc., shall be galvanised or
otherwise protected by a method approved by the Engineer. The protective finish shall be
to an approved specification. No welding shall be carried out after the protective finish
has been applied.
13.6.5
Identification
All cables shall be identified below the gland at each end and at approved positions by
means of bands engraved or stamped with the cable number, feeder name, size of cable,
number of cores, phase colour, etc., or such lettering as the Engineer may require. The
bands shall be securely fastened in a permanent manner, and shall be made of material
able to resist corrosion, damp and mechanical damage.
13.6.6
Earthing and Bonding
The Contractor shall connect, unless otherwise instructed, all cable screens and armour,
supporting steelwork and the metal enclosure of sealing boxes, joints etc., to the main
earth bar by suitable branch connections.
The earth strip or insulated cable and connections thereto shall be laid in formed cable
trenches or ducts, and/or fixed to walls, concrete or steelwork, by means of clamps or
claw type cleats, as appropriate. The spacing of fixings shall not be greater than 1 m.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the efficient bonding and earthing to the main
earth system of all cable screens and armour where provided.
All completed records shall be the property of the Employer. They shall be completed
within one month of the approval of the progress prints following upon the completion of
each section of the Contract Works. Progress prints, in duplicate if required, shall be
submitted to the Engineer at intervals not exceeding three months.
13.7
13.7.1
EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN
TRANSMISSION SUBSTATIONS
General Requirements
Excavation/Reinstatement works shall be undertaken only by contractors/subcontractors
registered with the Council of Registration of Civil Contractors of Building & Civil Works
and holding a valid annual licence under the required classification (Civil Works).
The Tenderer shall submit at tender stage a list of equipment and resources that will be
assigned to the project. The Tenderer shall also submit a reference list outlining past
experience of Civil Contractors/Subcontractors in similar contracts.
Every effort shall be made to maintain traffic flow and access to persons and vehicles to
property and places adjacent to the route.
13.7.2
Route
Generally the route of the trench is that shown on the attached construction drawings.
The Contractor is obliged to mark this route on site and no excavation is permitted unless
the Engineer inspects the marked route and approves it. The final route of the trench is
that decided by the engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 233 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.7.3
Excavation of Trenches
At least seven days notice of intention to start excavation shall be given to the Engineer
together with the agreed programme for excavation on the complete route.
The depth of excavation is that shown on the construction drawings but this depth may be
increased or decreased in selected parts of the route or locally to avoid other services or
other reason as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer. This increase or decrease
of excavation depth does not vary the contract value. The Contractor shall stick to the
approved route and by no means is allowed to depart without the written consent of the
Engineer.
The exact location of each trench shall be approved by the Engineer on Site and no
claims are allowed by the Contractor for any deviation from the route shown on the
construction drawings. Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and each trench
shall be excavated to approved formation and dimensions and shall have vertical sides
which shall be timbered or otherwise secured where necessary so as to avoid subsidence
and damage.
The bottom of each trench shall be firm and of smooth contour. The Contractor shall take
reasonable precautions to prevent damage to the road or ground surface from a slip or
breaking away of the sides of the trench.
Where trenches pass from positions where a change of level is necessary, the bottom of
the trench shall rise or fall gradually. The rate of rise or fall, if not indicated on the
construction drawings shall be approved by the Engineer.
All trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides to the width, lines, grades and depths
as shown on the drawings or as specified in writing by the Engineer.
All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water from any source
at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable fill material and completed in
accordance with the specification. Where directed by the Engineer such over excavations
shall be backfilled with mass concrete at the Contractors expense.
The Contractor shall carry out at his own expense soil thermal resistivity tests for the sand
intended to be used in the sand cement bound mixture and the mixture itself under dry
and wet conditions, sufficiently in advance before commencement of the works, to verify
the required thermal properties of the mixture.
When excavations for trenches have been accurately executed, the contractor shall give
notice to the Engineer. Laying of cables or ducts or building of structure shall not be
started until the Contractor has obtained the Engineer’s sanction to proceed with the work.
The Contractor is responsible for the protection of existing services and supplies from
damage at no extra cost.
The Contractor shall not work in any area where services are still covered. The Engineer
shall have the right to stop the work or part of the Works where the Contractor fails to take
the necessary measures to uncover these services and the Contractor shall not claim for
additional compensation in time or additional money.
The Contractor shall perform all hand excavation, protection and other work as specified
herein or as required to locate existing services within the limits of this Contract, or at off-
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 234 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
site locations as designated by the Engineer and in accordance with the requirements of
all Contract Documents. The existing services referred to herein shall include, but not by
way of limitation, all sewers, water mains and lines, gas mains, electric (both power and
lighting), telephone and such others as may be encountered under this Contract.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary and protective measure required to
maintain existing services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation. In
particular, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining of any
existing services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation
In the cases where the excavation is to be made on asphalted or concreted roads and/or
pavements, the asphalt or concrete surfacing shall be cut using suitable disk cutter at a
depth of not less than 120mm. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to
minimise damage of the asphalt beyond the width of the excavated trench. The
Contractor will be charged with the extra costs where reinstatement’s in excess of the
approved excavation width.
This method of cutting of road surfacing is essential and shall be strictly adhered to.
The use of air compressor and associated cutting tools will not be allowed.
There shall not be any soil classification for excavating either in soft or in hard material.
The contractor is responsible for obtaining information he considers necessary regarding
the possibility of encountering soil with varying degree of hardness, and allow for it in his
tender.
All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water from any source
at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
13.7.3.1
Excavated Material
The materials excavated from each trench shall be placed so as to prevent nuisance or
damage to adjacent ditches, drains, fences, gateways and other property or things. If,
owing to traffic or for reasons of safety or other considerations, or deemed necessary by
the Engineer, the excavated material cannot be stacked on site, it shall be removed from
the site to an approved tip and returned for refilling the trench (if proved to be suitable
according other clauses of this specification) on completion of laying at the cost of the
contractor. The cost of any additional security measures needed to be taken by the
Contractor in such cases is deemed to be included in the Contract price. Surplus material
shall be disposed off by and at the cost of the Contractor.
13.7.3.2
Horizontal drilling
Horizontal drilling shall be used instead of excavation where specified in the drawings or
in any Contract document.
13.7.3.3
Traffic Safety Measures
The Contractor shall at all times during the construction of the Works maintain a right of
way. This right of way shall be of adequate quality and durability for the free and safe
passage of pedestrians and traffic, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
The Contractor shall also ensure that there are adequate footways for pedestrians when
the Works disrupts the existing ones. The footways shall be adequately maintained with
at least a suitable all weather surface. The Contractor shall also maintain pedestrian
accessibility to substation buildings and switchyards.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 235 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Measures shall be taken by the contractor to ensure at all times the safety of Employer’s
personnel as well as for the Contractor’s employees working on site. To this effect it is of
primary importance that the Contractor properly fences the excavated route and all
barricades, excavations and constructions be illuminated by the Contractor at night.
The Contractor shall construct and maintain detours for the diversion of traffic where this
becomes necessary. Detours shall be of an approved standard with adequate signing to
ensure traffic safety. Detours shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer needed,
and the area shall be reinstated.
The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, reposition, cover and uncover and finally
remove, as applicable, traffic signs, cones and other street furniture as the progress of the
Works require and take such other measures as may be necessitated by the Works in
order to direct traffic and take all other necessary precautions for the protection of the
Works and the safety of the employees and Employer’s personnel.
All details or traffic safety and management measures necessitated by the Works shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his consent 7 days before the Contractor intends to
commence any work. The Contractor shall also furnish any further relevant details and
information requested by the Engineer.
13.7.4
Methods of Laying
Cables laid direct in the ground in excavated trenches shall be protected with concrete
covers. Cables may also be drawn into pipes or ducts or laid in formed trenches or
troughs or on racks or supported in trays or cleats as required by the Engineer. Where
cables are laid in formed trenches the installation shall include for the removal and
replacement of the trench covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on
the trenches where they access ways.
Where three single-core cables are laid direct in the ground or in formed trenches or
supported in cleats or racks and form one three-phase circuit, they shall be laid in
triangular formation touching unless otherwise agreed, the apex of the triangle being up
most (trefoil arrangement).
13.7.4.1
Cables Laid Direct
Unless instructed to the contrary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall lay cables direct in
the ground in the following manner: 100mm of soft Cement Bound Sand to EN 197-1 in
the ratio of 14 parts to 1 part by volume shall be placed to form a bed for the cable.
After the cables have been laid they shall be bound with suitable cables ties at intervals of
2m and then they shall be covered to a level of 400mm above the bottom of the lower
most cable with cement-bound sand in the ratio 14:1 by volume.
In all cases the mixture shall be prepared in a suitable mixer to give a homogeneous
material. Water shall be added in the requisite amount (dependent upon the initial water
content of the sand) so as to achieve a proper mixture that will enable adequate
compaction to be achieved. (The water shall reach the bottom of the mixture).
In each layer where protective covers are required they shall be carefully centred over the
cables forming each circuit, each cover being closely interlocked with the adjacent covers
throughout the length of the cable.
The covers shall be in accordance with BS 2484 and EAC drawing 7180008.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 236 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The sand shall be fine (particles greater than 5mm not allowed), homogeneous and pure
without any chemical impurities that might cause harm to the cable. Sand’s thermal
resistivity shall not exceed 1,2oCW/m. The Contractor shall submit laboratory tests
proving its thermal resistivity, chemical properties and composition.
Where more than one horizontal layer of cables is laid, the level of the upper layers of
cable shall be gauged from the level of the finished bottom of the trench and marked on
the side of the trench at frequent intervals before the installation of the lower layers, to
ensure that the correct vertical spacing is maintained.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ascertaining to the satisfaction of the
Engineer whether the soil is chemically active and for taking special precautions to protect
the cables against chemical action. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid
electrolytic and/or electro-chemical action occurring in situations where the cable and
accessories are likely to be installed in close proximity to other dissimilar metals in the
presence of moisture.
Where power cables are to be installed in buried formed concrete or brick trenches fitted
with covers, and in order to maintain thermal environment on buried cable routes, the
cables shall be cleated in trefoil formation and the trench backfilled with imported back-fill
material of thermal resistivity to secure the stated cable rating under all conditions. The
back-fill material shall be carefully consolidated and the covers fitted.
Power cables laid in unfilled formed concrete or brick trenches shall be securely cleated to
the trench bottom in a manner to suit the cable system design.
13.7.4.2
Pipes and Ducts
Where cables are to be drawn in pipes the bottom of the trench shall be maintained as
smooth as possible. Sharp changes in altitude or direction shall be avoided.
The trench shall first be formed with 100mm cement-bound sand soft fill as specified in
paragraph 6.1 and the pipes shall then be laid in trefoil formation. Spacers at intervals of
2m shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shall then be covered with
cement-bound sand mixture (prepared as per paragraph 6.1) up to a level of 100 mm
above the uppermost pipe unless otherwise shown on drawings. All provisions described
elsewhere in this specification regarding the mixture, concrete covers etc, shall be applied
to backfill trenches with pipes.
In certain cases and where in the construction drawings is stated so, pipes shall be
covered by concrete grade 20 instead of cement bound sand mixture. The Engineer may
instruct the Contractor to use concrete instead of the mixture in other places as well,
depending on the site conditions and provisional measures against future installations.
Prior to handing over the project, pipes shall first be sized to remove any debri. After that
a suitable mandrel (piston) of 10% smaller diameter than the diameter of the pipe shall be
successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good practice of duct laying.
Care shall be taken to make the bends of pipe or duct-lines as easy as practicable and in
no case of a radius less than 3,2 metres. Prefabricated bends in accordance with shall be
used in cases where the curvature is such that pipe cannot be bent.
Pipes for fibre-optic cables shall be laid as shown on construction drawings. Spacers to
at intervals of 2m, shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shall be sized to
remove any debri. After that a suitable mandrel of 10% smaller diameter than the bore
diameter of the pipe shall be successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 237 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
practise of duct laying. Prefabricated bends shall be used in cases where the curvature is
such that pipe cannot be bent. The radius of curvature in any case shall be greater than
300mm.
In general and where applicable angles and bends shall be preferably effected by bending
the pipes in as high as possible radius of curvature. Prefabricated bends shall be used
only where the bending of pipe is impossible. In all installations of pipes embedded in
concrete, expansion joints shall be provided every 18m.
Duct seals to shall be fixed in all pipe ends whether empty or occupied by cable, or
cables, to prevent ingress of water or vermin. Spacers to at intervals of 2m shall be
installed in all pipe installations.
Nylon pulling guide of 8mm diameter and strength of at least 1000kgf shall be laid in all
pipes.
13.7.5
Warning tape/cable markers
Before the last layer of backfill material, PE warning tape shall be laid as shown on the
construction drawings. The warning tape is to be provided by the Purchaser. In addition
suitable concrete cable markers shall be placed right on the trench surface or nearby
every 5m to indicate the position of the cable. The marker shall be approved by the
Engineer.
13.7.6
Cable Covers
Cable covers shall be of un-reinforced concrete and shall comply with BS2484 and EAC
drawing 7180008.
13.7.7
Pits for Fibre-Optic Cables
Pits for fibre-optic cables shall be constructed as shown on the relevant construction
drawings to the specified dimensions. Pit covers shall be manufactured by heavy-duty
ductile iron to EN 60124 grade D400 of high quality and standard. The frame shall be
monoblock, provided and fixed with anchoring devices. The top shall be of the 3-point
suspension system with two or more triangular covers. The top surface shall be anti-skid
with the EAC logo as badging. The raised pattern shall be at least 5mm in depth. For
fibre optic cable pits adjacent to concrete, expansion joints at pipe entries/exits shall be
provided. The Contractor shall provide reasonable number of cover lifting keys or tools,
which must be simple and operated by one person.
13.7.8
132kV Joint-Bays
The Contractor must allow in his tender, where necessary, for the preparation of adequate
joint-bays for jointing work. The size of the joint bays, if not indicated on the construction
drawings, must be as compact as possible and in any case the width of the excavation
must not exceed 3m. Joint-bay drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Joint bays shall have a concrete base and a double layer of slabs shall be suitably located
above the joints to provide mechanical protection. Each joint shall bear an engraved label
indicating the circuit joint number and phase mounted on the outer shell where the phase
colour shall also be painted.
Joint bays shall be excavated in not more than 2 days before the actual pulling work.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 238 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
13.7.9
Filling In and Reinstatement
Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced until the Engineer has inspected, approved
the cables and accessories or pipes and has authorised the operation to proceed.
After cable slabs have been installed and approved by the Engineer backfilling operations
shall commence immediately.
Where the cable route passes along switchyards or areas other than reads or pavements
then the excavated material can be used as backfill provided that is normal soil (nonrocky). If the excavated ground is rockly, then soil suitable for compaction shall be
imported for backfill. The soil shall be compacted properly in layers not exceeding
300mm.
Where the cable route passes along roads or pavements or areas designated for future
road or pavement the backfilling and reinstatement shall comply with the following
requirements. Generally all material and work shall comply with the latest edition of the
"Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the Department of Public Works
(PWD-Roads Division), Sections 400, 500, 600 and 700.
All excavations made (whether for the purpose of cable laying or trial holes) shall be backfilled in 100-200mm layers depending on the compacting machine used, the earth in each
layer being well rammed and consolidated and sufficient allowance made for settlement.
Each layer shall be adequately sprayed with water in such a manner that, in conjunction
with the means of compaction that are to be used, a density of at least 95% of the dry
density at the optimum moisture content to be achieved, in accordance with the American
Specification AASHTO-180-74 (Modified Proctor Test).
The Contractor is responsible for the proper compaction of each layer, which shall be
tested in accordance with the above-mentioned specification standard.
The minimum number of tests is two for a length of excavation up to 50 meters. For
greater lengths the number tests will be increasing accordingly but in any case the
distance between successive test positions shall not be greater than 50 meters. The
Contractor shall send copies of test results to the Engineer.
The equipment to be used for the compaction of the backfill material shall include apart
from vibrating rollers (self or hand driven) power rummers, vibrating plates, and others to
be approved by the Authority and the Engineer, so that proper compaction is effected in
corners and side edges.
13.7.9.1
Fill material type 2
The backfill material of the section between the cable slabs and at depth as shown on the
construction drawings from the road finished level, shall be of type 2 material as specified
in the latest edition of the Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the PWD.
13.7.9.2
Fill material type 1
The section of the trench, from the top of backfill type 2 to the level where asphalted
layers start, the trench shall be backfilled with material type 1 as specified in the Standard
Specification for Road and Civil Works of the PWD.
The excavated material may be used as backfill material type 1 or 2 provided that it
complies with the corresponding specification.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 239 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor must make the necessary contacts and obtain appropriate certificates on
time: (i) from the Soil Mechanics Laboratories of the Public Works Department (PWD)
regarding the suitability of excavated or imported materials to be used as backfill (ii) from
relevant authorities on the T.R. values of the excavated or imported materials. For this
reason the Contractor shall stock on site all the required fill material before the
commencement of the works. The Contractor shall immediately after the stock piling
arrange for the inspection and testing of the stocked material by the PWD. Work shall not
be allowed to commence unless the imported material proves to be suitable by PWD.
Copies of the certificates shall be sent for approval to the Authority and the Engineer prior
to their use.
13.7.9.3
Asphalting
The trench shall be fully reinstated with asphalting layers. All associated work shall be
constructed according to relevant drawing and PWD specification.
The asphalt shall be of type 35-50 at a temperature of 25oC and shall comply with the
quality of the asphalt produced by the Cyprus Petroleum Refinery at the time of purchase
of the asphalt for the purpose of this project. Any amendments imposed by PWD on the
quality control procedure after the Contract award shall be applied for the purpose of this
Contract without affecting the contract price.
The placing of asphalt layers, including the type 1 material, shall be effected with special
finisher suitable for the trench width, so as to effect excellent quality smooth finish.
The Contractor shall bear all costs and relevant charges for all the necessary field and
laboratory tests required.
The Authority reserves the right to perform field and/or laboratory tests at any time in
order to check the compliance with the Specification.
If the results of such tests are negative the Contractor shall be obliged to remove the
unsuitable materials and replace them with suitable ones at his own expense or if possible
and with the consent of the engineer take any suitable measures and actions to rectify the
defective works.
The Contractor shall bear all expenses in respect of such negative tests results.
13.8
TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF
CORES
The ends of each cable shall be terminated in brass compression type cable glands.
In cubicles all cores including the spare cores of multi-core cables shall be ferruled and
terminated at the top of a terminal block. The ends of every type wire and every cable tail
shall be fitted with numbered white ferrules with the numbers clearly engraved in black.
Moisture and oil-resisting insulating material having a glossy finish shall be used. The
ferrules shall be of the interlocking type and shall grip the insulation.
Wiring looms shall be formed in a neat and secure fashion using approved cable
strapping.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 240 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The individual cores shall be taken out and connected to the terminals in such a manner
that a sufficient length of core is available to permit cutting off and re-making of the
conductor termination without disturbing the main group of wiring.
All cores shall be left long enough to reach any terminal in the box. All cores shall be run
to the far end of the terminal row away from the gland and then back to the appropriate
terminal.
All markers shall be fitted to cores in an approved manner such that the number reads
from the terminal outwards.
Control cable looms within cubicles shall have sufficient surplus length to permit a
subsequent rearrangement to the remotest termination.
13.9
TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS
Control cables which incorporates metallic screens shall have the screens earthed at one
end only but the screens shall be connected to terminal boards at both ends. The position
of the earthing connection shall be shown clearly on the relevant diagrams.
Earth connections formed from wire braid screening shall be sleeved with green or
green/yellow insulation. Cable type earth connections shall use green/yellow coloured
insulated cable.
Multicore cable, comprising twisted pairs with a screen round each pair, shall have the
pair and the screen earth connection secured together intact up to the terminal board.
13.10 TERMINAL COLOURING AND LABELLING
Phase identification shall be marked in an approved manner on cable boxes, tail ends and
single-core cables and at all connecting points. Cable boxes shall be marked with
approved labels indicating the purpose of the supply where such supply is not obvious.
13.11 TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS
13.11.1
General
The outer case of terminal boxes shall be of steel construction and shall be so designed
to form an extremely rigid structure and shall be fitted with one or more hinged covers
provided with fasteners and padlocking facilities.
Each unit shall be provided with an earth stud.
All main equipment shall be arranged so that it is accessible from the front of the box or
kiosk.
The outer cases shall be treated before painting to prevent corrosion and shall be finished
in glossy enamel to an approved colour externally and white internally. Where terminal
boxes are required for installation outdoors or in damp situations, they shall be of
watertight construction and galvanised. Boxes located outside shall be weather and
insect proof with drainage facilities to EN 60529, IP54 degree of protection. Those
located indoors shall be to IP51 degree of protection.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 241 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
If the width of the box necessitates the provision of two hinged front covers they shall
close on to a centre post, which shall be removable to facilitate cable termination. The
depth of the outer case shall be not less than 200 mm.
13.11.2
Outdoor Boxes and Kiosks
Outdoor boxes and kiosks shall have domed or sloping roofs and shall be of weatherproof
and vermin-proof construction, with adequate ventilation and draining facilities. Any
divisions between compartments inside the boxes or kiosks shall be perforated to assist
the natural air circulation. They shall be so designed that condensation does not affect the
insulation of the apparatus, the terminal boards or the cables. Heaters shall be provided.
Where these exceed 40 watts, they shall be controlled by means of a watertight switch
mounted on the outside of the box or kiosk.
13.11.3
Access Facilities
Access shall be provided at both the front and back of kiosks and junction boxes, except
for small terminal boxes of the type normally employed for wall mounting.
Doors and access covers shall be easily opened and shall not be secured by nuts and
bolts. Doors and covers under 14 kg weight may be of the slide-on pattern, above this
weight they shall be hinged.
Kiosk doors shall be fastened with integral handles. Nuts, bolts, or carriage keys shall not
be used. Provision shall be made for padlocking each door.
Hinged doors on outdoor boxes and kiosks shall be provided with stays to retain the doors
in the open position.
13.11.4
Low Voltage Connections
If voltages in excess of 125 V are present in box or kiosk, they shall be adequately
screened or insulated and an appropriate "DANGER" notice shall be fixed on the outside
and inside of the box or kiosk.
13.11.5
Cable Termination
All cables shall enter boxes and kiosks at the base.
Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level, but shall wherever practicable enter
boxes or kiosks near the base.
Removable gland plates shall be provided, at least 450 mm above ground level. Sufficient
free space shall be available for the addition of future cables. Cable glands and conduits
shall project at least 20 mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate
draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the
surface of the gland plate. The back, sides and front of the box or kiosk shall project at
least 50 mm below the gland plate to prevent moisture draining on to the plate and cable
glands.
Where armoured cables are employed the armouring shall, unless otherwise approved, be
earthed inside the cable glands.
For the reception of external cables in panels removable gland plates shall be provided.
All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to the equipment they
shall be sealed by fitted boards. These shall be of an approved, non-flammable,
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 242 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
insulating, vermin- proof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20 mm
above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or
conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate.
Separate gland plates shall be provided for each circuit plate with glands suitable for
PVC/PVC/SWA PVC cable.
13.11.6
Labels
Labels shall be provided inside each junction box or kiosk to describe functions of the
various items of equipment. Where the kiosk is divided into compartments each door shall
have an external label to identify the compartment.
13.11.7
Terminal Boards
Terminal boards shall comprise banks of rail mounted, screw clamp, spring loaded
insertion, solder lug or stud type terminals as required to suit the design and duty of the
cables to be terminated, arranged in pairs horizontally and grouped in vertical formation to
provide a rigid assembly. Each pair of terminals shall be connected together at the base
with a fixed or plug type link. Insulating material of self extinguishing or resistant to flame
propagation and substantially non-hydroscopic type shall be moulded around the base of
the screws or studs, links connecting pairs of screws or studs or plug sockets to prevent
exposure of live metal at the back of the terminal boards and to secure the terminals
against rotation and displacement.
Terminal boards shall have an approved means for securing the wires, and shall be
complete with identification ferrules, insulating barriers between pairs of terminals and
removable transparent non-flammable terminal covers fitted with marker strips for
identifying the terminals. All nuts, washers, links and other components provided for
securing the wires shall be electro-tinned. Springs shall be aged and shall withstand
corrosion.
The clearance between adjacent terminal boards and from the sides of the case shall not
be less than 100 mm. The minimum clearance between terminal boards and the top and
bottom of the case shall be 200 mm.
All terminal boxes and boards shall meet the associated cable site tests.
13.12 DRAWINGS
The following drawings and schedules are required:
(a) Multicore and auxiliary power cable route plan
(b) Layout and dimensions of cable trays, racks and ladders
(c) Arrangement for cable support, steelwork, clamping, cleating, cable markers, cable
tress etc
(d) Cable schedules
(e) Core termination schedule
Other drawings necessary to complete compilation and details of cable layout and
arrangement shall be submitted as required by the Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 243 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
14. LV AC SWITCHBOARD
14.1
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
The panel is to comprise of a completely enclosed self supporting metal structure and
shall be of the single busbar air insulated multi-cubicle, factory built assembly type,
incorporating moulded case circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers, isolators, fuses,
instruments and current transformers.
All units when built up into a complete switchboard shall be such that the completed
switchboard is of flush fronted design, having a neat and clean appearance and shall be
readily extensible on both sides.
All components shall be accessibly mounted in the switchboard and shall not impede
access to wiring or terminals. All faults occurring within any individual unit shall be
contained within that unit and except for busbar faults shall not cause shut down of any
section of board other than the unit itself. All equipment shall be constructed of nonhygroscopic and non-flammable material. Insulating barriers and bus supports shall be of
an approved material. The design shall cater for the interconnection of busbars, both
primary and secondary, between adjacent units. The apertures for secondary bus wires
between adjacent units and for secondary wiring in individual units shall be "bushed" to
prevent damage to wires on sharp edges of metal.
Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartment within the switchboard and
access shall be possible only by means of bolted-on sheet steel covers, which shall
clearly be marked "Busbars". Busbars and busbar connections shall not be exposed when
covers and doors are opened for access to the remainder of the switchgear.
The construction shall be robust and be designed to prevent the spreading of damage due
to fire, short-circuits or other causes. All cable terminations shall be accessible from the
bottom. The cable termination compartment shall be segregated from the rest of the
switchboard. The switchboards shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live
parts.
14.2
RATINGS
14.2.1
415 V AC Switchboard
The Switchboard shall comprise the following:
14.2.1.1
Incoming Circuits
•
1 – 250 A 4P Manual change-over switch
•
2 – 250 A 4P moulded case circuit breakers for the three incoming supplies, fixed
type, motorized, with mechanical and electrical interlocks as described later on.
All Incoming Circuit breakers must be equipped with under voltage relay.
14.2.1.2
Outgoing Circuits
•
1 – 200 A 3P moulded case circuit breaker
•
1 – 125 A 3P moulded case circuit breaker
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 244 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
4 – 63 A 3P MCBs type D
•
2 – 20 A 3P MCBs type D
•
9 – 16 A 3P MCBs type D
•
1 – 60 A 1P MCB type D
•
2 – 25 A 1P MCBs type D
•
2 - 20 A 1P MCBs type D
•
4 – 16 A 1P MCBs type D
•
6 – 10 A 1P MCBs type D
20% space for additional MCBs
All the above as per drawing No. 1S000E8NE1SB002 constituting part of the tender.
14.3
MAIN BUS-BARS
The panel shall include three phase busbars and one neutral busbar of high conductivity
copper, adequately supported to withstand all normal and fault condition stresses. The
clearances of the busbars to all earthed metal parts shall comply with the requirements to
EN 60439 - 1.
The Busbars shall be insulated by using appropriate plastic cover or other suitable
insulating means.
The phase and neutral busbars shall be not less than 264 mm2 cross sectional area and
the rated short time withstand current of the busbar shall be 50 kA for 1 s.
14.4
TEMPERATURE RISE
The panels shall be capable of carrying continuously the specified currents without
exceeding the maximum temperatures given in the appropriate International Standards.
14.5
CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE
The panel shall comply with EN 60439 - 1 and the degree of protection shall be not less
than IP31 to EN 60529.
The panel shall be of robust construction and shall be made of electro-zinc coated sheet
metal having a minimum thickness of 2 mm (14 SWG). The construction shall employ
folding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcement where
necessary. The stiffness shall be such as to prevent maloperation of relays or other
apparatus by impact. The front of the panel shall have a smooth well-finished surface.
All steel surfaces shall be protected against corrosion in accordance with EN ISO 12944.
The exterior of the panels shall be given one coat or primer, one undercoat and at least
one finishing coat of minimum thickness 80 microns of light grey colour. The interior of the
panel shall be finished with a mat white surface.
The panel shall provide for bottom entry of cables via detachable blank vermin proof
plates.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 245 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The enclosure shall be front accessed. The backside cover panels shall be detachable but
not for maintenance or installation purposes. All maintenance and installation
requirements must be satisfied by accessing the panels from the front.
The depth and other dimensions of the panels shall be such as to satisfy the installation of
the incoming and outgoing cables. The minimum estimated required area per incoming
cable must not less than 300x300 mm.
The panel shall be well ventilated, top and bottom, through vermin proof louvers fitted with
brass gauge screens.
All control circuits shall be fused with suitable rated fuses at the points of supply.
Indicating lamps shall be fitted with suitable dropping resistors. All devices shall be clearly
labelled and the ON/OFF position of the switches shall be clearly indicated.
Incoming and outgoing circuits shall be appropriately marked. Also interconnection wires
shall be marked by inserting suitable plastic sleeves at both wire ends, bearing the same
number.
14.6
LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
All incoming and outgoing circuits on the panel shall be protected by means of 415V/240V
miniature or moulded case circuit breakers, which shall comply in all respects with the
requirements of EN 60898 and EN 60947-2.
The breaking capacities of the incoming circuit breakers shall be not less than 20 kA and
the breaking capacities of the outgoing circuit breakers shall be not less than 9 kA unless
otherwise specified.
The circuit breaker operating mechanisms, except for the incoming circuit breakers (see
Paragraph below), shall be of the quick-make and quick break type with the speed of
operation independent of the operator and shall be mechanically trip free from the
operating handle. The operating mechanisms shall be constructed to operate all poles
simultaneously during opening, closing, and tripped conditions.
The circuit breakers operating handle or switch shall clearly indicate the three positions,
ON, OFF, and TRIPPED.
The circuit breakers shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal elements for inverse time
delay operation and magnetic elements for short circuit protection.
Current curves shall be provided showing overload and short circuit discrimination
between outgoing breakers and the incoming breaker.
The replacement of any circuit breaker shall be possible to be carried out without
interference to the other circuit breakers on the panel.
Outgoing circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be covered by a hinged door with a safety lock.
14.6.1
Incoming Circuit Breakers
The incoming circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be motor wound spring
operated. The circuit breaker shall be capable of closing fully and latching against its rated
making current.
Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional measures:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 246 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) If the circuit breaker is open and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be closed
and then tripped.
(b) If the circuit breaker is closed and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be
opened, closed and then tripped.
(c) Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for remote electrical indication shall be
provided to indicate the state of the spring.
(d) Motor charged mechanisms should be provided with means for charging the spring by
hand and also a shrouded push-button for releasing the spring. An electrical release
coil shall also be provided.
(e) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence
immediately and automatically upon the completion of each circuit-breaker closing
operation. The time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 30 seconds.
(f) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted with a motor charged closing
mechanism, whilst the spring is being charged. It shall be necessary for the spring to
be fully charged and the associated charging mechanism fully prepared for closing
before it can be released to close the circuit-breaker.
All circuit-breaker operating mechanisms shall be fitted with an electrical 110 Vdc shunt
trip release coil for local remote tripping /opening and in addition a mechanical hand
tripping device.
The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from a 110 Vdc
power supply and shall operate satisfactorily, over the ambient temperature range when
the voltage at their terminals is at any value within the voltage range of 85% to 110% of
nominal voltage, with the exception of the shunt trip release coil which shall operate
between 70% to 110% of nominal voltage and in addition over the range of all operating
conditions of the batteries and chargers of the substation.
All operating coils for use on the DC supply shall be connected so that failure of insulation
to earth does not cause the coil to become energized.
Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in each pole on each unit and
shall be independent of each other and all other circuits.
Approved, positively driven mechanically operated indicating devices shall be provided to
indicate whether a circuit-breaker is in the open, closed, service, isolated or earthed
position.
Facilities shall be provided for manually charging the springs in case of closing supply
failure. Manual operation of circuit breakers for maintenance purposes shall be provided.
The locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit breaker can be
prevented from being closed when it is open and from being manually tripped when it is
closed. These facilities shall not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the
insertion of the single padlock required. It shall not be possible, without the aid of tools, to
gain access to the tripping toggle or any part of the mechanism which would permit defeat
of the locking of the manual trip. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip
mechanism so as to render inoperative the electrical tripping.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 247 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
14.6.2
Manual Change-Over Switch
The manual change-over switch shall comply in all respects with the requirements of EN
60947-3.
The rated operational currents as stated are based on the AC-23 utilization category.
They shall be of the quick make and quick break operation and shall have independent
opening and closing mechanism.
The changeover switches shall be of compact moulded body with double break contacts
and separate arcing contacts. Locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the
changeover switch can be locked in either position.
The technical characteristics of the switch must be such as to comply with the
characteristics of the back up fuses of 400A rating, HRC type 2 and the LV circuit breaker
of the MCCB type included in the proposed switchboard under this tender.
14.7
14.7.1
INSTRUMENTS
Voltmeters
The phase-to-neutral voltage of each Incoming supply shall be measured by means of
suitable separate voltmeters with phase selection switches.
14.7.2
Ammeters
The load of each phase of the incoming circuits shall be monitored by means of 0-300 A
scale Ammeter. The Ammeter shall be controlled by means of a suitable selector switch
with L1, L2, L3, and OFF positions.
14.7.3
Indicating Lamps
A red lamp shall be connected to each Incoming supply circuit to indicate whether the
circuit in question is connected to the Distribution Switchboard busbars or not.
14.8
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Each phase of the Incoming circuits shall be equipped with a Current Transformer for
monitoring the phase currents. The current transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1
and have the following characteristics:
•
Ratio: 300/1 Amps
•
Class: 1
•
Burden: 15 VA
For the Substation switchboards, each phase and the neutral of the Incoming circuits shall
be equipped with a Current Transformer for Restricted Earth Fault protection. The current
transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1 and have the following characteristics:
•
Ratio: 300/1 amps
•
Class: X
•
Knee point voltage: 100 V
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 248 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Internal Resistance at 75 oC: 0,85 Ω
14.9
TERMINATION CABLES
The incoming supplies to the panels will be by means of 185 mm2, 4-core, XLPE/PE
insulated and armoured aluminium cables, which shall be terminated by means of suitable
cable lugs and glands, which are to be provided with the panel. The terminations strips
shall be at adequate height for avoiding core deformation and insulation deterioration.
They must be accessible at all installation stages of cable
Detail drawings of the termination compartment and terminals with any other associated
equipment shall be provided at the stage of tender. It shall be ensured that the glanding
and termination space is adequate for all incoming and outgoing circuits.
14.10 EARTHING
The panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 95 mm2 crosssection, which is to be connected to the substation earth.
14.11 INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND INTERLOCK
SCHEME
The incoming supply circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked
and shall be provided with selector switches and relays in order to be controlled for either
automatic/manual changeover or manual parallel operation.
In the manual position, it shall be possible to have the following combinations:
(a) When change-over and non paralleling is selected:
•
CB1 closes and CB2 cannot close.
•
CB2 closes and CB1 cannot close.
(b) When manual parallel operation is selected:
•
Both CB1 and CB2 close paralleling the two transformers.
In the automatic position, the following change over shall happen automatically ensuring
that the transformers will never be paralleled:
•
If CB1 is closed and CB1 fails or looses its source of supply, then CB2 shall close
automatically.
•
If under the same conditions CB2 fails then CB1 shall close automatically.
After any changeover the circuit breaker shall remain to that state, even when the cause is
removed.
Each incoming supply shall be monitored by means of an under voltage relay which is to
operate when the voltage on any phase drops below 70% of the rated value. It shall be
possible to adjust the operation of these relays with a time delay, adjustable between 0
and 2 seconds. The under-voltage relay shall pick up when the monitoring voltages reach
a value of 90% of the rated value. Both pick-up and drop-off voltage settings, shall be
adjustable between 20% and 100% of the nominal voltage.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 249 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
When a circuit breaker trips an alarm must be given on the panel and supervisory
signalling to be provided by voltage free contact.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 250 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
15. SUBSTATION EARTHING
15.1
GENERAL
The Contract includes the connection of all items of Plant to the earthing system of the
substation that shall include the supply and installation of all materials and equipment for
the connection of the Plant.
15.2
BASIS OF DESIGN
The design of the earth mat is based on the maximum fault level of the system as
specified in Section 3.1- “Design Criteria”.
The earthing system design is generally in accordance with the guidelines for earthing in
IEEE 80 "Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding". The earthing of all equipment and
the provision of earthing systems, electrodes and connections is in accordance BS 7430.
15.3
EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT
All electrical apparatus shall be connected by individual branches from the earth grid. The
points of connection in respect of principal items of plant are:
(a) The HV switchgear, MV switchboard, capacitor banks, power transformers, earthing
and auxiliary transformers, tanks, Relay/Control Panels, Telecom panels, LV AC and
DC equipment and all other electrical apparatus shall each be connected to the main
earth bar by means of separate subsidiary connection of at least 185 mm2.
(b) All steel door, rails, steel structures, cable trays, concrete reinforcement bars and all
metal structures of the substation shall be connected to the earth grid by branch earth
bars.
(c) Connections to transformer neutrals shall be duplicate and shall be made direct to the
main earth bar at two different points. The transformer body shall be connected to the
earth grid separately.
(d) In general the connections between HV electrical equipment and the main earth bar
and between LV electrical equipment comprising substantial multi-cubicle
switchboards and the main earth bar shall be duplicated.
(e) The main earth bar shall be distributed throughout the substation and shall provide
access for connection of all equipment and panels and shall cater for future
expansions.
15.4
JOINTS AND BRANCHES
Joints shall have a resistance not exceeding that of an equivalent length of conductor and
joints and shall be tested to prove compliance with this requirement.
No drilling of the earth conductor shall be allowed.
Joints and connections to the earthing system shall be so effected as to avoid reduction of
the current carrying capacity and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 251 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
All joints and connections underground shall be made by thermo welding. Exposed
connections shall be made by thermo welding or where approved by the Engineer by
compression or tinning and bolting, provided allowance for such connections was made in
the design calculations.
Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that the available contact area is fully utilized
in all connections to plant and apparatus.
15.5
GUARDS
Where earthing conductors are exposed to mechanical damage steel guards shall be
provided to protect them.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 252 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
16. FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS
16.1
GENERAL
Except as otherwise specified optical fibre media will be provided by others in accordance
with this Specification. Each optical fibre link shall comprise a specified number of fibres
between two substation buildings, as defined in the Schedules. The fibres shall be carried
in underground optical fibre cable buried with the 132 kV power cables, terminating in
demountable connectors, as specified in detail below.
Optical fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall be designed for operation at
nominal wavelengths of both 1.300 nm and 1.550 nm. However, the fibres shall be
optimised for operation within the 1.300 nm window, as specified in detail below.
Any fibre optic cable connection, which may be required to be provided between the
digital current differential protection relays and the multiplexer equipment, which shall be
installed in the telecommunications room, shall be supplied under this Contract and its
total cost for installation and connection at both ends shall be assumed to be included in
the Contract price. The optical fibres shall be fitted with demountable connectors. The
connection types shall be defined during the Contract design stage in co-ordination with
the supplier of the optical terminal equipment.
Unless otherwise stated the following scope of supply for the optical links is not included
in this Contract:
(a) Fibres within the underground optical fibre cable, which shall interconnect with the
existing system.
(b) Splice boxes, within each substation building, to accommodate fibre splices between
the fibre cable and the flexible termination cable.
(c) Flexible termination cables, which shall form the final connection between the splice
box and termination equipment to be supplied under this contract.
16.2
16.2.1
OPTICAL FIBERS
General
All fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall comply with ITU-T Recommendation
G.652 (Red Book) and the requirements detailed below.
The fibres shall be optimised for use with wavelengths of around 1.300 nm, but they shall
also be suitable for operation with wavelengths around 1.550 nm.
The fibres shall be entirely suitable for jointing by means of a normal fusion splicing
technique.
16.2.2
Fibre Material
The fibre shall be manufactured from high grade silica and doped as necessary to provide
the required transmission performance.
The chemical composition of the fibres shall be specifically designed to minimize the
effect of hydrogen on the transmission properties.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 253 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
16.2.3
Fibre Coating
The primary coating shall consist of an inert material which can be readily removed for
jointing purposes without damage to the fibre and without necessitating the use of
hazardous chemicals.
A secondary coating may be applied directly over the primary coating or alternatively a
loose jacket may be provided.
Where a tight fitting secondary coating is provided it shall consist of an inert material.
The secondary coating or loose tube shall be colour coded throughout the length of the
cable. If not part of the material of the secondary coating the colour coding shall be fast
and capable of withstanding normal handling during termination.
The fibre coating shall be translucent such that fibre splicing techniques, using optical
alignment of cores by means of injection and detection of light through the cladding, shall
be supported. In addition, the fibre coating shall be optically matched to the cladding to
promote cladding mode stripping.
The composition of the cable shall be specifically designed to reduce the production of
hydrogen gas and to prevent the migration of hydrogen into the fiber.
16.2.4
Fibre Geometry
The mode field diameter shall be 9,2 µm with a tolerance of ±0,6 µm.
The mode field non-circularity shall be less than 6%.
The mode field concentricity error shall not be more than 1 µm.
The fibre cladding diameter shall be 125 µm ±2.4%.
The cladding non-circularity shall be less than 2% when measured over the maximum and
minimum diameters.
16.2.5
Fibre Attenuation
Those optical fibres forming part of entirely new links, to be provided within the scope of
the Contract, shall have an average attenuation of coefficient (per optical path) not
exceeding 0,4 dB/km at 1.300 nm and 0,25 dB/km at 1.550 nm.
16.2.6
Cut-off Wavelength
The cut-off wavelength of fibres shall lie in the range 1.100 to 1.280 nm, as measured by
the Reference Test Method detailed in ITU-T G650.
16.2.7
Dispersion Coefficient
The fibres should be optimised for operation at 1.300 nm such that the total dispersion
coefficient is nominally zero. The dispersion coefficient at 1.550 nm shall not exceed 18
ps/km.nm.
The dispersion coefficients at wavelengths of both 1.300 nm and 1.550 nm will be advised
later.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 254 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
16.3
16.3.1
FIBER JOINTS
Fusion Splices
All fibre joints shall be of the fusion type, except where demountable connectors are
specified.
Fusion slicing shall be carried out by trained personnel using automatic fusion splicing
equipment designed for the fibre type. Fibre ends shall be prepared for splicing using
methods and tools recommended by the fibre and splicing equipment manufacturers. The
cleanliness and accurate cleaving of fibre ends shall be ensured prior to splicing.
The accurate alignment of fibre cores, prior to splicing, shall be verified using a technique
that monitors the optical power transmitted across the splice interface. Fusion splicing
shall be commenced only after manipulations of fibre alignment have maximized the
transmitted power.
Fusion splice optical losses shall average at no more than 0,07 dB per splice. No single
splice loss shall exceed 0,1 dB.
Splices shall be mechanically strengthened and protected from the environment by means
of purpose designed splice sleeves or enclosures. The protection sleeves shall be heat
shrinkable and shall incorporate a stainless steel rod. The minimum length of the sleeves
shall be 45 mm. The finished splice shall be supported within the splice (joint) box by
means of suitable clips or restraints. It shall be possible to remove and replace the splice
in the support device without risk of damage to the splice or fibre.
Each fusion splice shall have a spare length of fibre of approximately 1 m associated with
it. This excess fibre shall be coiled neatly and clipped (or otherwise retained) within the
splice (joint) box.
16.3.2
Demountable Connectors
Demountable connectors shall be fitted to each fibre at the termination of each optical link.
The connector types shall be defined during the contract design phase.
16.3.3
Splice Boxes
Splice boxes shall be wall mounted and located at the substation building, tolerance room,
adjacent to the terminal equipment with which the optical link is associated; the precise
location shall be agreed with the Engineer.
16.4
TERMINATION CABLES
A termination cable is defined as that cable installed between the splice box at the
substation end of the approach cable and the optical termination equipment (supplied by
others).
The termination cable shall be of flexible and rugged construction, suitable for installation
within floor voids at the substation buildings. The cable construction shall incorporate
strength member(s), fibre buffering (bedding) and a tough jacket. The fibres shall be
entirely compatible with those of the approach cable to ensure good optical and physical
fusion splicing properties.
Each termination cable shall be supplied in a preformed length, with factory fitted
demountable connectors at the free end. The type of demountable connector shall
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 255 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
comply with the requirements previously described. A minimum allowance of 10 m shall
be made for the length of each termination cable.
16.5
16.5.1
TESTING
Factory Testing
Factory testing shall be carried out in accordance with procedures defined in ITU-T G.650
or EN 793 - 1.
16.5.2
Site Testing
On hand over of the optical fibre optic link the contractor shall perform the following tests,
to be carried out for each individual fibre link to confirm acceptability and compliance with
this specification.
(a) Link attenuation at 1.300 nm and 1.550 nm for each individual fibre of the link.
(b) Fibre attenuation profile measurement using an optical time domain reflectometer.
This test shall be carried out from each end of each fibre link. Test results shall be
presented in graphical form with graduated axes.
Precautions are to be taken to ensure that the fibres under test are outside the dead
zones of the OTDR. For this reason an appropriate length of fibre pigtail shall be
inserted between the launch end and the fibre to be tested.
16.5.3
Splicing & Testing Reports and Certificates
The following reports in duplicate shall be submitted to the Engineer for each new optical
link to be established, for record purposes and shall be incorporated in the “As
Constructed Records”.
(a) Splicing reports detailing the date, weather conditions, jointers and supervising
engineer’s names, details of the type of cable and the type of joint or termination,
location, ambient temperature and any other information relative to the Splicing
Optical process.
(b) Test certificates shall be submitted detailing the test results of commissioning as
specified in the relevant clause above.
(c) Full written reports shall be required of any damage occurring to conductor or
equipment together with remedial action proposed which shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 256 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17. INSPECTION AND TESTING
17.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the carrying out of material and plant inspection
and testing. He shall be responsible for any inspection and testing normally carried out by
the Manufacturer/Contractor/Sub-Contractor and for those carried out according to the
manufacturing and fabrication standards of the material/plant and/or rule, regulations and
practices of the manufacturing country.
The whole of the Plant covered by this Contract will be subject to inspection and test by
the Engineer during manufacture and on completion. The approval of the Engineer or the
passing of any such inspection or test will not, however, prejudice the right of the
Purchaser to reject the Plant if it does not comply with the Specification when erected to
give complete satisfaction in service. The costs of all tests and inspection shall be borne
by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
The Purchaser and/or the Engineer and/or his representative shall be entitled at all
reasonable times during the manufacture, to inspect, examine and witness tests on the
Manufacturer's, Contractor's and Sub-Contract's premises the material and workmanship
of all plant to be provided under the Contract. If part of the said plant is being
manufactured in other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the Purchaser and/or the
Engineer and/or his representatives, permission to inspect, examine and witness tests as
if the said plant is being manufactured at the Contractor's premises. Such inspection,
examination and/or testing shall not release the Contractor from any of his obligations
under the Contract.
Before any Plant is packed or dispatched from the Main or Sub-Contractor's works, all
tests called for shall have been successfully carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
Not less than thirty days notice shall be given when the Plant is ready for inspection or
test and every facility shall be provided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors to
enable the Engineer to carry out the necessary inspection and tests.
17.2
SUB-CONTRACTORS
Within two months of acceptance of the Tender the Contractor shall forward to the
Engineer a list of all sub-orders placed or intended. The Contractor shall submit un-priced
copies of all orders and sub-orders as selected by the Engineer. One copy of all drawings
referred to in the sub-orders is to be submitted, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
The drawings and sub-orders submitted to the Engineer shall cover all components, which
are subject to electrical and mechanical pressure or stress when the Plant is in operation
and also those items, which will be dispatched to Site direct from the Sub-Contractor's
works.
For the purpose of this Clause, inter-works shall be treated as sub-orders.
Sub-orders shall include a statement advising the Sub-Contractor that the items being
ordered will be subject to inspection and test by the Engineer.
It is important that all copies of sub-orders are clearly marked with the name of the
Contractor and the following reference:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 257 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Purchaser's Name
•
Contract Number
Sub-Contractors shall comply with all the applicable requirements of this Specification
and, in particular, with this Section. Orders issued by the Sub-Contractor shall also
include the Main Contractor's name and reference on their sub-order in addition to the
above-mentioned heading.
17.3
MATERIAL TESTS
The Contractor shall provide test pieces as required by the Engineer to enable him to
determine the quality of the material supplied under this Contract. Such test pieces shall
be prepared and supplied free of charge and any cost of the tests shall be borne by the
Contractor. If any test piece fails to comply with the requirements of the appropriate
specifications for the material in question, the Engineer may reject the whole of the
material represented by that test piece; the Contractor's designers and metallurgists will
be consulted before any material is so rejected.
In the event of the Engineer being furnished with certified particulars of tests which have
been carried out for the Contractor by the suppliers of materials, they may, at their own
discretion, dispense with the previously mentioned test entirely.
17.4
WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
After the Contract has been awarded and the main features of the project design are
known, then an Engineer's Inspection and Testing Program shall be established by the
Contractor.
The Engineer reserves the right to call for such additional tests as may be necessary to
prove compliance with the Specification.
Unless an alternative place of testing is agreed or specified the routine tests shall be
carried out at the Manufacturer's Works.
Type tests will not be required in those cases where the Contractor can produce certified
evidence to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the required type tests have been
performed successfully on identical equipment or equipment which is for practical test
purposes similar and produced in the factory where the equipment offered is to be
manufactured. Evidence to this effect shall be submitted at the time of tendering.
Where a type-tested design is manufactured under license in a different location evidence
of repeat type tests appropriate to the alternative manufacturing location will be required.
Type tests shall be carried out by approved testing authorities.
The Manufacturer's test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and
where necessary shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by such other body
as may be agreed.
Not less than thirty days notice of all tests shall be given to the Engineer, in order that he
may be present if he so desires. As many tests as possible shall be arranged together in
accordance with a program to be agreed with the Engineer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 258 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer applications for inspection which shall contain
the following information.
(a) Contract number
(b) Manufacturer's name plus name of manufacturer's staff responsible for the testing and
manufacturer's works order number
(c) Location of tests
(d) Date of test
(e) Description in full of Plant offered for inspection (Contractor's order references alone
are insufficient and unacceptable)
(f) Schedule of tests to be performed and standard to be applied
(g) List of the Engineer's approved drawing numbers appropriate to the Plant offered
(h) Sub-order number
The subject items should remain available for Engineer's inspection and test up to a
minimum of 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test.
Every facility with respect to access, drawings, instruments and manpower shall be
provided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractor to enable the Engineer or his
designated representative to carry out the necessary inspection and testing of the Plant.
Inspection and testing during manufacture shall be in accordance with the General
Conditions of Purchase and this section of the Specification.
Works tests shall include all routine electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in
accordance with the relevant Standards except where departures therefrom and
modifications thereto are embodied in this Specification. For Plant not covered by
International Standard or specifically mentioned in this Specification, such tests as are
relevant shall be carried out in accordance with the maker's standard practice which must
meet with the prior approval of the Engineer.
Should the Plant or any portion thereof fail under test to give the required performance,
further tests which are considered necessary by the Engineer shall be carried out by the
Contractor and the whole costs of the repeated tests to which the Purchaser will be put
(including travelling and other expenses of the Engineer) will be borne by the Contractor.
After satisfactory completion of the witnessed tests at the Works, the Plant shall be
submitted for the Engineer's approval during dismantling preparatory to shipping. No item
of Plant is to be dispatched to Site until the Engineer has given his approval in writing.
17.5
17.5.1
SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Procedure
Not less than 2 months before the commencement of site testing the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer a test program for all sites to meet the erection and commissioning
program agreed.
Together with this program the Contractor shall provide in adequate time for approval by
the engineer before site testing is due to commence a set of pro-forma test forms for each
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 259 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
item or type of equipment showing details of the proposed tests, checks and method of
recording results. A list of all general checks shall also be included. The forms shall record
type of equipment, serial numbers and any other identifying marks, substation name and
circuit identification and shall include space for the test Engineer's and witnessing
Engineer's signature.
No testing shall commence until the format and test procedures are agreed and all results
shall be submitted on the approved form.
Where testing of common equipment such as bus zone protection and voltage selection
schemes is involved as extensions to existing and operational sites the submission shall
clearly state the outage requirements or 'risk of trip' conditions which would apply to
operational plant and where wiring modifications are involved on existing plant marked
diagrams shall be submitted showing any wiring additions and deletions if these have not
been previously submitted, before any work commences and this submission shall form
part of the "Permit to Work".
Testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests
which involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside normal working
hours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary outage
arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing program.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencement of site
erection of the site supplies, which will be required for the operation of the test equipment.
The Contractor shall provide the requisite experienced test personnel and all relevant test
equipment, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer or stated in the Schedules.
No tests as agreed under the program of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction
of the Engineer in writing.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise agreed.
17.5.2
Standards and Methods
The method of testing, unless specified in the Schedules, shall be agreed with the
Engineer.
Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test sheets in
cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearing on the test
results.
The Contractors' test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and shall be
appropriately calibrated by an approved authority or standard at the contractors expense.
The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some
variation upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by
changed conditions at site or by differing design, manufacture or constructional
techniques.
17.6
TEST CERTIFICATES
Triplicate sets of all principal test records, test certificates and performance curves shall
be submitted to the Engineer immediately after the conclusion of each test carried out in
accordance with the provisions of this Contract. These test records, certificates and
performance curves shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have been
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 260 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
witnessed by the Engineer. The information given in such test certificates and curves
shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and
should also bear the Contract reference and the Purchaser's name.
The Engineer shall countersign the test certificates from all works and site tests if found to
be satisfactory and retain two copies.
The test certificates shall be grouped by substation sub-divided by plant type and further
on a circuit-by-circuit basis and shall be compiled into volumes complete with index and
included in the appropriate Operation and Maintenance manuals.
So that the records may be used for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided
as soon as possible after completion of testing.
17.7
REJECTION OF PLANT
If any item fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect
whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at Site, the
Engineer may reject the item, or defective component thereof, whichever he considers
necessary, and after adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and/or test.
In the event of a defect on any item being of such a nature that the requirements of this
Specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to be replaced
by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.8
LIST OF TESTS
Following is the list of the tests at the manufacturer's works and at site.
17.8.1
Manufacturer’s Inspection and Testing Program
The Contractor shall carry out a comprehensive Inspection and Testing Programme during
manufacture of plant. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for the cost of carrying out the
following stages of inspection and/or test. These are not intended to form a comprehensive
programme, as it is the Contractor's responsibility to draw up and carry out and furnish
evidence of "type tests" on certain items of equipment.
17.8.2
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
The requirements of this section are intended to cover complete switchgear assemblies.
Component parts such as circuit breakers, isolators, current and voltage transformers, and
instruments shall have already been submitted to separate tests as specified in this
Specification. Additional pressure tests are specified however for the compartment chambers
of gas-insulated switchgear.
17.8.2.1
Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 200 or 62271 - 203 as applicable. The
interchangeability feature of identical units, together with the interlocking provided for
preventing units of different ratings being inter-changed shall be demonstrated. Supply
voltage variations for auxiliary devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification. Fluid leakage tests and partial discharge tests shall be included for gas-filled
switchgear.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 261 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Each pressurised chamber of gas-insulated switchgear shall be subject to a hydraulic test
after completion of all welding and machinery operations for a period of 15 minutes. There
shall be no sign of leakage or undue strain during the test and no permanent distortion after
pressure has been released. The test pressure shall be not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure of the compartment or as may be varied to the requirement of regulations of the
country of installation and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.8.3
Circuit Breakers
17.8.3.1
Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 and EN 62271 - 1 together with any
tests carried out as a normal routine procedure by the manufacturer. In addition, leakage
tests shall be carried out on gas-filled circuit-breakers.
The gas pressures, gas supply conditions, test connections and the measuring and recording
of results are to be approved by the Engineer.
Circuit-breakers shall be tested complete with any housing of which they form an integral part.
17.8.3.2
Type Tests
In accordance with the Specification, the performance of the circuit-breaker offered shall be
covered by existing type-test certificates to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 evidence of
which shall be submitted with the tender.
In the case of the 22kV circuit breaker for capacitor bank control, evidence must be provided
that the circuit breaker offered has passed satisfactorily the type tests for capacitor bank
switching according to the relevant Standard.
17.8.4
Disconnectors and Earth Switches
Routine and Type Tests - In accordance with EN 62271 - 102.
17.8.5
Post Insulators
17.8.5.1
Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60168 and IEC 60273. The mechanical routine
test shall consist of a tension test. The insulators shall withstand a load not less than 30% of
the tension failing load, for 3 seconds, without failure or loosening of fittings.
Where solid-core insulators are used an ultrasonic test shall be applied as a routine test on
the insulating part of each insulator before assembly. The frequency of the ultrasonic wave
shall be between 0.8 MHz and 50 MHz. The test shall be made along the axis of the insulator
and radially.
17.8.5.2
Sample Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60168. The tests shall be carried out on a sample
of 0.5% with a minimum of three insulators. All insulators shall be submitted to test (1) to (4)
of clause 34. Porosity tests - test (5) - shall, be carried out on fragments of porcelain from
insulators broken during other tests.
Galvanising tests - test (6) may be carried out on new unmounted fittings, selected from the
manufacturer's stocks of identical material.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 262 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17.8.6
Oil-Filled Vessels other than Cable Boxes
17.8.6.1
Routine Tests
All oil-filled vessels other than cable boxes shall be filled with insulating oil and subjected to
service operating pressure, or, if vented to atmosphere, to a pressure of 1 bar. They shall be
left standing for a period of 24 hours. During this period no leakage shall occur.
17.8.7
Insulated Pressure Containers
17.8.7.1
Routine Tests
Containers made of insulating material which have in service to withstand gas pressures in
excess of atmospheric pressure shall each be tested hydraulically after all necessary grinding
or machining work on them has been completed. For containers having fittings permanently
attached thereto, the tests shall be made after the fittings have been added.
The tests shall be carried out at the pressure given below for a period of 15 minutes and
components shall thereafter be marked in an agreed manner.
(a) For containers subject to static gas pressure loads only, and not subject to material
mechanical shock in service, the test shall be made twice maximum working pressure.
(b) For containers subject to rapid changes of gas pressure, or to gas pressure plus
mechanical shock, the test shall be made three times maximum working pressure.
17.8.8
Bushings
The requirements of this section are applicable to ceramic, treated paper, condenser and
other bushings for use indoors or outdoors and may be with or without oil or other filling as
appropriate.
17.8.8.1
Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137.
17.8.8.2
Sample Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137.
17.8.8.3
Type Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60137.
17.8.9
Porcelain Hollow Insulators
The requirements of this section are applicable to porcelain insulators which are complete in
themselves or form part of complete bushing assemblies.
17.8.9.1
Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of IEC 62155 (BS 4963).
17.8.9.2
Sample Tests
In accordance with the requirements of IEC 62155.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 263 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17.8.10
Current Transformers
17.8.10.1 Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186. These shall also
include a check of the magnetisation characteristic.
17.8.10.2 Type Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186.
17.8.11
Voltage Transformers
17.8.11.1 Routine Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186.
17.8.11.2 Type Tests
In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186.
Additionally, for magnetic voltage transformers, it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that capacitance discharge capability of the transformer is not less than the
rating assigned or stated in the Schedules. Where deemed necessary by the Engineer
discharge tests shall be made on representative units to confirm the mechanical and thermal
stability of the windings.
17.8.12
Control and Indicating Panels, Marshalling Kiosks, Terminal
Boxes, Meters, Instruments, and Secondary
17.8.12.1 Routine Tests
All components shall have been tested in accordance with relevant International
Standards/Recommendations prior to assembly in the complete equipment.
Tests shall be carried out to prove the correct functioning and wiring of the complete
equipment to the requirements of the Specification.
All secondary wiring including panel wiring and control circuits and all apparatus connected
directly thereto shall withstand a high voltage test of 2 kV to earth unless subject to other
requirements such as detailed under Protective Equipment.
17.8.13
Motors
17.8.13.1 Type Tests - A.C. Motors
One motor of each type shall be submitted to the following tests, which shall be carried
out in accordance with EN 60034.
(a) Inspection, at 50% assembly stage on h.v. motors 1.0 kV and above.
(b) Loss tangent measurement on each phase of h.v. motors 5.0 kV and above.
(c) Measurement of winding resistance, resistance measurement detectors and heaters
where applicable.
(d) Verification of direction of rotation relative to the phase sequence of the supply.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 264 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(e) No load loss measurement at nominal voltage with check for balance with the machine
unbolted from the bedplate. All h.v. motors shall be run for 15 minutes at 120%
nominal voltage.
(f) Temperature rise test.
(g) Locked rotor test.
(h) Verification of load characteristics and momentary excess torque capability.
(i) Verification of capability to produce rated output at minimum transient voltage, with
measurement of slip.
(j) Measurement of breakaway, pull-up and pull-out torques.
(k) Measurement of breakaway starting current. When this test is carried out at a
reduced voltage due to limitation of test plant, allowance shall be made for the effects
of saturation when deducing the value at nominal voltage.
(l) Overspeed test at 120% nominal speed for 5 minutes on h.v. motors and prototype
designs. (Visual examination on high speed or highly stressed rotors and welded rotor
assemblies).
(m) Dielectric tests including measurement of insulation resistance.
(n) Noise measurement where applicable.
(o) Vibration measurements when required.
(p) High voltage test.
17.8.13.2 Routine Tests - A.C. Motors
All other motors shall be submitted to test (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i), (l), (o), and (p) of the
above.
17.8.13.3 Type Tests - D.C. Motors
One motor or each type shall be submitted to the following tests which shall be carried out
in accordance with EN 60034 where appropriate.
(a) Insulation resistances.
(b) Resistance measurements of windings and heaters where applicable.
(c) Winding polarity checks.
(d) Light run figures and balance.
(e) Load characteristics.
(f) Temperature rise tests.
(g) Commutation tests.
(h) Overspeed tests.
(i) High voltage test.
(j) Noise tests where applicable.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 265 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(k) The above tests shall be conducted on the first motor of each basic design although
test certification for tests (f) and (j) may be submitted for approval.
(l) Where special series or ballast resistors are used, these shall be tested with the
motor.
17.8.13.4 Routine tests - D.C. Motors
Tests as (a), (b), (c), (d), (g), (h), (i) and (l) above.
17.8.14
Galvanising
17.8.14.1 Sample Tests
Representative samples, selected by the Engineer of all galvanised material shall be
submitted to galvanising tests. Galvanised fittings associated with insulators, and steel
cores for aluminium conductor steel reinforced cables shall be tested in line with the
relevant International Standards/Recommendations. All other fittings, fabrications,
hardware and fixings shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the relevant ISO
Recommendations.
17.8.15
Insulating Oil And Gas
17.8.15.1 Sample Tests
Samples of oil and gas from each consignment shall be tested before despatch and shall
comply with the requirements of EN 60296 and IEC 60376 respectively.
17.8.16
Protective Equipment
17.8.16.1 Routine Tests
All relays, instruments and other equipment shall be subjected to routine tests as specified in
EN 60255, supplemented by additional tests as is considered necessary by the Engineer.
Routine test reports shall be submitted for each relay and piece of equipment. The reports
shall record all measurements taken during the tests.
All apparatus directly connected to pilots which pass outside the switching station shall
withstand a high voltage test of 4 kV to earth for one minute. During the test all other
windings, connections or contacts shall be earthed.
Composite relay systems, e.g. distance relays, auto reclose relays, shall be subject to such
testing to International Standards by approved manufacturers' works inspection and testing
procedure as shall satisfactorily prove the correctness of the assembly and its settings and
ranges of operation.
17.8.17
Insulating Gas and Oil
17.8.17.1 Sample Tests
Samples of oil and gas from each consignment shall be tested before despatch and shall
comply with the requirements of EN 60296 and IEC 60376, respectively.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 266 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17.8.18
Handling Devices and Lifting Tackle
17.8.18.1 Routine Tests
All handling devices and lifting tackle supplied for maintenance purposes under the contract
shall, unless they are built into and form part of the equipment, be tested, marked and
certificates of test provided.
Lifting tackle built into and forming part of the equipment shall be operated with the maximum
working load to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.8.19
Batteries and Chargers
17.8.19.1 Routine Tests
Battery charger routine tests according to EN 60146.
The normal low-rate (float) charge voltage shall be set in the works at the specified voltage
per cell when delivering 50% of rated load. At this setting it shall be demonstrated that the
charger can maintain output voltage within the prescribed limits under the specified variations
of input voltage and frequency and output load current.
The operation of the boost charge facility shall also be demonstrated. The correct functioning
of all control indication and alarm devices shall be verified.
All secondary wiring shall be submitted to a high voltage test of 2 kV AC for 1 minute.
Where load voltage limiting regulators/diodes are to be connected it shall be demonstrated
and recorded that the load voltage is maintained within -10% to +10% of rated voltage for all
stages of battery charging conditions.
17.8.20
Low Voltage Switchgear
17.8.20.1 Routine Tests
Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate International
Standards/Recommendations. Routine tests shall include general inspection and electrical
operation tests.
DC Switchboard routine tests in accordance with EN 60439.
17.8.21
Auxiliary Power and Control Cables
17.8.21.1 Routine Tests
Routine tests in accordance with BS 6346.
17.8.21.1.1
PVC Insulated Auxiliary Cables
(a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested without immersion in water
for 5 minutes at 3 kV rms AC between conductors and between each conductor and the
armour which shall be earthed. The voltage shall be increased gradually and maintained
at the full value for 5 minutes.
(b) Insulation resistance - After completion of the voltage test the insulation resistance
between each conductor and the remaining conductors in the cable which shall be
connected to the armour shall be measured and shall be not less than that stated in the
relevant Schedule.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 267 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(c) Conductor resistance - The DC resistance of each conductor shall be measured and shall
be not greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20°C.
(d) Armour resistance - The DC resistance of the armour shall be measured and shall be not
greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20°C.
(e) Insulation thickness - Measurements shall be made on representative samples or core
taken not less than 0,30 m from the end of every factory length of cable, and the method
of measurement shall be approved by the Engineer.
(f) Extruded bedding and sheath thickness - Measurements shall be made on representative
samples taken not less that 0,150 m from the end of every factory length of cable, and the
method of measurements shall be approved by the Engineer.
(g) Spark test on oversheath - The extruded oversheath shall be spark tested in approved
manner.
17.8.21.1.2
Polyethylene Multipair Cables
(a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested between conductors and
between all conductors and the armour which shall be earthed. No breakdown of the
insulation shall occur. Between each conductor and remaining conductors connected to
the armour which shall be earthed - 10 kV AC, for 1 minute. Between all conductors
bunched and armour, which shall be earthed, - 15 kV AC for 1 minute.
(b) Insulation resistance - The insulation resistance shall be measured between each
conductor and the other conductors connected to the armour after completion of the
voltage test. The measured value shall not be less than that indicated in the relevant
Schedule.
(c) Conductor resistance - The DC resistance of the conductors shall be measured and the
results when corrected to 20OC shall not be greater than the figures stated in the relevant
Schedule.
(d) Mutual capacitance of telephone pairs - The mutual capacitance shall be measured
between the two conductors of each telephone pair with other conductors of the cable
and armour earthed. The mean value using alternating current and a suitable bridge shall
be recorded.
(e) Capacitance unbalance - Measurement of pair to pair capacitance unbalance shall be
made at a suitable audio frequency with all other conductors and any screen
connected to the armour and earthed. The measured value shall be divided by:
1
 L
 L  2

+
 
 500  500  
1
2
where L is the length in meters.
(f) Mutual inductance - Measurements shall be made at 5 kHz on carrier pairs. The
measured value shall be divided by:
1
 L
 L  2

+
 
 500  500  
1
2
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 268 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
where L is the length in meters.
(g) Voltage test on outercoverings - The PVC oversheath of complete cable shall withstand a
spark test for one minute between the armour and the external conducting surface of the
PVC sheath. The voltage applied between electrode and armour shall be 6 kV AC per
mm of thickness or 9 kV DC per mm of thickness.
17.8.21.2 Sample Tests
(a) PVC Auxiliary Cables
(b) Polyethylene Multipair Cables.
Sample tests shall be carried out on the first length and on not less than 10 per cent of drum
lengths of cable supplied to the contract.
The method of testing insulation and sheath shall be in accordance with EN 60811. The
physical examination of cable shall include measurement of insulation and sheath thickness,
diameter and number of armouring wires, cable diameter and make up of cable to comply
with the relevant Schedule particulars.
17.8.22
132 kV XLPE Cable Accessories
Accessories shall be subject to routine and type tests in line with the appropriate International
Standards/Recommendations and in accordance with the relevant clauses of this
Specification. Routine tests shall include material and dimensional checks on samples of
accessories and Type Test assemblies shall include sealing ends and joints appropriate to
the contract, which will be subject to lightning impulse voltage and dielectric security tests.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that earth disconnection links and boxes meet the voltage,
current and impulse requirements of the system. A programme of factory tests including
water tightness tests on link boxes shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
Type tests may be waived on production of documentary proof of previous tests as for cables.
17.8.23
Transformer
17.8.23.1 Routine Tests
All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests in accordance with EN
60076.
(a) Correct functioning of the tap-changer and driving mechanism.
(b) Measurement of winding resistance on all tap positions and phases.
(c) Measurement of ratio, polarity and phase relationship.
(d) Measurement of impedance voltage on all tap positions.
(e) Measurement of load loss.
(f) Measurement of no load loss and no load current at Un and at +5% Un and at +10% Un.
(g) Insulation resistance
(h) Dielectric withstand tests.
On uniformly insulated windings tests shall comprise:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 269 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
induced over voltage withstand
•
short duration power frequency voltage withstand
•
lighting impulse withstand for line terminals
•
lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% BIL kVp
On non-uniformly insulated windings tests shall comprise:
•
short duration power frequency voltage withstand
•
induced line to earth overvoltage withstand test
•
lightning impulse withstand for line terminals
•
lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% BIL kVp
•
induced power frequency overvoltage withstand test with partial discharge
measurement. This shall be performed in symmetrical three-phase connection on
completion of all the above tests.
The following are noted regarding the impulse voltage withstand tests:
1. The transformer shall have been subjected to the above routine tests prior to the impulse
voltage withstand tests.
2. Impulse test on regulating windings shall be carried out on the principal and on the
extreme tap positions.
3. The procedure shall be as required by EN 60076 Part 3, Clause 13, the impulse test
voltages being applied successively to each line terminal. Negative polarity is to be used
throughout the tests.
The sequence of voltage applications shall be:
i.
One reduced impulse calibration test.
ii.
One 100 per cent full wave voltage application.
iii.
One reduced chopped wave voltage application.
iv.
Two 115 per cent chopped wave voltage applications.
v.
Two 100 per cent full wave voltage applications.
Oscillographic records of the applied voltage and neutral current and/or transferred voltage
are to be taken and included in the records.
Films of the oscillographic records are to be made available to the Engineer at the time of the
tests for his examination.
External flashover of the bushings during the chopped wave tests is not permitted.
At the conclusion of the impulse voltage withstand tests, the transformers shall again be
subjected to the routine tests (f) and (g).
17.8.23.2 Type and Special Tests
These tests shall be carried out on one transformer of each size and type.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 270 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) Temperature Rise Test - The test shall be in accordance with EN 60076, Part 2.
Temperature-rise tests shall be conducted on the tapping corresponding to the maximum
losses.
(b) Noise Level Test - A noise level test to EN 60076 shall be carried out in accordance with
EN 60551.
(c) Frequency Spectrum Test - The purpose of this test is in order to establish the noise level
spectrum for noise insulation purposes.
This test shall be carried out over a frequency band of 50 Hz to 8 kHz, at 50Hz intervals
up to 500 Hz and 100 Hz intervals up to 1000 Hz and 500 Hz up to 8 kHz with noise level
measured at each point. The tests shall be carried out with the transformer de-energised
and also with the transformer energised with fans running. Measurements shall be made
on both axes at about 3m distance from the transformer. Other details will be agreed at
the time of the test.
(d) Measurement of Zero Sequence Impedance - The test shall be in accordance with EN
60076.
17.8.23.3 Voltage Control Equipment
17.8.23.3.1
Routine Tests
Each finished tap changer is to be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60214 but in
addition the mechanical test shall be carried out at rated voltage and no load.
17.8.23.3.2
Type Tests
Test Certificates shall be submitted confirming compliance with EN 60214 except that
evidence of the service duty type test shall be in excess of 100,000 operations.
17.8.23.3.3
Sequence Tests
Proving tests as necessary on control scheme to cover the principal modes of remote and
supervisory control, alarm and identification. These tests shall be performed with the tap
changer installed in the transformer and temporarily connected by cables to the remote
control panel.
17.8.23.4 Magnetic Circuit
17.8.23.4.1
Routine Tests
Each core completely assembled is to be tested for one minute at 2,000V AC between core
bolts, side plates, structural steelwork and core at the core and coil stage. After the
transformer is tanked and completely assembled, a further test is to be applied between the
core and the earthed structural steelwork to prove that the core is earthed through the
removable link, at one point only.
Magnetisation curves shall be supplied by the manufacturer with the test reports based on the
test values for voltages up to 110% of nominal and on calculated values for nominal voltages
above 110% up to 140%.
17.8.23.5 Cable Boxes
17.8.23.5.1
Routine Tests
To meet the requirements of as specified in Clause 8.7.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 271 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17.8.23.6 Tanks
17.8.23.6.1
Routine Tests
Oil Leakage - All tanks, conservators and oil filled compartments which are subjected in
service or during maintenance to oil pressure are to withstand without leakage, a hydraulic
pressure test equal to 69kN/m2 or the normal pressure plus 34kN/m2 whichever is the greater,
for 24 hours during which time no leakage or oil ingress into normally oil free spaces shall
occur.
17.8.23.6.2
Type Tests
Unless Type Test Certificates can be produced for tests carried out on similar equipment, the
following tests are to be included for tanks and conservators.
(a) Vacuum Test - The equipment is to withstand a full vacuum of 760mm of mercury when
empty of oil. The permanent deflection of plates or stiffeners on removal of vacuum is not
to exceed the following values:
Length of Plate
Permanent Deflection
Less than 1300mm
3.17 mm
1300 to 2500mm
6.5 mm
Greater than 2500mm
12.7 mm
(b) Pressure Test - The equipment is to withstand a pressure corresponding to 69kN/m2 or
the normal pressure plus 34kN/m2 whichever is the greatest. The permanent deflection of
plates or stiffeners on removal of pressure is not to exceed the value stated in respect of
the vacuum test in the preceding paragraph.
17.8.23.7 Gas and Oil – Actuated Relays
17.8.23.7.1
Routine Tests
(a) Oil Leakage - When subject to an internal oil pressure of 207kN/m2 for fifteen minutes
(b) Gas collection
(c) Oil Surge
(d) Performance test under service conditions
(e) Voltage - 2kV for one minute between electrical circuits and casing
17.8.23.8 Galvanizing
17.8.23.8.1
Routine Tests
To the requirements of EN 10244 or EN 729 whichever is applicable.
17.8.23.9 Current Transformers
All current transformers shall be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60044 - 1.
Triplicate Copies of all test records should be submitted to the Engineer. Also one copy of
each test record should be included in the relative Operating, Maintenance and Installation
Manuals.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 272 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
17.8.23.10 Earthing and Auxiliary Transformer
17.8.23.10.1 Routine Tests
All transformers shall be subjected to the following tests in accordance with EN 60076.
(a) Measurement of Winding Resistance
(b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationships
(c) Measurement of impedance voltage
(d) Measurement of load loss
(e) Measurement of no load loss
(f) Short duration power frequency withstand test
(g) Induced overvoltage withstand test
(h) Insulation resistance of each winding
17.8.23.10.2 Type and Special Tests
(a) Temperature rise test - A temperature rise test shall be carried out on one transformer
and the costs shall be included in the Contract price. This test shall take into account
temperature rise due to both the specified earth fault current and continuous operation at
CMR of the auxiliary winding.
(b) Impulse voltage withstand (full wave) to be carried out on each transformer.
(c) Measurement of zero sequence impedance to be carried out on each transformer.
17.8.24
Tests at Site
Tests on completion of erection shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the
relevant Clauses of the General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary test equipment to carry out the site tests and certificates of calibration (if
applicable) by an approved authority shall be submitted for the approval of the Site Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a written programme of tests and checks according to this
Clause for the approval of the Engineer. Test sheets and testing procedures (if required)
shall be forwarded to the site engineer not less than one month in advance of the planned
test.
The Contractor shall provide experienced test personnel subject to the approval by the
Engineer (CV's shall be submitted) and conditions imposed by any authorised local Body and
the local laws ruling at that time on such practice.
The testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests
which involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside normal working
hours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary outage
arrangements to be made in conformity with the testing programme.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencement of site
erection of the site supplies which will be required for the operation of the test equipment, to
enable the Engineer to arrange accordingly or to agree with alternative arrangements should
this be necessary.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 273 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
The Contractor shall record the results of the tests clearly, on an approved form and with
clear reference to the equipment and items to which they refer, so that the record can be
used as the basis for maintenance tests by the Purchaser during the working life of the
equipment. Triplicate copies of all Site test records, test certificates and performance curves
shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer as soon as possible after completion of
any group of tests. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied
for all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Engineer. The information given
in such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to
which the certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference.
The Engineer shall countersign the test sheets if found to be satisfactory and return one copy
to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall subsequently provide to the Engineer six bound copies of all site test
sheets as final records. The test sheets shall be grouped by substation sub-divided by plant
type and further on a circuit-by-circuit basis.
So that the records may be used for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided as
soon as possible after completion of testing.
Initial energising and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by the Engineer and carried
out jointly by the Purchaser, Contractor and Engineer. They will be subject to the Purchaser's
standard safety procedures and all operational switching will be carried out by the Purchase
according to a detailed programme, which the Purchaser will prepare and which will be
agreed in advance between all three parties. During these 'live' tests the Contractor shall
remain responsible for the performance of his Plant.
No tests as agreed under the programme of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction
or agreement of the Engineer in writing.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a list of recommended settings
for all protection and other types of automatic equipment, not less than three (3) months
before such equipment is required in commercial service. Where the settings involve
discrimination with settings of an existing network or plant supplied under another contract,
the relevant information will be supplied to the Contractor.
Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test sheets in cases
where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearing on the test results.
The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some variation
upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by changed conditions
at Site or by differing design, manufacture, or construction techniques or by latest revisions, if
any, of the Purchaser's testing procedures.
The Tenderer is required to submit proposals for dielectric tests to be carried out at site and
to include in his price the costs of such tests and of such equipment as deemed necessary.
17.8.25
Main Switchgear and Ancillary Equipment
17.8.25.1 General Checks
A general check of all the main switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be made and shall
include a check of the completeness, correctness and condition of earth connections,
labelling, arcing ring and horn gaps, clearances, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, pipework,
valves, blanking plates and all other auxiliary and ancillary items. Checks shall be made for
oil and gas leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external damage. A check shall
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 274 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
be made that loose items which are to be taken over by the Purchaser, e.g. blanking plates,
tools, spares, are in order and are correctly stored for taking over.
17.8.25.2 Metal Enclosed Switchgear Tests
Following completion of erection of GIS metal enclosed switchgear all high voltage circuits
shall be subjected to a high voltage AC withstand test. The Contractor shall submit with his
tender his proposals for carrying out this test including the proposed test voltage.
Provided that the switchgear is fully assembled at the manufacturers works and submitted to
a full AC voltage test and provided that site installation is carried out under controlled clean
conditions an alternative site test comprising an impulse test followed by a partial discharge
test may be acceptable. The Contractor shall submit details of any alternative site test
procedures at the time of tendering.
Dielectric tests shall be carried out on all auxiliary and Control Circuits.
The resistance of the main busbars and connections shall be measured and recorded.
Contact resistance tests shall be carried out with not less than 15 amperes passing through
the contacts.
All electrical and mechanical interlocks shall be proved. Checks shall be made on local and
remote indications and operation of auxiliary contacts.
Operational tests will include local and remote trip/close. Circuit-breaker timing tests shall be
carried out on all circuit- breakers.
Testing of the gas system shall be carried out to prove the gas quantity, its dryness and its
dielectric strength. The gas leakage shall also be measured.
All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor who shall also provide current
calibration test certificate for all test equipment.
17.8.25.3 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
Manually operated equipment shall be subject to operational tests to confirm contact
pressures, contact resistance, synchronism of operation of all phases and the ease of
operation.
Checks shall be made on interlocks, local, remote and supervisory indications and operation
of auxiliary contacts.
Motorised equipment shall be tested to prove the motor operation, including local and remote
operation. Timing tests shall also be carried out. Motors shall be subjected to overload and
single-phasing tests.
Earth switches and maintenance earthing devices shall be tested to confirm the opening and
closing sequences and checks shall be made on interlocks, indications and manual locking
devices.
17.8.25.4 Current Transformers
The magnetisation characteristic of all current transformers shall be checked at a sufficient
number of points to identify the current transformers with reference to the manufacturer's
estimated design curve and to determine the suitability of the current transformer for its
intended duty. It may be noted that it is not normally necessary to check the characteristic up
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 275 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
to the knee-point for this purpose. Special measures may have to be taken to ensure that the
core is fully demagnetised before commencing the test.
Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor. The primary injection
methods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer.
Local primary injection tests are to be carried out to establish the ratio and polarity or current
transformers as a group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of
similar ratio.
17.8.25.5 Voltage Transformers
All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity, ratio, phasing and for secondary output
(for CVT it shall be energised from the primary voltage side).
The following tests shall be carried out on electromagnetic type voltage transformers:
(a) Insulation tests at 500 volts to earth and between windings. All voltage transformers shall
be checked for polarity phasing and for secondary output.
(b) In the case of capacitor voltage transformers used as carrier coupling units tests will be
required on the coupling equipment and on the high frequency earth rods and their
connections where these are included under the Contract.
17.8.25.6 Interlocking
All interlocking arrangements both electrical and mechanical shall be fully checked and
tested. The interlocking for on load transfer shall be fully proven on each circuit.
17.8.25.7 Batteries and Battery Charging Equipment
The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested.
Battery discharge tests shall be carried out to confirm the battery rating and that the
conditioning charge has been successfully carried out.
Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and
adjustment and on the battery and charger alarm systems and to confirm battery capacity.
The specific gravity and cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall be recorded.
17.8.25.8 Instruments and Meters
Instruments and instrument transformer circuits shall be checked for polarity or direction and
for calibration including any interposing transformers or transducers. These checks shall be
made on all current transformer ratios.
Meters shall be checked for correct operation and rotation. The meters will subsequently be
taken to the employer's test laboratory and if they are found to be inaccurate and out of limits
will be dealt with as a defect during the guarantee period rather than a commissioning defect.
17.8.25.9 Low Voltage Switchboards
General testing and inspection shall be carried out as referred to above so far as is
applicable. It shall include checks on interlocking, changeover arrangements and
interchangeability of components. Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 1kV test set.
Attention is drawn to the requirement for functional testing and timing testing on circuit-
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 276 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
breakers and AC and DC circuits associated with standby auxiliary supplies and standby
generating sets, particularly where automatic operation is specified.
Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 500 V insulation test set. Check earthing
connections.
Shutters, interlocking, earthing procedures and the inter- changeability of components shall
be checked.
17.8.25.10 DC Supply Equipment
Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and
adjustment, the battery and charger alarm systems and battery capacity.
The open-circuit cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall be recorded (for each
cell).
The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested.
17.8.26
PVC Insulated Auxiliary Cables
(a) Voltage Test - Each 600/1000 Volt PVC insulated cable shall after installation and
glanding but before connecting tails to equipment terminals be tested at 3,5 kV DC
During the test the voltage shall be increased gradually to the full value and maintained
continuously for 1 minute between conductors and between each conductor and armour
without breakdown.
(b) Insulation resistance - The insulation resistance of each completed cable circuit shall be
measured and recorded.
17.8.27
Transformers
The following tests shall be performed:
(a) Insulation resistance tests between core and tank, between primary and secondary
windings and to earth.
(b) Voltage withstand tests on insulating oil to BS 148.
(c) Voltage ratio.
(d) Phase relationship.
(e) Magnetisation characteristics of current transformers of winding temperature devices.
(f) Calibration of winding temperature devices.
(g) Tap Changer:
•
Insulation resistance of control and motor circuits.
•
Raise-lower switch in local and remote position over complete range.
•
Operation of limit switches and motor protection cut-outs.
(h) Prove control circuits and remote indication and alarms.
(i) Calibration of automatic voltage control equipment.
(j) Cooling Equipment:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 277 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Megger insulation resistance in control circuits, motors, pumps and fans as
appropriate.
•
Check operation of fan and pump motors from local and remote positions.
•
Check the automatic starting and stopping of power cooling devices and the
associated indication.
(k) Check the Buchholz protection relays for alarm and trip operation using compressed air.
(l) Calibrate the oil temperature indicators including the winding temperature measurement.
Prove that the cooling-on, alarm and trip functions operate.
Before energising the transformer it should be dried by means of approved methods, if
necessary.
The above tests should be carried out on the earthing transformers as far as practicable.
17.8.28
Protection, Control, Alarms, Measurement, and Indication
Equipment
17.8.28.1 General
Sufficient tests shall be performed on the relays and protection schemes to:
(a) Establish that the equipment has not suffered damage during transit.
(b) Establish that the correct equipment has been supplied and installed.
(c) Confirm that the various items of equipment have been correctly interconnected.
(d) Confirm performance of schemes designed on the basis of calculation, e.g. differential
protection.
(e) Provide a set of figures for comparison with future maintenance values allowing the
condition of the equipment to be determined.
17.8.28.2 Wiring
Insulation Resistance Test at not less than 1000 Volts AC for one minute or 500 Volts DC are
to be carried out on all AC and DC protection, control, alarm and indication circuits to ensure
that wiring is in a satisfactory condition. The insulation of all circuits shall be checked before
proceeding with other tests and it is also essential that all AC wiring is proved, relay contacts,
auxiliary contacts, etc., being operated to verify this. Visual inspection and wiring checks for
completeness shall be made before testing commences on cable glands, cable jointing, fuse
or circuit-breaker ratings and small panel items such as indicating lamps.
Static equipment which may be damaged by the application of test voltage shall have the
appropriate terminals short-circuited.
Inter-relay, inter-unit and cubicle wiring carried out at site is to be checked to the appropriate
circuit wiring diagram. This may be done by using bells or buzzers or DC voltage supplied
from the station battery. Where it is found necessary during pre-commissioning work to effect
site modifications to the secondary wiring, site copies of the appropriate schematic and wiring
diagrams shall be suitably marked as agreed with the Engineer before the circuit is
commissioned.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 278 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Loop resistance measurements are to be made on all current transformer circuits. Separate
values are required for current transformer and lead resistance and all measurements are to
be recorded on lead resistance diagrams.
17.8.28.3 Mechanical Inspection
All panel equipment is to be examined to ensure that they are in proper working condition and
correctly adjusted, correctly labelled and that the relay case, cover, glass and gaskets are in
good order and properly fitting.
17.8.28.4 Secondary Injection
Secondary injection shall be carried out on all AC relays, using voltage and current of
sinusoidal waveform and rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory operation and range
adjustment.
When testing distance relays a switched voltage and current input should be used to simulate
fault conditions.
The polar characteristics of all distance protection shall be recorded at 30 degree intervals.
For circulation current protection employing voltage operated relays, the points of injection for
relay voltage setting tests shall be across the relay and stabilizing resistance. The fault setting
for this type of protection is to be established by secondary injection, where it is impracticable
to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across the appropriate
relay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors and CTs connected.
17.8.28.5 Primary Injection
Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor. The primary injection
methods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engineer.
Tests are to be carried out as follows:
(a) Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transformers as a
group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.
(b) Overall primary injection to prove correct inter-connections between current transformer
groups and associated relays.
(c) Fault setting tests to establish the value of current necessary to produce operation of the
relays.
17.8.28.6 Instruments and Meters
All instruments, meters and transducers shall be tested and calibrated to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.8.28.7 DC Operations
Tests are to be carried out to prove the correctness of all DC polarities, the operating levels of
DC relays and the correct functioning of DC relay schemes, selection and control switching,
indicating and alarms.
17.8.28.8 On Load Tests
In view of the hazards inherent in these tests, they shall be carried out under the direct
supervision of the Engineer and/or the Employer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 279 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
An operation and stability test shall be carried out for on load commissioning of unit type
protection.
Test for restraint shall be carried out to prove the characteristics of protective systems with
directional characteristics.
On load checks shall be made after the protection gear has been placed in service to ensure
that all connections and test links have been replaced and test leads removed as well as to
confirm the integrity of the current transformer circuits. Where necessary voltage readings
shall be taken at the terminals on each relay to ensure that loop connections between the
relays are complete. Special attention shall be paid to broken delta voltages and residual
current circuits where zero voltage or current respectively may not be proof of the
completeness of the circuit.
17.8.29
Tests On Completion
Tests on completion shall be subject to discussion and agreement but shall in general include
the following after all erection and site tests have been satisfactorily completed.
(a) Energization of all equipment under no load condition, normal system voltage, for 48
hours.
(b) Verification of correct indication of all instruments and meters under varying loads and
voltage.
(c) End to end tests of differential protection, intertripping and communications circuits under
live line conditions.
(d) Operational tests on synchronising equipment.
(e) Directional tests on distance, and directional overcurrent and earth fault protection where
appropriate.
(f) On-load stability tests of unit protection systems.
(g) Phasing checks on LV AC systems, VT supplies and main systems.
(h) Measurement of noise level with the transformer fans in operation under the minimum
ambient noise conditions.
The exact nature of the tests and presentation of the results shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
17.9
INSPECTION PLAN AND PROCEDURES
An Inspection Schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
The Schedule shall include:
(a) Inernational Standards. For each of the following stages of the work, the acceptance
criteria shall be stated.
(b) Stages of inspection shall cover the following:
•
Tests to review or approve certification of material.
•
Review and approval of manufacturing procedures.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 280 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Witnessing test or review and approval of certification of operator's qualification to
carry out the work required.
•
Visual and dimensional examination of components.
•
Pressure tests on casings and vessels.
•
Non-destructive examination of materials in progress.
•
Functional tests on sub-assemblies, type tests on complete units, system
performance tests and soak test.
•
Examination of painting, packing proposals and documentation for shipment.
The Engineer will indicate the inspection requirements on the agreed inspection program
in accordance with the following paragraphs:
(a) Hold point which requires a mandatory inspection by the Engineer. This inspection or
test shall be witnessed by the Engineer and further progress in manufacturing shall
not be made until the plant is approved by the Engineer.
(b) Inspection or test of material may be carried out by the Engineer at his discretion.
(c) Certification of material and functional test shall be approved by the Engineer before
dispatch from the works.
The approval by the Engineer of any such inspection and tests shall not prejudice the right
of the Employer to reject the plant if it fails to comply with the Specification when erected
or to give complete satisfaction in service.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 281 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18. ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT
The Items of Equipment are listed in the following paragraphs.
The descriptions given in the items of this Section cover the main items of equipment and,
furthermore, are not exhaustive in their description of the full requirements of the
Specifications. It is, therefore, the Tenderer's responsibility to include in his supply and in
the prices to be quoted in Schedule of Prices all items, which are necessary to meet the
full requirements of the Specification and the General Conditions of Contract.
The main equipment contained in this section is the following:
•
132kV and 66kV Outdoor Switchgear
•
GIS Switchgear
•
22kV Indoor Metalclad Switchgear
•
Transformers
•
Microprocessor based Substation and Energy Automation System
•
Protection and Bay Control Cubicles and Panels
•
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Signalling (SCADA)
•
Main and Auxiliary Power and Multicore Cables up to 132kV
•
LV AC Distribution Board
•
DC Battery Systems
•
Fire Extinguishers
•
Ambient Temperature Sensors
18.1
132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this section there shall be provided the
necessary terminal boards, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates and all necessary
sundries whether specified in detail or not.
The Items of Equipment comprise:
•
132 kV Triple Pole Circuit Breakers
•
132 kV Isolators and Earthing Switches
•
132 kV Current Transformers
•
132 kV & 22-11 kV Neutral Current Transformers
•
132 kV Voltage Transformers
•
132kV Surge Arresters
•
132 kV Connections
•
132 kV Structures
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 282 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
66kV Voltage Transformers
•
66kV Surge Arresters
18.1.1
132 kV Triple Pole Circuit Breaker
(a) 132 kV triple-pole, circuit breaker, of the SF6 type, having a continuous rating of 800 A,
a symmetrical breaking capacity as specified in the drawings and Section 3.1 –
“Design criteria” of the specifications. It shall be suitable for the application of
three-phase auto-reclosure when required. The circuit breaker, shall be complete with
a 110 V dc motor wound, spring charged operating mechanism.
In a weatherproof control local kiosk shall be housed the electrical controls and
mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary switches, local control
switch, local/remote control selection changeover switch, internal heaters, externally
mounted single phase AC plug and socket outlet.
Circuit breaker operating mechanisms of hydraulic type shall be considered provided
that the Tenderer submits with his Tender complete technical details and tests carried
out on identical equipment to that offered, particularly in relation to oil pressure loss.
Manual facilities must be provided for recharging the system.
(b) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 1600 A rating.
(c) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 2000 A rating.
(d) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 2500 A rating
(e) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 3150 A rating
18.1.2
Isolators and Earthing Switches
18.1.2.1
132 kV Isolator
(a) 132 kV isolator, triple-pole, open type, suitable for outdoor installation, 800 A
continuous rating, complete with manual operating mechanism with mechanical and
electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary switches, mechanism box heater and all
necessary multicore cable gland plates.
(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1(a) but with site rating of 1600 A
(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 2000 A
(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 2500 A
(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 3150 A
18.1.2.2
132 kV Isolator (power driven)
(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1(a) but power driven for local, remote and supervisory
control, fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility.
(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2(a) but with site rating of 1600 A
(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000 A
(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500 A
(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150 A
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 283 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.2.3
132 kV Isolator (power driven) with Earth Switch
(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but complete with triple-pole, earth switch, with the
isolator power driven for local, remote and supervisory control, fitted with a removable
emergency manual operation facility.
(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3(a) but with site rating of 1600 A
(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 2000 A
(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 2500 A
(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 3150 A
18.1.3
Current Transformers
18.1.3.1
132 kV 800A Feeder Circuit – Type 1
Set of three, 132 kV 800 A post type current transformers, each separately mounted, each
complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland
plates and glands and the following secondary tapped windings:
(a) First winding ratio 800/1 A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point voltage
more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 ohms for 1st main
protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 800/1 A with characteristics as (a) above for 2nd main protection.
(c) Third winding ratio 800/1 A, with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent,
earthfault, instruments and future metering and at least class 5P20.
(d) Fourth winding ratio 800/1 A, with an output, class and accuracy for busbar and
breaker failure protection
18.1.3.2
132 kV 800A Feeder Circuit – Type 2
Set of three, 132 kV 800 A post type current transformers, each separately mounted, each
complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland
plates and glands and the following secondary tapped windings:
(a) First winding ratio 800-200/1 A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point
voltage more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 ohms for
main protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 800/1 A with characteristics as (a) above for main protection.
(c) Third winding ratio 800/1 A, with an output, class and accuracy for main protection
(d) Fourth winding ratio 800/1 A, with an output, class and accuracy busbar protection
18.1.3.3
132 kV 800A Feeder Circuit – Type 3
As item 18.1.3.1 above but with winding for high impedance busbar protection (main
zone) and additional fifth winding of ratio 800/1 A, for high impedance busbar protection,
check zone
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 284 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.3.4
132 kV 2000A Current Feeder Circuit
Set of three, 132 kV 2000 A post type current transformers, each separately mounted,
each complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable
gland plates and glands and the following secondary tapped windings:
(a) First winding ratio 2000/1 A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point voltage
more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8 ohms for 1st main
protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 2000/1 A with characteristics as (a) above for 2nd main
protection.
(c) Third winding ratio 2000/1 A, with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent,
earthfault, instruments and future metering and at least class 5P20.
(d) Fourth winding ratio 2000/2,5 A, with an output, class and accuracy for high
impedance busbar protection, main zone
(e) Fifth winding ratio 2000/2,5 A, with an output, class and accuracy for high impedance
busbar protection, check zone.
18.1.3.5
132 kV 2500A Feeder Circuit
As item 18.1.3.1 above but CT Ratio of 2500/1 and where required knee point voltage
more than 400V The Project is to be carried out in phases due to the fact that the new
equipment will be installed in the area of the existing substation. and secondary resistance
(75oC) not more than 8 ohms
18.1.3.6
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 3150
amperes, each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and
comprising of the following secondary windings:
(a) First winding with a ratio output, class and accuracy for busbar circulating current
protection and breaker fail protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 3150/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent
protection and instruments and at least class 5P20.
18.1.3.7
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 2
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 3150
amperes, each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and
comprising of the following secondary windings:
(a) First winding with a ratio 3150/3.94 A, with an output class and accuracy for high
impedance busbar protection.
18.1.3.8
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 3
As item 18.1.3.7(a) but with additional second winding of ratio 3150/1 A with an output,
class and accuracy for overcurrent protection and instruments and at least class 5P20.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 285 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.3.9
132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit – Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 amperes,
each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(a) First winding ratio 200/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for and overall
transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 200/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent and
earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20.
(c) Third winding with a ratio 800/1 with an output, class and accuracy for high impedance
busbar protection, main zone.
(d) Fourth winding with a ratio 800/1A with an output, class and accuracy for high
impedance busbar protection, check zone.
18.1.3.10 132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit – Type 2
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 amperes,
each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(a) First winding ratio 200/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for and overall
transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 200/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent and
earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20.
(c) Third winding with a ratio 800/1 with an output, class and accuracy for busbar
protection and breaker failure protection.
18.1.3.11 132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit – Type 3
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 amperes,
each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(a) First winding ratio 200-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for and overall
transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 200-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent
and earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20.
(c) Third winding with a ratio 800/1 with an output, class and accuracy for busbar
protection and breaker failure protection.
18.1.3.12 132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit – Type 4
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 amperes,
each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 286 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) First winding ratio 200-150-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for and overall
transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 200-150/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent
and earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20.
(c) Third winding with a ratio 800/1, output, class and accuracy for busbar protection and
breaker failure protection.
18.1.3.13 132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit – Type 5
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 amperes,
each separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(a) First winding ratio 200-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for and overall
transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 200-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent
and earth fault protection, and instruments of at least class 5P20.
(c) Third winding ratio 2000/2,5 A with an output, class and accuracy for high impedance
busbar protection, main zone
(d) Fourth winding ratio 2000/2,5 A with an output, class and accuracy for high impedance
busbar protection, check zone.
18.1.4
132 kV Neutral Current Transformer
Outdoor post type, neutral Current Transformer to be mounted on the transformer tank or
alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the respective bushing,
comprising one core as follows for differential/restricted earthfault protection:
(a) Turns ratio: 200/1 A
(b) Accuracy class: X
(c) Rated knee point emf: 400 V (min)
(d) Secondary winding resistance: 8 Ohms (max)
18.1.5
132 kV Neutral Current Transformer
As item 18.1.6 but with turns ratio 200-75/1
18.1.6
22-11 kV Neutral Current Transformer
Outdoor post type 22-11kV side neutral current transformer to be mounted on the earthing
transformer tank or alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the
respective bushing, comprising two cores as follows:
(a) Core 1: 22-11kV Restricted Earth Fault protection
•
Turns Ratio: 2000-1000-500/1 A
•
Accuracy Class: X
•
Rated knee point emf: 400 V (min)
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 287 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Secondary winding resistance: 8 Ohms (max)
(b) Core 2: Standby Earth Fault Protection
•
Turns ratio: 2000-1000-500/1 A
•
Accuracy Class & Accuracy limit Factor: 5P20
•
Rated Output: 20 VA
18.1.7
132 kV Voltage Transformer
Set of three 132 kV voltage transformers, single phase, separately mounted capacitor
type suitable for outdoor installation, ratio
132,000 110
/
V
3
3
having a minimum output, accuracy and class suitable for protection, synchronizing and
instrumentation purposes of 100 VA Class 1 and 3P to EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186
and facilities for the connection of power line carrier coupling equipment, including
provision of a drain coil, and for the mounting of line traps on top. To be complete with
weatherproof cubicle containing two sets of secondary fuses and links and in one unit
cubicle a no-volt relay with integral fuse, and all necessary multicore cable gland plates
and earth terminal stud.
18.1.8
66kV Voltage Transformer
As item 18.1.7 but with
18.1.9
66,000 110
/
V ratio
3
3
132kV Surge Arresters
Set of three Metal Oxide surge arresters for outdoor use housed in polymeric housing, rated
voltage 120kV complete with insulating base for structure mounting
18.1.10
66kV Surge Arresters
Surge arresters as Item 18.1.9 but with rated voltage 60kV
18.1.11
Surge Arrester Monitoring Unit
Set of three surge arrester monitoring units able to record:
•
Number of discharges
•
Amplitude of surges together with date and time
•
Leakage current
•
Resistive current through the arrester
For each substation a handheld cordless transceiver should be supplied, able to collect
the monitoring unit measurements and transfer them to a computer for statistical analysis.
Relevant software should be included with the package.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 288 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.12
Busbars And Connections
18.1.12.1 132kV Double Busbar Substations
18.1.12.1.1
132kV Double Busbar
(a) One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150 A continuously rated tubular connections, clamps etc.
to establish the wrap-around double busbar system of the substation as shown in the
relevant drawings including busbars and connections to the Bus Section Isolators, in
busbars 'A' and 'B'. Sufficient provision shall be made at the end of the busbars for
clamps associated with future extension.
(b) As for item 18.1.12.1.1(a) above but having 2000A rating
18.1.12.1.2
132kV 3150A Bus Coupler Bay Connections
One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150A continuously rated tubular and conductor type
connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries
to complete one bus coupler bay as shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.1.3
132kV 2500A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections
One 3 phase set of 132kV 2500A continuously rated tubular and conductor type
connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries
to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.1.4
132kV 2000A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections
One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.12.1.3 above but
rated at 2000 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings
18.1.12.1.5
132kV 800A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections
One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.12.1.3 above but
rated at 800 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings
18.1.12.1.6
132kV 800A Double Busbar Transformer Connections
One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.12.1.3 above but
rated at 800 A, to complete one transformer bay, with conductor type connections to the
transformer, up to and including the clamp on the transformer 132kV terminal bushing, as
shown in the drawings
18.1.12.1.7
132kV 3150A Bus Section Bay Connections
One 3 phase set of 132 kV 3150 A continuously rated tubular and conductor type
connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connectors and all necessary sundries
to complete one bus section bay in substation, as shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.1.8
132kV Post Insulators – Type 1
One 132kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for
upright mounting on the provided steel structure.
18.1.12.1.9
132kV Post Insulators – Type 2
One 132 kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts suitable for underhang mounting
on steel gantry.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 289 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.12.2 132/66kV Single Busbar Substations
18.1.12.2.1
132kV 1600A Single Busbar
One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 A continuously rated busbar connections complete with
strain sets, clamps and all necessary fittings to complete the single busbar system, as
shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.2.2
132kV 1600A Bus Section Bay Connections
One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 Amp continuously rated conductor type connections,
clamps, bimetal connectors to complete one bus section bay in substation with conductor
type busbars, as shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.2.3
132kV 800A Single Busbar Line/Cable Connections
One 3 phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.12.2.2 to complete one
Line/Cable bay up to and including the clamp on the overhead line conductor or
alternatively up to and including the stem of the respective cable sealing end, as shown in
the drawings.
18.1.12.2.4
132kV 800A Single Busbar Transformer Connections
One 3 phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.12.2.2 to complete one
transformer bay up to and including the clamp on the transformer terminal bushing or
cable sealing end, as shown in the drawings.
18.1.12.2.5
132kV Post Insulators
One 132 kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for
upright mounting on the provided steel structure.
18.1.12.2.6
66kV Post Insulators
As item 18.1.12.2.5 above but 66kV.
18.1.12.3 STRUCTURES
18.1.12.3.1
High Level Steel Structure – Type 1
Substation high level steel structure to support both the incoming overhead line feeder
connections and substation strained conductors, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc
to enable attachment of line-strain sets. Additional take off points to be provided on the
beam to achieve specified down lead clearances in accordance with the attached detailed
drawings.
18.1.12.3.2
High Level Steel Structure – Type 2
Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors,
including busbars, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc and suitable for mounting
underhang insulators where necessary for clearance purposes in accordance with the
attached detailed drawings.
18.1.12.3.3
High Level Steel Structure – Type 3
A high level steel structure to support the substation shield wire system in accordance
with the attached detailed drawings.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 290 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.1.12.3.4
High Level Steel Structure – Type 4
Substation high level steel structure suitable for supporting two adjacent incoming
overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors, complete with fixing bolts, eye
bolts etc to enable attachment of line strain sets, and capable of being extended in future
at both ends. Additional take off points to be provided on the beam to achieve specified
down lead clearances. The structures should be suitable for extension on both ends for
supporting in future new line feeders connected to the substation.
18.1.12.3.5
High Level Steel Structure – Type 5
Substation high level steel structure as item 18.1.12.3.4 above but suitable for connecting
three adjacent overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors.
18.1.12.3.6
High Level Steel Structure – Type 6
Substation high level steel structure as item 18.1.12.3.4 above but suitable for connecting
four adjacent overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors.
18.1.12.3.7
High Level Steel Structure – Type 7
Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors,
including busbars, of two adjacent feeders, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc. and
suitable for mounting underhang insulators, where necessary for clearance purposes. The
structures should be suitable for extension on both ends for extending the substation in
future with new bays.
18.1.12.3.8
High Level Steel Structure – Type 8
Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as
item 18.1.12.3.7 above but suitable for three adjacent feeders.
18.1.12.3.9
High Level Steel Structure – Type 9
Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as
item 18.1.12.3.7 above but suitable for four adjacent feeders.
18.1.12.3.10
High Level Steel Structure – Type 10
Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as
item 18.1.12.3.7 above but suitable for five adjacent feeders.
18.1.12.3.11
High Level Steel Structure – Type 11
Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as
item 18.1.12.3.7 above but suitable for six adjacent feeders.
18.1.12.3.12 Steel Supporting Structures for Other Equipment
Substation steel supporting structures for all other equipment including:
•
Circuit-breaker.
•
Isolator and earth switch.
•
Post type current transformer.
•
Capacitor voltage transformer.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 291 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
18.2
Post insulator, etc.
METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this schedule, there shall be provided the
necessary terminal boards, panel wiring, fuses, cubicles, lighting, screens, guards, labels,
cable gland plates including cable glands, SF6 gas or other insulating medium,
connections to all related equipment provided under this Contract and all necessary
sundries whether specified in detail or not.
In all cases the current ratings referred to are site ratings based on the specified outdoor
shade design ambient temperature.
The items of equipment comprise:
•
Circuit Breakers
•
Isolators and Earth Switches
•
Voltage Transformers
•
Current Transformers
•
Busbars and Connections
•
Gas Handling Equipment
•
Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters
18.2.1
132 kV Circuit Breakers
(a) SF6 single pressure type circuit-breaker, triple pole, continuous minimum site rating
800 amperes, 132 kV with rated short circuit rating as specified in Clause 3.1.2 of this
specification at 145 kV symmetrical breaking capacity complete with insulators and
operating mechanism.
Control cabinet complete with circuit breaker control and monitoring device, switch
control and monitoring device and mechanical and electrical interlocking
arrangements, bay controller with mimic diagram, alarm leds with accept and
cancellation facilities, all necessary auxiliary switches, local control capabilities,
local/remote selection and internal heaters. It shall include all pipe work on, in and
between the circuit-breaker poles and the control cabinet or kiosk.
The local control panels shall be equipped with all necessary facilities appropriate to
the GIS design offered.
(b) As for item 18.2.1(a) but having 1600 amp rating
(c) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2000 amp rating.
(d) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2500 amp rating
(e) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 3150 amp rating
18.2.2
132 kV Isolators and Earthing Switches
(a) Busbar/line isolating switch, triple-pole, continuous site rating 800 amperes, complete
with electrical and manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 292 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box
heater.
(b) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2(a) but with site rating of 1600 amperes
(c) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000 amperes
(d) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500 amperes
(e) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150 amperes
(f) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual operating mechanism,
mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches
and mechanism box heater.
(g) High speed busbar or line fault making earth switch, triple pole with electrical and
manual operating mechanism, mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all
necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater.
(h) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual operating mechanism,
mechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches,
mechanism box heater and fitted with additional primary injection testing facilities.
18.2.3
Voltage Transformers
18.2.3.1
132kV Voltage Transformer
Three-phase voltage transformers in an SF6 environment double wound single-phase ratio
132000 110 110
/
/
V
3
3
3
with a minimum accuracy, class and output suitable for protection, synchronizing and
instrumentation purposes of 100VA Class 1 and 3P to EN 60044 – 2 and/or IEC 60186 and
each complete with a cubicle containing secondary miniature circuit breakers, complete
with appropriate number and type of auxiliary contacts, isolating terminals, and earthing
links.
18.2.3.2
132 – 66kV Voltage Transformer
As item 18.2.3.1 but with
132,000 − 66 ,000 110 110
V ratio
/
/
3
3
3
18.2.4
Current Transformers
18.2.4.1
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 2000 A, each
separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(b) First winding with a ratio output, class and accuracy for Busbar circulating current
protection and breaker fail protection.
(c) Second winding ratio 2000-1000/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for
overcurrent protection and instruments and at least class 5P20.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 293 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.2.4.2
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 2
As item 18.2.4.1 but with CT ratio 2000/1
18.2.4.3
Bus Coupler Circuit – Type 3
As item 18.2.4.1 but with CT ratio 3150/1
18.2.4.4
Line/Cable Circuit – Type 1
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 A, each
separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(a) First winding with a ratio output, class and accuracy for Busbar circulating current
protection and breaker fail protection.
(b) Second winding ratio 800/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for back up
overcurrent and earth fault protection and instrument operation and at least class
5P20.
(c) Third winding ratio 800/1 A of suitable output, class and accuracy for first main feeder
protection.
(d) Fourth winding ratio 800/1 A of suitable output, class and accuracy for second main
feeder protection.
18.2.4.5
Line/Cable Circuit – Type 2
As item 18.2.4.4 but with CT ratio 1600/1
18.2.4.6
Line/Cable Circuit – Type 3
As item 18.2.4.4 but with CT ratio 2000/1
18.2.4.7
Line/Cable Circuit – Type 4
As item 18.2.4.4 but with CT ratio 2500/1
18.2.4.8
132/23-11,5 kV Transformer Circuit
Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transformer
comprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800 A, each
separately mounted, complete with a secondary terminal box and comprising of the
following secondary windings:
(d) First winding with a ratio, output, class and accuracy for Busbar circulating current
protection and breaker fail protection.
(e) Second winding ratio 200-150/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for overcurrent
and earth fault protection, and instruments and at least class 5P20.
(f) Third winding ratio 200-150-75/1 A with an output, class and accuracy for restricted
earth fault and overall transformer biased differential protection.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 294 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.2.5
Busbars and Connections
(a) Set of 132 kV, 2000 A rated busbar chamber with busbars clamps, support insulators
and all necessary sundries to equip a single busbar unit with a 3 phase set of busbars.
Suitable for extension at both ends.
(b) As item 18.2.5 (a) above but double busbar.
(c) As item 18.2.5 (a) above but rated 3150A.
(d) As item 18.2.5 (b) above but rated 3150A.
(e) Set of 132 kV 2000 A rated busbar chamber with busbars, clamps, support insulators
and all necessary sundries to equip a single busbar bus coupler unit with a 3 phase
set of busbars.
(f) As item 18.2.5 (e) above but double busbar.
(g) As item 18.2.5 (e) above but rated 3150A.
(h) As item 18.2.5 (f) above but rated 3150A.
(i) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connection chambers with connectors, clamps, support
insulators, current transformer accommodation, voltage transformer accommodation
for a single busbar feeder unit.
(j) As item 18.2.5 (i) above but double busbar.
(k) As item 18.2.5 (i) above but rated 1600A.
(l) As item 18.2.5 (j) above but rated 1600A.
(m) As item 18.2.5 (i) above but rated 2000A.
(n) As item 18.2.5 (j) above but rated 2000A.
(o) As item 18.2.5 (i) above but rated 2500A.
(p) As item 18.2.5 (j) above but rated 2500A.
(q) Cable sealing end termination chamber complete with connections, clamps and all
sundry items to accept three 132 kV single core cable sealing ends.
(r) Set of SF6 – Air bushing 800 A rated termination, suitable for the connection to
overhead lines, transformers or sealing ends. The insulators shall be of composite
material construction.
(s) As item 18.2.5 (r) above but rated 1600A.
(t) As item 18.2.5 (r) above but rated 2000A.
(u) As item 18.2.5 (r) above but rated 2500A.
(v) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connection chambers with connectors, clamps, support,
insulators, current transformer accommodation for a single busbar transformer feeder
unit.
(w) As item 18.2.5 (v) above but double busbar.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 295 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(x) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection chamber with 3 phase connections through to
transformer 132 kV gas insulated terminal bushings complete with support insulators,
clamps and all sundry items and supports.
The system shall incorporate any necessary expansion joints and absorb any vibration
generated by the transformer.
(y) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection trunking as detailed under item (x) but with facilities to
accommodate 132 kV gas insulated metal oxide surge arresters should it be
established that these are required as a result of insulation co-ordination studies.
(z) As item 18.2.5 (y) above but rated 1600A.
(aa)
As item 18.2.5 (y) above but rated 2000A
(bb)
As item 18.2.5 (y) above but rated 2500A.
18.2.6
Gas Handling Equipment
A portable gas handling trolley shall be provided for the complete sampling, testing,
filtering, drying, extraction, evacuation and refilling of SF6 gas. The unit shall be selfcontained and house all necessary compressors, high precision pressure gauges, piping,
moisture meter, leak detection equipment and controls together with a storage tank
capable of containing sufficient gas to fill all chambers of one circuit bay including
associated busbar chambers.
Gas sampling equipment shall include facilities for determining the moisture and oxygen
content of the SF6 gas.
Two portable gas alarm units shall also be supplied for detecting possible overpressure in
a compartment during maintenance by means of clear audible alarm.
18.2.7
Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters
Set of 3-phase metal enclosed, metal oxide, surge arresters, for accommodation in GIS
Switchgear complete with discharge counter, and leakage indicator. The units shall have
electrical characteristics to suit the insulation co-ordination requirements of the substation.
18.3
18.3.1
1.
POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS
Power Transformer Requirements
40 MVA
16 MVA
16 MVA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
132/23-11,5 kV
132/23-11,5 kV
66/23-11,5 kV
To deliver a continuous maximum
power for entire range of regulation
with the following conditions:
MVA
40
16
16
kV
22,8-11,4
22,8-11,4
22,8-11,4
0,9
0,9
0,9
+/- 10
+/- 10
+/- 10
(a) Normal LV voltage
(b) Load Power factor (lag)
(c) Range of HV System Voltage
%
2.
No. of phases
3
3
3
3.
No. of windings
2
2
2
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 296 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
DESCRIPTION
40 MVA
16 MVA
16 MVA
UNIT
132/23-11,5 kV
132/23-11,5 kV
66/23-11,5 kV
4.
Normal ratio of transformation
kV/kV
132/23-11,5
132/23-11,5
66/23-11,5
5.
Corresponding highest system
voltage
kV/kV
145/24-12
145/24-12
72.5/24-12
6.
Minimum withstand voltages:
(a) Full wave impulse
kVrms
550/125-95
550/125-95
325/125-95
(b) Induced overvoltage power
frequency
kVrms
230/50-28
230/50-28
140/50-28
(c) Power frequency withstand of
neutral
kVrms
38/-
38/-
38/-
ONAN/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF
31.5
10
10
Air
Air
Air
1000
1000
1000
7.
Type of cooling
8.
Minimum continuous ONAN rating
of transformers
9.
External cooling medium
10.
Service conditions:
MVA
(a) Altitude not exceeding
m
(b) Air temperature not exceeding
o
C
50
50
50
(c) Air temperature in any one
year not exceeding:
•
For design purposes
o
C
45
45
45
•
Average in any one day
o
C
30
30
30
•
Average in one year
o
C
20
20
20
11.
Winding temperature rise limit
o
C
60
60
60
12.
Top oil temperature rise limit
o
C
55
55
55
13.
Winding hot spot temperature on
emergency overload not exceeding
o
C
140
140
140
14.
Maximum hot spot temperature rise
when loaded in accordance with EN
60354
o
C
73
73
73
Star
Star
15.
Phase connections:
(a) 132 kV winding
(b) 66 kV winding
Delta
(c) 22-11 kV winding or tertiary
Delta
Delta
Star
(d) Vector group - 132 or 66 or
22-11 kV
YNd11
YNd11
Dyn11
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 297 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
DESCRIPTION
16.
UNIT
40 MVA
16 MVA
16 MVA
132/23-11,5 kV
132/23-11,5 kV
66/23-11,5 kV
Short circuit withstand:
Fault Level at terminals of:
17.
18.
19.
(a) 132 kV Busbars (1 sec)
kA
(b) 66 kV Busbars (1 sec)
kA
(c) 22 kV Busbars (3 sec)
kA
Refer to Clause 3.1.2
o
Impedance voltage at 75 C and at
principal tapping C.M.R. between
windings. (% on HV base)
%
21
15
15
Nominal mean sound level in
accordance with EN 60551, Indoor
installations
dB (A)
≤ 50
≤ 50
≤ 50
Nominal mean sound level in
accordance with EN 60551, Outdoor
installations
dB (A)
≤ 60
≤ 60
≤ 60
(a) Ratio - plus %
%
12,5
12,5
10
(b) Ratio - minus %
%
18,75
12,5
14,3
#/%
25/1,25
20/1,25
17/1,43
Voltage Control
20.
Total range of variation of
transformation ratio as item 4
above
(c) Number and Size of steps
21.
Type of control
On load – local,
remote and,
supervisory
On load – local,
remote and,
supervisory
On load – local,
remote and,
supervisory
22.
Automatic control required and
reference voltage
YES / 110Vac,
50Hz
YES / 110Vac,
50Hz
YES / 110Vac,
50Hz
23.
Estimated distance between
remote control point and
transformer
m
100
100
100
Vdc
110
110
110
24.
Nominal DC supply
25.
Provision for supervisory indication
required
YES
YES
YES
26.
Marshalling kiosk required
YES
YES
YES
27.
Number of transformers for which
automatic control is to be required
3
3
3
28.
Supply voltage for parallel control
and panel indications
Vac
230
230
230
29.
Supply voltage for supervisory
control, alarms and trips
Vdc
110
110
110
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 298 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
40 MVA
16 MVA
16 MVA
132/23-11,5 kV
132/23-11,5 kV
66/23-11,5 kV
Heavy
Heavy
Heavy
Composite
Composite
Composite
Minimum (mm/kV nominal voltage)
35
35
35
31.
Number of cooler banks required
per transformer
2
2
2
32.
Rating of each cooler bank as
percentage of total loss at C.M.R.
50
50
50
33.
Type of oil preservation system
Silica Gel
Silica Gel
Silica Gel
34.
Whether wheels, skid or flat bottom
base required
Flat base
Skid or Flat
base
Skid or Flat
base
35.
Whether anti-vibration pads
required
YES
NO
NO
36.
High voltage cable is 132 kV XLPE
2
single core, 300 mm Cu Conductor
2
cable with 90 mm Cu Wire Screen
One per phase
One per phase
One per phase
22kV Cables: 630 mm Cu
Conductor XLPE single core cables
2
with 95 mm Cu wire screen
Three per phase
Three per phase
Three per phase
22kV Cable to connect the earthing
2
transformer: 300 mm Al conductor
XLPE single core cable with 95
2
mm Cu wire screen
One per phase
One per phase
DESCRIPTION
30.
UNIT
Pollution category of open air
bushings
Insulators
37.
38.
18.3.2
%
2
Earthing Transformer Requirements
150 kVA
DESCRIPTION
1.
No-Load voltage ratio
2.
Number of taps and approx. step
3.
Rating of interconnected star winding on 30
seconds basis
4.
Vector group HV/LV
5.
Bushing insulators or cable box:
(a) HV Line
(b) HV Neutral
(c) LV Line
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
UNIT
23-11,5/0,415 kV
%
±10 / ±5
#/%
4/5% & 4/2,5%
A/Phase
557
ZΝyn1/d
Cable box
Bushing
Cable box
Page 299 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
150 kVA
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
23-11,5/0,415 kV
(d) Neutral
Bushing
(e) HV Cable disconnecting chamber
required
6.
External secondary load
7.
Zero sequence impedance with LV windings
open circuited
No
kVA
150
4 for 11 kV nominal
Ω/Phase
16 for 22 kV nominal
8.
Maximum Flux Density at Rated Voltage
T
1,7
9.
Impedance Voltage at C.M.R. of S.W., 75oC
and Normal Ratio
%
4
dB (A)
≤ 60
10.
Nominal mean sound level in accordance
with EN 60551
11.
Type of transformer base required
12.
Accommodation required on tank for
outdoor weatherproof post type current
transformer
YES
Supplied under this Contract
YES
13.
18.4
Low Voltage Cable to the LV Switchboard:
Skid or flat
3x185 mm2 Al cable
with 70 mm2
concentric Cu wire
neutral (CEANDER
type)
22 kV SWITCHGEAR
To complete each item of equipment detailed in this schedule there shall be provided the
necessary terminal boards, current transformer and voltage transformer test terminal
block, auxiliary relays, panel wiring fuses, MCB's, cubicle lighting, anti-condensation
heaters, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates and all necessary sundries whether
specified in detail or not.
The Items of Equipment comprise:
(a) Transformer Incoming circuit breakers.
(b) Bus Section circuit breakers
(c) Feeder circuit breakers (Underground)
(d) Feeder circuit breakers for capacitor bank
18.4.1
Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 1
Transformer Incoming Circuit breaker panel comprising the following:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 300 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
(b) Fixed 2000 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110V DC.
(d) Three current transformers each housing the following cores:
•
One Class PX, with knee point voltage more than 400V and secondary resistance
(75 oC) not more than 8 Ohms, of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for biased differential
protection.
•
One Class 5P20 of 2000-1000/1 ratio for O/C and E/F protection.
•
One Class 1 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for capacitor bank Control on ONLY the black
(L2) phase current transformer.
•
One Class 0,2 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for metering, instruments and tap changer
control.
(e) One three-phase disconnectable, circuit connected voltage transformer ratio 2200011000/110V, 100/50 VA per phase of accuracy class 1+3P, for protection, metering,
tap change control, supervisory indication and instruments.
(f) One voltage regulating relay of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary
modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the
minimum circulating current principal, manual step up and step down operation of tap
changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control etc.
(g) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms
•
1A overcurrent and earth fault IDMT protection
•
1A two stage inverse time LV standby earth fault
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LEDs
•
Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power
Factor
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 301 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 Vdc Power Supply
(h) Current and Voltage Transformer Test terminal blocks.
(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(j) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for
the cables specified in the relevant drawing.
(k) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
(l) Space to be made available for one three-phase electronic meter to be mounted
locally by the Purchaser on the cubicle. Dimensions of openings will be given by the
Purchaser after Contract award. All necessary wiring up to the meters shall be
supplied with the panels.
18.4.2
Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 2
As paragraph 18.4.1 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1
18.4.3
Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 3
As paragraph 18.4.1 but without voltage regulating relay
18.4.4
Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 4
As paragraph 18.4.2 but without voltage regulating relay
18.4.5
Bus Section Circuit Breakers – Type 1
Bus Section circuit breaker panel comprising the following:
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
(b) Fixed 2000 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc.
(d) One set of three current transformers housing the following:
•
CT Class 5P20 ratio 2000-1000/1 for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 302 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms
•
1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LEDs
•
Measuring Functions for Current.
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 Vdc Power Supply
(f) Cubicle heaters ON / OFF switch (only on Bus Section one)
(g) Voltage Selection Relay and buswiring to all feeders
(h) Current Transformer Test terminal block.
(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(j) Lockable Busbar Earth Switch for each separate Bus-Section (on this panel or
otherwise as appropriate).
18.4.6
Bus Section Circuit Breakers – Type 2
As paragraph 18.4.5 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1
18.4.7
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Underground)
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling an underground cable feeder comprising the
following:
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 303 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(b) Fixed 630 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 V DC.
(d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings:
•
One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms
•
1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LEDs
•
Under / Overvoltage
•
Under / Overfrequency
•
Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power
Factor
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 Vdc Power Supply
(f) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.
(g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for
the cables specified in the relevant drawing.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 304 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.4.8
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Overhead)
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling overhead line feeder comprising the following:
(j) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
(k) Fixed 630 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(l) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 V DC.
(m) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings:
•
One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(n) One core balance neutral current transformer Class 5P20 of 60/1A ratio, for sensitive
earthfault protection.
(o) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms
•
1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection
•
Autoreclosing
•
Sensitive earth fault
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LEDs
•
Under / Overvoltage
•
Under / Overfrequency
•
Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power
Factor
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 305 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 V DC Power Supply
(p) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.
(q) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(r) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for
the cables specified in the relevant drawing.
(s) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.4.9
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Capacitor Bank)
Outgoing feeder circuit breaker panel suitable for switching a 10 MVAr capacitor bank,
comprising the following:
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
(b) Fixed 2000 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 V DC.
(d) One three-phase disconnectable, circuit connected voltage transformer ratio 2200011000/110V, 100 / 50 VA per phase of accuracy class 1 + 3P, for protection, metering,
tap change control, supervisory indication and instruments.
(e) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings:
•
One Class 5P20 of 600-300-150/1A ratio for O/C and E/F protection and
instruments.
(f) One interposing current transformer, Class 1,0 of ratio 1+1+1/1, 30 VA for the
capacitor bank control, which is supplied by others.
(g) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms and capacitor
bank circuit breakers
•
1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 306 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Under / Overvoltage
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LEDs
•
Measuring Functions for MVars
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 Vdc Power Supply
(h) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.
(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(j) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for
the cables specified in the relevant drawing.
(k) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.4.10
Feeder Circuit Breakers (Local Transformer)
Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling underground cable feeder comprising the
following:
(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A rating, set of isolating
plug and socket.
(b) Fixed 630 A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work,
auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.
Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.
(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc.
(d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings:
•
One Class 5P20 of 500 -100/1, for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.
(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that
are described below but not limited to these:
•
Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the
switchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 307 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and
also provide local control capability
•
Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs
•
Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolating mechanisms
•
1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDMT protection
•
Adequate programmable binary inputs
•
Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)
•
Adequate programmable LED’s
•
Under / Overvoltage
•
Measuring Functions for Current, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor
•
Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch
•
Trip/Close Control Switch
•
Light Emitting Diodes (LED’s) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to
provide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status
indication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages
related to events or faults
•
LED reset and test push button
•
Trip Circuit Supervision
•
110 Vdc Power Supply
(f) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.
(g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation
heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.
(h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for
the cables specified in the relevant drawing.
(i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.
18.5
PROTECTION AND BAY CONTROL CUBICLES
Each cubicle shall be of sheet steel suitable for floor mounting with cable access at the
bottom. The cubicles shall accommodate all the items specified together with all relevant
ancillary components.
Note: Bay Controllers can be situated on the Protection Cubicle or the Local Control
Cubicle depending on the type of installation.
Important Note: In certain cases relays should be compatible with relays at the opposite
line end. These cases are indicated in the relevant protection drawings included to this
specification. It is expected that the Tenderers should offer the specified relays.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 308 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.5.1
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF) Including:
(a) One first main feeder protection is a distance type full scheme offering a range of inbuilt schemes to be used with protection signalling equipment over multiplexed fibre
optic cables to provide initially a permissive overreach scheme. It shall also
incorporate "weak infeed" feature to allow tripping when there is either no infeed or
insufficient infeed to operate the relay measuring elements. The relay shall also
incorporate Autoreclosing and Synchronizing features.
(b) One second main feeder protection relay for current differential feeder protection,
complete with current check feature, to be used with signalling equipment (not
included in this Contract) over direct or multiplexed fibre optic channels.
(c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and
earthfault
(d) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear
on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information,
alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station
control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the
Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability.
(e) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit
(f) One protection IN/OUT switch first main protection
(g) One protection IN/OUT switch, second main protection
The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays:
(h) Overvoltage protection
(i) First main protection high speed tripping, electrical reset
(j) Second main protection high speed tripping, electrical reset
(k) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(l) Busbar protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(m) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(n) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit
(o) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit
(p) Main protection out of service indication
(q) Main protection operated indication
(r) One LED reset and test push button
Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays.
Current and voltage transformer test terminal blocks for each circuit, auxiliary relays,
interposing current transformers and material to complete the relay cubicle.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 309 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.5.2
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.1 but without busbar protection relays
18.5.3
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.1 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays
18.5.4
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.1 above but with both protection relays based on current differential principle. The
relays should be from different manufacturers or alternatively its main algorithm must be
based on a different basic logic.
18.5.5
132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.4 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays
18.5.6
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST) Including:
As 18.5.1 but without line differential relay.
18.5.7
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST) Including:
As 18.5.1 but without line differential relay and busbar protection relays.
18.5.8
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST) Including:
As 18.5.1 but without bay controller, line differential and busbar protection relays
18.5.9
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.4 but with only one line differential relay.
18.5.10
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.4 but with only one line differential relay and without busbar protection relays.
18.5.11
66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:
As 18.5.4 but with only one line differential relay and without bay controller and busbar
protection relays`
18.5.12
132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete for 3 phase
overall transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set differential current
element
(b) One instantaneous 132 kV winding restricted earth fault relay
(c) One instantaneous 22-11 kV winding restricted earth fault relay
(d) One instantaneous 415V winding restricted earth fault relay
(e) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and
earthfault
(f) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear
on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information,
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 310 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station
control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the
Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability.
(g) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit
The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays:
(a) Main protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(b) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(c) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(d) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit
(e) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit
(f) Main protection operated indication
(g) One LED reset and test push button
Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays.
(h) One Controller with adequate programmable binary inputs, LEDs and tripping relays
that will receive information through a serial interface from the transformer monitoring
device and will initiate alarms and trips for the following:
•
Main transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip
•
On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip
•
Main transformer low oil level alarm
•
Tap changer low oil level alarm
•
Oil temperature alarm and trip
•
Winding temperature alarm and trip
•
Main transformer pressure relief operated trip
•
Earthing transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip
•
Earthing transformer pressure relief operated trip
•
Earthing transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection operated
•
Earthing transformer low oil level alarm
(i) LED reset and test push button
Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays
and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.5.13
132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Including:
As 18.5.12 but without busbar protection relays
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 311 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.5.14
132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Including:
As 18.5.12 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays
18.5.15
132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete for 3 phase
overall transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set differential current
element
(b) One instantaneous restricted earth fault relay
(c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and
earthfault
(d) Bay Controller, mounted on the protection and control panel, to collect and preprocess status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and
transmit the data to the station control unit. It should release commands initiated by
the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control
capability.
(e) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit
The following functions should be incorporated into the main relays:
(j) Main protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(k) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(l) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset
(m) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit
(n) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit
(o) Main protection operated indication
(p) One LED reset and test push button
Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays.
(q) One voltage regulating relay of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary
modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers, manual step up
and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for
remote and supervisory control etc.
(r) One Controller with adequate programmable binary inputs, LEDs and tripping relays
that will receive necessary signals from the transformer that will initiate alarms and
trips for the following:
•
Main transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip
•
On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip
•
Main transformer low oil level alarm
•
Tap changer low oil level alarm
•
Oil temperature alarm and trip
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 312 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
Winding temperature alarm and trip
•
Main transformer pressure relief operated trip
Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays
and material to complete the relay cubicle.
18.5.16
132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:
As 18.5.15 but without voltage regulating relays
18.5.17
132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:
As 18.5.15 but without busbar protection relays
18.5.18
132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:
As 18.5.15 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays
18.5.19
132 kV Bus Coupler Relay Cubicle Including:
(a) One numerical low impedance busbar and breaker failure central unit carrying out the
following features in conjunction with the protection bay units:
•
Zone 1, Zone 2 and additional Check Zone measurement
•
Phase segregated measurement
•
Self monitoring, including CT circuits and isolator positions
•
Integrated 2-stage circuit breaker failure protection
•
Set of LEDs to indicate protection operated, zones out of service
•
LED reset and test push button
(b) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and
earthfault
(c) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear
on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information,
alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station
control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the
Operator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability.
(d) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit
(e) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit
(f) One LED reset and test push button
Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays.
(g) One voltage selection scheme (selection of busbar voltage) and Synchronizing
facilities to be used for Autoreclosing, Local Closing and SCADA Closing
(h) One current transformer test terminal block
Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays
and material to complete the relay cubicle.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 313 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.6
18.6.1
AUTOMATED SUBSTATION CONTROL
General
A microprocessor based Substation Control System to monitor and control the entire
substation that shall handle the following tasks:
•
Telecommunication
•
Monitoring
•
Remote control/control with switchgear interlock
•
Serial connection of protection devices
•
Automation
•
Pre-processing and visualizing process-related information in the station
•
Archiving and reporting
18.6.2
Configuration
The typical configuration shall consist of:
(a) Substation Controller shall be of an open-type, modular construction telecontrol and
substation controller.
(b) Serial interfaces for connection to higher-level system control centres (SCADA) using
the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, test and diagnosis PC for commissioning and trouble
shooting, time synchronization.
(c) Connection to bay level.
(d) Bay control units, protective IEDs or combined control and protection bay units.
(e) Engineering PC (latest available specification) with Windows operating system that
shall configure and parameterise the substation having the following features:
•
Software for setting, commissioning, controlling and testing IEDs, for visualizing
and evaluating fault records, etc.
•
21” TFT Monitor
•
Colour Laser Printer
(f) Operation and monitoring PC (latest available specification) with Windows 2000
operating system having the following features:
(g)
•
Human Machine Interface offering standard function modules for graphical display,
for messaging, archiving and reporting. It shall consist of symbol library, message
management expansion, wizards, processing functions and Measured/Metered
Value processing unit
•
21” TFT Monitor
•
Dot-Matrix Printer
Furniture to include:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 314 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
•
One computer table for the Engineering PC screen and printer, and one for the
HMI and printer
•
One rack for the PCs
•
Four office arm chairs
18.7
REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS
18.7.1
General
Each cubicle and panel shall be of sheet steel, suitable for floor mounting,
accommodating all items to complete the control functions. Alarm fascias shall include all
the necessary repeat facilities to retransmit alarms over SCADA.
18.7.2
Remote control cubicles and panels for double busbar substations
18.7.2.1
Line/Cable Bay
132 kV double busbar feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch
2
Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
Line earth switch semaphore indicator only
1
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Main 1 Protection Operated
Main 2 Protection Operated
Busbar Protection Operated
Backup Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Intertrip Received
Communication Circuits Faulty
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
Auto Recloser Off
Auto Recloser Operated
Auto Recloser Lockout
VT Fail
Main 1 Protection inoperative/out
Main 2 Protection inoperative/out
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 315 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
•
No.
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
Ammeter phase selector switch
1
Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled
1
Voltmeter phase selector switch
1
Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled
1
Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled
1
Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset
1
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Synchronising check relay
1
Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
SCADA transducer for MW
1
SCADA transducer for MVAr
1
18.7.2.2
Transformer Bay
132 kV double busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch
2
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Main Protection Operated
Busbar Protection Operated
Back-up Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 316 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
No.
Oil Temperature Main Transformer
Buchholtz Alarm Main Transformer
Winding Temperature Main Transformer
Pressure Relief Main Transformer
Oil Temperature Earthing Transformer
Buchholtz Alarm Earthing Transformer
Pressure Relief Earthing Transformer
TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty
Main protection inoperative/out
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
Ammeter phase selector switch
1
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
18.7.2.3
Bus Coupler Bay
132 kV bus coupler feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch
2
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Busbar Protection Operated
Backup Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Synchronising check relay
1
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 317 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
No.
Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
SCADA transducer for Amps
1
SCADA transducer for Volts
2
18.7.2.4
Bus Section Bay
132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch
4
Busbar earth switch semaphore indicator only
4
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
LVAC Supply Faulty
Busbar Protection inoperative/out
Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail
Battery Volts low
Battery earth 1 or 2 fail
Isolator in intermediate position
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
Substation “Attended / Unattended” switch
1
Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including:
1
•
Synchroscope 200 mm dial and on/off switch
•
2 voltmeters 100 mm dial for "running" and "incoming" volts
•
Phase angle meter 100 mm dial, double scaled complete with selector
switch
•
2 frequency indicators 100 mm dial
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 318 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.7.3
Remote control cubicles and panels for single busbar substations
18.7.3.1
Line/Cable Bay
132 kV single busbar feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only
1
Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
Line earth switch semaphore indicator only
1
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Main 1 Protection Operated
Main 2 Protection Operated
Busbar Protection Operated
Backup Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Intertrip Received
Communication Circuits Faulty
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
Auto Recloser Off
Auto Recloser Operated
Auto Recloser Lockout
VT Fail
Main 1 Protection inoperative/out
Main 2 Protection inoperative/out
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
Ammeter phase selector switch
1
Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled
1
Voltmeter phase selector switch
1
Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled
1
Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled
1
Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset
1
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 319 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
No.
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Synchronising check relay
1
Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
SCADA transducer for MW
1
SCADA transducer for MVAr
1
18.7.3.2
Transformer Bay
132 kV single busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with the following:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only
1
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Main Protection Operated
Busbar Protection Operated
Back-up Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
Oil Temperature Main Transformer
Buchholtz Alarm Main Transformer
Winding Temperature Main Transformer
Pressure Relief Main Transformer
Oil Temperature Earthing Transformer
Buchholtz Alarm Earthing Transformer
Pressure Relief Earthing Transformer
TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty
Main protection inoperative/out
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
Ammeter phase selector switch
1
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 320 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
No.
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
18.7.3.3
Bus Section Bay
132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following. If CB is not
specified disregard its functions:
Function
No.
Section of Mimic diagram
1
Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch
2
Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch
1
28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test
pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum
following alarms:
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Lockout
Circuit Breaker Tripped
SF6 Pressure Low
CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout
Busbar Protection Operated
Backup Protection Operated
Breaker Fail Protection Operated
Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty
Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty
LVAC Supply Faulty
Busbar Protection inoperative/out
Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail
Battery Volts low
Battery earth 1 or 2 fail
Isolator in intermediate position
Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled
1
LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton
1
Synchronising check relay
1
Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check
1
Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for
supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset
1
SCADA transducer for Amps
1
SCADA transducer for Volts
2
Substation “Attended / Unattended” switch
1
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 321 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Function
No.
Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including:
1
•
Synchroscope 200 mm dial and on/off switch
•
2 voltmeters 100 mm dial for "running" and "incoming" volts
•
Phase angle meter 100 mm dial, double scaled complete with selector
switch
•
2 frequency indicators 100 mm dial
18.7.3.4
Remote Tap Changer Panels – Type 1
Automatic control shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel, up to three
transformers using the Master/Follower/Independents principle.
Remote Tap Changer Panel shall be equipped with the following:
1.
Automatic Voltage Regulating Relay equipped with following:
Voltage Indication (Phase to phase voltage of the low voltage terminals of the
transformer).
Tap position indicator
Automatic/Manual - voltage control selector switch spring return
Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch
Raise/Lower pushbuttons
Start/Stop controls for forced cooling equipment
Independent/Master/Follower selector switch
AVR voltage reference adjuster
2.
Alarm Relay: A multi-element alarm flag relay is to be provided to indicate the
following:
Buchholz Gas
Winding Temperature - stage 1
Low oil level
Pressure Relief operated (if provided)
Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail.
3.
Trip Relay: A multi-element trip flag relay is to be provided for the following:
Buchholz Oil surge
OLTC oil surge
Winding temperature - stage 2
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 322 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4.
Indications and Alarms
Tap change in progress - white lamp
Tap change out of step - amber lamp
Auto/Manual indication - white lamps
Air forced cooling equipment running - white
Air forced cooling failure - amber
VT Fail alarm - amber
Supply voltage failure on OLTC - amber lamp
The alarm and trip relays are required to be latched flag relays with four hand-reset change
over contacts per element. The contacts shall be voltage free for operating the transformer
main trip relay.
Depending on the scheme the available on the automatic regulating relay controls and alarms
shall be utilised and only the remaining as specified above, shall be provided by other means.
Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitable for operation with the distance between the
transformer and remote control panel as shown on the drawings.
18.7.3.5
Remote Tap Changer Panels – Type 2
Remote Tap Changer panel as paragraph 18.7.3.4 but using the minimum circulating current
principle
18.8
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)
SIGNALS
18.8.1
Alarms to SCADA
Alarms to SCADA shall be grouped in the following manner:
18.8.1.1
Protection Fault
Summary of all conditions that degrade or prevent the operation of protection relays, for
example,
(a) Relay dc supply failure
(b) Protection relay fault
(c) Pilot wire fault
(d) Communication circuit fault
(e) VT failure/MCB tripped
18.8.1.2
Trip Circuit Fault
Summary of all conditions that prevents CB opening, for example,
(a) Fault detected by trip circuit supervision relay and trip supply faulty
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 323 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(b) SF6 pressure low stage 2
(c) Oil pressure low stage 2
18.8.1.3
Circuit Breaker Fault
Summary of all conditions that prevents CB operation (closure), for example,
(a) Aux DC & Drive supply faulty
(b) SF6 pressure low stage 1
(c) Oil pressure low stage 1
(d) Spring not charged (delayed contact)
18.8.2
Circuit Data
18.8.2.1
132 kV Feeders
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
CB close(Q0)
DO
S*F010
2
CB open(Q0)
DO
S*F030
3
Autorecloser IN
DO
S*F040
4
Autorecloser OUT
DO
S*F041
5
BBA Isol. close(Q1)
DO
S*F052
6
BBA Isol. open(Q1)
DO
S*F062
7
BBB Isol. close(Q2)
DO
S*F054
8
BBB Isol. open(Q2)
DO
S*F064
9
Line Isol. close(Q9)
DO
S*F056
10
Line Isol. open(Q9)
DO
S*F066
11
Trip relay reset
DO
S*F180
12
CB open(Q0)
DI
S*F200
13
CB closed(Q0)
DI
S*F210
14
BBA Isol. Closed (Q1)
DI
S*F220
15
BBA Isol. Open (Q1)
DI
S*F222
16
BBB Isol. Closed (Q2)
DI
S*F230
17
BBB Isol. Open (Q2)
DI
S*F232
18
Line Isol. Closed (Q9)
DI
S*F250
19
Line Isol. Open (Q9)
DI
S*F252
20
BB earth switch closed (maintBB;Q1/Q2)
SI
S*F240
21
BB earth switch closed (maintCCT;Q9)
SI
S*F242
22
Line earth switch closed (Q8)
SI
S*F260
23
Main 1 protection operated
SI
S*F270
24
Main 2 protection operated
SI
S*F280
25
Backup protection operated
SI
S*F290
26
Intertrip operated
SI
S*F300
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 324 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
27
Main 1 protection fault
SI
S*F310
28
Main 2 protection fault
SI
S*F320
29
Backup protection fault
SI
S*F312
30
Busbar protection fault
SI
S*F319
31
Trip circuit fault
SI
S*F330
32
SF6 Bay Lock out
SI
S*F332
33
SF6 Sensor defect
SI
S*F334
34
CB fault(Q0)
SI
S*F340
35
BB Isolators fault (Q1/Q2)
SI
S*F342
36
Line Isolator fault (Q9)
SI
S*F346
37
Loss of SF6
SI
S*F341
38
Bay control fault
SI
S*F349
39
Main 1 protection out of service
SI
S*F350
40
Busbar protection out of service
SI
S*F359
41
Main 2 protection out of service
SI
S*F360
42
Autorecloser IN
SI
S*F370
43
Autorecloser fault
SI
S*F372
44
Supervisory control selected
SI
S*F380
45
Autorecloser initiated
SI
S*F550
46
Autorecloser lockout
SI
S*F560
47
Autorecloser blocked
SI
S*F562
48
Measuring instruments faulty
SI
S*F482
49
Cable fault
SI
S*F690
50
MW measurements
M
S*F800
51
MVAr measurements
M
S*F810
18.8.2.2
ITEM
Transformers & Transformer Feeders
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
cb open (Q0) (with synchr. check function)
DO
S*T010
2
cb close (Q0) (with synchr. check function)
DO
S*T030
3
cb open (Q0) (w/out synchr. check function)
DO
S*T050
4
cb close (Q0) (w/out synchr. check function)
DO
S*T060
5
BBA Isol. Close (Q1)
DO
S*T052
6
BBA Isol. Open (Q1)
DO
S*T062
7
BBB Isol. Close (Q2)
DO
S*T054
8
BBB Isol. Open (Q2)
DO
S*T064
9
Trip relay reset
DO
S*T180
10
cb open (Q0)
DI
S*T200
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 325 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
11
cb closed (Q0)
DI
S*T210
12
BBA Isol. Closed (Q1)
DI
S*T220
13
BBA Isol. Open (Q1)
DI
S*T222
14
BBB Isol. Closed (Q2)
DI
S*T230
15
BBB Isol. Open (Q2)
DI
S*T232
16
BB earth switch closed (maintBB; Q1)
SI
S*T240
17
BB earth switches closed (maintCCT; Q9)
SI
S*T242
18
cct earth switches closed (fd;Q53)
SI
S*T260
19
main protection operated
SI
S*T270
20
Transformer protection operated
SI
S*T280
21
Back up protection operated
SI
S*T290
22
main protection fault
SI
S*T310
23
backup protection fault
SI
S*T312
24
Trip circuit fault
SI
S*T330
25
SF6 Bay Lock out
SI
S*T332
26
SF6 Sensor defect
SI
S*T334
27
cb fault
SI
S*T340
28
Loss of SF6
SI
S*T341
29
BB Isolators fault
SI
S*T342
30
Bay control fault
SI
S*T349
31
Main protection out of service
SI
S*T350
32
Busbar protection out of service
SI
S*T359
33
MV & LV REF out of service
SI
S*T360
34
Bay supervisory control selected
SI
S*T380
18.8.2.3
Transformers & Transformer Tap Changers
Transformers and transformer tap changer remote control panels / AVR Relay, should be
suitably equipped in order to provide or accept the signals indicated on the following list:
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
Tap changer raise
DO
S*T΄080
2
Tap changer lower
DO
S*T΄090
3
Tap changer auto
DO
S*T100
4
Tap changer manual
DO
S*T110
5
Transformer temp alarm
SI
S*T400
6
Buchholtz gas
SI
S*T410
7
Transformer oil level alarm
SI
S*T414
8
Tap change fault
SI
S*T420
9
Tap change incomplete
SI
S*T430
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 326 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
10
Tap change sup control selected
SI
S*T440
11
Tap change auto
SI
S*T450
12
Transformer cooling fault
SI
S*T470
13
Tap changer tap position
SI
S*T790
18.8.2.4
ITEM
Common
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
BS cb open (Q0) (with synchr. check function)
DO
S*C010
2
BS cb close (Q0) (with synchr. check function)
DO
S*C030
3
BBA1 bsi close (Q1)
DO
S*C052
4
BBA1 bsi open (Q1)
DO
S*C062
5
BBB2 bsi close (Q2)
DO
S*C054
6
BBB2 bsi open (Q2)
DO
S*C064
9
Trip relay reset
DO
S*C180
7
bs cb open (Q0)
DI
S*C200
8
bs cb closed (Q0)
DI
S*C210
9
BBA1 bsi closed (Q1)
DI
S*C220
10
BBA1 bsi open (Q1)
DI
S*C222
11
BBB2 bsi closed (Q2)
DI
S*C230
12
BBB2 bsi open (Q2)
DI
S*C232
13
BB earth switch closed (maintBB;Q1)
DI
S*C240
14
BB earth switch closed(maintBB;Q2)
DI
S*C242
15
BB earth switch closed (maintBB;Q15)
DI
S0C240
16
BB earth switch closed(maintBB;Q25)
DI
S0C246
17
bs protection operated
DI
S*C270
18
bs backup pr/tion operated
DI
S*C290
19
BB /Cb failure protection fault
DI
S*C319
20
bs backup protection fault
SI
S*C312
21
cb failure protection fault
SI
S*C320
22
Trip circuit fault
SI
S*C330
23
SF6 Bay Lock out
SI
S*C332
24
SF6 Sensor defect
SI
S*C334
25
cb fault
SI
S*C340
26
Loss of SF6
SI
S*C341
27
BBA Isolators fault
SI
S*C342
28
BBB Isolators fault
SI
S*C344
29
Bay control fault
SI
S*C349
30
Bus Zone P/tion out of service
SI
S0C350
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 327 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
31
CB failure P/tion out of service
SI
S0C360
32
cb supervisory control selected
SI
S*C380
33
Substation supervisory control selected
SI
S0C380
34
Sup/sory SynchCheck cct fault
SI
S0C480
35
Measuring instrument fault
SI
S*C482
36
cb failure protection operated
SI
S0C490
37
BB protection operated
SI
S0C500
38
BBA1 zone 1 pr/tion operated
SI
S0C510
39
BBB2 zone 2 pr/tion operated
SI
S0C540
40
Substation controller General Alarm
SI
S0C599
41
Battery charger 110V fault
SI
S0C600
42
DC Supply Equipment 48V fault
SI
S0C610
43
LV AC supply fail
SI
S0C620
44
communication equipment fault
SI
S0C640
45
Fire Alarm operated
SI
S0C650
46
Switchgear maintenance Alarm
SI
S0C660
47
bs current
M
S*C700
48
BBA1 volts
M
S*C710
49
BBB2 volts
M
S*C740
50
GIS Room Temperature Measurement
M
S0C960
NOTE:1.
"*" shall be substituted by the circuit No. e.g. for E03 "cb 335 closed" the signal No.
will read S3F210 (or S7F210 for cb 735)`
2.
For common signals "*" shall be substituted by the ΄0΄ as already shown (S0C500)
18.8.2.5
22 kV Incoming & Bus Section
Each 22kV incoming or bus section should be suitably equipped in order to provide or
accept the signals indicated on the following list:
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
"CB" close (Q0)
DO
S*D050
2
"CB" open (Q0)
DO
S*D060
3
Lockout Relay Reset
DO
S*D180
4
"CB" open (Q0)
DI
S*D200
5
"CB" closed (Q0)
DI
S*D210
6
BB (LHS -Q11) Isol.closed
SI
S*D220
7
BB (RHS -Q12) Isol.closed
SI
S*D224
8
BB earth switch closed (LHS-Q11)
SI
S*D240
9
BB earth switch closed (RHS -Q12)
SI
S*D244
10
Incoming Feeder Earth Switch Closed (Q1)
SI
S*D260
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 328 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
11
Supervisory control selected
SI
S*D380
12
Protection fault
SI
S*D310
13
"CB" Trip circuit fault (common with feeders)
SI
S0D330
14
"CB" fault (common with feeders)
SI
S0D340
15
O/C Protection operated (common with feeders)
SI
S0D270
16
E/F Protection operated (common with feeders)
SI
S0D272
17
Breaker failure prot. Operated (common)
SI
S0D490
18
Under Frequency Operated (common with feeders)
SI
S0D570
19
DC supply fault
SI
S0D606
20
Bus bar 1 voltage
M
S0D710
21
Bus bar 2 voltage
M
S0D720
22
Bus bar 3 voltage
M
S0D730
23
BS Current
M
S*D700
24
Incoming Active Power -MW
M
S*D800
25
Incoming Reactive Power -MVars
M
S*D810
26
Room Temperature Measurement
M
S0D960
18.8.2.6
22 kV Feeders
Each 22kV feeder should be suitably equipped in order to provide or accept the signals
indicated on the following list:
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
"CB" close (Q0)
DO
S*D050
2
"CB" open (Q0)
DO
S*D060
3
Lockout Relay Reset (Autoreclose scheme)
DO
S*D180
4
"CB" open (Q0)
DI
S*D200
5
"CB" closed (Q0)
DI
S*D210
6
BB (Q1) Isol.closed
SI
S*D220
7
Feeder Earthing Switch Closed (Q1)
SI
S*D260
8
11 kV "CB" supervisory control selected
SI
S*D380
9
Protection fault
SI
S*D310
10
"CB" Trip circuit fault (common)
SI
S0D330
11
"CB" fault (common)
SI
S0D340
12
O/C Protection operated (common)
SI
S0D270
13
E/F Protection operated (common)
SI
S0D272
14
Instantaneous Protection Operated (common)
SI
S0D280
15
Sensitive Earth Fault Operated (common)
SI
S0D290
16
Breaker failure prot. Operated (common)
SI
S0D490
17
Autoreclose Lockout (common)
SI
S0D560
18
Under Frequency operated (common)
SI
S0D570
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 329 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
19
Feeder Active Power –MW (+/-)
M
S*D800
20
Feeder & Capacitor Feeder Reactive Power -MVARs (+/-)
M
S*D810
18.8.2.7
Capacitor Bank
The capacitor bank control panel should be suitably equipped in order to provide or
accept the signals indicated on the following list:
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TYPE INFO. NAME
1
Capacitor Bank1 "CB" close
DO
S1V050
2
Capacitor Bank 1 "CB" open
DO
S1V060
3
Capacitor Bank 2 "CB" close
DO
S2V200
4
Capacitor Bank 2 "CB" open
DO
S2V210
5
Capacitor Bank 3 "CB" close
DO
S3V260
6
Capacitor Bank 3 "CB" open
DO
S3V380
7
Capacitor Bank 1 "CB" open
DI
S1V200
8
Capacitor Bank 1 "CB" closed
DI
S1V210
9
Capacitor Bank 2 "CB" open
DI
S2V200
10
Capacitor Bank 2 "CB" closed
DI
S2V210
11
Capacitor Bank 3 "CB" open
DI
S3V200
12
Capacitor Bank 3 "CB" closed
DI
S3V210
13
Capacitor Bank Stage Faulty-Trip
SI
S0V270
14
Capacitor Banks "CB" supervisory control selected
SI
S0V380
15
Capacitor Bank Alarm
SI
S0V390
16
Capacitor Room Temperature Measurements
M
S0V960
NOTE:1. "*" shall be substituted by the Panel No. e.g. for J03 "cb closed" the signal No. will
read S3D210
2. For common signals "*" shall be substituted by the ΄0΄ as already shown S0D270)
18.9
MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES
18.9.1
132/66kV Cables, Joints and Terminations
18.9.1.1
Cables
1. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 800mm2 Copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for
1sec lead sheath, HDPE oversheath.
2. Same as item 1, but with 630 mm2 copper wire stranded conductor
3. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 300mm2 copper conductor, 13KA for 1 sec. copper
wire screen and aluminium foil HDPE oversheath.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 330 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
4. 66kV, single core XLPE cable with 630mm2 copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for
1 sec lead sheath, HDPE oversheath.
5. 66kV single core XLPE cable as item 4 but with 300mm2 copper conductor.
18.9.1.2
Terminations
1. 132kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable,
complete with bushing and all necessary accessories and fittings.
2. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 630mm2 copper conductor cable
3. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 300mm2 copper conductor cable
4. 132kV Indoor SF6 sealing-end termination for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable
complete with internal and external fittings, and earth bond terminals.
5. 132kV indoor SF6 sealing end as item 3 but for 630mm2 cable.
6. 132kV indoor SF6 sealing end as item 3 but for 300mm2 cable.
7. 132kV indoor transformer sealing end for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable
complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth bond
terminals
8. 132kV indoor transformer sealing end as item 6 but for 630mm2 copper XLPE cable
with lead sheath.
9. 132kV indoor transformer sealing end as item 6 but for 300mm2 copper conductor
XLPE cable with lead sheath.
10. 66kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 630mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable,
complete with bushings and all necessary accessories and fittings.
11. 66kV outdoor sealing end as item 9 but for 300mm2 copper conductor cable.
12. 66kV transformer sealing-end for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete
with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth bond terminals
13. 66kV transformer sealing end as type 11 but for 300sqmm copper conductor cable.
14. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all
necessary accessories, internal and external fittings.
15. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 300mm2 aluminium conductor XLPE cable, complete with
all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings
18.9.1.3
Joints
1. 132kV joint for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary
jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc.
2. 132kV joint as item 1 above but for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE Cable.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 331 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
3. 66kV joint for 300mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable, complete with all necessary
jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc
4. Joint as item 3 above but for 630sqmm copper conductor cable.
5. 132kV Transition joint to connect a 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled cable to a
630mm2 Copper Conductor XLPE Cable, both cables with lead sheath, with all
necessary jointing accessories internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc
6. As item 5 above but to connect the 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled 132kV
cable to an 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable.
18.9.2
22kV Cables
(a) All 22 kV cables within the substation area to suit the relevant substation design are to
be supplied by the Purchaser and design details are to be given to the successful
Tenderer at Tender award.
(b) All cables supplied are to be laid and fitted to position by the Tenderer with suitable
terminations of proven technology.
(c) The Contract includes the supply and installation of all cable support and traywork
(including for all cables of outgoing feeders), cable ties etc.
18.9.3
Transformer – 22 kV Switchgear Cable Connections
Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuits adequately rated to suit the rating of the
transformers with 20% overload. Minimum cable size shall be single core copper
stranded conductor of 630 mm2 cross sectional area.
The cables can be single point bonded with earthing at the switchgear. If warranted
measures against limiting overvoltages at the unearthed terminals shall be taken.
18.9.4
Transformer - 22 kV Earthing Transformer Cable Connections
Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuit of same size as the transformer 22kV switchgear
connection or a smaller size provided detailed calculations warrant it.
18.9.5
Communication Cables and Accessories
Provide and install all necessary fibre optic cables, copper connection cables, plugs,
connector modules/adapters, star couplers, converters and modems.
18.9.6
Auxiliary Power and Multicore Cables
Provide and install, gland, test through and terminate multicore and auxiliary power cables
including glands to interconnect all items of plant supplied and installed under the
contract. Also gland off and terminate at the contractors plant all cables supplied and
installed under separate contracts interconnecting plant not supplied under this contract
with all plant supplied under this contract
The minimum size of cable for the connection between the earthing transformer low
voltage side or the local supply transformer and the LV AC switchgear shall be 120 mm2
4-core.
The Contractor will be responsible for the provision of all cable supports and traywork,
cable ties and cleating.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 332 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
18.10 LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
One 400 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 kA for 1 second LV AC switchboard comprising an air
insulated metal enclosed multitier design incorporating moulded case circuit breaker units
and fixed type moulded case circuit breakers, forming a flush fronted switchboard which
shall be complete with all wiring, earthbar, secondary fuses and material to complete.
18.11 SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT
The tender includes all items referred to in chapter 12 of this tender document that include
among other equipment the following:
•
One or Two 110 V DC batteries (depending on the requirements)
•
Two 110 V DC battery chargers
•
One 110 V DC distribution board
•
Two DC to DC converters (110 V to 48 V)
•
One 48 V DC distribution board
•
One 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter
All battery charger systems shall be sized adequate to cater for the indicated full
substation development.
18.11.1
110V DC Battery System
18.11.1.1 300Ah Battery
110V batteries of the same capacity individually, of the nickel cadmium high performance
type with stands and accessories having a capacity of 300Ah
The battery will operate unearthed with high impedance earth fault detection.
The battery system should include:
(a) One set of battery fuses in a wall mounted box with suitable bushed entry for battery
connections and cable gland plate for charger cable.
(b) One Set of battery connections, connectors and fixings.
18.11.1.2 200Ah Battery
As item 18.11.1.1 above but having a capacity of 200Ah
18.11.1.3 100Ah Battery
As item 18.11.1.1 above but having a capacity of 100Ah
18.11.2
110V DC Battery Charger
18.11.2.1 Double Charger
110 volt battery charger unit consisting of floor mounted sheet steel cubicles, access
doors and containing all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars etc, and including:
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 333 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
Two chargers each with rated output to supply 100% of the standing load and the full float
and boost charge requirements of the battery specified. The chargers shall normally work
in parallel, but shall be suitable for isolation for fault location or maintenance purposes.
Each charger shall be complete with the following:
(a) Boost charge switch with automatic timer.
(b) Input AC supply switch and fuse.
(c) Output DC double-pole switch and fuses.
(d) Output DC ammeter, flush type, 100 mm dial.
(e) Output DC voltmeter, flush type, 100 mm dial.
(f) Charge failure relay to give remote alarm and local indication.
(g) Battery overvoltage relay to give remote alarm and local indication.
(h) Cable gland plates.
(i) One set of manual changeover equipment to provide the following facilities in the case
of a dual battery system:
•
Either one of the battery banks on float and the other on boost charge.
•
Both batteries on float.
•
Mimic diagram to show clearly the switch position of the changeover scheme
18.11.2.2 Single Charger
As item 18.11.2.1 above but one charger
18.11.3
110V DC Distribution Board
110 Vdc distribution board consisting of floor mounted sheet steel cubicle with access
doors and containing all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars, complete with
connections to chargers and batteries, and including:
(a) Battery input/output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial with high/low sensitivity
switch.
(b) Load output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial.
(c) Battery earth fault high impedance type detector relay with facilities to identify positive
and negative earth faults and complete with test facilities, alarm indications and
remote alarm facilities.
(d) Battery fail relay to give remote alarm local indication.
(e) Double-pole circuit fuse-switches for a minimum of thirty distribution outlets, actual
number to the approval of the Engineer. There should also be capacity for extending
the number of outlets to 60.
(f) The board shall be fitted with voltage regulating equipment (limiting diodes) to
maintain load volts within -15% and +10% of nominal under all charge conditions.
(g) Two DC/DC converters 110/48 V DC
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 334 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
(h) 110 V DC / 230 V AC inverter
18.12 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Suitable portable type extinguishers shall be supplied as necessary complete with wall
mounting brackets and shall be erected by the Contractor. The extinguishers shall be of
the dry powder type (10 kg charged weight) or CO2 type (6 kg charged weight) depending
on the equipment that is erected in the room that they are to be situated.
A scheme of fire extinguishers shall be provided and each extinguisher shall be numbered
in accordance with the schedule. The schedule shall contain all relevant design and
maintenance information.
The whole of the fire extinguisher arrangements, quantities, locations and types shall be
to the approval of the Fire Officer in Cyprus and the Engineer.
Mobile extinguishers shall be provided as follows:
ROOM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
132 kV Switchgear (Indoor Installations)
Relay and Control
SCADA and Telecom
22 kV Switchgear
Battery
Capacitors (where applicable)
Basement (where applicable)
Main Entrance (where applicable)
NO. OF UNITS
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
18.13 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Where applicable temperature sensors shall be installed in the switchgear rooms (GIS, 22
kV and Capacitors) for the measurement and monitoring of ambient temperature from the
Energy Centre.
The sensors shall have a temperature range of –5 oC to +70 oC and shall be wall
mountable with stainless steed sheath so as to provide mechanical protection to the
sensor.
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
Page 335 of 336
EAC SPEC 14-019
Issue 3, Dated 09-09-2004
19. ENGINEER’S DRAWING LIST
The following drawings accompany and form part of this Specification:
DRAWING TITLE
DRAWING NO.
1.
132kV GIS Single Line Diagram
TK76/10
2.
Medium Voltage Single Line Diagram (3 sheets)
TK76/7
3.
Protection & Control – Symbol Notation
TK/C/24
4.
H.V. Protection and Control Schemes (3 sheets)
TK76/11
5.
MV Protection and Control (12 sheets)
TK/C/25
6.
Substation Interlocking Conditions (6 sheets)
TK/C/27
7.
LVAC Switchboard for 132/22-11kV Substation
8.
Equipment Layout (Ground-Floor Plan)
TK76/3
9.
Switchgear Layout for GIS and Control Room (First
Floor Plan)
TK76/4
10.
Sections
TK76/5
11.
Equipment Layout (Basement)
TK76/9
132kV GIS Ayios Athanasios - Technical Specifications
1S000E8NE1SB001
Page 336 of 336
BUS-SECTION No.1
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
AFXENTIOU
INCOMER No.1
DOMOPLEX
CHRISTIS DAIRIES
ENTEX
MANTRA VASILIOU
SPARE
BUS-SECTION No.2
KYPROPLAST
ARTEMIS GARDENS
SPARE
INCOMER No.2
SPARE
SPARE
MORFIS
LOUMPIA
ESTIAS
MATTHAIOU
PISSOURIOS
MALOUDES
PETSIDES COACHES
INCOMER No.3
KYPRIANOU PLOTS
ELLINAS PLOTS
SHARMATTAS
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1
2
3
4
A
5
6
M1 Faulty
0 >=1
0
0 >=1
0
8
A
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
Not Interlocked
M1 Out of Service
7
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
0
&
0
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
0
0
0
0
0
M2 Out of Service
M2 Faulty
Maintenance Earth Switch Q9 OFF
Release Q0 OFF
0 >=1
0
0
Earth Switch Q8 OFF
0 >=1
0
Release Isolator Q9
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 ON
B
Local Control Selected
0
&
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 ON
0
0 >=1
0
B
0
&
0
0
BB Isolator Q1 ON
BB Isolator Q2 ON
0
=1
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
0 >=1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Earth Switch Q8 ON
&
0
0
BB Isolator Q9 ON
&
0
0 >=1
Trip Circuit 1 Healthy
0
0
0
Trip Circuit 2 Healthy
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
0
Release Q0 ON
0
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
0
0
&
0
C
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
0
C
0
0
0
Spring Charged
Maintenance Earth Switch Q9 OFF
SF6 Pressure Normal
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 OFF
0
0
0
>=1
0
Release Busbar
Isolator Q2
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 ON
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
D
0
&
0
&
D
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q9 OFF
Maintenance Earth Switch Q9 ON
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 OFF
0
>=1
0
0
0
0
Release Busbar
Isolator Q1
&
0
Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
0
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 ON
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
E
&
0
0
Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
0
Isolator Q9 OFF
Maintenance Earth Switch Q9 ON
0
&
0
Line Voltage Not Present
0
0
Release Earth
Switch Q8
0
Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
0
F
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
Release Maintenance
Earth Switch Q1,Q2,Q9
Isolator Q9 ON
0
ΗΜΕΡ./
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
0
&
0
Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
E
>=1
0
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Sh. 1
132kV Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
Line Bay
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Busbar Isolator Q1 OFF
A
Busbar Isolator Q2 OFF
0
A
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
Not Interlocked
&
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
0
0
22kV Q1 - ISL OFF
0
0 >=1
Local Control Selected
&
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
0
0
0
0
0
BB Isolator Q1 ON
=1
0
0
0
22kV Earth Switch Q1 - ES OFF
0
BB Isolator Q2 ON
0
0
Earth Switch Q53 OFF
Release Q0 OFF
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 OFF
0
B
>=1
0
0 >=1
Trip Circuit 1 Healthy
&
0
Release Busbar
Isolator Q2
B
0
0
0
Trip Circuit 2 Healthy
0
0
0
0
Release Q0 ON
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 ON
0
0
Protection Healthy
&
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
0
0
0
Spring Charged
Earth Switch Q53 ON
SF6 Pressure Normal
0
&
0
Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
0
C
C
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
Busbar Isolator Q1 OFF
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
&
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
&
0
0
Busbar Isolator Q2 OFF
0
0
Release Maintenance
Earth Switch Q1, Q2
0
0
0
0
0
D
Earth Switch Q53 OFF
0
D
22kV Q1 - IS OFF
0
22kV Earth Switch Q1 - ES OFF
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 OFF
0
>=1
0
0
0
Release Busbar
Isolator Q1
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 ON
Busbar Isolator Q1 OFF
&
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
0
0
Busbar Isolator Q2 OFF
0
0
&
Release Earth Switch Q53
0
0
0
E
E
22kV Q1 - IS OFF
Earth Switch Q53 ON
0
&
0
Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
0
ΗΜΕΡ./
F
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
132kV Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Transformer Bay
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
Sh. 2
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
Not Interlocked
0
BB Isolator Q1 ON
=1
0
0
BB Isolator Q2 ON
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
0 >=1
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
0
Release Q0 OFF
0
0
&
0
0
0
0
&
0
0
0
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
0
Local Control Selected
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 OFF
B
Trip Circuit 1 Healthy
Trip Circuit 2 Healthy
0 >=1
0 >=1
0
&
0
0
Release Busbar
Isolator Q2
B
0
0
0
0
0
Busbar Earth Switch Q25 ON
Release Q0 ON
0
0
0
Protection Healthy
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
&
0
0
0
Spring Charged
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 ON
SF6 Pressure Normal
C
C
Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
>=1
0
Release Maintenance
Earth Switch Q1, Q2
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 OFF
Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
Maintenance Earth Switch Q1 OFF
0
0
&
0
0
0
0
D
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 OFF
All Feeder Busbar Isolators Q1 ON
0
D
>=1
0
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 OFF
0 >=1
B.S. Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
0
0
0
Release Busbar
Earth Switch Q15
Release Busbar
Isolator Q1
Busbar Earth Switch Q15 ON
0
Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
&
0
All Feeder Busbar Isolators Q2 ON
0
0
>=1
0
0
B.S. Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
0
Release Busbar
Earth Switch Q25
Maintenance Earth Switch Q2 ON
E
E
ΗΜΕΡ./
F
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
132kV Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Line Bay
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
Sh. 3
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
Outgoing Feeders
Transformer Feeders
B
B
Protection Healthy
132kV Busbar Isolator Q1 ON
&
0
Trip Circuit Healthy
0
=1
0
0
Release Outgoing
Feeder Q0 ON
0
0
132kV Busbar Isolator Q2 ON
&
0
0
0
0
0
132kV Circuit Breaker Q0 ON
0
SF6 Pressure Normal
>=1
22kV Q1 - ES ON
0
0
Earth Switch Q53 ON
0
&
0
22kV Q1 - ES ON
0
C.B. Q0 OFF
C
C
0
Isolator Q1 OFF
0
&
0
0
Protection Healthy
Release Earth
Switch Q1
0
&
0
0
Trip Circuit Healthy
0
Release 22kV Q0 ON
0
Line Voltage Not Present
SF6 Pressure Normal
D
D
Circuit Breaker
Q0 OFF
Not Interlocked
Release Isolator
Q1
Release Q0 OFF
Not Interlocked
22kV Q0 OFF
Earth Switch Q53 ON
Release 22kV Q1 - IS
Release 22kV Q1 - ES ON
Release 22kV Q0 OFF
E
E
ΗΜΕΡ./
F
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
22kV Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Tranformer Bay / Outgoing Feeder Bay
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
Sh. 4
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
BB Isolator Q11 ON
BB Isolator Q12 ON
B
0
&
ALL RHS BS Q1-IS OFF
0
0
0
BS Q0 OFF
Earth Switch Q11 ON
Earth Switch Q12 ON
&
0
0
Q11-IS ON
0 >=1
0 >=1
0
B
0
0
0 >=1
0
0
Q11-IS ON
&
0
BS Q0 OFF
0
Release Q11-ES ON
0
0
0
Protection Healthy
Trip Circuit Healthy
0
&
0
Release BS Q0 ON
0
0
SF6 Pressure Normal
0
C
C
ALL LHS BS Q1-IS OFF
BS Q0 OFF
Earth Switch Q53 ON
0
BS Q0 OFF
&
0
D
Q12-IS ON
Release Q12-IS
Release Q11-IS
0
D
0
Q12-IS ON
0
0 >=1
&
0
BS Q0 OFF
0
Release Q12-ES ON
0
0
E
E
ΗΜΕΡ./
F
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
22kV Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Bus Section Bay
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
Sh. 5
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
AND
X1
OR
NAND
&
Y
X2
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
0
0
0
1
X1
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
&
Y
X2
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
1
1
1
0
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
>=1
X1
Y
X2
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
0
1
1
1
B
B
X-OR
X1
X-NOR
NOR
=1
Y
X2
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
0
1
1
0
X1
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
>=1
Y
X2
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
1
0
0
0
=
X1
Y
X2
X1
Input
0
0
1
1
X2
Input
0
1
0
1
Y
Output
1
0
0
1
C
C
NEG
X1
Y
X1
Input
0
1
Y
Output
1
0
D
D
E
E
ΗΜΕΡ./
F
ΑΛΛ./ REV.
ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ /
1
ΗΜΕΡ./ DATE ΕΛ./ CHEC.
DESCRIPTION
2
DATE
ΕΡΓΟ /
DECEMBER 2002
ΚΛΙΜΑΚΑ/ SCALE
N.T.S
ΣΧΕ∆ΙΟ/
ΑΡΧΗ
DCh
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΣΜΟΥ
ΕΛΕΓΧΟΣ/ CHECKED
DCh
ΚΥΠΡΟΥ
ΕΓΚΡΙΣΗ/
DCh
DRAWN
APPROVED
AUTOCAD FILE
3
DB GIS INTERLOCKS
4
ΚΕΝΤΡΙΚΑ ΓΡΑΦΕΙΑ /
ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ /
PROJECT
MANUFACTURER
ELECTRICITY
AUTHORITY
132kV GIS SUBSTATION - DOUBLE BUSBAR
ΤΙΤΛΟΣ /
CYPRUS
TITLE
Interlocking Conditions
HEAD OFFICE
5
+
DRG. REF.:
CONTRACT No.:
Notation
6
ΑΡ.ΣΧ. /
7
DRG No.
Sh. 6
TK/C/27
of. 6
8
F
? /S ?.?.?.
1
SECTION 1
2
SECTION 2